Οδηγός στα Ασσυριακά

:CT>
PRINCIPAL W. R. TAYLOR
COLLECTION
1951
FIRST STEPS IN ASSYRIAN
FIRST STEPS IN ASSYRIAN

A BOOK FOR BEGINNERS
BEING
A SERIES OF HISTORICAL, MYTHOLOGICAL, RELIGIOUS, MAGICAL, EPISTOLARY AND OTHER TEXTS PRINTED IN CUNEIFORM CHARACTERS WITH INTERLINEAR TRANSLITERATION AND TRANSLATION
AND
A SKETCH OF ASSYRIAN GRAMMAR, SIGN-LIST AND
VOCABULARY
BY
L.
ASSISTANT
IN
W. KING, M.
BRITISH
A.,
ANTIQUITIES,
THE
DEPT. OF EGYPTIAN
AND ASSYRIAN MUSEUM
522645
LONDON
KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TROBNER &
1898.
[ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.]
CO., LTD.
PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING CROSS ROAD
SEEN BY PRESERVATION
SERVICES
FEB
*
'" 2
DATE..
PJ
32SI
Re
Printed by Adolphus Holzhausen, Vienna.
PREFACE.
THE aim
all
of the present
work
is
to furnish the beginner with
the materials which he
will require in his earliest studies of

It
the Assyrian language and the cuneiform inscriptions.

tains a sketch of the
con-
most useful
facts
concerning the cuneiform
of Assyrian system of writing, and an outline of the principles
grammar
series
list
of the
more common
printed
in
signs
and ideograms
of texts
and
extracts
the Assyrian cuneiform
character with interlinear transliteration and translation, ranging

in date
from about B. C. 2250 to B. C. 260

all
and
a full voca-
bulary to
the texts printed in the book.
To
enable the reader

first
to apply the
knowledge he can obtain by a perusal of the
294 pages, and to give him practice in independent decipherment, a few untransliterated and untranslated texts have been
added.
For the convenience of the beginner
all
the Babylonian texts
included in this volume have been transcribed into the Assyrian

character.
It is
of the greatest importance for

as
him
to
become
for
master of the so-called Ninevite script
soon as possible
almost every work found in Ashur-bani-pal's Royal Library at Nineveh is written in it. His Babylonian studies should begin
when he
ease.
is
able to read
the ordinary Assyrian character with
The
texts
here chosen represent
all
the
main
divisions
of
Babylonian and Assyrian literature and include examples of histor-
VI
PREFACE.
mythological, religious, magical, epistolary and
other do-
ical,
cuments, and care has been taken in selecting them to include those which are of importance from an historical point of view.
Among
these
may
be specially mentioned
the account of the
siege of Jerusalem
by Sennacherib
in
701 B. C. and of the taking

Students of Eastern cosmo-
of Babylon by Cyrus in 588 B. C.
gonies will be glad to have in a handy form the Babylonian
legends of the Creation and the Deluge.

here given,
viz.
The
other
legends
the Descent of Ishtar into

Zii,
Hades and the Loves
of Ishtar, the Treachery of the god
the story of the Eagle
and the Serpent, and of Etana's flight to heaven with the Eagle, etc. illustrate the stories with which the early dwellers on the
plains of
Mesopotamia amused
their leisure in the childhood of
their race.
Recent discoveries are illustrated by some extracts from the now famous correspondence between the kings of Egypt and their Babylonian allies and vassals in the fifteenth century
B. C. as found in the Tell
el-Amarna
tablets.
literal
The
translations
have been made as

exists
as
is
consistent
with the difference which
between the Assyrian and English
languages, and usually the meaning of every word will be found In the few passages in which this is not the case beneath it.
reference to the vocabulary will
enable the reader to identify

In
the words and their meanings.
the full vocabulary which

;
follows the texts the words are arranged alphabetically
words
clearly derived from the same root are placed together, but where-
ever this might cause the beginner difficulty cross references have
been added.
It
may
be remarked, in passing, that the reader

will find
it
who
possesses a
knowledge of Hebrew
;
most useful
in his Assyrian studies
such knowledge, however, on his part,
has not been assumed anywhere throughout the book.
The remarks
to
that Dr. Wallis
Budge has made
in
the Preface
scarcity
his First Steps in Egyptian
with reference to the
of
material
for study at the disposal
of the beginner in Egyptian
PREFACE.
are true, mutatis mutandis, for Assyrian.
his
I
VII
undertook
this
work
at
suggestion and
in
have carried
I
it
out practically on the lines
adopted
for
his book.
take
this
opportunity of thanking him
many
valuable suggestions and for his friendly advice which

at
he has freely placed

work.
my
disposal
during the course of the
L.
W. KING.
London, May 2nd, 1898.
CONTENTS.
PAGE.
Preface
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
PART
Introduction
:
I.
Cuneiform inscriptions Cuneiform writing
...
...
...
...
XVII
XXI
...
The
Assyrian method of writing
...
...
XXVI
XXXII
Syllabic signs
Ideograms
Determinatives and phonetic complements
.,.
XXXV
XXXIX
Phonetic changes
XLV
...
Pronouns
...
...
...
...
...
XLVIII
LIII
Nouns
Adverbs
...
...
...
...
...
...
...
LXI
Prepositions
LXIV
..
Conjunctions
...
...
...
...
...
LXVI
Verbs
List of Assyrian signs List of
...
LXVIU
...
... ... ...
LXXXVIII
CXXXIII
numerals
...
...
...
...
...
...
List of determinatives List of List of

List
CXXXIV
...
... ...
ideograms for the months ideograms
CXXXV
CXXXVII
for the principal deities
...
...
of ideograms for the principal countries, cities
and
rivers
CXXXVIII
CONTENTS.
PAGE.
PART
II.
Texts with interlinear transliteration and translation

1.
NAMES AND TITLES OF EARLY BABYLONIAN AND

ASSYRIAN KINGS
1
2.
INSCRIPTION FROM A CYLINDER OF HAMMURABI, KING OF BABYLON, ABOUT 2200 B. C.

See Strassmaier and Winckler,
II, P1
Zeitschr. filr Assyr.,
75
f.
57
I,
3.
THE MEMORIAL TABLET OF RAMMAN-NIRARI OF ASSYRIA, ABOUT 1825 B C.

See Cun.
pi,
KING
Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol. IV (2nd ed.), and Jastrow, Am, Journ. of Sem. Lang, and 3g,
Lit.,
Vol. XII, pp.
43
if.
817
I,
4.
THE HUNTING-EXPEDITIONS OF TlGLATH-PILESER KING OF ASSYRIA, ABOUT noo B. C.

See Cun.
Inscr. of West. Asia,
Vol.
I,
pi.
14
...
18
21
5.
INTRODUCTION TO THE ANNALS OF ASSUR-NXSIRPAL, KING OF ASSYRIA, 884
860 B. C.
I,
See Cun.
6.
Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol.
pi.
17
...
22
28
THE ENDOWMENT OF THE TEMPLE OF THE SUN-GOD.

See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol. V, pi. 60
f.,
7.
and Jeremias, Beitr. zur Assyr., I, pp. 268 ff. ... THE SIEGE OF DAMASCUS BY SHALMANESER II AND
29
36
THE TRIBUTE OF JEHU, KING OF ISRAEL, 842

See Cun.
8.
B. C.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol.
Ill, pi. 5,
No. 6
37
3g
EXTRACTS FROM THE RECORDS OF TIGLATH-PILESER

III.
See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol.
Ill, pi. 9,
No.
3,
and
pi.
10,
No. 2; and Rost, Die

22
f.,
Keilschrifttexte
ff.
Tiglat-Pilesers III, pp.

9.
26
f.,
78
4046
pll.
EXTRACTS FROM THE ANNALS OF SARGON.

See Botta, Monument de Ninive, Vol. IV,
145,
CONTENTS.
PAGli.
XI
82 and 65, andWincklcr, Die Keikthrifttextc Sargoru,

I,
pp. 38
tf.,
100
f.,
II,
pll. 9, 14,
3o
f.
...
4751
10.
SENNACHERIB'S INVASION OF PALESTINE AND THE

SIEGE OF JERUSALEM, 701 B. C.
See Cun.
I,
pi.
38
f.
...
5266
11.
THE MURDER OF SENNACHERIB,

See Abel and Winckler,
681 B. C.
p.
Keilschrifttexte,
48;
Scheil, Recueil de travaux, Vol. XVIII, p.
17,
and
Messerschmidt
sellschaft,
Mitteilungen der Vorderasiatischen GeI,
1896,
pp. 24
f.,
73
...
...
...
67
69
12.
THE DESTRUCTION OF
See Cun.
Inscr.
SlDON BY ESARH ADDON.

I,
of West. Asia, Vol.
pi.
45
...
70
76
3.
THE SACK OF THEBES BY ASHURBANIPAL.

See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol. V,
pi. 2
...
77
80
14.
THE EMBASSY OF GYGES, KING OF

See Cun.
LYDIA.
pi. 2
...
V,
8187
15.
THE CUTTING OF THE CANAL OF

POLASSAR, KING OF BABYLON,
II,
SlPPAR BY NABO-
625604
Zeitschr.
B. C.
Assyr.,
fur
pp. 69
ff.
88
90
6.
THE COMPLETION OF THE WALLS OF BABYLON BY

NEBUCHADNEZZAR
561 B. C.
See Cun.
Inscr.
Zeitschr.
II,
KING OF BABYLON, 604

and
...
pi. 34,
...
Winckler,
17.
fur
Assyr.,
II,
p.
143
gi
94
THE DEFEAT OF ASTYAGES BY CYRUS.

See Cun.
Inscr.

zur Assyr.,
II,
pi.
64;
Hagen
f.,
and Delitzsch,
1
Beitr.
pp. 218
248
95
102
8.
THE TAKING OF BABYLON BY CYRUS.

See Cun.
Inscr.

zur Assyr.,
II,
pi.
35
Hagen
f.,
and Delitzsch,
248
Beitr.
pp. 210
ff.,-222
io3
114
CONTENTS.
PAGE.
PART
II.
Texts with interlinear transliteration and translation

1.
NAMES AND TITLES OF EARLY BABYLONIAN AND

ASSYRIAN KINGS
1
2.
INSCRIPTION EROM A CYLINDER OE HAMMURABI, KING OF BABYLON, ABOUT 2200 B. C.

II,
Zeitschr.
fur Assyr.,
p.i 75
fI,
57
KING
3.
THE MEMORIAL TABLET OF RAMMAN-NIRARI OF ASSYRIA, ABOUT 1825 B C.

See Can.
pi.
Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol. IV (2nd ed.), and Jastrow, Am. Journ. of Sem. Lang, and Sg,
Lit.,
Vol. XII, pp. 143
ff.
817
I,
4.
THE HUNTING-EXPEDITIONS OF TlGLATH-PILESER KING OF ASSYRIA, ABOUT noo B. C.

See
dm.
Inscr. of West. Asia,
Vol.
I,
pi.
14
...
18
21
5.
INTRODUCTION TO THE ANNALS OF ASSUR-NASIRPAL, KING OF ASSYRIA,
884860
B. C.
I,
See Cun.
6.
pi. 17
...
22
28
THE ENDOWMENT OF THE TEMPLE OF THE SUN-GOD.

See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol. V, pi. 60
f.,
7.
and Jeremias, Beitr. zur Assyr., I, pp. 268 ff. ... THE SIEGE OF DAMASCUS BY SHALMANESER II AND
29
36
THE TRIBUTE OF JEHU, KING OF

See Cun.
8.
ISRAEL, 842 B. C.
Ill, pi. 5,
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol.
No. 6
37
3g

III.
See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol.
Ill, pi. 9,
No.
3,
and
pi.
10,
No. 2; and Rost, Die

22
f.,
Keilschrifttexte
ff.
Tiglat-Pilesers III, pp.

9.
26
f.,
78
4046
pll.

See Botta, Monument de Ninive, Vol. IV,
145,
CONTENTS.
PAGD.
XI
82 and 65, and Wincklcr, Die

I,
Keilschrifttexte Sargons,
pp. 38
tf.,
100
f.,
II,
pll. 9, 14,
3o
f.
...
4751
10.
SENNACHERIB'S INVASION OF PALESTINE AND THE

SIEGE OF JERUSALEM, 701 B. C.
See Cun.
I,
pi.
38
f.
...
5266
11.

See Abel and Wincklcr,
681 B. C.
p.
Keilschrifttexte,
48;
Scheil, Recueil de travaux, Vol. XVIII, p.
17,
and
Mcsserschmidt
sellschaft,
Mitteilungen der Vorderasiatischen GeI,
1896,
pp. 24
f.,
73
...
...
...
67
69
12.
THE DESTRUCTION OF SlDON BY ESARHADDON.

See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol.
I,
pi.
45
...
70
76
13.

See Cun.
Inscr.
pi. 2
...
77
80
14.

See Cun.
LYDIA.
pi. 2
...
V,
8187
15.
THE CUTTING OF THE CANAL OF

POLASSAR, KING OF BABYLON, See Strassmaier and Winckler,
II,
SlPPAR BY NABO-
625604
Zeitschr.
B. C.
fur Assy r.,

88 90
pp. 69
ff.
6.
THE COMPLETION OF THE WALLS OF BABYLON BY

NEBUCHADNEZZAR
561 B. C.
See Cun.
Inscr.
Zeitschr.
II,
KING OF BABYLON, 604

and
...
pi. 34,
...
Winckler,
17.
fur
Assyr.,
II,
p.
143
gi
94

See Cun.
Inscr.

II,
pi.
64;
Hagen
f.,
and Delitzsch,
1
Beitr. zur Assyr.,
pp. 218
248
95
102
8.

See Cun.
Inscr.

zur Assyr.,
II,
pi.
35
Hagen
222
f.,
and Delitzsch,
248
Beitr.
pp. 210
ff.
io3
114
XII
CONTENTS.
PAGE.
19.
INSCRIPTION OF DARIUS, KING OF BABYLON, 521
485 B. C.
See
t.
Schulz, Jotirnal Asiatique, Troisieme Serie,

pi. VIII,
IX,
Col.
f.,
a,
and Bezold, Die Achdmeniden... ... ... ...
inschriften,
pp. 36
y3, 87
115
116
20. INSCRIPTION
OF ANTIOCHUS-SOTER, KING OF BAB. C.

pi.
BYLON,
280260
Inscr.
See Cun.
21.
66
...
117
121
THE CREATION OF THE

Vol. IV, p. 362
p.
GODS.
Soc.
See George Smith, Trans, of the

f.,
of Bibl. Arch.,
and Chaldean
account of Genesis,
62
f.
Jensen, Die Kosmologie der Babylonier, pp.
268
p.
ff.;
Zimmern
f.;
in Gunkel's Schopfung
und Chaos,
401
and Delitzsch, Abh.

Bd. XVII, pp. 22
der konigl. Gesellsch. der

f.,
Wissensch.,
92
...
...
...
122
123
22.
THE REVOLT OF TIAMAT, THE DRAGON.

See S. A. Smith, Miscellaneous Texts, pp.
i
5;
cit.,
.,.
Zimmern,
pp. 32
23.
if.,
op.
cit.,
ff.
pp. 407
...
ff.;
and Delitzsch,
... ... ...
op.
100
124
136
THE FIGHT OF MARDUK AND THE DRAGON.

See E. A. Wallis Budge, Proc. of the
Arch.,
Soc.
of Bibl.
Vol.X,
p.
86
(six plates); Delitzsch, Assyrische
Lesestiicke
(3nd
ed.), pp.
97
ff.;
Jensen, Die Kosmologie

in
der Babylonier,
pp. 278
ff.;
Zimmern
ff.
;
Gunkel's
Schopfung und Chaos, pp. 410

Abh. der konigl.
Gesellsch.
...
and Delitzsch,
Bd. XVII,
...
der Wissensch.,
pp. 22
24.
f.,
92
137157
THE CREATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES AND

THE SEASONS.
See George Smith, Trans, of
Vol. IV, p. 362
f.,
the Soc. op.
of Bibl. Arch.,
cit.,
pi. 2;
Jensen,
p.
288
op.
f.,
Zimmern,
pp. 46
ff.,
op.
cit.,
f. ...
p.
414; and Delitzsch,

...
... ...
cit.,
...
108
...
158
160
CONTENTS.
25.
XIII
I'ACil
.
THE STORY OF THE DELUGE.

See Cun.
48
f.
;
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol. IV (2nd ed.),

babylonische Nimrodepos, pp.
pi.
Haupt, Das
184
n.
George Smith, Chaldean account of Genesis, pp. 264

Jensen, Die Kosmologie der Babylonier, pp. 368
ff.;
ff. ;
and
pp.
161
Zimmern
428
26.
ff.
in
Gunkel's Schdpfung und Chaos,
181
THE DESCENT OF ISHTAR INTO HADES.

See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol. IV,
pi.
3i
and
Jeremias, Die babylonisch-assyrischcn Vorstellungen vom

Leben nach dem Tode, pp. 10
27.
ff.
...
...
...
182
185
THE LOVES OF
See Cun.
;
ISHTAR.
ff.
;
Inscr.
pi. 41 Haupt, Das babylonische Nimrodepos, pp. 42 and Jeremias, Izdubar-Nimrod, pp. 24 f., 51 f.
...
186
191
28.
THE TREACHERY OF THE GOD

115
ff.
Zu.
Genesis, pp.
II,
...
See George Smith, Chaldean account of

;
and E. T. Harper,
ff.,
Beitr.
zur Assyr.,
pp. 409
29.
467
ff.
192199
ETANA'S JOURNEY TO HEAVEN WITH THE EAGLE.

See E. T. Harper,
449, 453
f.
...
Beitr.
...
zur Assyr.,
...
II,
...
pp. 3g6
...
ff.,
...
200
2o3
30.
THE STORY OF THE EAGLE, THE SERPENT, AND

THE SUN-GOD.
See Morris Jastrow,
Beitr.
zur Assyr.,
Ill,
pp. 363
ff.
George Smith, Chaldean account of Genesis, p. i3g f
and E. T. Harper,
439
3
1.
ff.
...
Beitr.
...
zur Assyr.,
...
II,
...
pp. 3g2
...
ff.,
...
...
204
214
How
WIND.
ADAPA BROKE THE WING OF THE SOUTH-
See Winckler, Der Thontafelfund von El-Amarna,

pp.
II,
1
66 (a and
ff.
//);
and E. T. Harper,
Beitr.
zur Assyr.,
pp. 418
215218
XIV
32.
CONTENTS.
PAGE.
THE SONG OF URA, THE PLAGUE-GOD.

See George Smith,
p.
1
Chaldean account of Genesis,
33
f.
495
33.
f.;
E. T. Harper, Beitr. zur Assyr., II, pp. 432 f., and King, Zeitschr. filr Assyr., YA, pp. 53, 56, 61 219
;
222
LEGEND CONCERNING THE BIRTH AND BOYHOOD OF KING SARGON I.

See Cun.
Inscr.
of West. Asia, Vol.
Ill, pi. 4,
No. 7 223
225
34.
EXTRACTS FROM PENITENTIAL PSALMS.

See Haupt, Akkadische und sumerische
p.
pi.
1 1
Keilschrifttexte,
f.
Cim. Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol. IV (2nd ed.),

pi.
op.
26,
No. 8;
Haupt,
27,
No. 3;
'/.,
pi.
;
29**, No. 5;
Cun. Inscr. of
pi.
24;
p.
i22f.
West. Asia, Vol.
IV (2nd
ed.), pi. 59,

,
No. 2
pi.
54,
No.
and
f.,
Zimmern
f.,
Babylonische
52, 100
f.,
Busspsalmen,
pp. 33
35.
85
f.,
62
ff.,
89
f.
...
226240
HYMNS AND PRAYERS.

See Cun.
pi.
Inscr.

a" Assyriologie,
20, No. 2; Bertin, Revue

ff. ;
Vol.
I,
pp. 157
ed.),
Cun. Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol. IV (2nd
pi.
29,
No.
ff.,
King, Babylonian Magic and

4
3
;
Sorcery, pp. 16
pi.
f.
Cun. Inscr. of West. Asia,

Zeitschr.
Vol. IV,
Assyr.,
pi. 20,
No.
ff.,
and Briinnow,
fur
V, pp. 66
79
241251
assyrische
36. _
INCANTATIONS.
See
Maqlu,
Tallqvist,
I,
Die
Beschworungsserie
p. i3,
pp. 48
f.,
58
f.,
38
f.
II,
19
f.,
Cun. Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol. IV (2nd ed.),
pi.
51
and Zimmern,
Religion,
I,
Beitriige
zur Kenntnis der babylonischen
p.
f.
252260
Letters,
37.
ASSYRIAN LETTER-TABLETS.
See R. F. Harper, Assyrian and Babylonian
I,
p.
42,
III,
pp. 276, 327, IV, p. 350;
S.
i,
A. Smith,
pi.
Proc. of the Soc. of Bibl Arch., X,
No.
VIII
CONTENTS.
and
198
38.
XV
PAGE,
I,
Delitzsch,
ff.,
Beiir.
zur Assyr.,
pp.
189
ff.,
212
ff.,
222
ff.
26l
269
LKTTKUS FROM TELL EL-AMARNA.

See Budge and Bezold, The
in the British
Tell el-Amarna Tablets

f.
;
Museum,
f.,
pp. 6
f.,
24
Bezold, Oriental
Keilinschriftliche
Diplomacy, pp. 3
i3;
and Schrader,
48
f.
BiWothek, V, pp. 14
3g.
ff.,
270281
Ill,
OBSERVATORY REPORTS.
See
Cun. Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol.
pi.
51,
Nos.'i, 3, 6,
40.
and 7
282
285
REPORTS FROM ASSYRIAN ASTROLOGERS.

See Cun.
Inscr. of West. Asia, Vol. Ill, pi. 51,
pi. 58,
Nos.
and
'41.
II
and
No.
286288
V,
pi.
SOME ANCIENT BABYLONIAN LAWS.

See Cun.
Inscr.
of
West. Asia, Vol.
25
...
289
292
42.
PROVERBS AND SAYINGS.

See \}&\\tz&ch,AssyrischeLesestucke($Td
ed.), p.
134;
Cun
Inscr.
of
West. Asia, Vol. II, pi. 16;
and Bezold,
Kouyunjik
... ...
Catalogue of the Cuneiform

Collection,
Tablets
...
in
...
Ihe
Vol. IV, p. 1742
2g3
294
PART
III.
Texts to be transliterated and translated
...
...
295
314
PART
Vocabulary to
texts in
IV.
III
...
Parts
II
and
...
3 15
399
LIST OF ASSYRIAN
GRAMMARS AND
DICTIONARIES.
Jules Oppert.
Elements de la grammaire assyrienne. First edition
(Paris,
1860).
Second
of
edition, Paris,
1868.
Edward Hincks.
Menant.
Specimen
Chapters
an Assyrian
Grammar,
London, 1866.
J.
Expose
des elements
de la
grammaire
assyrienne,
Paris, 1868.
Eberhard Schrader, Die

zig,
assyrisch-babylonischen Keilinschriften,
Leip-
1872.
A. H. Sayce.
An An
Assyrian Grammar,
London, 1872.
Do.
Elementary Grammar, London, 1875.
George Rertin.
Abridged Grammars of the Languages of the Cuneiform Inscriptions,
London, 1888.
Berlin,
Friedrich Delitzsch. Assyrische Grammalik,

translation by R. S.
1889.
English
1889).
Kennedy (London,
Parts
I
Edwin
Norris.
Assyrian
Dictionary.
III,
London,
1868
J.
72 (unfinished).
1886.
Leipzig,
N. Strassmaier.
Alphabetisches Verzeichniss, Leipzig,
Friedrich Delitzsch. Assyrisches Worterbuch.
Parts
III,
R. E.
Bmnnow.
18871888 (unfinished). A classified List of cuneiform

Leyden, 1889;
Indices,
ideographs,
etc.,
1897.
the Assyrian
W.
Muss-Arnolt.
concise Dictionary
of
Language,
Berlin,
1894. (In progress.)
Friedrich Delitzsch. Assyrisches Handworterbuch, Leipzig, 1896.

B. Meissner.
Supplement
zu
den
assyrischen
Worterbiichern,
Leyden, 1898.
INTRODUCTION.
Assyrian
is
the
name
that
now
of
to
indicates the language once The
spoken
by
the
inhabitants
It
Mesopotamia,
the
is"
Assyrians
and
Babylonians
alike.
belongs
northern
group
of the
Semitic family of languages and

;
closely akin to Phoenician
or Himyaritic,
and Hebrew, Syriac and Chaldee these are distinct from Sabaean Arabic and Ethiopic, which form the southern
group.
The language
on stone and
;
is
made known
number of
cities
to
us by numerous inJ
scriptions
clay, written in "cuneiform"
or wedge-
shaped characters
the greater
these inscriptions have
been unearthed from the buried

the present century.
of Mesopotamia during
The decipherment
Persian
of the Assyrian
inscriptions
is
a natural The
deci-
result of the labours of scholars
cuneiform inscriptions.
who have investigated the old The Achaemenian kings who

to the fourth
P herment
of the inscriptions.
ruled over Persia from the sixth
century before
at that
Christ, after the fashion of other races in
Western Asia
period, borrowed from the Babylonians the idea of cuneiform
writing ;
1.
they, however, considerably simplified the Babylonian

"Keilschrift"
In
German
the Arabs
call
it
^.l^c*-* (mistnarl)
lived
"nail-
writing".
2.
The
Susians, the Elamites,
and the people
who
around Lake Van,

1888 of the "Tell
diffu-
for instance, all used cuneiform characters.
The
discovery
in
el-Amarna
Upper Egypt showed the wide sion of Babylonian cuneiform throughout Western Asia as early as the
tablets" at Tell
el-Amarna
in
XV th
XVIII
system,
INTRODUCTION
employing
in
their
inscriptions not
more than
thirty-
nine groups
character.
of wedges
their
As
and each group formed an alphabetic empire was not confined to Persia, but
to
embraced the important countries of Susia and Babylonia,

the greater
number of
their
inscriptions
they appended Susian
icriptions.
and Babylonian translations written in the cuneiform characters employed by these two nations. After the fall of the Achae-
menian empire the Old Persian cuneiform
fell
into disuse,
and
the inscriptions in this character, as well as those in the other
kinds of cuneiform writing, in the course of time ceased to be
understood.
Those
records, however, that
were engraved upon
the stone walls of buildings and on the faces of rocks did not
perish, but
remained as permanent though unintelligible monu-
ments of the kings
who
set
them
up.
era,
During the seventeenth and eighteenth centuries of our
however, travellers in the East began to turn their attention to

these inscriptions, especially those at Persepolis,
and we
find in
the accounts of their journeys

1 expressed concerning them.
many
strange views and opinions

until
It
was not
the beginning of
century B. C. At this period not only in Egypt but from the coast of the Mediterranean to Elam, and from Armenia to the Persian Gulf, Babylonian cuneiform
was the language of

needs, but
I
official
correspondence.
It
was not unnatural therefore

which would lead us
that
other races should have modified this widely diffused system to meet their
own
do not see any
sufficient evidence
to
assume
that the Phoenician alphabet
was formed by the modification of
certain cunei-
form characters.
i.
1665)
1711)
See Pietro della Valle, Viaggi (Rome, 1662; English translation, London, en Perse, et autres lieux de I 'Orient (Amsterdam, Chardin, Voyages ;
.
.
de Bruin, Rei\en over Moskovie, door Persie en Indie (Amsterdam, 1714; English translation, London, 1787); and Niebuhr, Reisebeschreibung nach Ara;
bien
und andern umliegenden Ldndern, Bd.

by
II
(Copenhagen, 1778).
For de-
scriptions
travellers at the beginning of the present century,

in
in
see Morier,
journey through Persia (London, 1812); Ouseley, Travels of the East (London, 1819 23); R. Ker Porter, Travels
etc.
various countries
Georgia, Persia,
(London,
182122)
and Burckhardt, Travels
in
Arabia,
etc.
(London, 1829).
CUNEIFORM INSCRIPTIONS
the
XIX
was made towards
nineteenth
century
that the
first
step
deciphering them correctly.
Of
the three kinds
of cuneiform writing
in
(t.
e.,
the Persian,
the Susian, and the Babylonian),
which the Achaemenian

it
kings inscribed their trilingual records,

the Persian should
as
it
was most natural
that inthedeci
first
hermcnt engage the serious attention of scholars, P
is
by
far the simplest
of the three.
The
credit of
having
in
Grotefend
first
discovered
the
method by which the Persian column

belongs
to
these
inscriptions
in
might be deciphered
x
Grotefend
who
rius,
1802 succeeded in reading the names of Hystaspes, Da-
and Xerxes.
Other scholars followed on the
lines
laid
all
down by him, and made contributions

-of the
Rask, Saint Martin, Burnouf and Lassen
to the further identification of the characters
Old Persian alphabet.
Up
to
the year 1887, however,
the decipherers had merely succeeded in reading a
names, and they had not been able to
few proper make accurate and con-
nected translations even of the short inscriptions they had studied.

i.
Grotefend announced
his
discovery in the
left
Gottinger
Gesellschaft
der
Wissenschaften, Sept. Hth, 1802, and he has
a lengthy description of the
process by which he arrived at his results in Heeren's Historical Researches

(English translation, Oxford, i833), Vol.
II,
pp. 3i3ff.
The
process by which
both he and Sir Henry Rawlinson obtained the clue to reading the inscriptions was the same in each case and may be briefly described. Grotefend took for
analysis two short inscriptions in which he noticed the characters corresponded throughout with the exception of two groups of signs in each. As the rest of the inscriptions tallied, it was not unreasonable to suppose that the groups of the name of the man signs in each which differed represented proper names
who
set
up the
its
inscription and possibly that of his father.
But
in
these
two
inscriptions the
group which occupied the second place

position looked as though
set
it it
in
one inscription, and
which from
of the
represented the
first
name
of the father
man who
now
up, occurred in the

that
place in the
other inscription.
As he already imagined
Grotefend
inferred
the inscriptions were set
that these three
up by Persian kings, groups of signs gave the names of
three consecutive generations of the Persian monarchy.
On
trying the
names
Hystaspes, Darius and Xerxes he found they
fitted
the various signs exactly.
At a
later period Rawlinson, working independently on two other inscriptions, succeeded in reading the same three names by a similar process of reasoning.
b*
XX
awlinson
INTRODUCTION
for the late Sir
This achievement was reserved

son> G. c. B.,
Persia,
tails
first
LdtheBe-
who
in 1885,
and whilst stationed
Henry C. Rawlinat Kirmanshah in
ription.
turned his attention to the subject. Unaware of the de-
of Grotefend's discovery, he independently obtained similar
results
later
by making an analysis of two short inscriptions two years he succeeded in climbing the rock at Bahistun (Pers. Bagi;
and in copying the greater part of the Persian text of the Annals of Darius Hystaspes which was engraved upon its face.
stan)
In the winter of
1887 he sent a
first
instalment of his transla-
tion of these texts to the
translation of the Behistun inscription
Royal Asiatic Society. His complete was published in 1846 in

it
Vol.
of the Journal of that Society, but
was on the
original
translation
made
in
i83y
3g that Rawlinson himself based his
Apart from his correct identification of the entire Persian alphabet, he was also able, from his knowchief claims to originality.
ledge of Zend
inscription
literal
;
and Pehlevi, to arrive

first
at
the meaning of the
he was thus the
to
present to the world a

lines of cu-
and correct translation of over two hundred

1
neiform writing.
he deci-
The decipherment
Qf
of the Babylonian cuneiform followed that
lerment
'
^Q
Persian cuneiform.
The
writing:
in
the third
column of
Babylotne an cu;iform
g r ât trilingual inscription of Darius Hystaspes had been
already identified as Babylonian from the fact that

characters were identical with those
slabs that
i.
some of the
on the inscribed bricks and

and Babylonia. The
first
had been found
in Assyria
The
fullest description
is
of Rawlinson's
own achievements and
those of his
predecessors
given in his
memoir The Persian Cuneiform

from those of Spiegel
Inscription at Be-
histun (Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. X).

translations differ in but few details
His transliterations and

in
Die altpersischen
Keilinschriften (Leipzig, 1881). See also Flemming's article Sir
Henry Rawlin-
son und seine Verdienste urn die Assyriologie in the Beitrdge %ur Assyriologie,
Vol.
II,
pp.
ff.
Nature, Vol. LI,
p. 536f.,
Vol. 58, pp. XLIVff., and Prof. G. Rawlinson's
Proceedings of the Royal Society, Memoir of Sir H. C. Rawlinson

is
(London, 1898); a
list
of the Persian cuneiform inscriptions
given by Weiss-
bach, Die altpersischen Keilinschriften (Leipzig, 1893).
CUNEIFORM WRITING
step
in
XXI
the decipherment
was made by comparing the proper
names occurring
in the Persian text of the Behistun inscription
with the corresponding groups of characters which
represented
this
them
in
the
third
or Babylonian
column.
Starting with
point as a base, Rawlinson, Hincks, Norris and Oppert gradually
worked out the values of the Babylonian and Assyrian signs. The principal steps in the work of decipherment are marked
by the discovery of the polyphony of the Babylonian signs a pointed out by Rawlinson and by Hincks' proof of their syllabic nature. For the determination of the Assyrian sylfact first
labary these scholars obtained considerable aid from the ancient
Assyrian
lists
of signs which
this
had been recently excavated
at
Kuyunjik and brought to
country, while for help in the
interpretation of the inscriptions they
depended upon the close
resemblance of roots in Assyrian with those in Arabic, Hebrew,

Syriac and Chaldee.
1
The method
Assyrians
is
of writing employed
commonly
called "cuneiform"
by the Babylonians and Cuneifor w from the Latin cuneus
"a wedge". Each character or sign consists of one or more wedges

arranged in a variety of ways, while the characters themselves
are written from left to right.
Strangely enough, however, the
wedge, though
its
most
distinctive characteristic,
;
no part
in its
composition
its
existence
is
had originally entirely due to the

is
material for writing employed by the scribes. There

that the cuneiform system of writing, like all others
i.
no doubt
which have
See Rawlinson's paper
On
the Inscriptions of Assyria
(Journ. of the Roy. As. Soc., Vol. XII), and his
Memoir on
the Babylonian
and Babylonia and

scientifique en
Assyrian Inscriptions
actions of the
(ibid.,
Vol. XIV), Hincks' numerous papers in the Trans-
Royal
II
Irish
Academy, and Oppert's Expedition

;
Mesopotamie, Vol.
(Paris, 1859)
Norris' principal contribution to Assyriology
his great Assyrian Dictionary which he did not live to complete. For the decipherment of Susian, the language of the second column of the Achaemenian trilingual inscriptions see Norris, Memoir on the Scythic Version of the Behi-
was
stun Inscription (Journ. of the Roy. As. Soc., Vol.
XV) and Weissbach, Die
Achdmenideninscliriften ^welter Art (Leipzig, 1890).
XXII
origin
'"
INTRODUCTION
its
1 origin in picture-writing. All pri-
developed naturally, had
mitive races employ the same rude means
when
first
they begin to
of
all
iting.
record their names
and
actions,
and they
scratch
rough pictures on any substance that may come to hand. After certain pictures have become associated with certain words the
pictures
their
,
are used
;
to
express the
sound of the words without

used phonetically.
meaning
in other words, they are
The
forms of the characters themselves, from being written rapidly
become more and more

or characters
it
simplified,
until
in
the resulting signs
is
hard to recognise the originals from which
they have
descended.
This
is
particularly
the
case
with the
cuneiform writing of the Babylonians.

of the country
in
|
The
primitive inhabitants
of pictures, tracing
made
their records
by means
rough outline the various objects they wished to represent, and in course of time employing many of their picture-signs to
represent sounds merely, apart from ideas.
record stone would naturally suggest

preserving an inscription,
itself as
it
For any permanent most suitable for

so
ie
deve-
and we find
was
soil
employed
in
jment of
Babylonia
of
its
but the alluvial nature of the

as
it
was not
in favour
extensive use,
had generally
to
be imported from
some other country.
These early Babylonians therefore adapted
themselves to their surroundings and from the fine clay of their

soil
they fashioned tablets on which they continued to outline
their picture-characters.
But
it is
possible to write faster on soft

lines,
clay than
on
stone,
stilus,
and straight
pressure of the
i.
tend to become wedges.
when made by a The pictures
single there-
two
tablets in the British
That the Assyrians themselves believed this to be the case is proved by Museum. These tablets are lists of picture characters
arranged in groups, and opposite each sign or group the scribe has written
the cuneiform character to which he supposed
it
corresponded.
The
the
tablets are
numbered
8520 and 81
27, 49
+ 5;
photograph of
former
is
published by Houghton in the Trans, of the Soc. of Bibl. Arch., Vol. VI, p. 454; a copy of the latter is given in Cuneiform Texts from Babylonian tablets etc.
in
the British
Museum, Part
(1898).
CUNEIFORM WRITING
fore soon
1
(XXIIl)
lost
their original
lines
and became mere groups of

characters, however, The picto-
wedges.
From
it
the archaic forms of
some of the
is
still
possible to recognise the objects for
intended.
The
is
assyrian
sign
for
*->^f-,
which they were instance, which means
"*
characters
sti11
"heaven",
the
descendant of the archaic sign
in
which
rec g-
nisable.
we may
The
when
possibly see a star with eight points,
or a representa-
tion of heaven as a circle devided into eight equal portions
(^.
archaic form of the sign

set
2
for
"ox",
:|,
etc. is
is
^>, which
in the earlier
circle
vertically,
thus
W,
in
certainly suggests the head of an
ox with horns.
The
sign for "the sun, day"
^|,
inscriptions written
5^>,
which we may
see a
rough
is
O,
representing the sun's disk.

the
earlier
The
sign for "corn"
inscriptions
vertically,
is
written
^^>
and
^; m ^/j^?
this in
which,
'when written
we may perhaps see a representation of a blade of corn. Some signs for new ideas were formed by The a combination of two other signs already in existence.
u "mountain" placed within ox", gave the new " a mountain -ox". The sign |^ sign t^$$> (= mod. Ass
sign
l>
t^)
"water" when placed within

>~Hfj|T "to drink";
^J^J
"mouth" gave the new

"to eat"
is
sign
similarly
>-Hy[
formed from
^p^ "food", and forms of *-*$

combination of
^^"J
"mouth". One of the commonest archaic

is
"month"
X^>,
and
which we may explain
as
j* "day"
^^ "thirty".
later
To
trace the pic-
1.
In the characters
employed by the
Assyrians and Babylonians the

different
signs are formed by various combinations
and repetitions of
|,
wedges,
,
those of most frequent occurrence being the upright
the horizontal *
and the diagonal wedge /, which
frequently
written
ri
interchanges
with
the
sloping
s y llable
sl
wedge
e.
g. the
syllable
f
di
is
as
/T>t
an ^ T^fc' lhe
bu as >-T^T and >-TT
the
syllable
in
as
>-TT^T
few
and *"TTI'
The
P in S
wedges
and
in
y/
are employed
only a
signs. In writing
on clay the
differences
the shape of the wedges could be produced by slightly shifting
the position of the stilus in the fingers.

2.
Some
archaic inscriptions are written vertically.
XXIV
torial
INTRODUCTION
origin of the majority
inscriptions,
of the
is
signs
however
even in
the
most ancient
quite impossible,
J
;
because
we
cannot identify the objects which they represent

later periods of
while in the
Babylonian and Assyrian history the signs befor

it
came
still
less like pictures,
was but natural
that the scribe
writing quickly on his soft clay tablet should tend to simplify

the characters.
The
inscriptions engraved
in
on stone
reflected the
changes which took place
the inscriptions on clay and the

latter
forms of the characters on the

in stone he
in-
were carefully reproduced

one that
while
by means of the
-
chisel,
is
The
o
j^
subject of the invention of cuneiform writing
;ntors
meiformriting.
it
as g- yen r se to a considerable
is
amount of controversy,
for,
generally agreed that
it
was due
to the early inhabitants of

is
Babylonia, the nationality of this people

still
disputed; some scholars
hold that this race were the Semitic Babylonians themselves,
though the majority now admit that the Semitic Babylonians borrowed their method of writing from an earlier race of non-Semitic
origin.
The
point at issue
may
be best stated by briefly indicating

it.
the course of the controversy that has taken place around
Among
many
the literary remains of the Babylonians and Assyrians are
compositions that are inscribed in the

but, to judge
in
\
same cuneiform
characters,
from the forms of the words, are clearly not written

language.
the
Assyrian
Many
of
these
compositions
are
furnished with interlinear Assyrian translations while the words

i.
theory has recently been put forward by Dr. Delitzsch, who, while reattempts to explain the rest as
cognising the pictorial origin of certain signs,
formed from them

signs
artificially.
Instances have been
given above of
how new
were formed by combinations of signs already in existence, but Dr. Delitzsch goes further and asserts that new signs were formed by combinations
and variations of simple wedges or rather lines. He distinguishes some fortyfive Urbilder or signs with a "motive" and thinks the majority of the characters were developed from them. Of the methods of combination he sets forth the
is that in which the meaning of a simple sign was intensified this process the Sumerians by the addition of a number of extra wedges termed gnnu. Few people will, however, accept his theory in its present form.
;
most convincing
CUNEIFORM WRITING
XXV
and forms employed are explained in a number of tablets containing lists of words with Assyrian explanations compiled by the Assyrian scribes. Moreover the monumental and documentary
inscriptions of the
early rulers
Isin
of cities in Babylonia, such as
Shirpurla or
idiom.
Sir
Lagash, Ur,
first
and Larsa,
are
written in
this/
The
to
detect the existence of this language
wag The
]
Su-
Henry Rawlinson,
who
in
1852 concluded that
it
was tht
menan
question
tongue of the early non-Semitic inhabitants of Babylonia amor whom the Semitic Babylonians had settled, and from the fad
that Babylonian kings,
in
addition to their other
titles,
style(
Xfecmselves king of
Sumer and Akkad, he concluded

of the
that th<
were Akkadians who spoke this language which he styled "Akkadian". Oppert, however, while accepting the existence of the language, contended that
primitive
inhabitants
land
was the language of the "Sumerians". 1 Others reconciled these views by tracing dialectic differences in the inscriptions, which
it
they supposed to represent differences of pronunciation exhibited
by the Akkadians and Sumerians, the primitive inhabitants of northern and southern Babylonia respectively others again,
;
though they recognised the existence of dialects, did not attempt

to define their geographical
distribution.
In 1884 the problem
assumed a new form and the question in deGate was modified
somewhat by Halevy who denied the

absolutely.
as the
existence of the language
He
asserted
that
what_had
hitherto
been regarded
Sumerian or Akkadian language was merely a traditional

scribes
i.
The Assyrian
in
merian"
describing the ancient non-Semitic
employed both of the names "Akkadian" and "Sucompositions which they edited
and translated into Assyrian; see the tablets K 11856, where "Akkadian" is mentions^" iC 14013, where both "Akkadian" and "Sumerian" are referred to,
8
1
27, i3o,
it
where mention
is
made of
li-sa-an Su-me-ri, "the
Sumerian
language";
may
be added that on the tablet S 1190, inscribed with incan-
tations and prayers,
two of these are

(cf.
referred to as II
i-pat Su-[me-]ri,
"two
in
Sumerian incantations"
Catalogue of the Cuneiform tablets the Kouyunjik Collection, pp. 1200, 1354, 1469 and 1805).
Bezold,
XXVI
cabalistic
INTRODUCTION
method of writing invented by the

priests.
early Semitic Ba-
bylonian
the Semitic Babylonians
According to Halevy's assumption therefore were the inventors_jDJMthe cuneiform
method of
Halevy devoted himself vigorously to developing his theory and for a time-Aêded in making many
writing.
converts.
The
excavations,
however^thathave been
carried
on
in Babylonia during the last fifteen years,
have yielded thousands of cuneiform inscriptions written entirely in this ancient tongue
and proving the existence of

indications of Semitic origin.
able
that
;
powerful race
who
betray no
it
To
these "Sumerians"
is
prob-
the
invention
of
cuneiform
writing
should
it
be
as-
signed
with
calic
}"
much
from them the Semitic Babylonians received of their early civilisation and culture.
a,
together
The
1
i,
il,
Assyrian language possesses the vowel sounds

at
e,
i,
u, a,
e,
fttcll
and the diphthongs m^^^*

b,
and
n, s,
ia. It
also possesses the consonantal

s
ands in
syrian.
sounds
are
g, d, z, h,
t,
k,
/,
m,
p,
s, k, r,
and L These consonants

,\
'"*
j^g
2
,
arran ged in the order of the
Hebrew alphabet and they

J,
correspond to the
h,
3,
Hebrew
p,
^1,
ttf
characters D,
1,
I,
PI
(Arabic
),
tD,
D,
D, S,
ii,
and
n
I
as reference will be
sometimes
made
to the
Hebrew alphabet
here give a
:
list
of the
Hebrew
If
(j
characters with their transliteration
THE ASSYRIAN METHOD OF WRITING

(13) (14)
(15)
XXVII
&
3
m
n
*
(18) (19)
(
it
D
y
20 )
1
tf
'
f
/
(16)
(17)
(21)
(22)
With regard
Assyrian J
it
to
the pronunciation of consonantal sounds in Pronunciatlc
may
be remarked that the sound represented by the
consonantai
in
symbol h is a guttural ch ; t is a harder dental than t; k and k were both pronounced by the Assyrians as k, but the Babylonians pronounced k as g; s is pronounced as is and S as sh.
a special character In the sign ^^>^>^- the Assyrians possessed
for markirig"~TrIe breathing, but in use
it
sounds
Assy-
rian,
especially at the beginning of a word.
was generally omitted, The Assyrian method of
writing, moreover,
was
ill-adapted for the expression of peculiar

find that the consonants K,
!"1,
Semitic sounds, and
we
(c),
&(,)
(,)>
an d
f r
which
special characters exist in the other Semitic

its
languages, were not distinguished in

root, for instance,
syllabary.
If a
Semitic
commences with any one of these consonants form of the word is without the consonant altothe Assyrian 2 g. 75K ('*/) "to eat" gether and commences with a vowel,
.
= Assyr. akdlu;
1.
TOP! (haldkP) "to go"

is
= Assyr.
alaku ; t^*lH (hadh aty
Of
these
consonants K
aspirate
corresponding to the English h
employed to indicate the breathing; .1 is an H had two sounds distinguished in ;

,
Arabic by the characters
^ and
and
1
the
nounced with
friction, the latter a guttural
former representing a strong h proch y also had two sounds cor;
responding to the Arabic

latter a guttural
2.
g or
^,
the former a softer guttural sound,

^
the
w, and
= y.
In the transliteration of the
Hebrew words here

the
cited the softer
pronun-
ciation of the letters
nSDIIQ, when without
Daghesh
lene, is indicated
It is
by
\
I
the addition to the letter of a small h printed above the line.

in
possible that
Assyrian the corresponding consonantal sounds were softened

in the
when
they
came between two vowel sounds but
Assyrian method of writing there
was no means of marking

3. In this list
this difference of pronunciation.

s.
and
in
the following paragraph the 3 m.
Perf. of
Hebrew
verbs
is cited
while the corresponding verbs in Assyrian are given in the Infinitive.^-.
XXVIII
"to be
INTRODUCTION
new"
= Assyr.
D*1JJ
ed'eû ;
1 ,
ID^
e.
(ab
ar,
i.
e,
_^)
"to cross"
sun),
=
to
Assyr. eberu;
grow dark"
= Assyr.
its
Assyr. alddu ; pJJ
^) "to = (yanak) "to suck"

('drab'
i.
enter
,
(of the
h erebu; *TT (yalad
i.
e.
ibl) "to bear"

Similarly
Assyr.
en'eku.
when
one of these consonants occurs

a Semitic
as the second or third
letter in
e.
root
= Assyr.
It
D!T"J (rahani)
"to
love" =
place
is
taken in Assyrian by a vowel,

Assyr. rdmu ; $?t# (Zdma) "to
g.
hear"
semu.
has been already stated that the Assyrian language belongs

of the Semitic languages.
Its
to
the northern group
affinities
with Hebrew however are closer than with the other languages
which make up the group. The following examples of words whidr-t5ccuf both in Hebrew and Assyrian will suffice to indicate the close resemblance
between the two languages, and will
further illustrate the inability of Assyrian to represent the

itic
Sem-
consonants referred to in the preceding paragraph:

Assyrian
]
'eb h
Hebrew
IX
'06*
a-bu
DK
en
fc
TMI
'ahaz
'el
'arba

Hebrew
nritf 'alia
XXIX
Meaning
Assyrian
Êj
h
ai~ ia
ITT
thou (m.) house
Hebrew
and Assyrian compared.
TO
bayit
band
ba-nu-u
be-e-lu
to build
lord
bir-ku
knee
lightning
bdrak
bir-ku
hM
gam-malu
di-i-nu
dal-tu
camel
judgment
door
^
PIT
zera
zik-ru
zi-e-ru
name
seed
friend
^ffl
ib-ru
DPI
e-mu
ha-du-u
J
father-in-law
to rejoice
1C
IW
ha-ta-nu
ta-a-bu
i-du
son-in-law
good
hand, side
u-mu
ydrriin
day
right
im-nu
i-sa-ru
hand
righteous
star
kak-ka-bu
kal-bu
lib-bu
dog
heart
to clothe
to learn
to take
la-ba-$u
-ET ET
la-ma-du
la-ku-u
h'-Sa-a-nu
tongue
XXX
Hebrew
Hebrew
ind
rian
INTRODUCTION
mdhas
Assy-
com-
sdhap'
nna
ît selem
Up
kol
IP *&.
kerm

Though
XXXI
the Assyrians possessed the consonantal sounds al- Assyrian

'
ready described, their method of writing did not include separate signs for each consonant.
They
did not employ an alphabet
but a syllabary
racter,
letter
in
other words each cuneiform sign or chais
witnthe
exception of the vowel signs,

itself a
not a single
if
but represents in
complete
the
syllable.
Thus
an As-
syrian
wished to write
down
word
akshud "I
conquered",
he would employ three signs only >-^f ÊJ ^J, i, e. ak-$u-ud, or, if he wished to write down abu "father", he would employ only
two
is
signs
y^r
^>-
a-bu.
Each of the
signs here
is
employed
it
is
what
S 7 llables -
termed a simple syllable, that
to say, in sound
consists simple
of one vowel and one consonant, or of a vowel by
itself.
In
H ^7 M'
"in"
;
the following words each sign represents a simple syllable: " ~ *--* "i"; t^TTT at ta thou "; ^ a ~ ma - fu " word "to"
sT
>
flf
~ry,
a-na,
flf
Ej
^=[,
}}
>
ba-la-ti, "life"
,
|
;
gt^f
-
^J<,
ma-ta-a-ti,
"lands"
;
ba-a-bu, "gate"
si-i-ru,
,
"exalted"
^ ^JJ ^, ^r-3,
On
p.
^J| ^S-
<, ra-bu-u, "great"
6=Ej|
;
"I entered"
ta-a-ru, "to return".
XXXII
line
f.
is
a table of simple
syllables,
arranged alphabetically.
It
will be seen that the table
runs across both pages.
The
first
gives the signs for the
vowels by themselves
the syllables which
J
;
the rest of the table gives the signs for
begin or end with the various consonantal

these are arranged in the order of the Heleft
sounds in Assyrian
brew alphabet.
tains syllables
The
which
in
half of the table (on p.
XXXII) cong, d,
etc.
begin
with the consonants

a,
b,
and
e.
which contain
ba,
addition the vowels

; da,
di,
(and e\ and
u,
g.
table
gt, gu (and be), on the opposite page contains a similar arrangement of the syllables which end with the various consonants, e. g. ab, ib,
bi
bu ; ga,
du.
The
right half of the
ub
ag,
In
ig,
ug;
ad, id,
to
ud.
The
for
list
may
be considerably simpligiven the signs for the
i.
addition
the
signs
the vowels there
diphthongs should be here noted,
ai and
il?
XXXII
INTRODUCTION
A
Initial
V
Value
I
u
Value
consonant
List of
Sign
Value
Sign
Sign
simple syllables ar-
TJ
\
ranged al'
phabetically.
3,
3,
G D
TTA
n,
n,
ha
ta
II
ka
a,
3,
M
N
ET
n
ne
D, S
sa
<
8,
pa
sa
Pi
P, n,
K
R
S
ka ra
-TTZ
tt,
Sa
se
n,
TT
la
SIMPLE SYLLABLES
I
XXXIII
U
Value
Sign
Final
Sign
Value
Sign
Value
consonant
List of
simble syllables aral-
ranged
a*
tu
Ug
id
iz
B,
phabetically.
ud
uz
z,t
e,
T,
ID
AHPFF
SET
ik
uk
K,
m
an
n
um
M,
N,
3
II
en
S,
ap
as
HI
is
up
us
p,
ak
ik
uk
K, p
ir
IH
er
at
e~s
at
ut
XXXIV
lied
INTRODUCTION
for
by observing that the signs for ab, ib, ub are also employed that the signs for ag, tg, ug are ap, ip and up respectively
;
also
ad,
employed
id,
for ak,
ik,
uk and ak,
at,
ik,
nk
ut
that the signs for
ud are also employed for

iz,
it,
and
at,
it,
ut ;
and
that the signs for az,

as,
is,
uz are also
employed
for as,
is,
us
and
us.
The
student should familiarize himself with the forms

list
of the characters until he can write out the
of signs by heart,
ompound
rllables.
In addition to simple syllables
sent
w iat
j
h ave been called
many compound
signs in Assyrian repre-
syllables, that
is
to say,
sounds consisting of a vowel between two consonants, such as

///,
kun, mar.
The word
is
t=|f
^fî
lud-lul, "let
me bow down",
:
for instance
written in
are
compound
employed
appointed"
syllables.
in
;
compound
"let
syllables
the
Both simple and following words

lil-ma-da,
g= ^y^^yy^
him
learn";
dan-nu, "strong"
;
as-kun, "I
<^><
t&Zw^lt]]]],
in-na-bit,
j ^J, "he fled"

; ;
S^ ^-,
^<(
^Ê E^J| ^~,
har-ra-nu, "road"
M^ff
for
^1 ^^1?
he length
man-da-at-tu, "tribute",
This syllabic method of writing was not well adapted
vowe
nd the
s,
accurate iy marking the difference between the long and the short
aubling f conso-
vowels, or for distinguishing between single and doubled consonants.

In the
case of
open
syllables
there are
however two
is
ways
(i)
in
which
it is
possible to indicate that the

to write
;
vowel
long
One method
it
is
after the
syllable the sign for
the
vowel which
nd
is
contains
nd,
thus to indicate the a of the syllable

it
long
(i. e.
not no]
may
>
be written *~^~| J^, na-a,

T]f
e.
g.
ndru "river"
Id,
is
generally written
^"J
J^,
^TT,
na-a-ru. Similarly
"not",
>~<
can
be
written
be-e-lu ;
Ê|
la-a; belu,
"lord",
can
be
written
^^ ÊTJ^
ni-i-ru ;
riiru,
Ê
illL
nunu,
"fish",
"yoke", can be written ^yy~ can be written +^- ^yyy^: >Â.

in a
is
nu-u-nu.
It
must not be assumed however that the vowel

is
simple syllable
not added, for
b'elu
short
when
the corresponding vowel sign

*~^~\
we
find ndru written

+~<
ÎIL na
ru
>
fa
written
written
be-lu ; niru JEJJ,
written ^yy~ "^JJJ, ni-ru;
IDEOGRAMS
written
the
**f-
XXXV
other
+^-,
nu-nii.
is
(2)
The
method ojîndicating
j
length of a vowel
"distant"
is
to
double the following Consonant,
e.g. riiku
written
is
it
^JTT E^V^T
in
~^
is
ru-uk-ku.
Whenj
a consonantal
sound
sharpened
is
pronunciation and should
be doubled in writing
e.
.
generally doubled by the Assyrians,

is
iUakin,
"he was placed",

however, the
written
i*-*a-kin ;
sometimes,
in writing.
doubled
consonant
not
indicated
The
The
Assyrians,
however, did not always write

itself to
in
syllables, Ideograms
but often used one sign by

reason of this will
of the signs
idea
.be
represent a complete word.
readily seen
when
it
is,
remembered
that each
was originally
syllabic
a picture
representing a
characters
complete
and that the
values of the
were only subsequently developed. The Assyrians, then, while
employing
netically,
their
characters
as
syllables
in writing
words pho-
continued to use
many
of
them
;
in their old sense as
pictures or symbols for a
whole idea
in other
words they used

for instance,
many
"son"
of their signs as ideograms.

as
The
sign
;
Ê|,
was used
;
an ideogram for abu "father"

ilu
the sign J^ for aplu
the sign >~>^- for

list
"god"
the sign
^^J|
for alu "city".
The
them
following
of some of the
common
ideograms should be
learnt by heart
this can best be done by writing out a few of
at a time.
Ideogram
Pronunciation
Meaning
Ideogram
kakkabu
star
^*
fff
amelu
$arru
man
king
nobl<
>-^
rubu
belli
lord
XXXVI
Ideogram
XXXVIII
INTRODUCTION
they pronounced the Assyrian
word which corresponded
to
it
in
.meaning;
in fact
they regarded these Sumerian words as sym-
bols for their Assyrian equivalents in meaning.
A
in
similar use of
certain
borrowed words or expressions may be seen

bols
sym-
employed by "that is", or
at the
present day,
when
a reader renders "i. e."
"e. g."
by "for example".
In
each
of these
relation
phrases the Latin original stands in precisely the

to
its
same
English rendering as the Sumerian word used as an ideoto

its
gram
them
signs,
Assyrian equivalent. This
fact,
though explaining the
existence of ideograms, does not help the learner to understand

;
he must content himself with remembering that certain

or groups of signs, were
for certain
regarded by the Assyrians as
symbols
words. reasoa that the Assyrian

is
Perhaps
writing
Polyphons. that
is
the
principal
method of
somewhat complicated
signs are
syllabic
to
be sought in the fact
many
than one
polyphons, value and are used
in other
words they have more as ideograms for more

a,
is
than one word. Thus YI, which has the syllabic value
as
used
1
an ideogram for aplu "son" and mu "water"

is
the sign T^T V*'
has the syllabic values ku, dur and tus and
used as an ideo;
gram
for subatu
"garment" and asdbu "to dwell"

tarn, pir,
^J
has
the
syllabic values ud, tu,
lah,
his
and
is
used as an ideo-
gram
for
Samtu "sun", umu "day" and pisu "white".
The
exi-
stence of this polyphony
may be explained by supposing that the same sign might be used as an ideogram for synonymous or closely connected words (it being easy to trace, for instance, the ;e, me
connection between "sun", "day" and "white"), and subseq
for
"fetjfc
words of similar sound
while from the meanings so
tained various syllabic values were developed.
To what
exent mt
tl^^6^
Assyrian signs are polyphonous, the student
may
judge for himself
by referring
to the List of Signs at the
end of the Introduction.
From
the above brief
summary
of the various
characters
it
methods
will
in
which the Assyrians employed
their
be ob-
DETERMINATIVES
served that a sign
(a) as a syllable
XXXIX
ways
:
may
in
possibly be used in one of three
word written
phonetically, or (b) as an
(c)
ideogram representing a whole word, or

group of two or
for a
as
one sign
in a
more
It
whole word.
signs which together form an ideogram will be obvious that this method of writ'
ing
would often be ambiguous, and

felt
it.
that the Assyrians them-
selves
it
to
be so
is
proved by the means they took to

tfcey
simplify
To many words
attached certain signs, which

class of thing Deter'
have been called determinatives, to indicate the

to
which the word belongs. The majority of these determinatives are placed before the words to which they refer they
;
are never
pronounced but are intended
to
help the reader to

the following
their
list
:
understand the word that follows them.

.of
In
determinatives examples
are
added
is
illustrating
use
for ilu "god") ^p- (the ideogram of deities, e. g. -*f
placed before the names Deter-
<^J,
Marduk ;
^f-
*J, Sama! ;
word
mdnu; ^-^- ^jj, Nabu;
-HP
>~<
is
IU
F C3&
^^JL^,
Assur ;
+-+^-
^W,
Rtar;
Tal-me-tum;
^f
^fcf
<JEJ
y,
Dam-ki-na.
placed before male proper names,
j^
y
*~1^ ^>^yy Sin-aheP -er-ba, Sennacherib; y>-^- >-^yy ^.^y,

l
e.
g. y >- >^-
'^yyyy E^TT> r****w *&-y jEy ^y< E- Sar-ra, Tiglathpileser y ^< }} JEJJ y^ ^}}]^, Ha;
r
^^y
;
A
>
za-ki-a-u,
Hezekiah
y *-J][
^^]
^yyj^
^:,
Hu-um-ri-i,
Omri
is
y ^TTT^ Tf placed before female proper names,

;
t\]
Ia ~ u ~ a
Jehu>
e.
g. ">-
^Sy.^PF
^TT! <!MTI t^TTT $&

Stratonice.
(the
is
e.
>~ll* I^f, As-ta-ar-ta-m-ik-ku,
ideogram
for
matu "country", and
Sadii
"mountain")
Ku-u-
placed before the

g.
V^
names of countries and mountains,

;
<f!2,
;
M"-*r, Egypt
V Jgf < ^|J,

.
st,
Ethiopia
V ^= >-fJ
XL
INTRODUCTION
Lab -na-
na,
Lebanon
^< yy^ EJ *~^y> %?& - m a -
#,
Mt.
Amanus.
(the
ideogram
tribes
for
names of
amelu "man") and professions, e.

;
is
placed
before
the
g.
KaS-ti-i, the Kassites
^yyfy
;
Ni-ba--a-ti, the Nabataeans

*~*
r
the Macedonians y yi yi, Ma-ak-ka-du-na-ai,

,
>TTT ^.TTT, &*, "priest" g ^p ^ w ?" sa ^^yy, <w, "physician"; ESy ^TIT
M-, "governor";
ideogram
e.
f'
Wrtf
il
r "-
(the
for alu "city")
is
placed before the names

;
of
cities,
g.
^->^\ >yy" ^f- f^, Nt-nu-a, Nineveh
^^y
; ;
% Ur-sa-li-im-mu, Jerusalem
,
Is-ka-al-lu-na, Askelon
[,
Gar-ga-mis, Carchemish.
is
(the
ideogram
for
e.
naru "river")
g.
placed
before
the
names of
Tigris
;
rivers,
^ jj
"wood") wooden
;
>^-, Idiklat or Diktat, the
^T
yi
^y>^,
Puratu,
the Euphrates
yi T^f
^y
(the
ideogram
for isu
is

e.
of trees, woods, and
objects,
g.
^ ^~^"^yy
"cedar";
^^^^yy,
buraXu,
datiu,
"pine"
^ j^JÊ^yy^,
^y ^yyy^
y
is
erinu,
^ ^y^,
"beams".
"door";
^yj,
ga-û-n',
y^
(the
ideogram
for
e.
Sammu "plant")
g.
;
placed before the

+^- ^f\-> maStakal,
names of
the
plants,
-
^^^L Ê^yy
^yyy^: JEf
mdStakal
plant
^^
is
^--^, ku-un-gu,
(the
ideogram
for
abnu "stone")
Efj-^f
]f|
placed
before
the
names of stones, e.g.

îT
"V* uknu, "lapis lazuli"',
^^^
ET*^? paruiu, "alabaster".
DETERMINATIVES
(the
XLI
is
ideogram
stuffs
for subatu
"garment")
e.
Deterplaced before the
names of
a
and garments,
;
n
g.
JEJ x^kXÊ: |^
a
fruHu,
;
ceremonial garment
JEJ
*J-, kilu,
kind of cloth
cede the
I!0
IiU -Mfflk
ideogram
for
HT<
fc-^'-", "garments".
word
'
IEJJE
tne
Sipatu "fleece,
wool")
'
is
placed
e.
be-
fore the
names of wools and woollen

ta - kil' tu >
stuffs,
j
g.
sHTT
^yyj^
n ^T
^
JEJjE
"P ur P le
wo
ISIE
<MTI
a-da-gur,
>^-, ar-ga-man-nu,
"crimson wool".
is
for karpatu "vessel") E^yf^ (the ideogram names of vessels, e. g. f^ ^>^yy
placed before the
^f^
^^J"^^!*
a vessel for incense.
Jl^T^
(the
ideogram
for imeru "ass")
is
e.

g.
of
some of the
;
larger animals,
l^T
"horse"
^^
tflp, gammalu,
"camel"
fl-/i,
"dromedaries".
(the
ideogram
for immeru
"lamb, sheep")
JE^f
is
fore ~>vprds
for sheep, e.g.
t^]]
is
placed beW-///,
JÎ,
"sheep".
(the
ideogram
for siru "flesh")

e.
sometimes placed bekiSddu,
fore parts of the body,
g.
t^^*^< >f2^
is
"neck";
fc^^< t^,
(
irtu,
"breast".
tne
ideogram
for
arhu "month")
e.
placed
before the
names of the months,
g.
^^"^
e.
ET^J Nisannu, Nisan.

is
y- (the ideogram for kakkabu "star")
placed before the

*
>~<,
names of
bat,
stars
;
and planets,
g.
^z^z^>^-
Dil-
Venus
^z^z^^- ^yy^^.
for a$ru "place")
districts,
Mars. ^yy^y, Karradu,

:
few determinatives follow the words to which they refer

(the
01
Deter-
ideogram
is
minatives placed after the names

that fol-
many towns and
even
when preceded by
e.
the ow
j
t j ie
determinatives
("country") or
VHW ^M'
Nineveh
;
Babilu,
*J
t<_
Babylon g, Larsam
;
^J| ("city"), ^^Rj ^Jgf,

;
g.
^K
word.
Ninua,
INTRODUCTION
Sippar
;
>
?> s
j,
.Efcwi/tt,
Elam
V
*-|^,-
Î^f>
>~yj
^'^7, Akkad.
vr
"bird")
w
is
(the "ideogram for
placed after the names
of birds,
nuniu,
e.
g.
E3^J
*~|J,
^rw
>
"eagle";
^J^
"swallow"; ^^fEJ *~J][, summatu, "dove". nunu "fish") is placed after the names ^r^ (the ideogram for
of fish but
eteris
of rare occurrence.
Natives
r
ter
numand
-4^*^ are used as determinatives after num bers, while the sign-groups TI >nJf- and ^TTT TI >-i4- are
signs
The
Ê:
an<^
2rs
placed as determinatives after numbers and measures.
icasures.
The
signs
plural
of words
is
also
indicated
are
by means of certain
after
or
determinatives which
refer.
ihij
placed
the words
is
to
[ethods
F
indicat-
tg
the
which they ^ g ^,JL
The commonest
>1
sign for the plural
j^*,
mark
lural.
"god",
JL T ^*^, fldni,
The
TT
sign
is
j
"gods"
V,
mdtu, "land",
-,
matati,
"lands".
frequently used to
e.
the plural of things which occur regularly in pairs,
g.
Ê|, kdtu,
"hand", ÊJjy,
kdtd,
"hands"; ^J>-, mu, "eye", 4^>-]],

idd,
ina,
"eyes";
,/^,"side",^^|yy,
plural.
"sides".
The
signs j>-, >^-, and

it
are also placed after a
word
to indicate that
is
in the
Another method of indicating the plural of a word
exg.
pressed by an ideogram
>->Jf-, ilu,
was
to write the
tldnit
ideogram twice,
md/u, "land",
e.
"god", >-*^- *~*f~,
"gods";
V>
^^
matati,
"lands".
Such are the principal determinatives employed by the Assyrians and they prove of great assistance to the reader by simplifying his analysis of the text.
Many
ideograms, however, are
not furnished with determinatives and the reading of these would

often be uncertain or
ambiguous were
it
not for an ingenious

in
honeiic
icnts.
adding to the ideogram a phonetic sign expressing the final syllable of the word which the ideogram is intended to represent the syllable so added has been conveniently named the ideogram's phoneticl
;
device of the Assyrian scribes.
This consists
complement.
fevv
examples will
illustrate
the use
of the! I
DETERMINATIVES AND PHONETIC COMPLEMENTS

phonetic complement.
XLIII
Phoneti<
both for
lable
ilu,
e,
:[ |,
The sign *~*^~ is used as an ideogram and Samu (pi. Zame\ "heaven" when the syl"god" T TT e. it indiis added to the ideogram (/. >~>j- ^| y)
;
merits.
cates that
***$-
in that
passage
is
not to be read as
ilu,
"god",
but as Same, "the heavens".
The
when
sign
ÊJ
irsitu
is
used as an ideo-
gram
for
/'///',
"with", a$ru, "place", and

irsita)
(with the accusative
termination,
(t.
e.
"earth"
it
the syllable
^JfJ,
ta,
is is
added
to be
^JEJ ^^y[J)
irsita.
indicates that
^JEJ
in that passage
read
The when
sign
^J-^
is
used as an ideogram both for
the substantive Jumku, "favour" and for the adjective damku, "fa-
vourable"
the sign ^|,
indicates that the
ideogram
is
^J>~^f ^|) it to be read as damiktu, the feminine

tu,
(i.
e.
is
added
singular of the adjective damku. In the case of a verb expressed by
an ideogram the particular verbal inflection intended by the writer

is
frequently
We
and
fied
by means of the phonetic complement. have now seen how words in Assyrian could be either
indicated
written out phonetically in syllables or expressed by ideograms
how
this rather
complicated system of writing was simpli-
by the use of additional signs as determinatives and phocomplements,

the former indicating the general character
Analysis extra
netic
of words, the latter furnishing clues to their actual readings.
We
how
will
now
take a passage from an Assyrian
text
is
and
see
from an
the signs are there employed.
The
following
an extract
Assyriar
text
-
from a historical inscription.
IH
HF-
tTTT^
E!
^7
JT
XLIV
INTRODUCTION
The
first
point the reader will observe
is
that the
signs run
on and are not
clearly divided into words, though a line in the

It
is
inscriptions always ends with a complete word.
true that
some
scribes, especially in writing religious or poetical
tions, leave a clear space
composibetween each word, and when special
attention
îs
is
to be called to the division of
two words the
sign
placed between them. As a general rule however the signs
run on without clear division and the correct division of words

is
one of the
will
first
difficulties
to
be overcome by the beginner.
We
now
break the passage up into words indicating under
each sign the
way
it
ii
to be read
and
its
meaning.
ina
$ane(e)
gir
ri
ia
na
matu
Mu-sur
In
second
my
expedition
to
Egypt
and
matu
Ku-u-
si
/e
I
es -
se
ra
har
ra
nu
Ethiopia
directed
the way.
r
m
IH
Ur
-
da
ma Urdamane
ni
alu
Me
im
pi
Memphis
1
f
HfTT=
u
-
HF-
-<^
-
ET
ma
and
JT ^TT
su
-
^
-
ma$
Sir
na
zu
ub
abandoned
to
save
I
naptitim
his
-
=TTTT
in
-
^^
The
(tini)
su
na
lit
Warrant? 1
life
he
fled.
kings
DETERMINATIVES AND PHONETIC COMPLEMENTS
XLV
'
pahatiP
amglu
ki
pa
ni
ina
tarsi
ia
from an into
governors
prefects
my
presence Assyr an
;
*'/
/*'
ku
nim
ma
and
na
came
kissed
my
The
the
translation
to
feet.
runs:
"In
my
second expedition
directed
way
phis and
fects
fled to save his life.
Egypt and Ethiopia. Urdamane abandoned MemThe kings, governors and pre-
came
into
my
presence and kissed

x
my
,
feet."
The
determinatives are marked
by
+
;
the
phonetic
comple-
ments by
and the ideograms by
the rest of the signs are
simply employed phonetically as syllables. In the transliteration

it
will be observed that the determinatives are printed in smaller

*.
type above the line,
g.
mdtu
,
the determinative for lands,

f
alu
,
the
determinative for
<*meiu
cities,
h e determinative for classes of
men and m
corresponding to
;
proper names
which is placed before male |, the signs for the plural, P I and 7/ are similarly
,
printed above the line

parentheses.
phonetic complements are printed within
This system of transliteration has been employed
in the texts in the
Now
it
that the Assyrian
main body of the book. method of writing has been described,
will be convenient, before passing to the consideration of the
separate parts of speech, to refer briefly to the principal phonetic
changes which take place
among
the consonants in Assyrian.
nncl P a
phonetic
These changes are due

in Assyrian
to the fact that certain consonantal sounds changes
when coming
amon g together were not easy to pronounce

in
th<
consonant:
or were unpleasant to the ear, the result being that other sounds,
easier to
Assy _
pronounce or pleasanter to the
ear,
were substituted,
rian.
INTRODUCTION
The
out
reader need not delay over the

the
texts
list
here given, for through-
in
the
main body of the book those phonetic

in foot-notes;
changes that
the following
might prove puzzling are explained

list
of the principal phonetic changes
among
is
the
consonants
'rincipal
is
given for reference
only
\.' b
at the
end of a verb followed by the copula ma

assimilated
to
fre-
KjptJUmj
quently
the m,
is
/
e.
g.
~erub,
"he entered",
mong
the
followed by the copula ma,
often written erumma,

or X
is
onsonants
u d immediately followed by
/
,
assimilated
to
the
<t
or
s,
e.g. kardu, "strong", fern, karitiu (for karidtii}; edefu,
"to be -new", eshi (for edsu), "new".

III.
is
frequently changed to n before
d, /,
/,
s, $,
and
k,
e.
g.
L*J*A
mundahse (for mumdahst), "warriors", the
Ifteal,
Part. plur.
;
from mahdsu, "to smite"

(for nakamtti), "treasure" (for hamSit], "fifth"
s
;
hantu (for hamtti), "swift"

;
nakantu
;
"1
unsu (for umsii), "hunger"
han$u
before
assi-
*
\
dunku (for dumkii),
"favour"
is
the n that has taken the place of

S,
e.
m
is
sometimes
0"
milated to the
haû.
g. hanSu, "fifth"
sometimes written
IV. n immediately followed by a consonant
is
frequently assithis
milated,
e.
g. libittu
(for libiniv), "brick"
assimilation
of n
is
invariable in the Nifal
and
Ittafal,
of the verb, and

first
generally takes place throughout verbs of which the

radical
v
is
n (see below, VERBS).

(see below, p.
V.
XLIX), when 2 immediately preceded by a dental or sibilant, becomes

of the pronominal suffixes
g.
e.
mat-su (for mat-sti], "his land".
further change geis
nerally takes place, for the preceding dental
frequently
is
1
assimilated to the
s,
and the preceding
sibilant
always
1.
it
Of
may
2.
the phonetic changes that take place among the vowels in Assyrian here be noted that after a preceding i or e the a of the feminine terf.).
mination, sing, and plur., tends to become e (see below, p. LVII
The consonants
d,
t,
and
are "dentals",
\,
s,
s,
and
are "sibilants".
PHONETIC CHANGES
assimilated
or sibilant,
kds-su
;
XLVII
Principal
the
is
s,
which has taken the place of the dental

e.
if.
kdt-su
then dropped,
kdt-$u), "his
kdtu,
;
"hand", ka-su
(for
pc
changes
hand"
dan-na-su (for dannas-su
= dannat-su = dannat-$u),
dannatu, "foundation", am ong the

"its
foun- consonants
in
Assv
dation";
lirhis,
"may he overwhelm",
li-ir-hi-su (ton lirhis-su
rjan
lirhis-su ==.
Krhis-$u\
"may he overwhelm him".

VERBS)
VI.
in
the Ifteal and Iftaal of the verb (see below,

:
undergoes the following changes

(a)
when
it
follows
Ifteal,
z, s,
or
it_js
assimilated,
e.
g. issaJmr (for
;
-j
<S
5f
istahur],
Pret.
Pret.
g_\\.
from sahdru, "to turn"

from
sabdtu,
?.
ussabbit (for
ustabbtt\
(b)
i>
Iftaal,
"to take".
g.
.
when
Ifteal,
it
follows
becomes^/,
f>
.Pret.
and
Pres.,
from
Iftaal,
igdamar (for igtamar}, rt-*y*cr/ gamdru "to complete" ;

Pres.
*4-f
ft"
*p
ugdaâr
(for
ugtaMar),
from ga$dru, "to
strengthen".
(c)
when
it
follows m^ or n
Ifteal,
it
may
become^/,
e.
g. imdahis (for
;
'
_. 171
J J
~wJt^
A
imtahis),
Pret.
from mahasu, "to smite"

Iftaal,
e.
umdaUir
"^^
(for umtdStir),
"he
let loose",
it
Pret.
from [8aMr].
(d)
when
it
follows ^
may
become^/,
g. ikterib (for ikterib},
/>
*f
Ifteal, Pret.
from
kardbu, "to approach".

is
VII.
sibilant
which immediately precedes a dental

to
/,
frequently
(for
,
changed
rapaStu)
;
e.
g. "rapsu,
"broad",
Ishtafal,
fern,
sing, rapaltu
elu,
uUeli (for jiMelt),
Pret. from
"to be
the
Pret.
^^
jf-.^rrf
high".
Similarly,
when two
/,
sibilants
e.
come
together,
former frequently becomes
g. ilsi (for
ztoz'),
Kal,
from
Sasu
"to
//,
speak".
The combination
ss
4
s,
e.
instead
g.
of
changing
to
sometimes becomes
or
issapar,
isapra (for iUapar, iltapra}, Ifteal, Pret.
from Xapdru, "to send".
VIII. In
place of doubling a consonant,

after thg^.preceding vowel,
e.
m
g.
or_g_js__sQJiielirnes
added
inamdin for inaddin
inddin (see below,
VERBS), Kal, Pres. from.
ittananmar
for
ittanammar
ittandmar (see
see".
below, VERBS),
Ittanafal, Pres.
from amaru, "to
XLVIII
INTRODUCTION
PRONOUNS.
Personal
The personal pronouns

Sing.
^
i.
to express the
I.
nominative are:
rilnu,
pronouns
to
express
andku
at/a
Plur.
amnu, amni,
attunu
nini
the nominative.
2m.
2
c
f.
2 m.
ath
3m.
3
f.
$u
m. Sunu, Sun
f.
h'na
The
following examples illustrate their use
"may
thy servant live";
^^X
iluNin
-
bi a-na-ku
f^yy
art
^ ^
;
Sum-ma, "I spoke as follows";
thou-
^JTT s^T Î< Ey
ib
tu-ra-du
^y HP ^T
-ti-id,
//-fl na-an-na-raname(e),
"thou
^
/-&,
;
Ninib, a hero
^Hf- -Tf
a/-
art the light of
heaven"; Êf
^yy^
;
u as for him, he fled"
<*-
um-ma, "she (Ishtar)
informs thee thus"
^Î,
stand"
;
a-m-ni m-U-la-ka, "we are going"; Ê ?rf~^ ^ n *~*~d* nt-t-m, "we do not under-
^^
K^
-^ ^
,
^^HfÊÎ!
I
^^HP 5^H Hfl

;
T Jl^JE, at-tu-nu kakkabani sar-hu-tum, "ye mighty stars" >^*u - nu bi- nu - ut a-ra-al-K f Jif *-> ^X ^T T^ E^TT
su-nu, "as for
them, the offspring of Hades are they"

par-sa-a-tum Si-na, "lies are they".
to express
Personal
The personal pronouns

tiye are
pronouns
to express
the genitive and accusa-
the geni-
Sing.
I.
idti,
taSt
Plur.
I.
Matt, nidsi
tvc
accusatve.
,,
m.
.
katu, kaSu, kasa

kali,
m. katunu, kdtunu
2 f
3
ka$i
,,
m.
f.
$d$u
m. MSunu,
T>
PRONOUNS
XLIX
The
following examples illustrate their use:
^y- ^
unto me"
"thee
I
;
t]} y{
;
-|<,
&-*/-*
/rt-fl-//,
"Hearken (O goddess)
^^J ]} ^ ^Mf ^TTT ^tJ

}} *~*~]
^--^
<J>-
ap-kid-ka,
have commanded"
^J^f J^
JgJ E^t:
may
I
^fcyf^ *", 0-0

there be peace"
carried off
;
ka-a-$i lu-u $ul-mu t
"unto thee (O queen)

to-a-j^ ^-/w-/a,
I
"
;
^ ^ ^
]}
;
|^
g= ^fj ^J,
>-<,
"him
^^T
"us";
^-a-fa ^-^/, "her
ST Ê^ w-J<,
a-Xu-nu, "like
lu-ni,
ni-ia-ti,
<JEJ Ej
you" J^J ^J^ "them did they bring".
-^H ]] \ ^ ^^ JglJ JÎ, Xa-a-Xu-un
captured"
ki-ma kaub-
The pronominal
.
suffixes attached to nouns are:

2,
Pronominal sutfixes at-
i.
a,ia
Plur.
i.
ni
m. ka
f.
m.
^,
Sina,
kun
tached to
nouns.
2
3
3
tf
$u, $
$a, $
,,
m.
f.
3m.
3 f.
Sunu (rarely Sunuti)
$m
:
The

f7/-w,
-*f- SrEjf
J^,
/>/
"my god";
^,
fe/*-w,
"my
lord"
^-
^
;
mali-a, "in
my
land"
| J^ ^JJJ,
ma-a-ri,
;
"my
son"
<2S
>-^y,
^TTT
^tT,
zik-ru-ka,
"thy name"
<|î ^b ppJJ
an-ni-ki,
di-pa-ra-ka,
"thy torch"; >->^- gyT Î^f>

aS-ri-$u,
"thy
2W ~
;
mercy"; g^' ^JIJ Ê|,
"its
place"
^^J|
A^ L
?
;wr-^, "his body"; ^J>- gj

?yy
^g^J ^^|,
blood"
;
h'-ma-tu-u$, "his destiny"

;
<
^J|,
da-mi-*a, "her
be-ili-ni,
^^
;
^,
ia-&, "her
eyes"; >-X ^yy~ JÎ,
"our light"
^ ^yy
"our lord" >^JfHf J^ ^yy~ nu-ur-a-ni,
>-<y<
JEy i^-
hi-ta-ti-ku-nu,
"your sins"
\ +J-,
Ey
^TTT Jgf t:|^, ma-ru-ku-un, "your son"

;
^^
^f
bu-
Xa-Xu-nu, "their property"
heart"
^H ^g^TJ <y^
,
^jy ^^y
^^^J,
^^,
lib-ba-3u-un, "their
ka-li-si-na,. "all
of them"
-/a-A, "their boundary".
INTRODUCTION
The pronominal
Sing.
i.
suffixes attached to verbs are

t'nni,
anm\
ni
Plur.
,,
i.
annaSi kunu$i
kina&i
2 2
3
m.
f.
ka, akka
ki,
2m.
2 f
3
.
akki
$,
,,
m.
Su,
Si,
,,
m. sunu, sunuti
ftna,
3 f.
X,
,,
3 f.
:
Sinati
The
?T>
li-bi-ban-ni,
"may he
purify
me"
^
eat"
;
-&z-&-/a-*-/', "they made me ^>3^y KTX ^ JÎ, id-din-u-ni, "they gave to me"
;
>-t^J,
cried
to
as-hur-ka, "I
have turned to thee"

;
J^
pJJ
/--^, "I have
u-ba-'-ak-ki,
a-da-nak-ka, "I shall give to thee"
^J<J
1
thee"
^JJlt
;
^J A^ ^
+j- \,
u-$e-ri-ba-a$,
"I
have sought thee"
^>3^J ^J^^
id-di-nu-su,
"they gave
him" ^]]]^
;
^jyy^
^ ^^J ^ T^
^^,
"I placed
>-]]\
^^J ^,
j,
"he brought him in"; u-h-frba-a$-$u, "he made him sit";

"let
;
lik-kil-me-ti,
it
him look upon her";
^5y
.^./i?, "i fined

i-kar-ra-ban-na-ti,
(f.)-
EE *}}} E^
;
"he blessed us"
fc|
^JJ
;
<T<
at-ta-din-ku-nu-M, "I
have handed you over"
^= Ty
a$-ku-na-$u-nu,
ku-mi-$u-nu-ti,
>~<y^,
'Reflexive
/
upon them"; "burn them" >-^y ^z

;
^=
^^^ ^: J ^^yy ^
Assyrian but
is
la tap-pa-li-$i-na-a-ti,
"do not answer them".

exist in
The
pressed
reflexive
pronoun does not

suffixes
ex-
un
'l
by the substantive ramami "self"
in
combination with
to
\the pronominal
which
are
attached
nouns,
,
e.
g.
\E^y
Demon-
E! tpP Tf ra-ma-m-a, "myself";

;
E^ff tf
:
tjfl ra-ma-
nu-uS, "himself"
E^TT El ^Fh I */"
ra-ma-ni-su-nu, "themselves".
The demonstrative pronouns

m.
f.
are
Sing.,
Zuatu, Sdtu
Siati
PRONOUNS
Plur.,
LI Demonstrative
m. hiatunu, Sdtunu
f.
Xuafina, Satina
:
pronouns.
For these the following forms are sometimes used

Sing. m. $u
Plur.
;
f.
Si
Zuniiti
f.
m.
Sunu,
h'/id/i,
Sinatina
The
^1! JT
y^ >-Êy
place
$i~a-/i,
I
following examples illustrate their use " that cit alu ht ~ a - /u y" ; !if
^T'
1
>
ÎIT^
^T*"~
;
^ ^S
;
^ ^TI V
"that
a *~ ra *a ~ a ~ tu u-pi-hi-ir, j
strengthened"
"in that
>4^
^J>^ || ^^J^,
$a//i-ma
same year"
>-^y
"those kings"; "those
"those districts"; i^-, na-gi-i su-a-tu-nu,

,
sarraniP 1 hi-a-tu-nu,
?
VV
;
mdtati?
hi-a-ti-na,
?
lands"
^
^y
T{
(b)
E^f
^
Ê,
^^
ekallum(lum)
^y
h'-f,
^//j// U-ti-na, "those palaces";

;
S^yy^, paraMu
Su-u, "that shrine"
"that palace";
>^-,
mu-ra-ni $u-u, "those

1
young
lions"
sdbeP su-nu-ti, "those people"; ~<y<,
~<y<,
babani si-na-a-ti,
"those
gates"
^y^- >~^y -<y<
^^y,
zr-r/-//
si-na-U-na, "those curses".
<,
"this"
Sing.,
m. annu (Nom.)
f.
anni (Gen.)
;
anna (Ace.)
;
anriitu
(Nom.)
anriiti
(Gen.)
anmta (Ace.)
Plur.,
,,
m.
f.
anniiti
annati
:
The
\, Siptu an-nu-u, "this incantation"

?
>
^y
*"EÎ
ina u ~ mi <-ni-i, "at this
time"
had done this"
^ ^^yy ^
;
^H ^>-
J,
/-/
-KT~
4^\
e-/ap-pu-$u, "after
>^HF~
/-/, "this letter"

/ an-ni-ti,
^y^^yy -f^<
;
"because of this dream"
d*
LII
>
*
INTRODUCTION
y*~ ^p\
an-ni-ta ina $e-me-'$a,
"when
1
she heard this";

;
+j- |
*~*^~
y^r
^~
*~<y^>
salmani? an-nu-ti, "these images"

>~<y<,
y^
>~<y<
^^-
^y ]}
;
a-ma-a-H an~na-a-ti, "these
things".
(c)
ullu,
"that"
ulli
Sing, ullu (Nom.)

Plur. ulluti
(Gen.)
The
^
<i-a
[Ely ^yyy^,
,
udmu
/-/-, "that race"
a-fcul-K-e,
"on that side";
"those buildings".
(d)
0,
"this"
is
The form
used for
all
numbers, genders and cases
the following forms also occur:

Sing.,
Plur.,
f.
agdta
m. agannutu
f.
aganeti
The
^y
following examples illustrate their use:

y^
^
V
^yyy^
y^,
u- mu a-ga -a, "this
day"
*
;
y^^yyy^y^
}}
u inakak-kara-ga-a, on this ground";
ÎTT^
y^f
T^ fe^TTT'
ir-^~ tim
"'ga-a-ta,
"this earth"
^yy^ >^- ^y, ^yy^ S^ ^^

pronoun
is
:
^-<5z' a-ga-nu-te,
,
"these words"
matatia-ga-ni-e-tu, "these lands".
The
rela-
The
Sa
relative
dve pr noun.
"who, which"
relative
is
The
and
pronoun
all
sa
is
always
written
or
used for
relative sa
numbers, genders and cases. When the has the force of a genitive and would be trans-
lated in English
by "whose", the substantive in the relative

suffix,
e.
clause takes the corresponding pronominal
g.
NOUNS
LI 1 1
ha-ru ka-bal-hi,
"whose (m.) onslaught
is
unequalled"
*~Ej
"a
TI
Ey, Sarru rabu $a
ilu
Bel u
tltl
Nabu ir-a-mu
and Nabu
pa-la-a-$u,
mighty
king
whose
reign
Bel
love"
>~<
;
be-el-tum
$a par-su-$a
Su-tu-ru,
"a
lady
whose
command
is
";t:TTTE!^JI
u-ta-ad-dn-u ni-ba-Su-un,
"his troops
whose number
is
not to
be known". Similarly,
when
Sa has the force of
an accusative
or dative, the governing verb in the relative clause generally

takes the
pronominal
suffix,
while a preposition invariably
does
ÊT,
so,
jfa
,.,.xp
hattu
tTtM VET ^T f ET ^T t^TTT

T
ellitu(tii}
na-ad-na-ta-su,
"to
whom
his
is
given a
shining sceptre"
$a ilu-$u itti-$u zm-u-u, "(a
man) with
^\ -J|^ ^whom
god
is
;
tJITt,
angry".
NOUNS.
In Assyrian, as in
r
Hebrew and
the other Semitic dialects, roots Roots.
or stem-w ords consist of two, three

triliteral roots,
and four consonants
of these,
or roots of three consonants are by far the most
common.
are
meaning or idea from which formed both the verb and the noun (substantive and adroot contains in itself a
;
jective)
the root in fact
may
be compared to a skeleton, which
when
clothed with different vowels and sometimes with addigives expression

to
tional consonants
the various nominal and
verbal forms of
its
inherent meaning or idea.
The
triliteral
root
NMR,
for instance, contains the inherent idea of brightness or be-
ing bright, and forms the skeleton or base of the verb namdru
"to be bright", of the adjective namru "bright", and of the substantives namirtu
and namurtu "brightness".
LIV
INTRODUCTION
the student's
is
In examining an Assyrian word, therefore,
first
duty
is
to
identify the root
from which
it
derived.
In the
case of nouns he will find
little
difficulty in
doing
this after
he
has grasped the principal forms which they assume. These

be briefly described under the following five divisions:
I.
may
ManyjQouas
the
first
afe-
formed merely by the internal addition
of vowels to the root. As the nouns SQ_Jbrmed begin with

letter of the root
and do not contain other cone.
sonants, their roots are easily^ recognised,

_f
g.
Saknu
zikru
"governor", from sakdnu "to
set,
appoint".
"name",
"peace",
,,
zakaru
"to name".
Zulmu
Salamu "to be complete,
prosperous".
nakaru "hostile",
nakdru "to be different,

hostile".
zaktpu
lubutu
"post",
zakapu "to set up, erect".

labatu to
"garment",
in
"to cloth oneself".

internal
itu,
Many nouns
also
p.
+
addition
their
a/u,
vowels take
the feminine terminations

f.),
e.
or tu (see below,
LVI
g.
nisirtu
"treasure", from nasdru "to watch, guard",
f
II.
puluhtu "fear",
paldhu "to fear".

third
letter of the root
In
is
some nouns the second or the

doubled,
e.
g.
dictionaries
In
most Assyrian
the
words are arranged
as far
as
possible
under their respective roots and not necessarily according to the consonants or vowels with which they happen to begin. As Assyrian possesses no alphabet it is impossible to cite in cuneiform a root composed only of consonants. A
common
roots,
expedient therefore
the
is
to
use Hebrew characters
in
citing
Assyrian
as
Hebrew alphabet
contains
consonants which correspond to the
in
consonantal sounds in Assyrian (see above p. XXVI). As however the consonants themselves are incapable of being pronounced the Infinitive of the verb is
frequently cited as the root. characters as the root

"IDS,
Thus
or (2)
the root
in
NMR may
as
be cited (i)
in
Hebrew
in
transliteration
namaru.
Here and
the Vocabulary the latter plan has been adopted.
NOUNS
"to bewitch". kaUapu "magician", from \ka*apu\
pilakku
III.
Nominal
forms.
"axe",
[paldku] "to strike, slay".
Some nouns
of the
are formed by the addition of prefixes.
The
than those roots of these nouns are less easy to identify nouns in sections I and II, as they do not begin
with the
first
letter of the root.
The
prefix
may
take the
form of
(a)
a vowel, e.g.,
*W
kardbu "to bless, "prayer", horn
to
(b)
pay homage to".

(or
,
when
g.
the root contains_a labial,
/.
c.
b^jii
orj>),
e.
matkanu "place",
mdlaku
from sakanu "to

alaku
[eXiru]
set".
"way",
"righteousness",
"to go". "to be straight".
miUru
4
narkabtu "chariot",
rakabu "to ride".
naramu "love",
napharu "totality",
(c)
$,
e.
ramu
"to love".
pahdru "to collect".
g.
Uhluktu "destruction", from haldku "to be deSurbii
Ttroyed";
(d)
/,
e.
rabu "to be great". "great", from

;
tamharu "fight", from maharu "to oppose" Tdmhu "sighing", from [andhu\ "to sigh".
g.
IV. In a few
root,
e.
nouns
is
inserted after the
first
letter of the
g.
gitmdlu "perfect",
ritpa&u
from gamalu "to complete".

rapaSu
"wide",
are
"to be wide". terminations,
V.
Some nouns
provided with
special
of
which the principal are

(a)
the termination dnu,

karabu "to pay
e.
g.
kurbdnu "offering",
from
homage
,
to".
termination (b) the

"to be behind"
;
e.
g. arku "future",
from
\ardku~\
mahru "former", from maharu "to
oppose, to
be opposite".
LVI
(c)
INTRODUCTION
the termination utu,
by which abstracts are formed

e.
from a few concrete nouns,
g. belutu "lordship",
from
belu
"lord"
iliilu
"divinity",
from
ilu
"god"
sarrutu "royalty",
from Sarru "king".

first
few nouns, derived from stems the

1
radical of
which
is
weak, have dropped the initial vowel and begin with the second from abalu "to bring"; lidu and littu radical, e.g.
&22U"tribute",
"child", from alddu "to bear"
;
simtu
"adornment", from asamu "to
be adorned"
Assyrian
majority
subtu "dwelling",
from aSdbu "to dwell".
possesses
two genders masculine and feminine. The
of substantives are either masculine or feminine, but
some
of
are of
common
gender.
The feminine
is
of adjectives and
some masculine substantives

form
formed by the addition of

the nominal stem,
e.
atu or of the shortened
tu to
g.
Sarru
"king",
Sarratu
"queen".
malku "prince", malkatu "princess".

ardu
kalbu
"slave",
ardatu
kalbatu
"handmaid".
"bitch".
"dog",
"son",
mdru
bukru
mdrtu
"daughter".
(f.),
"first-born" (m.), bukurtu "first-born"
rubu
"great",
fern. rubalu.
dannu "strong",
nakru
"hostile",
dannatu.
nakirtu.
gamru "whole", damku "favourable",

kabtu
gamirtu.
damiktu.
kabittu.
"heavy",
"broad",
"green",
raptu
arku
rapa^tu.
aruktu.
i.
The
stems, from which these nouns are derived, begin in other Semitic
1 ;
languages with the consonant
this
consonant
(see
is
only represented in the corp.
responding Assyrian words by
vowel
above,
XX VII
f.).
NOUNS
*-
LVII
tdbtu.
riiktu.
tabu
rukii
"good",
"distant",
e^ the
e.
fem.
,,
After a preceding
aiu,
^pr
t,
a in the
feminine termination
generally becomes
.
g.
ellitu.
ellu
"bright", fem.
(LXJu
sihritu
4..
sihru "small",
and
sihirtu.
zinu
"angry",
,,
zimtu.
fimriitu.
riminu, rimnu "merciful", fem.

*-
elu
"high", fem.
elitu.
Some
ceded by
adjectives
/
form
g.
their
feminine in
ilu
though not pre-
or
e,
e.
rabu
"great",
fem. rabilu.
naditu.
daritu.
7t*A-^-
--
A>^>^*-^
nadu "fallen",
~ ddril "lasting",
x\
few adjectives form their feminine
in utu,
e.
g.
Zurbu "great", fem. Surbutu.
Uku "high",
Xakulu.
is
The
plural of
nouns
in Assyrian
formed by the addition The

Substantives in
'"'
Plural
of various terminations to the nominal stem.

the plural take the following terminations:
(a)
e,
e.
stantives.
g.
Samu
"heaven", plur. same.

"water",
"prince",
,,
mu
s malku
me.
malke.
m'Se.
e
^
N. B.
nitufi "people",
The
this
interchange of the vowels
and
i al-
ready referred to (see above p.
XXVI)
e.
is
especially fre-
quent in
malku
form of the plural,

yy~|
g. the plural of
may
ilu
be written
KiH
ildni.
ma ^~^
tnat
Eff= <|>-, m-ti.

(b)
dm,
e.
g.
"god",
plur.
hursu "mountain",
ardu
"slave",
hur^dni.
arddni.
LVIII
NTRODUCTION
body which occur
(c) a,
especially the plural of parts of the

in pairs,
e.
g.
inu
"eye",
plur. ind.
/
/
(d)
dti,
uznu "ear",
idu
uzna.
idd.
"side",
the plural of substantives with
the
feminine termi-
nation in the singular; should the preceding syllable

contain
an
or
e,
the
e, e.
d
g.
of the
plural
termination
generally becomes
^
^
,
Sarralu
kibratu
"queen", plur.
"region",
"sea",
,,
Sarrdti.
kibrdti.
tdmtu
beltu
tdmdti.
beleti.
j
Some
though
"lady",
substantives
form
their
plural
in
dti
or
tti
in the singular they are

e.
without the feminine
termination,
g.
ndru
"river",
plur. ndrdti.
kandli.
kanu
ff-f-f-r-r
-
"reed",
kudurru "boundary",
kudurreti.
Many
substantives have
$a-di-e
(i.
e.
^ \|-P ^y{
(i.
e.
more jhan jane form of >>> sade\ and tff^ |
plural,
e.
g.
^
;
**
saddni ?
(/'),
ir~ ri ~ e
occur as plurals__of_^7^, ^mQuntain"

girre),
^yy^
*~
]\
(*
1 *~\i
>
and ^flk ^TII
^"1^
KÎ^
gir-n-e-ti
girreti)
occur
as plurals of girru, "expedition".
The masculine
the termination
plural^pf_adjectives_
//,
is
formed^ by means of
dti,
the feminine plural by the termination

eti
which generally becomes

adjective
after a
preceding
/'
or
e,
e.
g,
masc. plur.
fern. plur.
damku "favourable",
rabu
damkuti,
rabuti,
damkdti.
rabdti.
"great",
gasru
_
ellu
"strong",
"bright",
"distant
gasruti,
elluti,
gatrdti.
elleti.
ruku
rukuti,
rukdti
and
ruketi.
NOUNS
LIX
it
The
refers,
adjective
e.
generally follows the substantive to which

EJfflf
?
Position
1
g.
fcjjgS
E|*- y
Sarru
r*
dan-nu,
?',
"mighty
great
king";^
gods"
;
*-*y~
?//
ra$w//
"the
^1
^TT
the
3!L^
is
-J<,
tt-me ru-ku-ti,
"distant days".
it
When
placed
-
special
emphasis
to
be
e.
laid
g.
upon
the adjective
r
is
before
1
substantive,
fc^f
*~^fe=]
4^**-fl
^^|
"V %r?yy>
da-li-ih-tu mat-su,
"his disordered land".
Substantives and adjectives in the singular end in one of the Casethree vowels
as
u,
i
and
a,
which
as a general rule
may
be regarded
Cl
marking the nominative, the genitive and the accusative case respectively, e. g. ^] ^JEf ^]] Ê ^JH, ^-mu-ki si-i-ru,
^
;
"thy name
is
exalted"
;
>~<
<^^~
5^^ ^< ^Jl^,

Ê
>-^\\
^-lit ia-ha-zi,
"lady of battle"
"a
cry
Jl^ >-+i\
To
this
*>-
^,
ku-la i-kab-bu-u,
they
utter".
rule,
however,
exceptions
con-
stantly occur, the case endings being often

ately,
e.
employed indiscrimin-
g,
^yyy
^y <jEy
;
"may thy
mination
heart have rest"
^ ^]]
The
teris
nu-u-ru id im-ma-ru,
i
"the light they do not behold".
in
substantives in the
nominative or accusative
first
frequently not the case-ending but the suffix of the

singular,
e.
person
light
g.
^- *~^\
nu-ri lim-mir, tf>- Ejjfcj,
"may my
shine"
<y>-
^^ ^:]}
JtJ
^^yy >^y<,
si-mi-e tas-li-ti,
"hear
my prayer". To substantives and

form
nij
adjectives the particle ma, or
its
shortened Mimation.
is
frequently appended.
Whatever may have been the

as
it
original so
far
use
of this
nftmation,
its
is
termed,
it
has
been
weakened that
the
omission
ojr_iiiseniQ.n
it
in
no
way
alters
its
meajiing of a word,
or
indefinite
nor does
e.
affect in
definite
signification,
g. *~<
^Tf*
be-lu,
any way and
^<
^^
^^,
be~lum,
both
mean "a lord"
$ur-bu-tum,
-E^y, beltu sur-bu-tu, and *g both mean "a mighty lady" or "the mighty lady"
or
"the
lord";
^
beltu
*>-
^^,
LX
INTRODUCTION
J/-/HW,
both
a
mean "on
earth" or "on the earth".

itself,
it
When
it
noun stands by
is
said to be in the
is
absoit,
lute state.
is
When
a substantive in the genitive
joined to
said to be in the construct state.
In consequence of the
close connection of
two nouns
is
so
joined they are pronounced
together
first
and there
tendency to lighten and shorten the
of the two.
A noun
in the construct state, therefore, (i.) geif it

is
nerally drops the mimation, and,
a singular
noun
in the
nominative or accusative,
ing
(in
it
also generally drops the case
end
some words
short
dropped
reappears,
(2.)
if
out before the case-ending

e.
vowel of the stem has already and this in the construct

in the construct
g.
zikru,
is
"name",
in
becomes
the
i
zikir)
the
noun
the
;
genitive,
(3.) in
dti,
however,
of the
genitive does not disappear
the case of a plural noun

uti
the plural terminations am,

tively an,
at,
it
eti
and
may become
respec-
and
:
ut.
The
following examples will illustrate
the above rules
fcz=^
;
AE^
Ef
]}
^1^
nap-har ma-a-ti, "the
whole of the land"

"sun-rise"
;
^]] gg^y HP"
*| <J^,
bu-kur
ilu
&#
ilu
$amh{
^JJ^ E^<
;
V \ E^f,
>-^f- y^
zi-kir mati-su-un,
"the
name
first-
of their land"
^*:
A^-
4^\^
A-nim, "the
born of
Ann"
V
J
>
,
Ê
^] ]} **-]{,
his
^ laf
i-la-a-tt,
"goddess
zik-ri
of goddesses"; f} *~*~]
su-mi-sa, "at the
*~->^-
^<^T >-]]\ ^]
name"
;
mention of
^^ f ^f
J,
a-na
t\ JEJ ^^|<
"with the
f J>-
t-na tukulti(ti] ildniP 1 rabiitiP 1 ,
help of the great gods";
na-at nu-uh-$e, "years of plenty".
casionally broken,
e.
g.
-<
^^^ ^ ^ ^ ^^
These
rules,
AHfflf
*a ~
however, are oc-
y{
>-]]\
r
<Hlf^
be-lum a-ba-ri u dun-ni, "lord of Syy~,
pow er
and might".
it
When
two substantives
are
in
apposition
is
not essential
that they should agree in number, a substantive in the singular
frequently standing in apposition to one in the plural,
e.
g.
*"v^y
royal
S=yy
ÊjflT^^-y^ alamP
bit
Urru-ti,
"cities,
ADVERBS
dwellings"
(Y.
e.
LXI
rule applies to parti-
"royal cities").
The same
cipial expressions sition
which_ma^be
in the singular
e.
thoughjn appo-
to substantives in_lhe plnraJ,

>-Jl
g.
Êjjf^
u the
Jw--
|^
^Vj
>-^TT
before
t
(i.
J^, $armnijâ-lik mah-ri-ia,

e.
kings,
who went
me"
"my
predecessors").
ADVERBS.
The
following
are
the
principal
adverbs
in
Assyrian
the
examples appended
hi' am
illustrate their use:
"so, thus",
am
^JEJ J^ parseP'-Xa, "so are her

g.
e.
^^
^^"f" J->- ^,
-
ki-a- Adverbs of manner.
commands";
ia-mu$ Sarru ki-a-am

ia
J
i-kab-bi,
"thus saith Darius the king".

e.
umma
^ >^
ma-a,
ilu
"thus, as follows",
introducing direct speech,
g.
^J ^J ^JTT fff ^T If "news they brought me as follows"
ti-e-mu ut-te-ru-ni
;
E-JTT
I$tar u-sab-ru-u-û u-$a-an-na-a ia-a-ti um-ma, "a vision
of the night IStar caused

(it)
him
to see,
(and)
he related
to
e.
me
as follows".
adu "now",
}} j|]t a-du-u u-mu-us-su *"E|

g.
5
^|
^ ^ ^-JJ ^|| ^6=

u-sal-lq,
Adverbs
time
'
"now
daily do
pray".
uma "now",
e.
g.
^
"now
to
is
mdt-su ni-ha-at,
eninna
his land at rest".

e.
"now" (opposed
"formerly"),
g.
^\
am * lu
.
tf-/-tf
to
ia-a-ti
mar-$ipri-Xu
for
$a sul-me iS-pu-ram-ma,
"now
me
his
messenger
greeting he sent".
matima
"whensoever,
e.
at
any time"; with negative, "never",
matema
g.
^<< ^
ma ~
LXII
INTRODUCTION
ti-ma ina ah-rat n-me,
"whensoever
in future
days"
-ET
"who had
fathers".
^TT *~
EtTT,
la
my
fe-e-ma a-na sarrani? 1 abeP l-ia amslu mar-sipri-$u
i$-pu-ra,
never sent his messenger to the kings,
uiverbs.
a-na-ku-ma mi-i-nu a-kab-bi,

w/w'
}
"how
shall
speak?".
ana
mem
"why?",
e.
g.
}}
ammen
a-na me -i-ni
il-la-ak,
"why
is
he going?"
^,
kakkadi-ia,
am-me-ni ta-at-bal
ago,
raba(a]
$a
"why
?".
e.
hast thou taken
away
*" X
the mighty
crown
for
my
head
adi mati
"how long ?",

long?".
e.
g.
^ ^t^r^TI^ m: n:{a)
Ej
J^
a ~^1 ma-ti,
"how
Fhe nega./a jvc, and

S C
"not",
g.
^
a na
.
Î
"
^T
good";
Sf ^TTI
1
^!f
to
fa, nu ,$u
w ho
had not submitted
my
!rohibi-
yoke"
ion -
tabiitiP 1 ,
/
-/^///,
"sorceries that are not

"I
t
e.
have not eaten".

is
la
in
prohibitions
followed, by the Present,
g.
-//,
"thou shalt not hearken to them".

of prohibition
is
J^K)t",
particjg
followed
'
bv the
Preterite,
si-pat-ki ai ik-ri-ba,
"may
I
thy incantation not approach"
* ET- -EÎT ^T<

ai ar-h', "a foe
e
may
If If not possess".
is
e.
<MTZ <K
^]]^
>-e<*M-'
"not", particle of_rjrohibition,

sing,
employed with the 2nd

g.
pers.
of
the
Preterite,
ADVERBS
>:[
LXIII
e
tf] 4^,
ana mar-$i
la-at-hi,
"to the sick
man
id verb
do not draw near".

lu "verily",
is
sing,
sometimes placed before verbs (3rd pers. masc. and plur., and i st pers. sing, and plur., of the
;
of
mphasis;
(recall ve
Preterite)
it
was no doubt,
in use
originally
it
emphasize the verb, but
employed to has been so weakdoes

not
affect
ncj co hor-
uive P ar ~
clcs.
ened
the
that
its
.e.
insertion
g.
or
omission
sense,
^KJ y\*
e/c.)
JETf JfcJ, al-lik, IH U al-Ukj both mean "I went". simply

fcCj
~
and
^JU^ When
the verb begins with the vowel

lu
it
(as in the Piel, Iftaal,
e-
YY
8I
may combine with it to form a single word, fclY^Jr tY / TfcrYT Y xx AYTT IS] H~ fc>rj!l] *E| *T~ %J' ', 4-*ar-htr*u
lu-ma$-$e-ru (for
umaSh'ru), "their place they deserted".

is
as a precative particle
terite
employed with the Preexpress

a
and the Permansive
to
wish (see be-
low, VERBS).
i
"come!", cohortative
particle,
e.
is
employed with the

fr"
ist pers.
plur. of the Preterite,

t
g.
tÊ
^ ^C\\
let
W S=
El'
ni-pu-us
$a-a$-ma,
"Gome!
us
join
battle!";
al-ka-mm-ma
m'-rid-ma
hr nmi
an-ni-e
ni-ku-la
ni-nu,
"come!
ox
e
i
let
us go
down, and of the
flesh of this
wild
let
us also eat!".
is
"up!", cohortative particle,

sing, of the Imperative,
e
e.
employed with the 2nd
pers.
7
g. t^J^r
^JH
to the
:
^J ^^y{}|
wood!".
rid ana
kitti,
"Up! go down
The
ma,
following adverbs are appended enclitically

for
Adverbs
appenc
appended
/7
emphasis to pronouns, nouns, verbs and ad-
verbs, e.g. Ez^J
J .^^f- ^J, SamaS, "thou art like the Sun-god"

|
;
^JJI
<^
at-ta-ma kima
ally.
>^
;
<J>-
|Y
^1^
ina satti-ma Si-a-ti, "in that
same year"
^TTT^
LXIV
ma
Sarrani P l
"ultu
INTRODUCTION
Hat-ti, "I
gathered together the kings of
the land of Hatti".

;//',
appended
for
emphasis to verbs, especially in relative clauses,
yj
^ ^$1
my
as
mi-i-nu $a a-ma-ru-ni $a
a-Sam-mu-m
ina pa-an
$arri beli-ia a-kab-bi,
"as
shall see
and hear, before the
king
u,
lord
will repeat".
e.
appended
an interrogative particle,
uznd ^,
^.
g.
^]J$-
>-gy ^^P >-^J

wilt thou
uP
-ia
tu-pat-tu-u,
?"
;
J> "my
J
^
ears
open
ilu
(Y.
inform me)
4$?\
a-na-ku-u mar-ti
B'el,
"am
is
not the daughter of Bel?"
The
cndin
ad-
The
verbial
CT
adverbial ending YYY J J yy j

,
i$
(or eS)
of very
i
common
TT
**Y
"*,
.
occurrence,
//
.
^~*\i
t
T*
"
y
/^
Q
;
^/-//?,
"below"
is
^-
ma ''~^ "much". This

e.
adverbial termination
,
frequently employed for comparison,

"like a
g.
"like a bird";
,
>-ET
^<<
t^?
XaI~la-ti-X, "as booty";
da-bu-u-e$, "like a
hog".
Such forms
as
ti-$am-ma, "yearly",
y~ *^yy][ ^yyy^, verbs ending in iS
^^yfj ^^ ^-UT^
ar-hi-$am, "monthly",
da-ri-sam, "for ever",

t
may
be explained as ad-
their terminations being strengthened
by ma
or m.
PREPOSITIONS.
Preposi-
The
following are the principal prepositions in Assyrian, to-
gether with their ideograms and the forms they most
commonly
assume when written phonetically:

ina "in". Ideogr. *
;
written phonetically
^ *~>
i' na ">
rare ty
^SS
in
ana "to". Ideogr. y
written phonetically y
PREPOSITIONS
iUu
ultu
I
LXV
"from". Ideogr.
^
:J^
^^,
//-//.
Preposi-
#-/; <{*>-^=y,
ul-tu.
////"with". Ideogr.
^JEJ
;
E^J *^J<,
*//"on, upon". Ideogr.

<?-///
^~r^lj
*/*,
^^^=J|,
ina or
aa
"upon, concerning, against".

Ideogr.
sir
"on,
upon, against".
ff^^y
written
phonetically
muhhi
in
combination with
phonetically
//m or ana.
Ideogr.
^~^J*J
written
^-^^[
to,
^^, muh-hi ;
ina or ana muhhi, "on,
concerning,
against".
adi"up
to, to,
together with". Ideogr.
^JJ
gddu "up
to, to,
together with". Written phonetically
^yj|^ J^J,
ga-du.
arki
"after,
behind".
Ideogr.
^JE^
written
phonetically
balu "without".
Written phonetically
^rj
JETf, ^fl-/,
^^J
^^
/t/
"like, as"
"like". Ideogr.
K^JJ
g=
to,
"concerning, with a view

tically
^w/
kirib
because of". Written phoneJ, af-f,
g=
\,
ÊJ,
>-
>- ^:5^, flMww.

ku-um.
ina kirib,
"instead of". Written phonetically

"in, within".
kirbi,
JEJ^]jy,
5
Written phonetically ^JEJ ^JJ^

;
ma
"in"
ana
kirib,
ana
kirbi,
"to"
iUu
kirib,
ultu kirib,
"from, from out of".

libbi "in,
within". Ideogr. ^JIJ

"in"
;
written
//^/,
//
^Jjy
libbi,
^,
/i3-î ;
ina
libbi,
a0 libbi,
"to";
;
?'.?/
"from, from out of.
pani "before". Ideogr. ^J>- written phonetically ina pan, iUu pan, lapan, "before".
^z
EÎ, pa-ni;
LXVI
Preposi-
INTRODUCTION
mahar "before". Written phonetically

har "before"
;
^
^
;
Êr* ma-har ;
ina
ma-
ana mahri, adi matin, "into the presence of".

:<*<
&z&z/ "in the midst of". Ideogr.
^J
ka-bal ; ina kabal, "in the midst of". fr-j^-J^,
kabalti"'m the midst
of. Written
ka-bal-ti; ina kabaUi, >-<|<,

birit
<*<"]r *^|<, kabal-ti, *^J "in the midst of".

bi-rit;
^J^
"be-
"between". Written ^~< ^TT,

tween, within".
ina
birit,
ina
birti,
ina biri
"between".
Written
{-
*
bi- e - ri-
*"TTI
ina
^~ n
>
Ê ^^!
^<
ana
tarsi
-Tf ^TTI
na
"against". Written |^ ^"^j
^r
^-ETT'
a ~ na tar~^-
ina tarsi "opposite, into the presence of;
in the
time of". Written
titu
tarsi
"from, since".
far-si.
Written
put "opposite".
^S~
ina put, ^J, pu-ut ;
"opposite".
CONJUNCTIONS.
Conjunc-
The
following are the principal conjunctions in Assyrian
u "and", the copula most frequently used in connecting both

sentences and nouns
;
written
KjÔJ
an d ^.
first
ma "and", the copula between two

it
verbs, to the
of which
it
is
appended
if
it
verb enclitically_j__lhe-,
is^
to
which
is
appended,
without^ a
suffix,
usually takes the
additional vowel a (see_below, p.
LXXVI).
'
enuma
z>m
"wnen "when",
^[
I
pjf Y~ ^-^T ^JTT, e-nu-ma

,
e.
g.
R= W
'
>E|
M F M F
I
d$-ru $u-u u-$al-ba-ru,
"when
that
inum
place shall have
inuma
^|J^ ^>manded"
y,
;
^,
grown old"; pp" j^^^f~ ^Jl<^| ilu Marduk ik-bu-u, "when Marduk com-
^yy~ ^filu
i-nu-um
*^\ Marduk
^HF~ ^c^<î
id-di-na,
Ea^y
^y^f1
gave".
"when Marduk
CONJUNCTIONS
ki
\
LXVII
"as,
when",
e.
g.
>-f
V^
*
ki-t
ak-bu-u,
and
had
Conjunctions '
ki $a
f
-'
Vs&* a-na
ilu
*-*-,
u as
ASSur am-nu-ru, "as
to ASSur
had
prayed"
;<JEJ t E
Cfi^-ffSpff
JHPT
"when thou
^T
shalt
Ej ^TTI
^"^ ^^"" war^ *u ~ a ~ tu tam-ma-ri,
see that inscription".
"as-,
a-^/-/ &Z t-/i-'-u,
<//
"as he wishes".
till,
"while, so long as
until",
e.
g.
^
/r/w
Z>a-$u-u,
"while
heaven and earth exist"

al-la-ku,
"until
..
go".
snce,
//
(
^.
ib-na-an-m, "since he created
me"
^^|-
^gJ
^yy
/, "since
fa "after", ,
,
completed the palace".
* t
<IJ
^
^ man
J^
^J
"after
I
ar-ki $a a-na Sarri a-tu-ru,
became king".
$um-ma a-me-lum ar-da
i-gu-ur-ma im-tu-ut, "if a
hires a slave
and he dies"
ÊT
Sum-ma
gate!'.
-ET
tfTTKVtHTTn --TTf^.
"if
la ta-pat-ta-a ba-a-bu,
thou dost not open the
aSXu Sa
"because",
e.
g.
^ ^-^ ^JTT,
times aSSu
is
^\ ^
a^-^
fo a-wa/
]}
ilu
V
AHur
e.
^HP
A
-W
my
^T
"be-
la is-su-ru,
cause he had not kept the
command
fa,
of ASSur".
SomeTf
used without
g.
feE^ -<T< tEj^

$arru-ti-ia la is-su-ru,
-ET
is
^T
^S în,
itself in
^=
a-mat
royal
"because he had not kept
command"
rarely $a
used by
the sense of
LXVIII
Conjunctions -
INTRODUCTION
"because",
is-su-ru,
e.
g.
^J|
^J
ii
t]
"^
ii
^TTT,
$a
la
"because he had not kept".
~nr
y
J^f,
-*H E-PII
;
u<
EI EI
"a bitter
na-ka-ra a-ha-a lu
ma-ma
sa-na-a,
foe
or
any other man"
i-pa-ar-ri-ku,
"who
shall hinder or display force against".

lu
is
often
combined with
in the sense of "or",
e.
g.
m
tablet".
lu ... lu ...
lu ...
\
î -HI
"whoof
$u-me Sa/-ra i-pa-$i-tu u lu na-ri-ia u-sa-a?n-sa-ku,

ever blots out the record
my name
or conceals
my
"either ... or
a
.,
whether ... or
"neither
. . .
."
with
. .
...
/
J
following
negative,
nor
.",
/."../...
e.g.
JgJ<
t^l
i
IJ<
t^- !,/
în
^ Wfl
maru-û lu-u martu-$u, "either his son or his daughter";
<
â ^
-u
<
/w ' w
ram-m'-$u
utdru(ru} u
u-hal-la-ku,
ma
minima
ab)Ul
$i-pir limuttim(tim^
nara su-a-tu
or
;
"whether he appropriates
evil
(a royal gift),
through
m<
^n~
I
any
device
destroys
this
monument"
*i
*
XIV
1
K AN lu-u umu
the
XV
KAN
itti
ilu
Samti
Id
innamir(ir),
"when
moon
neither
on the i4th day nor on the
5th day has been seen with the sun".
VERBS.
Under the heading NOUNS
syrian consist of two,
it
was remarked
that roots in As-
three
and four consonants. These roots
VERBS
are not in
LXIX
are
themselves words
but
the
skeletons
of words.
Each root or skeleton contains some inherent idea which can

be traced throughout the various words in which
it
is
found,
the words being formed by clothing the root with vowels and
sometimes with additional consonants.

been given of the principal ways
in
Examples have already which nouns are formed

the addition of other
from
roots.
It
will
now
The
be seen
how by
vowels and
consonants to the root the various
meanings of the
tri-
verb are obtained.

literal,
/'.
majority of verbs in Assyrian are
e.,-
they have three consonants in the root.

the Preterite, the Tenses of
verb>
The
Assyrian verb possesses five tenses:
the Present, the Imperative, the Participle, the Permansive and the
Infinitive. Past action
is
expressed by the Preterite, present and
future action by the Present, while the Permansjve expresses a
root
Taking as an example for conjugation the which conveys the inherent idea of "conquering", the KD, forms which these tenses assume in the Kal or simple stem of
state or condition.
the verb will be seen from the following paradigm.
Paradigm of the simple stem of the regular verb.
Paradigm
of the Kal
LXX
The
vowels of
j
INTRODUCTION
paradigm the vowel u occurs of the Preterite and in the first and second
It
will be seen that in the above
n tne seconcj syllable
rite,
Pre-
syllables of the Imperative,
and the vowel a

is
in the
second and
sent and
third syllables of the Present. This

ity
the case with the majorits
of Assyrian
verbs
the
rule
with
exceptions
may
be
stated as follows:
(i.)
Most verbs have the vowel u

the Preterite and in the
first
in
the
second, syllable of
syllables of the
and second
in
Imperative,
and the vowel a

e.
the
second and third
syllables of the Present,
g. Zaparu, "to send", Pret. tipur,
Imper. supur,
in the
Pres. isapar;
a few verbs
Pret.,
e.
however, with u
second syllable of the

syllable of the
Pres.
ilabir',
have_/ or u in the
lt
third
Pres
g. labaru,
tQ__gfow old",
Pret. ilbur,
ibalut.
h&latu,
"to live",
PreL/a/,
Pres.
(2.)
Some
the
verbs have the vowel

in
i in
the second syllable of

syllables
Preterite,
the
first
and second
of the
e.
Imperative, and
in the third syllable of the Present,
g.
pakadu, "to care for,

pikid,
(3.)
inspect, entrust", Pret. ipkid,
Imper.
Pres. ipakid.
in
few verbs have a
the second syllable of the Presyllables of the Imperative

e.
terite, in the first
and second
and
in the
second and third syllables of the Present,

isbat,
g.
sabatu,
Inflection
"to seize", Pret.
Imper. sabat, Pres. isabat.
In the above
jg
paradigm
it
will also be observed that the person^
to express
the person.
ex p resse d by certain additions which are either prefixed or af-
fixed to the
stem
in the Preterite
and Present they

thus the syllable
plural
are prefixed, in
the Permansive they are affixed. These additions are significant

parts of the personal
in
pronoun
ta
is
prefixed
the second person singular and
of the
are
first
Present and
in
Preterite
and the
syllables
is
ta,
ti
and tunn
affixed
the
Permansive; the syllable a
prefixed in the
person singular
affixed in the
of the Preterite and Present and the syllable ku
is
VERBS
first
-LXXI
person
singular of the Permansive;

first
prefixed in the
and the syllable ni is person plural of the Present and Preterite

of the Permansive.
It
and
is
affixed in the first person plural
may
further be noted that the second person feminine singular

Preterite,
of the
Present
and
Imperative ends in *;
that the
third person masculine plural of the Preterite, Present and Per-
mansive and the second person masculine plural of the Preand Imperative end in w; and that the third terite, Present
person feminine plural of the Preterite, Present and Permansive and the second person feminine plural of the Preterite, Present
and Imperative end in a. In the paradigm syllables which are sometimes added or omitted are placed within parentheses. An
accent
is
placed on the second syllable of the Present to indi-
cate that in pronunciation the tone falls
upon
fr
i
<
this syllable;
in
writing, the accenting of this syllable
\*
*q T nt1y indififrd
p.
the
doubling
of the
fyowinp
radical
r
e.
ikAXad
ika&ad.
Sometimes the ^liable ni andy more
rarely, the syllable
nu are affixed to the third masculine plural of the Preterite and

Present, while the
syllable ni
is
sometimes affixed to the third
masculine plural of the Permansive and to the third feminine

plural of the Preterite
Participle
and Present. The

fern, plural
fern,
singular
of the
and
its
masc. and
are similar to those of

A-
the adjective (se$/ above pp.
LVI
ff.).
The verb
possesses ten principal
stems or
voices to
which the Stems
of
following names are assigned:
Kal
Piel
Ifteal
Iftaneal
Iftaal
Shafel
Nifal
Ishtafal
Ittafal
Ittanafal
The names
of the stems have been adopted from those given
to the verb in other Semitic languages.

is
Thus
the simple
stem
termed Kal from the Hebrew adjective kal (bp) "light", a term which the Jewish grammarians applied to the simple stem
LXXII
in
INTRODUCTION
to
Hebrew
distinguish
it
from the stems weighted with

;
for-
mative additions, which they termed "heavy"
the
other
nine
stems take their names from the paradigm of the verb "to do",
in
Arabic faala (jjw), in Hebrew paal
(7J?S).
The
that
signification
and formation of the stems of the verb may

It
be briefly described as follows.
should
be
noted,
however,
as
while
the
significations
here
indicated
hold
good
general rule,
special
the stems of a verb

;
have sometimes acquired a
meaning
thus lamddu,
"to learn", in the Piel signifies

fly,
"to teach"; abatu, "to destroy", in the Nifal signifies "to
to
escape"; naplusu, the Nifal of the verb
[pa/asu~\
which does not
occur in the Kal, has not a passive meaning but signifies "to
look upon, to behold".
The
significations of the stems,
how-
ever, given below, cover the majority of verbs as the student
may
see for himself
by reference
to the
Vocabulary
at the
end
of the book.
The Kal
is
the simple form of the verb.
Its
formation has
been already described.
The
Piel
has
an
intensive
signification
and
is
formed by
doubling the middle consonant of the root.
The Shafel The
has a causative signification

s.
and
is
formed by
prefixing the consonant
Nifal has a passive signification and
is
formed by pre-
fixing the consonant n.
From
The
these four stems are formed four
more by
the insertion
of a // they are
Ifteal,
which generally
is
not to be distinguished in mean-
ing from the Kal.
The
Iftaal,
Piel,
which sometimes has the same meaning and sometimes serves as its passive. which sometimes has the same meaning
its
as
the
The
Ishtafal,
as the
Shafel and sometimes serves as
passive.
VERBS
LXXIII
like
The
Ittafal
(/.
e.
Intafaf)
which
the Nifal
has a
passive
signification.
By
the further insertion of an n in the Ifteal and Ittafal are
formed two more stems which are
The The
Iftaneal,
which has an active

e.
(/'.
signification.
Ittanafal
Intanafat),
which has sometimes
a passive,
sometimes an active
signification.
From
and
the
Iftaal
and
Ishtafal
were
also
formed an Iftanaal
an Ishtanafal but these forms are of rare occurrence and

here be disregarded. 1
may
The
Ittafal
and
Ittanafal
stand re-
spectively for Intafal
tely followed by a consonant,
and Intanafal; n however, when immediais frequently assimilated, and the

/
assimilation of the n to the following

these
takes place throughout
two stems of the verb

following
is
(see the rule stated above, p. LXVI).
The
kaXadu
is
the scheme of the regular verb.
The
verb Scheme
selected as a convenient
model
It
for displaying the
forms
j
which the stems of the verb assume.

that all these forms
should be noted however
do not occur
in the inscriptions in the case
of any one verb. In the Preterite, Present, and Permansive the
3rd
pers.
masc. sing,
is
given,
in the Imperative the
2nd
pers.
masc. sing.
The
tenses are inflected in the other stems as in the

If-
Kal, the initial u in the Pret. and Pres. of the Piel, Shafel,
taal
and
In
Ishtafal being retained in those tenses.
i.
the sake of brevity,

Kal,
most Assyrian grammars and dictionaries the stems of the verb, for are cited by means of Roman and Arabic numerals. The
the Shafel and the Nifal are cited as
I r,
the Piel,
Hi,
IIIi,
I 2
,
and IV
II 2,
i,
re-
spectively; the Ifteal, the Iftaal, the Ishtafal and the Ittafal as
III 2
and
IV 2 respectively; the Iftaneal, the Iftanaal, the Ishtanafal and the Ittanafal as while the symbols employed for the Piel3, II 3, III 3 and IV 3 respectively
;
Shafel and the Piel-Ishtafal (see below)
are
III
HI and IIin 2
respectively.
This
system of abbreviation has the advantage of indicating the relations of the stems to one another but for the sake of simplicity it has not been adopted
here or in the Vocabularv at the end of the book.
LXXIV
Scheme
Stem
INTRODUCTION
of the R<
VERBS
signification, e.g.
LXXV
t\, pa-kid,
;
"he inspects";
/a-6fr,
na-Su-u', '"they carry";

AW-///;/,
^fj ÊlÊ,
"he
is
old";
<|-,
"he
is
safe"
^ ^"ITT Êf'
kat-ma-ku
has
a
S<*b-ta-at,
"it (f.)
was cap-
tured";
^-JJJ Ej JEJ,
*7^~
"I
am overwhelmed";
TnjJTg_Pjpl
signification,
.^hafnl
e.
;<//
*E=TT *~?f
$a-ak-nu, "they are placed".
^P"
g. ''/*
and
Nifal
the
Permansive
,
passive
nti-uk-ku-mu,
/--</,
i
"they were heaped

has been brought
"I
up";
"who
down";
na-al-bu-$a-ku,
am
clothed".
is
The
Precative, the tense for expressing a wish,

particle
lu
formed by The
Pre '
means of the
in
combination with the Preterite or

always precedes the verb, and,
the Permansive.
The
particle lu
when
the
first
it
syllable of the Preterite begins
with a vowel,
lu
unites with
(i)
and they form a single word.

first
Thus
the u of lu
uniting with the
rally
I
becomes
e.
g. lu unites
vowel of the ist person sing., genewith akSud to form luk$ud, "may
first
conquer";
it
(2)
uniting with the

/,
vowel of the 3rd
pers.
sing.,
liksud,
generally becomes
e.
g. lu unites
it
with tkSud to form
"may he conquer", with

lessen";
it
usahhir
unites to form HsahhtrJ

first
"may he
form
(3)
uniting with the

/,
vowel of the 3rd

with iK&udu to
unites to form
pers. plur.,
likhidu,
becomes u or
e.
g.
lu
unites
it
"may
they conquer", with upattiru

it
lipattiru,
"may
they release", with uâbbiru
unites to form lusab-
diru,
It
"may
they break in pieces".

Effect of
has been already remarked that the accenting of the second
syllable of the Pres. Kal frequently gives rise to the doubling of
lhe accenl *
the second radical,
e.
g. ikdSad is written tkaXSad.
In the
scheme of
the Regular Verb syllables that are similarly accented in pronunciation

(e.
g.
the syllable
ta in
the Ifteal and the syllable na in the
If-
taneal) are also
marked with an accent;

second radical
is
in these verbal forms, as

e.
in the Present, the
often doubled,
g. *~]\
***?
ik-tar-ra-bu.
"they blessed", 3
m.
pi. Pret. Ifteal
from
LXXVI
karabu;
INTRODUCTION
A^^fflf ^TTT
s.
^Mf ^T fcTTT
from
habatu.
fy-ta-nab-ba-ta,
"he
plundered", 3 m.
Additional
Pret. Iftaneal
In in
the Preterite,
Present,
andPermansive
in
all
forms ending
consonant
vowels.
vowels
^
u,
*/
^
s.
may
take
a
addition one of the three short

clause a final a
*'&
i,
or
a.
In
e.
principal
is
of most
" ne con-
g. *~\\ Ê| ^?II? Kal from kasddu g= JEff Êj, as-lu-la, "I carried off", i s. Pret. Kal from fo/a/ ^P ^<, /*>fa-ha, "let him be appeased", 3 m. s. Prec. Kal from paXahu.
>
frequent
occurrence,
~$u
â
quered", 3 m.
Pret.
J^
first
The vowel
which
îj
is
also ^generally
added
to the
e.
of two verbs
are joined
bv the copula ma,

is-ba-ta,
g.
JZ^TJ
E^
t^^
Ej
3
>-^| ^^111) i^-pur-am-ma

s.
"he sent and grasped",

clausej^_a_Jinal
to the verb,
e.
m.
Pret.
Kal from saparu.
In
relative
vowel
g.
3
^f
s.
I
Pret. Kal.
*~^\ ^y, from

set
fa
is-ba-tu,
saJbalu\
"who
(3
m.
s.)
had grasped",
m.
^f
I
JEJ
;
fa as-ku-nu, >^-,
"which
had
^
up",
i s.
Pret.
Kal from fakdnu

speak",
lit-buû
t
^
s.
J^
E^< ^t? ^HL

Kal from mkaru
clothed",
3
;
a-zak-ka-ru,
"which
Êy,
Pres.
is
^yi
Perm.
4^_ ^SIfteal
"who
m.
s.
from
labaSu.
Verbs in subordinate sentences (except

take a final vowel, generally
;
conditional
clauses)
also
see
the examples to the conjunctions, pp.

\greement 3 ver an
subject.
LXVI
ff.
As
genc
j
a
er>
rule the
verb
agrees with
its
subject in
is
number and
yhe 3rd
3rd
fern,
masc. sine., however,

e.
often used loosely
for the
sing.,
ilu
g.
t^TT Hî*^Ffy>
goddess
iStar inclined
little
War
is
^JvT w-g--^
-TIT^-^
^T
(3
-T^
s.),
m.
"the
her ear".
Some
practice
required before the student will re-
cognise with ease, in the syllabic writing of the Assyrians, the

various forms of the verb which have hitherto been
transliteration only.
given in
as
In order to
familiarize
him with verbs
they were written by the Assyrians, a
number of parsed examples
VERBS
are here given in
LXXVII
be found to illustrate
cuneiform
these will
the paradigms
and
f,
rules already given.

rt-kun,
"he set"
m.
s.
Pret. Kal.
s.
from Sakdnu. Examples

tl
i/i-kiJ,
"he has entrusted": 3 m.
Pret. Kal. h. pakadu.

Pret. Kal.
s.
ah,
"he was afraid":
m.
s.
fr.
paldhu.
of
Re-
gular Verb.
tak-tum,
fr.
"thou hast covered": 2 m.
Pret.
Kal
katdmu.
*7^~>
I^f
ta$-ku-nu,
"thou didst set":
m.
s.
Pret.
Kal
fr.
sakanu.
yip[,
.?-,
"I
"I set":
s.
Pret.
Kal
fr.
Sakdnu.
kardbu.
f|f, ak-rib,
drew near":
s.
Pret.
Kal
fr.
V^ ^JTTi i*-pu-ru,
^Êy
fr.
"they sent": 3 m.
pi. Pret,
pi.
Kal
fr.
Sapdru.
submitted": 3 m. Êy, ik-nu-Su, "they
Pret.
Kal
fr.
kandhi.
>^yy,
iM-</a, "they
(f.)
conquered": 3
f.
pi. Pret.
Kal
kaSadu.
J^yj JfETJ ^y> //-^-/-/, "let him live": 3 m.
s.
Prec.
Kal
fr.
baldtu.
lu-u$-pur, "let
me
send":
i s.
Prec. Kal
fr.
Sapdru.
JEy
"let i^-, H$-ku-nu,
them
set": 3
m.
pi. Prec.
Kal
s.
fr.
Zakdnu.
H&'
fr.
*-
na -8a ~ a8> "he bellows": 3 m.
Pres.
Kal
nagdgu.
^y
^yj, /--/-//,
i-zak-kar,
"he gazes":
m.
s.
Pres.
Kal
fr.
natdlu.
E>rX
Y^r
^yy^f,
"he speaks"
m.
s.
Pres.
Kal
3
fr.
zakdru.
s.
^Hf~ *"^~y *7^~? Kal fr. zandnu.

-,
i-za-an-na-nu,
"he sends rain":
m.
Pres.
ta-pat-tar,
"thou dost release": 2 m.
s.
Pres.
Kal
fr.
patdru.
~<y^, ta-sa-ba-ti,
"thou dost grasp": 2
f.
s.
Pres.
Kal
fr.
sabdtu.
LXXVIII
Examples
illustrating
INTRODUCTION
E**oRF
,
>~
a-mah-ha-as, "I will smite"
s.
Pres.
Kal
r
ir.
the forms
mahdsu.
of the Re-
^
,
^,
i-na-at-ta-la ,
"they
(f.)
gaze":
f.
pi.
gularVerb.
ku-Su-udj "conquer": 2
,
m.
s.
Imp. Kal
s.
fr.
katddu.
fr.
E^V^T
tu-bu-uk,"pour out": 2 m.
"spare": 2 m.
s.
s.
Imp. Kal
fr.
tabaku.
j? gi-mil,
<,
Imp. Kal
fr.
gamdlu.
sa-bat,
"grasp": 2 m.
sa-pi-nu,
Imp. Kal
:
sabdtu.
s.
^
i
>^-,
"overcoming"
m.
(f.)
Part.
Kal
:
fr.
sapdnu.
st.
f.
>^yyj Jyyy
s.
Êj?
Kal
fr.
pa-ri-sa-at,
"who
decrees"
constr.
Part.
pardsu.
is
^y
>
^îfc,
/a-&r, "it
old": 3 m.
:
s.
Perm. Kal
s.
fr.
labdru.
fr.
^y ft,
lft(
tarn-hat,
"she
is
holding"
f.
Perm. Kal
:
tamdhu,
|^
Kal
y^
fr.
^yyy,
hdtdhii.
ha-a$-ha-a-ta,
"thou desirest"
m.
s.
Perm.
^ f^ ^yy Êy,
fr.
sa-am-da-ku,
"I
am yoked"
:
s.
Perm. Kal
samddu.
rab-su,
Ê^y^ ^JÊfe
^yy^ Êy,
"they crouch"
m.
pi.
Perm. Kal
fr.
rabdsu.
labdsu.
f.
lab-hi,
"they are clothed": 3 m.

(f.,
i.
pi.
Perm. Kal
fr.
^-]^[ Ej>
pi.
fczyyy^:
-
kat-ma, "they
fr.
e.
lips)
are pressed together": 3
Perm. Kal
<^<
,
katdmu.
u-rak-Ms, "I
made
fast":
i s.
Pret. Piel
fr.
rakdsu.
^yy^
^yyy^
^ ^^^ ^tT>
fr.
-
w-^-^-/r,
"I
lessened":
s.
Pret.
Piel
seheru.
][T>-y,
u-hal-Kk, "I destroyed":

u-na-a^-li-ku,
s.
Pret. Piel
fr.
haldku.
pi.
^yyy^ >-ry
Pret. Piel
^ <y- tÎ^, ^>-^yyy ^ ^,

fr.
"they kissed": 3 m.
naXaku.
U-sa-ah-hi-ir, "let
him
lessen": 3
m.
s.
Prec. Piel
fr.
seheru.
t
^yy, tu-$al-lam "thou causest to prosper":

Pres. Piel
fr.
m.
s,
Saldmu.
VERBS
TTTET, n-lja-am-ma-tu, "they light
.
LXXIX
up": 3 m. Examples
illustratin
Piel pi. Pres.

]<<<y *^~'
fr.
^~~^ hamatu.
life
the form|
s.
4*~~
but-lit,
"give
;////.?-.?/>-,
to": 2 m.
2
Imp. Piel
s.
fr.
balatu.
fr.
of the Re
gularVerl
"
"abandon":
m.
Imp. Piel
[maSaru].
^
fr.
| ^JJTEJ, nu-nm-mir,
"make
bright": 2 m.
s.
Imp. Piel
namdru.
mu-dal-li-bu, "afflicting":
Î '"E^TT ^'
fr.
m.
s.
Part. Piel
dalabu.
II
^^^ffl
*^y|
m.
s.
*-]\ ^ffl
fr.
su-uh-hu-ru,
"it is
turned": 3 m.
s.
Perm. Piel
jti 3
saharu.
^^ ^ E5iJ'
Pret. Shafel
fr.
w-^-^-^-^. "he caused to take":
sdbatu.
I'.
y^:
t=yyy^
^yy,
u-Um-kit, "I caused to fall",

fr.
^.
"I overthrew":
i s.
Pret. Shafel
makdtu.
y^
3
^ ^\\^ r?T
m.
,
*liT
u -ê '^- m''^ u

fr.
>
" the
y caused to submit"
pi. Pret. Shafel
kana&u. 2
$uk-m,
"make ready":
m.
s.
Imp. Shafel
fr.
\kalalu].
^>-
"to abase": Inf. Shafel ][Eiy, tu-ut-pu-lu,
fr.
Sapalu.
s.
^
Nifal
Nifal
>-<y< *-J][^, /3-3a!-//-^,

fr.
"he was destroyed":
m.
Pret.
fo/a.
it
K*-*a-kin, "let
be set": 3 m.
"let
it
s.
Prec. Nifal
fr.
Sakanu.
s.
yyf
fr.
lip-pa-fir,
be torn away": 3 m.
Prec.
patdru.
is
^<, is-sa-bat, "he
held fast": 3 m.
s.
Pres. Nifal
i
fr.
sabatu.
fr.
"I accomplished": yyy îfc, a$-ta-kan,
s.
Pret. Ifteal
Sakdnu.
^^
Sabdru.
Sff ^-^-^-^ "he broke":

{ P' tal - la
m.
s.
Pret. Ifteal
fr.
ffI
-ET Hfl
-^
" the
fe ared":
m.
pi.
Pret.
Ifteal fr. paldhu.
I< JEiy, M-ku-lu, "they are equal": 3 m.

teal
fr.
pi.
Perm.
If-
Sakdlu.
LXXX
Examples
illustrating
INTRODUCTION
>-j
l\P
the forms
of the Re-
^ E^V^T *|
Iftaa l
_
s.
>->-xr
Iftaftl
fr>
r^^
uk-tam-mi-is, "I
*^|
up-tar-ri-ra,
"it
was broken"
m.
s.
Pret.
\^ ^[,
fr>
was bowed down":
s.
Pret.
gularVerb.
kamasu.
^,
Prec. Iftaal
>*^r
lik-tam-me-ra, "let
fr.
it
be
made
plentiful": 3
m.
\kamdru].
us-tar-ki-ba,
^JEJ ^>^y
3
"he slung on"

fr.
(lit.
"caused to
ride"):
m.
s.
Pret. Ishtafal
rakabu.
:
t^S^ H7I
^^-T' u *-ta $-ri-fa> "he brought near"

fr.
m.
s.
Pret. Ishtafal
karabu.
^yyy *^*M
3
C^<
*"^y ^-^-^-^-^,
fr.
"they caused to take":
m.
pi. Pret. Ishtafal
sabatu.
s.
fiK
*^^ X^ HM'
fr.
mu *- ta k- mi-to, "flaming": m.
Part.
Ishtafal
hamdtu.
yy
fils"
:
^gy ^y,
it-ta-at-bak t
mus-tak-u-ia-at,
fr.
"who
(f.)
fui-
constr.
st. f. s.
Part. Ishtafal
"it
[kaldlu~\.
:
\\,
was poured out"

" h e sent":
m.
s.
Pret. Ittafal
fr.
tabaku.
fc^TTT fc^Mf
Pret. Iftaneal
^ P^TT
fr.
*$-to-p-P*->
m.
s.
Zapdru.
ti-ta-na-ka-an,
^yyy ^"y
s.
^yf ^Hf-i
fr.
"he makes"
m.
Pres. Iftaneal
Sakdnu.
at-ta-na-as-har, "I turn":
i s.
S^y
^yy >~^y ^^L 4^^

Ittanafal
fr.
Pres.
sahdru.
We
have hitherto considered those verbs which contain three

i.
strong radicals,
e.
verbs in which the three consonants that com-
pose the root appear in every verbal form.
When
the beginner
with the help of the explanations appended has mastered the
two paradigms on pp. LXIX and

the
list
LXXIV
and has worked through
of examples just given he will be in a position to parse
correctly a majority of the verbs he will

transliterated
meet with
in the texts
It
and translated
in the
reading book.
himself at
would be
with the
well for
him
therefore not to trouble
first
VERBS "weak verbs"

/'.
LXXXI
e.
verbs in which certain consonants of the root
undergo phonetic changes, or in which one or more letters of Weak verbs the root are represented by vowels in Assyrian though by consonants in other Semitic languages.
familiarized
'
When
he has thoroughly
himself with the forms of the strong verb he will
find little difficulty in recognizing the

classes of
same forms
in the various
weak
verbs.
it
Before proceeding to the consideration of the weak verbs

will
be necessary to explain,
as briefly
as possible,
the terms
which are usually employed

of brevity,
root",
for their classification.

is
For the sake

letter
when
reference
made
to
"the
first
of the Explanatlon of
"the middle letter of the root" and "the third letter of

the feminines of the Latin adjectives primus "first",
terms.
the root",
medius "middle",
and
tertius
"third" are employed, the feminine
substantive
littera
"letter"
being in each case understood.
For
example, the
is
first
letter of the root of the verb nadanu "to give"

first
radical of
(Hebrew 3); instead of describing this as "a verb the which is N", it may be more shortly described
J".
as a
verb "primae
In the verb Salalu "to plunder" the consonant
L
it
occurs as the third as well as the middle letter of the root;
may
thus be briefly described as a verb "mediae geminatae\

letter
i.
e.
verb with the middle
of
its
root
doubled, from the
Latin geminatus "doubled".

In
many words only two consonants appear

in
in the root
in
Assyrian although
other
Semitic languages the same roots
contain three consonants. This arises from the fact that certain
consonantal sounds^Jor which characters exist in other Semitic

languages,
were not represented in the Assyrian syllabary.

(see
It
has already been explained

Assyrians
above,
p.
XXVII
the
H,
f.)
that
the
had
by
no
the
signs
for
distinguishing
X,
seven sounds
FT
represented
J7
Hebrew consonants
T
(Arabic E),
(Arabic
f.
and
and
*;
and
number of examples were
given in
Hebrew and Arabic
of roots containing these consonants
LXXXII
Importance of
classifying
INTRODUCTION
were simply represented by vowels. Although
.
which
.
in Assyrian
these consonants do not occur in Assyrian their original existence

in
weak
verbs.
many
roots has left
its
traces
on the vowels;
for these will

t
be found to vary to some extent according to the consonants
which the root originally contained. Moreover,

least
as Assyrian
is
the
known
of the principal Semitic languages, a great deal of

its
our knowledge of the meanings of
roots has been obtained

roots
in
by
comparing
them with the corresponding

it
other
Semitic languages. For these two reasons
will be obvious that
although Assyrian did not
distinguish
the
seven consonantal
sounds referred to above, some system for distinguishing roots
which originally contained them would be of service for purposes of comparison. To meet this end the following system has been
invented on
the Continent
and
is
now
generally
adopted
in
books published there. For the convenience of the student

will need to consult fuller
who
works on Assyrian, a
brief description
of
it
is
here appended.
letter K,
The Hebrew
System of breathing,
classificais
which
as a
consonant simply marks the
taken as a general symbol for the seven consonantal
sounc j s
^ ^
^ ^ ^
p
.,
and
ancj fa esQ are distin-
guished from one another by a small index figure placed beneath

the K.
as
is
Thus K
,
is
cited as
>
K I? n K7
a
.
as
K2 H
,
(c) as
K3 p
,
(fc)
as
K4
J?
()
K5
as
K6
and
as
The
verb akdlu "to eat" (Hebr. b3X)

;
thus referred to as a verb "primae Rj"

is
<z/ott
tfrfl?f
"to go" (Hebr. "to be

<?3^r
Tnn)
referred
is
to
as
verb "primae K 2 ";
new"
r^w
(Hebr.
(Hebr.
ttf^fl)
referred to as a verb "primae

is
K3
"
;
"to cross"
i< 4 ";
*"G;P,
Arab. ^4*)
D*T5J,
referred to as a verb "primae

vljji)
is
"to enter" (Hebr.
Arab,
referred to as a verb "/>nt.
maeRg";
aladu "to bear" (Hebr. *b*,
e.
^y\)
is
referred to as
is
a verb "primae
K 6 "; and
eneku "to suck" (Hebr. plP)
referred
to as a verb "primae
K 7 ". K 2 ",
Similarly verbs containing these con-
sonants
as
their
middle radicals
etc.,
may
be referred to as verbs
in
"mediae Nj", "mediae
and verbs
which the third
letter
VERBS
of the root
Jirmae".
is
LXXXIII
to as verbs "tertiae in-
"weak" may be
referred
Of
the
weak verbs
cited
below the
J,
first
two
classes,
i.
e.
verbs
I
mediae geminatae
and verbs primae
contain in the root three con-
"
**
*
ti/i
sonants,
certain
of which undergo phonetic
changes
the
re-
maining
classes contain
examples of verbs in the roots of which

been referred to in
the Semitic
consonants occur which have
the preceding paragraph:

I.
Verbs mediae geminatae (verbs in which

third letters of the root
the second
and Examples
are the
same) are in the

In a
main
of weak
verbs,
conjugated like the regular verb.

a contraction of the second
few verbal forms

letters of the root
3.
and third
takes place,
e.
Perm. Kal
II.
M
3
g.
Mdlu
(root
hh&)
"to plunder",
m.
s.,
(for Mil).
Verbs primae
is
(verbs in which the
first letter
of the root
n) are in the
main conjugated
like the regular verb.

p.
In
accordance with the rule stated on
LXVI, the
is
n,
when immediately
assimilated
sdru
(rt.
;
followed by a consonant,
frequently
Kal the n disappears, e. g. na-(^ "to protect", Kal Pret. issur Im*13) (for insur),
in the Imper.
per/ usur.
III.
Of
verbs primae
is
tfj.
(verbs in
which the
first
letter
(rt.
of the
root
K),
the following are
examples: akalu
ikkal,
S^Kj)
akil,
"to eat", Kal Pret. ikul, Pres.

Ifteal
Imper. akul, Part,
Pret.
itakal',
ahdzu
(rt.
tn^) "to hold", Kal
Pret,
ihuz, Pres. ihhaz, Piel Pret. u'ahhiz, uhhiz, Pres. uhhaz,
Shafel
Pret. utdhiz, Pres. uXaftaz
amdru
(rt.
n^K x )
"to see", Kal
Pret. emur, imur, Pres. immar, Imper. aniur, Nifal Pret. innamir,
Inf.
ndmuru.
IV.
Of
verbs primae
is
X2
(verbs in
which the
first letter
is
of the
aldku
root
(rt.
H) the only one of frequent occurrence

"to go", Kal Pret.
illik,
*[SK 2 )
Pres.
illak,
Ifteal Pret.
LXXXIV
Pres.
ittalak,
INTRODUCTION
Iftaneal Pret.
and Pres.
ittanalak,
Shafel
p
V. Verbs primae
root
is
K3
e.
(verbs
c)
:
in
f
which the
first
letter
of the
H,
i-
are
rare occurrence;
3)
the follow-
ing are examples

edti,
edesu (rt. ttPTK
"to be new", Kal Pret.^7

Inf. uddujfu;
i&tf, Piel
Piel
3)
Pret.
uddt'X,
Part, muddts,
dSaSu
(rt.
WK
VI.
"to be sorrowful", Kal Pret.
Perm.
flfc.
Of
verbs primae S 4 (verbs in which the

is
first letter
<?$<?r
of the
root
p,
z'.
_)
the following are examples:

ebir, ibir,
(rt.
""Q^)
"to pass over", Kal Pret.

teal Pret. f/ifrr,
Pres.
ibbir,
Imper.
;
ebir, If(rt.
Shafel Pret.
usebir,
ezib,
Pres. uSebar
izib,
s<?
DTK 4 ) "to leave", Kal Pret.

Pret. u$ezib, Imper. $uzi&,
Sezib,
Pres.
izzib,
Shafel
Inf.
$uzubu\ emedu
(rt.
1bK 4 )
"to stand", Kal Pret.

t
emt'd, Ifteal Pret. //^w^, Piel Pret. urn-
mid Nifal Pret. innimid.

VII.
Of
verbs primae
is 5?,
/.
S5
(verbs in
which the
first
letter
of the
root
(rt.
D1K 5 )
most frequent occurrence is erebu ) "to enter", Kal Pret. erub, zrub, Pres. irrw3, Ife.
that of
V
*
teal Pret. z'/rw3,
Shafel Pret.
userib,
Imper.
Surib,
Ishtafal
Pret. uWerib.
VIII.
Of
verbs primae K 6 (verbs in which the

is
first letter
of the
Dttftf 6 )
root
1) the following are
examples:
aSdbu
(rt.
"to dwell", Kal Pret. u&b, Pres. u&ab,
Ifteal Pret. titu&b,

-v ;
ittatib,
Pres. z'//^3,
(rt.
Shafel Pret. uMib, Ishtafal Pret. uSte&b

urid,
;
aradu
T1K 6 )
"to go down", Kal Pret.
Pres. urrad,
(rt.
Imper.
rid,
Shafel Pret. uSerid, Perm. Surud

ubil,
^5/
^DX 6 )
If-
"to bring", Kal Pret.

teal
ubla,
Pres. ubbal, Imper. ^7,

uSebil,
Pret.
ittubil,
Shafel Pret. uUbil,

ultebil,
Imper.
^3/7,
Ishtafal Pret. uUabil,
usibil
IX.
Of
verbs primae
is
*)
K7
(verbs in
is
which the
first letter
of the
root
(rt.
the following
of frequent occurrence: [eSeru]

isir,
"IW 7 )
"to be straight, right", Kal Pret.
Shafel
VERBS
Pret. uSeh'r, Imper. SuSir,
Inf. Jfo/flforw.
LXXXV
$u$ur,
Perm.
Ishtafal Pret. uMe&r, Examples

of
*
Kx
(verbs
in
weak
verbs.
X.
Of
verbs mediae
is
which the middle

:
letter
of
the root
(rt.
K) the following are examples
ma'adu, mddu
IKj
to)
"to be many", Kal Pret. im'id, imid, Pres. ima'id\
Sa'alu (rt.
b*^)
K2
"ask", Pret.
it'al,
Imper.
Xa'al,
Ifteal Pret.
Ma'al, Piel
Pres. uSa'al.
XI. Verbs moftztf
(verbs in
which the middle
letter
of the
dis-
root
is
H)
are of rare occurrence
and may here be
regarded.
XII.
Of
verbs mediae
is fl,
*'.
K3
e.
(verbs
in
which the middle
letter
of
is
the root
e) that of
most frequent occurrence
rdmu
(rt.
DK 3 *l)
"to love", Kal Pret. tram, trim, Pres. tram,
Imper. rim, Part, rd'imu.

XIII.
Of
verbs mediae
is J?,
i.
K4
e.
(verbs in
,)
which the middle
letter of
:
the root
(rt.
the following are examples

ibel,
belu
^K 4 3)
"to rule", Kal Pret.

ire$,
ipil;
[retu] (rt.
^K 4 "l)
"to rejoice", Pret.
tn$,
Ifteal
Pret.
irtis.
XIV. Verbs mediae ^ 5 (verbs in which the middle letter of the root is p, i. e. g.) are of rare occurrence and may here be
disregarded.
XV. Of
verbs mediae
is
1)
K6
(verbs in which
the
middle
:
letter of
(rt.
the root
kdnu
JS 6 D)
"to stand", Kal Pret. ikun, Pres. ikan,

kdn, ken,
Inf.
Imper. kun,
Perm.
Piel Pret. ukin, Pres. ukdn, Imper. ken,

y
Perm, kun,
kunnu
Iftaal Pret.
uktm; tdru
(rt.
1X 6 n)
ta
"to turn", Kal

Part, mufiru,
Pret. itur, Imper. tur, Piel Pret. ufir, Imper.

Inf. turru,
fir,
Iftaal Pret.
//?r;
</a^
(rt.
"to slay", Kal ]S 6 H)
Pret. tduk,
Pres.
iflf/w^).
z'â^,
Imper. duk,
Perm.
^,
Ifteal Pret.
idduk (for
XVI. Of verbs mediae # 7 (verbs

the root
is
s
in
which the middle

:
letter
of
tabu
(rt.
itib,
DK 7 tfl)
Perm.
"to be good",
Kal Pret.
itlb,
Pres.
itab,
itibbi,
LXXXVI
nples
tab,
INTRODUCTION
Piel Pret. ufib, Part, mufibu, Inf. tubbu
;
danu
(rt.
|K 7 *l)
eak
"to judge",
Kal Pret.
idin,
Pres. idan, idinna,
Imper. din.
letter of the
XVII. Verbs
root
is
tertiae
infirmae (verbs in
which the third
weak) are of frequent occurrence. Of verbs tertiae K x of the root is K) the (verbs in which the third letter hatu (rt. Kjton) "to sin", Kal following are examples
:
Pret.
ihti,
Pres. ihatti\
imli,
main
(rt.
Xjbti) "to
fill,
to be full",
Kal Pret.
tertiae
Ifteal Pret. tmtali,
Piel Pret. umalli.
Verbs
be dis-
S2
are of rare
occurrence and
tertiae
may
in
here
regarded.
letter
(rt.
Of
verbs
is
K 3 (verbs
Pret.
which the third

:
of the root
ft)

ipti,
pitu
ipeti,
K 3 n&) "to open", Kal

Imper.
piti, pita,
ipta,
Pres.
(rt.
ipatti,
ipitti,
Part, petu;
ilka
;
lakii,
liku
S 3 pb) "to
Imper.
liki,
take",
Ifteal
Kal
Pret.
:
Pret.
ilteki.
ilki,
Pres.
tertiae
ilekki,
ilikki,
Of
verbs
4 !2^)
X4
the
following are
t'Smt,
examples
tSimt't
Semu
(rt.
"to hear", Kal Pret.

Sebii
(rt.
Pres.
th'mmt't
Imper. Simi\
tibi.
X 4 Dt^) "to be
tertiae
satisfied
with", Kal
Pret.
Many
K6
verbs
infirmae might,
by
comparison with the corresponding roots

classified
in
Arabic, be
as verbs tertiae
or
tertiae
these
two
classes
of verbs
however are usually treated together as it is frequently impossible to distinguish between them. In the
1
corresponding roots in Hebrew the original
and
have
been changed to H which merely serves to carry the vowel and has no consonantal force it is customary
both
:
therefore in citing Assyrian roots,
which belong
to these
two
classes, to
employ
PI
as a
symbol
for the third letter
of the root.
The
following are examples of these two

:
classes of verbs tertiae infirmae
bantu
bini,
(rt.
H3D) "to build",
Kal
bam,
Pret.
ibni,
Pres. ibani, Imper.
Part, dam, banii,
Perm.
Ifteal Pret. ibtani,
Nifal Pret.
$aiu
(rt.
and
Plfiltf)
Pres. ibbani, Ittafal
Pret.
Pret.
and Pres.
titi,
ittabni;
"to drink",
Kal
Pres.
iSatti,
Imper. &tf;
baru
(rt.
,TD)
"to see",
VERBS
Kal Pret.
ibri,
LXXXVII
(rt.
Pres.
ibari,
Shafel Pret. uXabri] manu
"to count", Kal Pret. imnu, Pres. manu, imani, Piel Pret.
umannd
kamu
(rt.
HOp) "to burn", Kal

of the root are
Pret. z'&ww, Imper.
kumu, Part. kdmu.

In
some verbs two
letters
weak
such verbs Doubly

wea
verbs.
are
termed "doublv weak" and exhibit the peculiarities of both
the classes of
weak verbs
"to exalt"
;
to
is
nddu
(rt.
1K I 3)
Xt
which they belong. Thus the verb a "doubly weak" verb, as it is both
(rt.
primae
and mediae K r
;
naSit
KjtW) "to raise"

is is
is
both primae
and
tertiae
elu
(rt.
rf?K 4 ) "to be high"
both primae K 4 and both primae X 7 and both mediae X 6 and
tertiae
infirmae
idu (rt.
(rt.
^ 4 *1^ 7 ) "to know"
tertiae tertiae
K4
bd'u
X Z K 6 3) "to come"
verbs
is
Kx
A
root)
few
exist
quadriliteral
in
(verbs
with
four
letters
in
the Quadri-
Assyrian,
:
of which the
following
are
of most
frequent occurrence
uSabalkat, "to tear
Ittafal,
\balkatu, rt.
fO^D], Shafel
Pret. uttalkit, Pres.
down",
Nifal Pret. ibbalkit "to fall upon, invade",

revolt,
Pret. itlabalkat
"to
to pass over"
\_par$adu,
rt.
"KtfHS],
Nifal
Pret.
ipparSid,
Inf. naparfudu,
u to
root
;
fly".
is
In
some
e.
quadriliteral
rt.
verbs
the
last
letter
of the
weak,
g.
n^^B, Shafel
Pret. uXpalki, "to
open wide"
rt.
HD^B, Nifal
Pret. ipparku, Inf. naparku, "to cease, disappear".
LIST
OF
SIGNS.
The
following List of cuneiform signs
is
given for reference,
and should be used together with the Vocabulary when reading The principles on the texts in the main body of the book.
which the
list
has been arranged are as follows.
It
has been
already stated on pp.

its
XXI
ff.,
that
the
cuneiform writing had
origin in picture-writing,
the inventors of the system being
At an
Character
accustomed to draw rough pictures to represent objects, actions, etc. early date the pictures lost their exact forms and became
mere groups of wedges,

t jie
chiefly because
soft clay
was used
as
md
func-
tions of
p r i nc ip a l
writing
.material.
its
The
in
original
picture-writing,
the signs
moreover, in addition to
change
development with regard to most of the picture-signs, or ideograms, were, in course of time, used to express the sounds of the names of things which they thus arose and came represented, apart from their meanings
;
outward form, underwent the meaning of the characters. For
into use, side
by
side with the original picture-writing, a system
of writing words phonetically by
means of
syllables.
Among
the Babylonians and Assyrians these

side
two systems
also existed
by
side.
sign
;
could thus be employed as (i) a single
syllable of a
word
(2)
an ideogram which stood
for a
whole
word more
(3)
a determinative to indicate the general

;
an ideogram
signs.
and
(4)
meaning of part of an ideogram consisting of two or
LIST
OF SIGNS
LXXXIX
In the following list the principal Assyrian signs are given Arrangement c with their most usual syllabic values and ideographic meanings.
The
and
list
is
divided into three columns. In the

;
first
column
is
the
;
sign to be explained
in the
second are
its
chief phonetic values

its
in the third are the

it
complete words which are
when
is used as an ideogram or as the first For example, the first sign in the list, >^, when occurring gram.
meanings of an ideopart
in the inscriptions,
may
possibly be used phonetically for any
one of the four syllables

cause of";
a$,
rum,
dil
or
til,
e.
g.
"beJ, a$-$u,
>-jy^
ÎHf
*^>
zi-ka-rum,
"male";
^.^
*~-
>->^-
mi-dil $ame(e\ EzJ^,
"the bolt of heaven"; îr| ^, ba-til, "discontinued, in abeyance"; or it may be used as an ideogram for
any of the words cited

ina matu At$ur ki,
in the third
;
column,
>
e.
g.
"in Assyria"
or finally
it
A^
*,
e.
^[E|, m AHur - ah iddina,

first
>
>~-
"Esarhaddon"
may
occur as the
sign,
g.
sign in an
*
ideogram composed of more than one
r^ *~^"T ^|
M|^, i-na The signs

direction
/? "
kussi,
"on the throne". And so on throughout.

or wedges with which they begin, the the
(i) the
s 'S ns
in this list are arranged in order according to the Order of
of the
wedge
general order being as follows:

horizontal
signs
beginning with
wedges
(first
those
beginning with
one horizontal
:,
wedge
-,
then the signs beginning with two wedges
then
;
those with three wedges
then those with four wedges E)

(first
(2) the signs beginning with diagonal wedges
those be-
ginning with one diagonal wedge

those with three
x
,
then those with two ^, then

begin with the large
^, and
;
finally those that
diagonal wedge ^)
tain the upright
(3) the signs the beginnings of
which con-
wedge (those signs beginning with the single

",
wedge,
last
|,
being followed by those beginning with \,
and
of
all
In each of these
by those beginning with two or more upright wedges). main divisions the same order is followed with
regard to the second and third wedges of each sign.
xc
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
XCI
Signs
XCII
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
XCIII
Sign
XCIV
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
xcv
Sign
XCVI
INTRODUCTION
Sign
Svllabic values
Ideograms
LIST
OF SIGNS
XCVII
Signs
XCVIII
NTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
XCIX
Sign
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
CI
Sign
Syllabic values
Ideograms
79-
tur, dur, tur
80.
|ff,
billu,
"tribute;
burden; talent".
81.
r
<MP U "honey".
>
82.
gur, kur
(i) idru, "to turn, re-
turn".
(2) a
measure.
83.
y,
karnu, "horn".
[e&ni],
f^y^fl,
"to
straight".
istanu
(
I
the North-wind ;
see 22 9,
iltdnu
84.
far
*py^y
burrumu, "brightly coloured".
(2) birmu,
"brightly
coloured cloth".
85sak,
Sak
sag ;
rihi,
"head".
ri$, ris
"head".
'dz ^yyy,
"chief".
asaridu,
~yy^l
officer,
Saku,
"hi
ruler".
bolt".
CII
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST OF SIGNS
GUI
Sign
CIV
INTRODUCTION
Sign
Syllabic values
Ideograms
^^
^
*^
mdrtu
bintu
"daughter".
ship".
106.
107.
108.
ad, a/, at
a3, "father".
109.
no.
rob,
rap
*arru >
,
in
duk.
112.
far, sar\ sir; hir
" kin
g"-
the god
Mar
Xa/dru, "to write".
garden".
JE^J,
(Iftaal
kutassuru
?,
of kasaru)
to
"to
(in-
collect,
trans.)."
rally
"wall".
dead".
114.
,
Ubara-Tutu.
se
naddnu, "to give".
LIST
OF SIGN
cv
Sign
CVI
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
CVII
Sign
CVIII
INTRODUCTION
LIST
OF SIGNS
CIX
Sign
ex
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST OF SIGNS
CXI
Sign
CXII
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
CXII1
Sign
CXIV
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
cxv
Sign
CXVI
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
CXVII
Sign
Syllabic values
Ideograms
2 1 6.
217.
sign sometimes employ-
ed for marking the division of words.
218.
ud,
tu
ut,
;
/;
;
u]
^,
(i) www, "day". (2) umu, "storm".
tarn
Mr
par, pir ; lah,

lih
;
(3) $am$u,
"sun"; gen-
his, his
erally written
with
determ.
(4) situ,
*"**j-
"exit,
that
forth".
which comes
(5)
P&>
"white".
the Sun-
*~*^~ ^y,
$ama$,
god.
^ J^y,
afu, "to
go forth".
sun-rse.
"sun-set".
"copper".
,
the
city.
the city.
Puratu,
the Euphrates
short
properly the
ca-
CXVIII
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
CXIX
Sign
cxx
Sign
INTRODUCTION
LIST
OF SIGNS
CXXI
Sign
CXXII
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST
OF SIGNS
CXXIII
Sign
Syllabic values
Ideograms
(2) Sutmu, "prosperity,

,
greeting".
daianu, "judge".
,sallukku "regt
ular offering".
,
Sandnu, "to equal,
to rival".
-<y^lEy^-,
262.
,
Sulma-
nu, the god Sulman.

///,
"mound".
263.
(0
'^
"earth".
;
(2) aSru, "place"
also
employed
terminative
as
deafter
names
(3) Mi,
of places.
"with".
"dis-
^y^,
tress".
dannatu,
der part".
(2)
&//," low,
lower".
Sumer, Southern
Babylonia.
,
"dwelling".
/' weight".
CXXIV
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST OF SIGNS
cxxv
Sign
CXXVI
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST OF SIGNS
CXXVII
Sign
CXXVHI
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST OF SIGNS
CXXIX
cxxx
Sign
INTRODUCTION
LIST
OF SIGNS
CXXXI
Sign
CXXXII
INTRODUCTION
Sign
LIST OF SIGNS
CXXXIII
Sign
CXXXIV
,0.
INTRODUCTION
fern,
<
[eSrtt],
esertu
(constr.
st.
e$erit\
"ten"
e$ru,
"tenth".
[is
ten esru~\, fern, isten esrit,
"eleven".
"thirteen".
"fifteen".
"twelve",
"fourteen",
"
sixteen".
i3. 15.
17.
!9-
"seventeen".
"nineteen".
s a Ids a,
"eighteen".
ao
^
y
esrd,
"twenty".
3o.
seldta,
"thirty".
40.
arbd,
irba'd,
irbd,
50.
"fifty".
"forty".
60.
LISTS
OF DETERMINATIVKS AND IDEOGRAMS

of
trees,
CXXXV
and
determinative before names
woods,
wooden
^'
,,
objects.
names of
plants.
names of names of
names
stuffs.
stones.
stuffs
and
garments.
of
wools
and
woolen
Tx
T^J
names of
"
vessels.
*^
names of some of the

mals.
larger ani-
words
)
for sheep. for
,,
words
some
parts
of th^
names of
the months.
stars
>->-^JL
^'
"W*
.tt> >>^
1
i~?
>
names of
after
and planets.
names of
names of
names of
places.
birds.
fish.
"
-j
Â^
Tf-HF-
[
)
>to-l -^6l determinatives after numbers. oÛ. in-~OL<^~*->

i
CA-v-rf-txiW
^TTT TVJ-
determmativ es
after
numbers, and measures.
for the plural.
LIST OF IDEOGRAMS FOR THE MONTHS.
^*-*^
>-
trr^ ^^~ rry ^-^1 ^^^ T

.
Nisannu, Nisan.
'
CXXXVI
^y
INTRODUCTION
Simdnu, Si van.
IV.
%:T *rl Ey I
*-jL_Y
Du'tizu,
Duzu,
Tammuz.
^T ^^^
^^^^1
Ab.
VII.
r/M/w, Tisri.
VIII.
^"
_T ^>^T ^~'
T?
>-
>
Arahsamna, Marcheswan.
I
IX.
Kislimu, Kislev.
'
XI
^^T Hh TT ^.JL
^J^J
^/w,
Sebat.
'
XIII.
>-^
^ TEJT *p ^
^^^rw, Adar.
>^r,
^
dari,
waAr
#/-//
&
Addon
$a
(also
termed
magru
Ad-
and Addaru
arku), the
second Adar or intercalary
month.
LISTS OF IDEOGRAMS
CXXXVII
LIST OF IDEOGRAMS FOR THE PRINCIPAL DEITIES.

the
ilu
Anu,
god of heaven, usually written

I
*~
A-num.
Bel,
the god of the earth and of mankind, *-**f- *~JJ ^J|
(frequently written
AJf,
^^JJJ ^JJI)
^^~ îs
the god of the abyss and of hidden wisdom, written

,
""^-a.
ilu
Another name of Ea
'
>~^- i^-
Nu-dim-mud.
Sin,
the
Moon-god,
;
>-^p- >~JJ *~>t-
^^Jl
(frequently written
is
^^JJJ ^^11)
Nannaru, *~J$SamaS,
^^-
Another name of Sin
t^\ Êf^Jp
^^^fl^J
the Sun-god, ^>^p- ^J.
"Rammanu, the Storm-god,
vHF")
^'
Marduk,
Merodach, the god of Babylon, ^>
Nabu,
Nebo,
written
a
the
god of Borsippa, *~>;
~f
is
(frequently
*"^yj^)
solar
.
^n~
god of
character,
>-)Jf-
^^y
ilu
]^]->
Nin-ib
Another name of Ninib

(or
Utgallu,
>~>-
-t
*~-
the god of battle,

Gibil,
the Fire-god,
a
M
*-
Nusku,
^7ra,
form of the Fire-god,
the Plague-god,
^^
^-
AHur,
7^/ar,
the national god of Assyria,
*-
the goddess (i) of love,

" (frequently
(2)
of battle,
written
<Vr
>-
Belli,
the spouse of Bel,
[.
A few names
that are written phonetically are here included.
CXXXVIII
Damkma,
INTRODUCTION
the spouse of Ea,
ilu
written >~>^-
Ê
ilu
Dam-ki-na.
Ai,
the spouse of Saunas', written the spouse of Ninib, >^+^,
^>4-
J^f |]r,
Ai.
Ba'u,
V~^
*->j-
*~E|-
the goddess of the Under-world, >->^- "JÊj
^JEJ EjÎ
-^ ** **
the
spirits
of
heaven,
*-]]]]
Ej^~
v
?
-4Anunna&i,
ilu
\V
TT|^r
the spirits of earth, written >~>Â-nun-na-ki.
^J]
LIST OF IDEOGRAMS FOR THE PRINCIPAL COUNTRIES,

CITIES
Akkadu,
AND RIVERS.
Northern Babylonia,
Arbela,
Assyria,
AMilu,
,
^^
Jgf),
^JI^ ^Hf~-^J),
V >^f
^JJ
^J), (V)
)
%Êlamtu,
the city ASSur,
^'-I
f ^1* ^
7
<Jgf,
Elam,
(>)
^J
^,
v^
^tyy
Idiklat
-yyyy <IEJ.
TY
IT
_Y
Tlgns
'
IT
S ^ ^'
Erech,
Urartu,
Babilu,
Armenia^
Babylon,
see Idiklat.
cuthah
LISTS OF IDKOGRAMS
the ancient Sirpurla,
CXXXIX
-
J.<W<i$,
/.,/nw///,
-^r-
Larsam,
Nineveh,
^
<
Nintia.
Nippur,
sippar,
^y
^^ ^
J^f
<Jg,
^JH t ||y <Jg[.

or
-yyyi <JEJ.
J^f
Euphrates,
^f
^JT^-.
.SV//</-,
Southern Babylonia,
^JEJ fe^^F
*"II)
TEXTS
WITH INTERLINEAR TRANSLITERATION AND TRANSLATION
NAMES AND TITLES OF EARLY BABYLONIAN AND ASSYRIAN KINGS.

I.
Sargon of Agade, about 38oo B.
C./^
$ar
Sar
ga
ni
$ar
ali
ga-
Sargani
Sar-ali,
king
of Aga-
de.
II.
Naram-Sin,' about 3750 B^C.

-
<tkjb
ra
am
-
'">
Sm
tn E^
Sar
ki
ib -
ra-
Naram
Sin,
king
of the four
ar
ba
im
quarters.
III.
Hammurabi, king
lf<
fc^
-
^
m
of Babylon, about
22606.
C.
Etyy
-
/^
aw
^ ^^
bi
^yy
dannu
Sar
ra
Sarru
Hammurabi,
the mighty king,
king
Bdbili KI
of Babylon.
NAMES AND TITLES OF KINGS

IV.
SamSi-Ramman,
y tTTT<=
-
of Assyria, about 1820 B. C.
<T- -HF&' /V "
Afl-
*T ^T!
iUakku
Ramman
Aûr
mar
son
SamSi-Ramman,
ruler of ASSur,
T-
f
ilu
t0T
-
^ *1 ^TT
itsakku
-Hf- If
illi
^
Sur
me-
Da
gan
of I^me-Dagan,
ruler of
ASSur.
V. Pudi-ilu, king of Assyria, about 1850 B. C.
di
ilu
sar
m " tu
AHur
ilu
apil
Bel
nirari
Sar
Pudi-ilu,
king of Assyria, son of Bel-nirari,
king
'
matu
AHur
apil
Anur-uballit
$ar
m * tu AHur
of Assyria, son
of ASSur-uballit,
king of Assyria.
VI. Ramman-nirari
<>
I,
king of Assyria, about 1825 B. C.
T<
v[-^]
matu
}]
apil
m Ramman-nirari sar
AHur
Î^-f Pu
-
di
ilu
Sar
Ramman-nirari, king of Assyria, son of Pudi-ilu,
king
tl1
AHur
of Assyria.
VII. Shalmaneser
I,
king
of Assyria, about i3oo B. C.
'"
^" Sulmanu-aSaridu
sar
ki$$ati
apil
Ramman-nirari
Shalmaneser,
king of the world, son of Ramman-nirari,
sar
ktisati
king of the world.

VIII.
Merodach-Baladan
I,
king of Babylonia, about 1200
B C
$ar
llu
Marduk
apil
iddina(nd)
$ar
kittati
Merodach-Baladan,
king of the world, king
Akkadi
mar
son
Me
li
&
si
of
Sumer
(and)
Akkad,
of Meli
^^ BaMi
f
K
'
abylon
descndant
of Kurigalzu,
IX.
a king without equal.
Nebuchadnezzar J, king of Babylonia, about 1150

fff
B. C.
^1 If
na
-
Nabu-ku-dur
ri
uur
rubu
du
na-
Nebuchadnezzar,
the prince, exalted (and)
\ ^
magnificent,
offspring
of Babylon,
the foTd
*arr
Pl
of kings,
*f
'****"
the courageous ruler,
Sakkanakku
governor
*TT
of Eridu, the sun of his land.
X. Tiglath-Pileser
I
I,
king of Assyria, about
noo
B.
C
If
apil
IEM<
Tukulti(ti]
-
If
apil
-
*TTTTAE*=TT
v $ar
!ar
ra
""* AHur
i*
Tiglath-Pileser,
king of Assyria, son
m AHur
E<M< v -
TJ
apil
res
i -
ti
Sar
matu
AHur
Mu
tak-
of ASSur-reS-iSi
king of Assyria, son of Mutak-
a
kit
-
f*
ilu
<<>"*tar
matlt
Nusku
AHur
kil
Nusku,
king of Assyria.
INSCRIPTION FROM A CYLINDER OF

RABI,
[Brit.
HAMMU
B. C.
KING OF BABYLON, ABOUT 2200

Mus., No. 12215.]
coi.
i,
i.
Ha - am
mu
ra
bi
sarru
dannu
$ar
Hammurabi,
the mighty king,
king
Bdbili KI
$ar.
ki
ib
ra
tim
of Babylon,
king
of the four
ar
ba
im
b"a-ni
ma-tim
tarru
so-
quarters,
the founder of the land, the king
whose
<Tip
-
w
ir
1
$a
tu
-hi
na
Si
HF;ama$
tlu
^T
< u
deeds
unto
the heart
of
ama
and
|V "
Marduk
ta
ba
na
ku
Marduk
are well-pleasing,
am
I.
^L The wall
of
Sippar
KI
in
pi
ri
ki-ma
like
sa-
Sippar
i.
with
earth
Literally "flesh".
INSCRIPTION FROM A CYLINDER OF HAMMURABI
JT
im
l
ra
bi -
im
r?
its
St
su
lu
great mountain
summit
ul
li
ap
raised.
pa - ra - am With- a] swamp-
lu
-
us
I
ta
as
hi-
"
surrounded
!T
na
Sippar
KI
The-etrrral.
to
Sippar
-IT; T?
ri
-
f^ E ma am m
-
âm^
yâr
ul
mi
im
dug out and

coi.
ii,
a wall
of safety
K
(lu
-
w/w
mi
it.
su
jfifa -
aw
ra-
erected for
Hammura-
y
z'
jy
su
3(2
ni
ma
tim
$arru
sa
ip
sa
tu
>
the founder of the land, the king
whose
deeds
/r
^"
Samas
ilu
Marduk
ta-
unto
the heart of
SamaS
and
Marduk
are well-
na
I.
ku
Sippar
KI
.
Bdbi-
pleasing,
sa-tu-im
fr. fr.
am
Sippar
i.
and
Baby-
1.
2. Ill 2,
3.
I
sadim, saharu.
e.
sadi with the mimation.
I,
/zizrz/.
4.
lu-u-um-mi-su
lummid-sii
II i,
fr.
emedu.
^CCV
<
THE MEMORIAL TABLET OF RAMMAN-NlRARII, KING OF ASSYRIA, ABOUt"i'3^ B.'<& ^ No. / *$?* &**
^
i.
[Brit. Mus.,
21
1.]
<^>
HFfl
rubu
HF/'/
Afl
* **
Ramman-nirari
^TTMT
^~Tl
-
^T!
si -
v
mat
HPHi
lu
Ramman-nirari,
the illustrious prince, adorned by
godj
T>
//
-
el
lu
sa
ka
an
ki
ilanipl
the ruler,
the viceroy
of the gods,
3.
^'
in
ma
ha
z^L
ni
ir
dap-nu
ti
the founder
of
cities,
the destroyer
of the
?^w
;;m
an
Kas
&
Ku
ti
Lu
hi-
mighty hosts
of the KaSSI,
the KutI,
the Lulu-
me
ba
ri
mu
hi
ip\
kul-
ml,
and
the Subarl,
V annihilate/'
of
e -
h'$
all
foes
above
/.
and
e.,
i.
That
is,
around the Upper and the Lower Sea,
Lake Van I and Lake

/
Urumiyah.
'
'
THE TITLES OF THE KING
TT
tf
7.
vv jy^
^yy-Eiy HI! t
2$
-
trampling
r matati-hi-nu their lands down
in
Lu
up
di
from
Lupdu
'<*'
Tfa
pi
ku
di to
lu
ha
at
and
Rapiku
up
Eluhat,
n
s has takeni -
9-
ion of
hosts\
of rSv --J^j^tûJU^
who
has enlarged
\
**
>- ty -yjl
-
TT
u
M ^T -HI
ku
-
$ V
tarru
$a
I
JTCf
naphar
all
ri
du
rt
ûndar^/
and
frontier,
the king for whom
HfffT
r3^" ^ 7
r.~fT?^Hf-~
|7
yl -
I7a
^4âr
and
princes
Anu,
Aur,
-f
ilu
^T
-HFilu
Afl-
- <HUT
u
-HF--TTI
ilu
Samat
Ramman
iMar
na
to-
Sama,
^T
Ramman
-T!T^
-
and
I^tar
at
his\ ^
r JT
.fa
*
/g
//
^&
ik
-
Jf]
$u
-3.
'
,
W
Xa
-
f
an
-
^-m^
gu
-
ni
feet
have forced
inj:o
submission,
\^
the exalted
r
A-'x^priest
/
of
Bel,
the son
of Pudi-ilu,
gor
-Y>5f
frT >*%- ^TT ^TTT

/
//M
15.
^*TT
y
-
V >-Sf ^TET
Xa
-
>
T
ilu
>->^p
Attur
^<?/
ak
ki
vernor
of Bel,
r-ttAe*
of
Aur,
10
THE MEMORIAL TABLET OF RAMMAN-NIRARI
,fo
&
id
matu
Tu
ru
ki
"the
conqueror
of TurukI
and
v
matu
**. <tETT
Nigimti
<
If <ys
3= *ET <^TT -Til JT

its
to
entire extent,
me
of
- ir
ma
al
ki
sadl(i)
hur-
all
(its)
ririeFsT" (its)
mountains
and
high-
ja
wz'
pa
at
Ku
ti
ra
pal
ti
/%XJ=J
lands,
the boundary of
the wide-spreading Kutl,
20.
gu - nu
the district
(?)
Ah
la -
me
Su
ti
of the Ahlami
and
Suti,
ET
la
-
Î!T -!< JT
-
ri
ma
ta
ti
su
nu
the lauri
and
their lands,
>-
IK
-
mu
ra
pis
me
- is
ri
ku
du
ri
who
enlarged
boundary
and
frontier,
V
^
grandson
of
-HFilu
-II -ITT *?
Bel
-
H.
Sangu
priest
tlu
nirari
Bel-nirari,
of
AHur-ma
ASSur,
$a
um
ma
an
Ka$ -
Si - i
i -
na
ru
ma
who
the hos\s
of the KaSsl
destroyed
\
y.
Ji-
IA-^
THE
=TTT*
na
-
KING'S
GENEALOGY
1 1
~T
ab
rl
za
ga
t] ~ -
-HI JT
-
* 6/
-T -^TI
ka
his
-
ri
$u
su
and
the
whole
of his enemies
hand
Su
du
mu
ra
pi$
me
is
ri
**-*
conquered,^
who
enlarged
boundary
and
YTT
WU>
w-U
-</
ri
>f
li
ip
li
pi
Sa
ilu
ASSur-
frontier,
the great-grandson
of
Aur-
uballit
Sarri
dan
ni
$a
$a
an
gu
uballit,
thT~mighty king,
whose
30.
priesthood
^ ^T
i -
tTTTT
e -
v
kur
E^TT -C'V
-
jy
$u
^y -TI-
fr
u
na
ra
tim
tu
rat
,
in
the temples
was glorious
^ffl
ru
-
and
JT^Ê^-K JT MJ^T
$u
-
-!-<!<
ka
-
lum
m
ki
-
sarru
ti -
su
na
ti
ma
whose royal prosperity
unto
distant (lands)
like
vtE
-^
a
Xadift)
_
"^^^^W^^B?
mountain was establshed,

33
-
who
broke up
tE
at
v
main
_
fa
r;
ra
forces
if the wide-spreading Subari,
If -I -III <MB!
ra
-
m -T
ku
-
-III
ri
35.
tff
e -
+ El
nu-ma
pis
rê
- is
ri
du
enlarged
i.
boundary
kat-su.
2.
and
sa-an-gu-su
frontier.
When
-X^"
JiJ
^
\
ka-su
sangat-su. sangnt-su.
,',^^
.>-'
r'
12
ir
la
la
$a
bit
llu
AHur
beli -
ia
's'a
the
sir-la-la
of
the temple of ASSur
my
lord,
which
ba
ab
ni
e$
Hi
ma
- ti
the gate
(^> ^)
t
of the god of the land"

38.
and
-Hfdaiane
na
pa
na
the gate (called) "the god of judges",
*which
in
former days
tfl
ski)
na
ah
ma
ih
hi-
is
jJ
f
fhad beeni
l
had
fallen into
deca/*
had suEslded,
and
built,
as
ra
$a
tu
I
pi
hi-
**<+
tnat place
strengthen-
na
su
ak
I
su
ud
it
ti
its
base
reached,
with
û"
li
ip
ri
$a
alu
ba
si
stone
and
earth
from
Ubase
--TTIJT
e
I
pu
u$
na
a$
ri
~su
=TTT u
I
te
ir
(it)
-r*"
^ Ouf<W
(it),
built
to
its
place
restored
44.
<HiH
u
^!
na
-
-TTI
ri
-
45.
ia
a~s I
ku
sfet
un
na
and
.
my
tablet
up.
In
dan-na-su
dannat-sn.
.J
-u
**
>
-fer
.V\
KO
THE
^ / RESTORATION
T
w;/^ ^'
xv-v>v ?"
f
OF THE TEMPLE/OF ASSUR
/ f
u
n
1
tr
3^
<MTI -f
ar
/â/
^T
-ffi
rw^w
let
<!-!!!
ar
-
m
ku
-
tTTT=
-
46. =ff
e
-
/S
e-
..^
'
nu- ma
future days
a future prince,
JT
aS
-
ru
$u
^TJT<= u
47.
sTTTt
u
shall
-
-Sal
ba
ru
ma f
j '
that place
have grown old and
fallen
y
a
-
î
hu
4 8.
^
*.+
an
-
^
hu
.^yy jgj <y^ -yy

-
su
==
di
i$
na
ri
ia
into decay,
its
rmns
*'tJt!jL(
repair,
my
tablet,
Su
me~
Sat
ra
na
a$
ri
$u
x su^.
lu
-L/t_
ti
ir
the record of
-HF-
^ ^
so.
i^
my
name,
into
its
place
leCUum
restore,
-yyi
M ^y
be -
ee *u/i ^y- se -
v
U
nie^_
to his prayers
may
<T
-
hearken. But whosoever
jy y/
-
v E^yy
sat
-
&&
i -
ra
pa
Si -
tu
ma
and
su
his
urn
su
the record of
my name
blots out
own name
i -
$a
ta
ru
u
or
lu
na
ri
ia
inscribes,
my
tablet
53.
sa
-
am
sa
ku
na
$a
ah
lu
uk
It
conceals,
(or) to
destruction
=
i -
54.
ma -nu
na
mi
Urn
na
du
consigns
1.
(it),
(or) into
an-hut-sii.
the stream
casts
(it),
an-hu-sii
THJ2
MEMORIAL TABLET OF RAMMAN-N IRAKI

55.
tE -y
i -
m =m=
lu
-
IT
a
-
^y
na
yj
T-
na
in
i$ati
ka
me P l
the water
(or)
the
fire
burns
(it),
(or) into
Ê
i
-
^y ^y ^yyy&r
na
-
56.
^
i
-
^y
na
^
e
-
^^yf*
*}*-f*-}}\ pi - ri
earth
^yyy^
u-
du
throws
(it),
(or) with
cov-
57.
ka
fa
mu
na
bit
ikliti
(?)
â
ers (it) up,
(or) into
a dark
chamber
where
it
ri
se
ri -
bu
ma
i -
sa
ka
nu
-
cannot
>e
seen
brings and
places
(it),
-TTI
lu
a$
Sum
ir
ri
ti
si -
na
ti
*
na
or
if
in
iinii)
because of
tr/ose
curses
60.
-ry
na
.^ ^yy
ka
-
yj
a
^<
-
y^
ra
ha- a
^
ia
-
^
a
^y
-
<y
lim
-
ba
na
btttef foe,
an
evil
enemy,
yyy
sa
-
m
lu
^y Ey
ma - ma
any
na
na
ki
ir
ta
a hostile tongue,
â
na
other
man
sends
and causes (him) o seize
1.
That
e.,
is,
theSyCurses that follow those acts.

a slanderer.
2. /.
"a man\)f hostile tongue,
f)
'
UTa*
ONTHE
SACRELIGIOUS
15
<y-JEH jgy
u
or
<tt
mi
-
ma
ha
sa -
scC -
ma
and
any plan
he conceives
pu
hi
tl "
AUur
ASSur
ilu
si
Si
ib
carries out,
may
the exalted god
who
dwelleth
Hf-
har
stffi-
kur-kur
ilu
A-nu
ilu
Bel
^
iûC^tÂ-
in
Eharsagkurkura,
Anu,
Bel,
ilu
Hani P l
the great gods,
./M^*
Ea
and
IStar,
4- tE -TTA
tlu
^
gu
of
$ame(i)
HPllu
gi
T^ Hfff - nun - na
ku
the Igigu
heaven,
the
Anunnaku.
6s
-
n jy ^
'
ti
iz
zr
//
i -
na
all
naphar
of them,
$iT-
nu
zi-
*-
^^LXîC*/
of
earth,
^
ki
-
**
ir
-
el
mu
$u-ma
and
ri
ta
anger
look
upon^Mm
with an
70.
ma
ru
u$
ta
ag
gi
2$
li
ru
ru-
evil curse
in
wrath
may
they curse
$u
$umi - $u
;
zeri - $u
el
la
su
him
i.
his
name,
his seed,
his relatives
and
el-la-su
ellat-sul
ki
im
ta
$u
na
mati
lu - hal
li
ku
his family
in
the land
may
they destroy;
72.
-ry
fltf
_
a/
^ ^yyy
-
jy
#$
mdti-su
ft< ÊI ha - la - ak
ni
h'-
may
the ruin
of his land, the destruction
of his
JT
^w
7 3.<
ku
du
ri
su
i -
na
pi
su
nu
people
and
of his border
at
their
weighty
lu - sa
am
ma
;
llli
Ramman
i -
na
ri - hi -
is
command
/be decreed
may Ramman
with
an
evil
4mbi
75
.
//'
mu
//
//
ir -
hi
su
bu
bu
downpour
76.
vi
overwhelm him,
may
flood,
^tff
ârw
<HH
limnu
w
sa
tu
A^-fflF El
-
*-
-EiT
-
*T ^1
te -
-TIT-
\n
->
ah
ma -as
tu
su
ir*
destructive wind,
rebellion,
hurricane (and)
Sam
Su
su
un
ku
bu
bu
tu
tempest,
"^ want
^yi -gyy ^yi
hu
-
(and) famine,
78. \}
*m IH ^y
-
& ^y
i -
v jy
mdli-hi
his land
lu
ru
ur
tu
sa
hu
na
drought
(and) hunger
in
be
-t=H
>('cz
^
*Vz
-HF//
v
^/^/
-^TT
-
Tl
a
-
^- & ^TT
bu
-
1ST
lu
-
^T
us-
su
bi
t'S
continuous
I.
on
his land
2.
/.
like a flood
e.,
2 may he
li-ir-hi-sn
lirhis-su.
Ramman,
the storm-god.
V,
f?
i b
Aj
v
,
<t^X>-**JK*^
UxA^^
THE HUNTING-EXPEDITIONS OF TIGLATHKING OF ASSYRIA, ABOUT PILESER

I,
1
100
B. C.
Museum, No. 12176.]
[From
a cylinder in the British
Tukulti(ti)
apil
$ar
ra
idlu
kar
du
Tiglath-pileser,
the valiant hero,
fTT
ta
-
T- AHfff
me
-
fcTt^
t?
-ETT?
la -
ih
u hatta
$a
na
an
mu-
who
holds
a sceptre without
equal,
who
I-
ffl
ru
^ Af IH
mu
-
<=ETT -TTZ
'
4.
-f t^T Idl
' lu
gam -me
ur
si
ri
Nin
ib
exercises
lordship over the
field.
Ninib
JT
u
ilu
5.
ST
iz
^
-
Nergal
kakke P l-su-nu
zu
te
and
Nergal
their terrible
weapons
'-
ka$at
su
nu
si
ir
ta
na
and
their exalted
bow
7.
to
t
i
-
z'
di
belu
ti
ia
i$
ru
ku
na
my
lordly
power
have presented.
At
PURSUIT OF WILD OXEN
si -
kir
ilu
Nin
ib
rd'imi
ia
IV
four
bu
hal
the bidding
of Ninib,
who
loveth me,
male
nmani P
dan
nu
ie
$u
tu
ru
te
na
wild oxen,
strong (and) mighty,
in
hu
rib - te
na
m&lv
Mi
ta
ni
the desert
in
the land of Mitani
and
^THJE^TT
i
-
-TT*
-
mil
ki
na
alu
ra
zi
$a
pa
is
an
.in
Araziki,
which
before
matu
Ha
-at
te
i -
na
'>"
kaM
ia
dan
na
te
the land of the yatti,
with
my
strong bow,
ku
ud
parzilli
mul
mul-
my
spear of iron
and
my
li
ia
zak
tu
te
na
pi$
ta
I
$u
nu
sharp darts
tTTT= IÎIE ^T<

u
-
>4-
^TT
I
Pl
-
JT -^
$u
-
^TT
karne P l their
$ik
ti
maSke
nu
slew.
Their hides,
-HF- IT
?/
wa
a//
z'a
ilu
A-
$ur
I
ub
la
horns
i.
to
life
I
my
city
ASSur
brought.
Literally, "their
brought to an end."
20
THE HUNTING-EXPEDITIONS OF TIGLATH-PILESER

.
<
X
Ten
l pirani P
bu
ha
li
dan - nu
te
elephants,
males,
mighty ones,
na
matu
#arrani(ni)
Si
di
naru
Ha-
iti.
Harran
and
the district
of the Ha-
TT^
bur
lu
-
TftlT*
a
I
V
IV
four
l pirani P
duk
;
bur
did
slay
elephants
TTT=
-
W 3 ttTTT ^TT
sa
-
lu
te
lu
bi
;
ta
ma$ke P l~
their
alive
caught
J
J^
/nu
20.
Zinnati P l
-
$u
nu
it
ti
l pirani P
hides
(and)
tusks
together with
the live
2 i.
â/
*
-
tu
te
na
ali
ia
llu
$ur
elephants
to
my
city
ASSur
a,,
<5
t
I
Az
si
kir
ihl
Nin
ib
brought.
At
the bidding
of Ninib,
E^TT
ra
A~f <ct tEff -. IT

-
JT <T$u
-
IH -SI
ne$e P l
mi
ia
II
&
who
loveth me,
one hundred and twenty
lions
lib
bi
ia
ik
di
na
with
my
courageous heart
by
SLAUGHTER OF ELEPHANTS AND LIONS
21
//
it
lu
//
ia
na
the attack
of
my power
*e.
on
tE
SET?
^'-w
foot
MI
lu
-
tTTTt TJ tflk
u
I
<HEJJ
u
f^
duk
VIII
eight
did
slay,
and
IC
hundred
IH-tElIT
ne$e P l
<=E^T
i
-
tT
*'?
na
u narkabti-ia
lions
in
my
chariot
wa
/>/
tu
te
u
I
Sim
kit
with
.......
brought low.
sen'
gi
mir
fa
issur
All beasts of the field
and
birds
= HfTI 1HT
$ame(e]
mut
tap
ri
$a
im
ni-sig-
of the heaven
that fly
among
my
30.
'
^7
ia
(?)
lu
u
I
at
cast.
ta
ad
di
spoils
i.
Col. VI,
11.
5584.
INTRODUCTION TO THE ANNALS OF ASSURNASIR-PAL, KING OF ASSYRIA, 884860 B. C.

[From
the stele No. 847 and paper squeezes in the British
Museum.]
i.
t
ana
-H^Tfcfl -MTI
ilu
tffltfflSf:
dan
-
-BEII
siri
Nin
Ninib,
ib
gi$
ri
dan
ni
To
the powerful;
the strong,
the exalted,
*TT3=tffl
atarid
-4-!
Hani P l of the gods,
IH^TT*
kardu
valiant,
tifcj HTI
sar
-
hu
the chief
mighty,
git
ma
lu
$a
ina
tahazi
la
z$ -
$a
na
nu
perfect,
whose onslaught
in battle
cannot be
ti
bu
$u
aplu
ri$
tu
ha
Sal
equalled,
^g
turn
-
^
ku
-
the son of highest rank,
destroyer of
ET
ma
-
^T
te
1
^- v
bu
-
Hf- -^ <^J!
ilu
kur
Nu
dim
mud
opposition,
first-born of
Nudimmud,
HhWTT
karrad
ilu
Igigi
li'u
ma -
lik
Hani ? l of the gods,
hero of
I.
the Igigi,
the mighty,
prince
The form tuk-ma-te occurs
as a variant reading.
THE PRAISE OF THE GOD
NINIB
23
//'/
//'
.Z? -
^r
mu- kil
mar
has
$ame(e)
offspring
of Ekur,
who
holds
the bolt
of heaven
irsitim(twi)
pi
tu
nak
be
and
earth,
who opens
the depths,
ka
bi - si
irsitim(tim)
rapaUi(ti}
ilu
$a
ina
who
treads
the broad
earth,
the
god
without
ba
lu- $u
l purusse P
$ame(e)
irsiiim(tim}
la
whom
4.
the decisions
of heaven
(and) earth are not
ipparasu(sit)
mu
nir
bu
ik
du
$a
la
decided,
the destroyer,
the" strong,
the com-
^'
<5//
pi
is
$u
atarid
mand
of
whose mouth
not void,
chief
of the four quarters,
w
giver of
sceptre
purussi
ana
nap
har
kal
all
and
decision
unto the whole of
^-a/
lu
$am
ru
$a
la -
the ruler,
the violent,
the com-
/ -
/a^
ka
ru
si -
kir
is
Sap
ti -
$u
Wu
the mighty,
mand
of
whose
lips
not altered,
24
INTRODUCTION TO THE ANNALS OF A$$UR-NASIR-PAL
ra/
abkal
Hani P l
mu
tal - lu
ilu
Ut-
the great,
spokesman
of the gods,
the exalted,
Ut-
-II
<5<?/
-II tfl
&&(#)
lords,
V
.fa
Eff
&)>
-
<V
pat
-4-
=!
$ame(e)
gallu,
lord of
whose hand the ends of heaven
Mi^r
irsitim(tini]
^HK-m
$ar
tarn -ha
-
ka
tus
su
pak
du
ri
(and) earth
controls,
king
of the battle,
Tf^TTMT W t=^^=^T^T tE^-MT

a
-
li
lu
$a
turn
ku
ma
tu^
pi
lu
strong one,
who
opposition
has conquered,
-n
-
-^^
nak -be
the depths
-
<
u
ul
lu
tu
git
ma
lu
bel
triumphant,
perfect,
lord of
and
tamati P l
iz
zu
la
pa
du
$a
the oceans,
terrible,
unsparing,
whose
v
ii
-
^
nakire P l
busu
a
is
bu
bu
sa
pin
mat
onslaught
the deluge, who overwhelms the land of enemies,
TJlfc
mu
tJTT^ sam -
=TTT
kit
^-ITA-TTA -f
tar
-
gi
gi
ilu
$ar
hu
who
overthrows
the wicked,
a powerful god,
1.
A name
I
or
title
of the god Ninib.
2.
3.
tufc-ma-tn occurs as a variant reading.

i,
Pret.
fr.
belli.
THE PRAISE OF THE GOD NINIB
25
V
.fa
-ET
/</
^ *e -
tTTlt
-
^TT
mil
-
IH 1
lik -
+ IH
nu
-
-4-
*T
nu
u
is
Su
ur
fame(e)
whose
counsel
not void,
the light of
heaven
Hfirsitim
(tint)
~T
-
mu$
par
du
ki
rib
apsi
(and) earth,
who
gives light to
the depth
of the abyss,
<T/^
V- ^T<
-
^ ^TT^
mu
-
-ET
ni$
la
ab
bit
Urn
nu
ti
$ak
who
annihilates
the wicked,
who
brings to subjection the
JJ^THMTI
ma
-
V $a
gi
ri
mu
hal
- lik
za
ia
ri
ina
in
disobedient,
who
destroys
foes,
whose name
-Hf-T"
puhur
Hani P l
the assembly of the gods
9-^1
$um-$u
-Hfilu
ma
am
ma
la
no god
can
enu (u)
ka
i$
balati
life,
ilu
rim
nu
humble,
the giver of
a merciful
god
V
$a
to
*TT*-I
si
-
AtTTT^
tabu
is
TU- ^TT^mA
a
- Sib
-I
beli
pu
$u
alu
Kal
hi
whom
to pray
good,
who
dwells
in Calah,
rabe(e}
beli
-a
lord,
[I]
AHur - nasir-aplu
Sarru
dan
nu
great lord,
my
I
Aur-nasir-pal [do pray], the
mighty king,
-El
far
la
V^T-HP
$a
-
<
far
kul
-
$ar
ktXXati
na
an
lat
king of the world, a king
without equal,
king of the
whole
26
INTRODUCTION TO THE ANNALS OF ASSUR-NASIR-PAL
ilu
Sam
su
kis - $at
ni$e ? l
of the four quarters,
the
Sun of
the hosts
'
of men,
x
dear to
Bel
HF-
Hf-'
na
ra
-am
and
Ninib,
darling of
<
|7
-Hfilu
^!I
Da
-
*&
gan
-^H JT
ka
-
nm
tu
Anu
and
Dagan,
beloved of
ET-T
Hani
Pl
rabuti P l
$ah
tu
na
ra
am
the great gods,
submissive,
the darling of
me
gir
llu
Bel
$a
thy heart,
the prince,
the favourite of
Bel,
whose
Sffl
Sangut
^TT
-
<-tW
eli
-Hfilu
-
Hf<
ti
-
su
ka
rabiti
(/?')
priesthood
unto
thy great godhead
i is
ti
bu
ma
tu
$ar
h'
du
pala
Su
good
so that
thou hast established
his reign,
>&ar -
</
ma
with
tukulti
(//')
AHur
ASSur
the valiant hero,
who
the help of
3<?// -
$u
ittalaku (ku)
ma
ina
mal
ki P l
$a
his lord
proceeds
and among
the princes
of
THE PERSONAL CHARACTERISTICS OF THE KING
27
-ET
&<5
-
rcz/
irbitta
(id)
$a
nin
$u
la
z$u(u)
the four quarters
a rival
has not,
&m
rc'w
e
-
Êvyyym
tab
-
-ET
la
THT^în
a
-
tT
ra
te
di
ru
tukmati
the shepherd of marvellous treasures,
who
fears not
opposition,
du
gab $u
$a
ma
hi
ra
la
the mighty flood
who
an opponent
does not
tm=
i$u(u)
^
Sarru
-^TT^
^
kflf -
<
-ET
la
-
TJ
a
possess,
the
mu - $ak - ni - e$ king who has brought to subjection
those that
&z
^w
/^-^
(were not subjecti to him, /
^ w ho
nap
har
Sat
ni$e P l
the whole of
the hosts
of
men
pi
lu
zikaru
dan
nu
mu
kab
bi
- is
ki$ad
/the knecki of j \
rules,
the strong man,
who
tramples on
ai
bi-$u
I
da
i$
i
kul-lat
all
nakire P l
mu - pa
ri
ru
his foe,
treads \ under foot
who
enemies,
who
shatters
ki
is
ri
mul
tar
hi
$a
ina
tukulti (ti)
mighty battalions,
who
I
with
the help of
i6
13
ET
Hani P
rabuti P
bele
$u
ittalaku(ku]-ma
the great gods,
his lords,
proceeds and
28
INTRODUCTION TO THE ANNALS OF ASSUR-NASIR-PAL
JT^TT >^T
matdti ? l
all
kali
h' -
na
kat
su
f
ikûd(ud^
has
\
hur
$a
ni
lands
with his hand
the highlands
\conquered,J
pat
gim
ri-Su-nu
pi
lu
ma
bi-lat
su
nu
in all their extent
has subdued and
their tribute
im
hu
ru
sa
bit
li
i -
ti
$a
kin
has received,
the taker of
hostages,
who
has
i -
te
eli
kali
si -
na
matati P l
triumphed
over
all
lands.
THE ENDOWMENT OF THE TEMPLE OF THE

SUN-GOD.
From
apil-iddina, king of Babylon,
[Brit.
the Tablet of Sippar inscribed in the reign of Nabuabout 879 853 B. C.

Mus., No. 12137.]
ilu
SamaS
b'elu
rabu(u)
- $ib
E-babbar-ra
in
Mamas',
the great lord,
who dwelleth
Ebabbara,
V
fa
<M*ffl
ki
is
-
T-*T<Ef
Sip-par
K1
W $a ina
^VTM
e -
rib
$a- a
ti
which
in
Sippar,
which during
the troubles
5.
<MEjjT
u
-m
dal
-
ff<
ha
-
u ^<
a
-
w v
fa
ti
matu Akkadi
m^
Akkad
u
-
<
KI
and
disturbances
in
amelu
Su
tu
amglu nakiru
Urn
nu
sah-
the Sutu,
the evil foe,
had des-
-TI
hu
<=TTT<=
-
tmt
u
-
hal
It
ku
usuratt P l
troyed (and)
had
cast
down
the sculptures,
/r
jw
//
ma
Su
ma
h'
kin
Su
his statutes
were forgotten and
his
image
and
3o
THE ENDOWMENT OF THE TEMPLE OF THE SUN-GOD

T
I- *T
his
ME
i
-
^7
na
Jin HI
kate
simati P l-$u
^ gn
par
-
ET
-
-ET
la
ip
h'd
ma
and
ornaments
had disappeared
none
~TT^
##
-
ET^TET
ma
-
tTT
Si
-
A4f
im
-
HF-
<T- -TI
-
E
$ar
///
na
ma
ma$
h' -
hu
beheld them.
Simmas's'ihu
king
Babili
h'h'n-$u
ft
ta
al
ma
his
pa
ni - $u
la
of Babylon his Statue
sought
for,
but
countenance he 1 did not
<
id
-
JT
-
ff
sa
<MfT
-
I
Su
<
u
T-*TT
simati P l
-
I
su
-ET
la
din
$u
lam
show 2 him,
his
image
and
his
ornaments he did
not
tEAÊT BfTtro Ve^HFi

-
-Hf-^T
tlu
=TTT=v
u
-
mur - ma
find.
ni
ib -
ha
(?)
$a
pa
an
Samas
$at-
An
enclosure
before
Samas
he
-TTI
ri
-
H
sa
-
t^ ET
am
-
-.
<T^
^H
Hf-
^TTT=
u
-
mi ET
kin
-
ma
and
sattukki-û
erected
regular offerings for
ma him he appointed, and
T ^TTTT
v ^ It
<T-
^
Sippar
KI
<-TTTT
E-kur-sum-utabtiî)
tangu
the priest
EkurumuSabi
=TTT*=
amelu
of Sippar,
1^
V
$a
_
af
fo;
jna
dannati
the seer,
he settled (there).
*5.
-tt
ilu
During the distress
and
hu
$ah
hi
at the
2.
$a
Ka^-su
nddin
ahi
famine
l.
I.
time of
KaSSu-nadin-ahi,
e.,
ama.
Literally, "grant."
SUSPENSION OF THE TEMPLE SERVICES
C3
Sarri
tfl 3= -TTI
ip
-
sis -
sattukku
$u
turn
pa
ri
ma
the king,
that regular offering
was stopped and
ba
'
til
sur
ki
nu
ina
ul
bar-$akin-$um
the drink-offering ceased.
Under
Eulbar-Sakin-Sum,
farri
kur-$um-u$ab$i($i)
Sangit
Sip -par
KI
the king,
Ekur-s'um-us'abs'i,
the priest of
Sippar,
amelu b aru
$arri
beli-û
im
hur
ma
and
I
gi
ni
the seer, before
the king his lord
went,
/"the appointed!
offerings for /
-My ^y^ -yiÊT ^

ilu
-T
ka
V&
akale P l
SamaS
ba
til
ik
bi
-ma
I
i
ama
have ceased"
he
said.
ka
of food
I
I
ka ka
kurunnu
kurmat
the director of
of sesame-wine, the support of
sag
gil
ina
libbi
gi
ni
ilu
Bel
Esagil
according to the appointed offerings of Bel,
na
ilu
SamaS
he
u
1
kin
ma
kur-$um-u$abh($t)
for
Santas'
ordained and
to Ekur-s'um-us'abs'i
40.
^yyyy
^TT
altl
K *T
Sip -par
E^?
tE
i -
Sangu
the priest of
i.
7.
amslu barti
a
rim
(it).
-II
Men (en)
Sippar,
the seer, he granted
One
e.,
Eulbar-gakin-s'um.
32
garden
in the district of
Alu-eSSu *,
which
is
45.
ki
-
rib
Babili KI
na
ilu
Samat
in
Babylon,
to
iddin-ma
he gave and
pan
to
E-kur-$um-usab'$i($i}
$angu
the priest of
Sip-par
Ekur-Sum-US'abs'i,
Sippar,
sad-gil
(it).
ar
ka
nu
ilu
Nabu-apil-
the seer,
he entrusted
Afterwards
Nabu-apil-
so.
iddina (no)
$ar
Babili KI
ni
bit
iddina,
king
of Babylon,
the elect of
ilu
Marduk
na
ram
ilu
Marduk,
the darling of
A - nim Anu
ilu
Ea
and
Ea,
m
OTW
-
*m
lib
-
3
bi
-4ilu
i
Zarpanitu
zi
-
A<5
ik
ru
who
rejoices
the heart
of Zarpanitu,
the valiant
^T
r
-
55.
W
$a
du
I ana
for
Sarru
it
as
is
mu
na
a$
hero,
who
kingship
adorned,
who
bears
pit
pa
ni
iz
zi
tint
sa
kip
ameiu
na foru
um . nu
a terrible
I.
bow,
City."
who overthrew
the evil foe,
Alu-esit
"The New
ACCESSION OF NABU-APIL-IDDINA
33
TTt
ameiu
W *V*-< ACMJl^;
Sa
$u
tu
htr
bu
hi
tu
$u
un
the Sutu,
whose
sin
was
great,
60.
T
$a
-EET
tu
-
IH
ur
-TTA
gi
-
:^TT
mil
v m^w
"' atlt
<HT
ana
to
Akkadi KI
whom
avenge
Akkad,
?w
Sub
ma
ha
zi
na
di
l parakke P
to
make
cities habitable,
to
found
shrines,
w.9
.?ttr
usurati pl
sul
lum
parse
to fashion
sculptures,
to preserve statutes
^/7
lu
di
kun
ni
sat
tuk
ki
and
ordinances,
to establish
regular offerings,
stir -
ru
uh
nindabe P l
belu
rabu(uj
to increase
free-will offerings
the great lord
TTT 70.
ln
Marduk
'V
0//a
^r
ta
ri
'
Marduk
with a right sceptre,
the rule of
ni'Sc'
Pl
pi
h'
mal
lit
the peoples
to undertake,
had
ka
tu$-hi
llu
$ama$
belu
rabil
$a
istu
urne pl
invested,
SamaS, the great lord,
who
for
many
34
ma
'
du
ti
it
li
matu Akkadi KI
days
with
Akkad
75.
ik
-
t
is -
vbit -
v
su
ki
-
me
lu
sad
su
ina
in
had been angry
(and) had averted
his neck,
^T*
pall
the reign of
"3&
ilu
Tf
-
^f
-
Nabu
apil
iddina(na]
sar
Bdbi-
Nabu-apil-iddina,
king
of Baby-
//
sa
ma
ir -
si -
ma
sah-
lon,
had mercy
(and)
turn-
hi
ra
pa
ni-su
sur
ti
sal -
mi
su
ed
his countenance.
His image,
sir
pu
sa
ha
as
bi
,
sikin-su
sihis
ma
ti-su
.....
of
.......
his statue
and
ornaments
ina
bir
//
"* ru
Pu
rat
ti
sa
on
the opposite side of
the Euphrates
.yyj
<5a/
^^
-
yj
ereb-Samî
^ ^
^|
na
in
-
on
Ey
ma
and
mir
the western bank
were found
tTTTTHF'"
-fcTTT-^T
alli
ilu
Nabu-nddin
sum
sangu
the priest of
Sip-par
am * lu bdru
the seer,
ina
Nabu-nadin-um,
Sippar,
of
RECOVERY OF THE SUN-GOD'S IMAGE
=TTTT
'"
>
E-tur-Xum-uXa&fi($t)
the seed of
Sanû
the priest of
lj/
"
Sip-par
Ekur-Sum-uabi,
cfc
Sippar,
Jl
$u
ff
tf
-IE
.
////;/
/
mi
the seer,
that
image
to
Nabu-
-III
<//>//
tmt
it
iddina(na)
sarri
beli-su
kal-lim-ma
and
apil-iddina,
the king,
his lord,
showed
Nabu-aptl-iddina(na)
$ar
Babili ^ l
$a
Nabu-apil-iddina,
king of
Babylon,
who
epe$(e$]
the preparation
sal
mi
su-a
turn
ka
bu
Sum
ma
of such an image
had commanded him and
ud
gu
lu
.
pa
nu
u$-hi
sal
mu
that
Su-a
- turn
entrusted
to him,
image
mur
ma
and
pa
his
nu-su
ir
ti -
su
i -
te
li
is
beheld
countenance
was glad
T ana
(and) joyful
was
Til
kab
-
TT!
la
*^L ^TT
as su
l
^
epe$(e$}
sal
his spirit.
To
the restoration
of that
//////
zu
un-su
ib
Si -
ma
ina
image
i.
his attention
he turned and
with
kab-ta-as-su
kabtat-sit.
3*
36
ni
me
ki
sa
ilu
E
Ea,
ina
si -
pir
ilu
Nm-
the
wisdom
of
with the craft of
Nin-
igi-nangar-bu
igi-nangar-bu,
ilu
Guskin
banda
ilu
Nin-
GuSkin-banda,
Nin-
- rcz
ilu
Nin
zadim
ina
hurasi
ru
us
si
kurra
(and) Nin-zadim with
sumptuous gold (and)
^<^T!
abnu ukni
ib
-
Hf-^T
ilu
-II
belt
Elrabi
bi
sa
lam
SamaS
bright
lapis lazuli
the image of
Samas,
the great lord,
ki
m'$
kan
ni
ina
te
HI
ti
sa
he carefully
prepared.
With
the purification
of
i.,vilu
E
Ea
ilu
Marduk
ma
har
and
Marduk
before
^ n Sama$
ina
E
'.f
Kar
Za-gin
na
Sa
kisad
the bank of
ama
in
E-Kar-Zaginna
on
Tâ *naru pu
-!!- ^T<
_
*T- 1
p}
his
_
ra f
ft
$u
AHFf.^TT ET jm _\ j/ . Wrt
he washed and
^
/r .
Ef
;//t2:
T^
.
N:he Euphrates
mouth
he took up
his dwelling (there).
<4t^^r
t
(
Q V
OxC
41 /u
-3
rvcî
Ich
CtC
^tt
'
-
.,^X"
2 1
.A
t-
THE SIEGE OF DAMASCUS BY SHALMANESER AND THE TRIBUTE OF JEHU, KING OF

II
ISRAEL, 842
[From paper squeezes
in
B.
C.^ ^. t^â~~*~f
e
J
1 1
the British
Museum, No/. 1143 and
4 b /] oft
"
/;/(/
<IW
XVIII
the i8th
--M
l palef -ia
f*e*p*"
tETKfflf XVI
\
>
I
Samtu
TJ&THK
n* ru
X
JJ"
Puratu
In
year of
mv
J
reign
(forthei 1 6th J
time the Euphrates
U'
a.
T
"'
IK
"
Af
'
V
ilu
Ha-za
$a
" M/ "
I DimaSki
^
crossed.
azael
of
Damascus
TTEIK
a
-
mi
gi
wnmanati
F l-$u
it
ta
kil-
-^4^
in
the multitude
of his troops
ATI
ummanati P l-
5.
If
a
-
and
his troops
in
great
numbers
^t
id
-
7.
ka
Sa
ni
ru
ubdn
the
Sade(e)
I
w he
assembled,
Saniru,
summit
th e
which
\mountains, /
T
tfo
is
Tl
=TTI
</aw -
^ Hf<
nu
ti -
I
Su
na
-I
na
I i
at the
entrance to/
Lebanon,
his fortress
EXTRACTS FROM THE RECORDS OF

TIGLATH-PILESER
I.
III.
The
reduction of
Hamath and
in
the cities tributary to
Uzziah of Judah, "rfrnntffi B. C.

the British
Museum, Nos vjii5a
1
=5
e.]
XIX
Nineteen
na
gi
Sa
alu
Ha
am
ma
at
ti
districts
of
the city of
Hamath
j\
<//
a/am' P l (ni)
'
$a
/'r
//
su
nu
together with
the cities
round about them,
Sa
In'
tarn - tim
sa
twhich\ ( on the \ I (a^) i \shore of/
the sea
of
hilmu(mu) the setting
of the sun,
sa
i -
na
hi
it
ti
kul
lul
te
which
in
sin
and
?** iniquity (vO
na
Az
ri
(i.
ia
e.,
ki
mu
to
Azariah
Uzziah)
they had detacjbed.
na
mi
sir
matu
AHur
utir
I
ra
to
the territory of
Assyria
brought
[back.
OVERTHROW OF
*'*
;
UZZIAH'S
CONFEDERA/Y
/
/
T-
41
***
y
pi
^yys
mnclu
tEff
ja
Kw -II -TI*
amelu
^ foj .
/ ^<fc4g*^
ht
,/
fate
p a hatt
Pl
My
officers
as
governors
MRRfT<?/r-
.?-
aX
I
kun
;
XXX. M,
III.
over them
appointed
3o,3oo
^____
_
niSe f l
people
.*/.
'
as
^
I
su
ha
am
ma
ullu
ki
rib
carried
awa
from
alani
V*
$u
nu
ma
and
pihat
in the district of
their cities
Ku
tyyyt xp
if
fa
I
^
as
tyyyy
-
bit
settled.
II.
The
tribute of
Menahem
of
Samaria and of other princes
of Syria and Asia Minor, 738 B. C.

in the British
Museum, Nos. 115
115
e.]
ma
da
at
iu
Sa
Ku
i/S
la
a}
pi
The
tribute
of
KuStagpi
rt ^
-:yyy Ku - um - mu
of
^
-
T T I<
y^
-
y?
ai
Etyy
Ra
-
ha
sun
nu
Kummuh,
\
Rezin
\
-\
.L1.9-,,
.^V
H<I
.^2i^
III
v S3*
-t^T
JT
TM
I- s=
Me
-
A
-
Afl^ I-
.&***
"x7 '" "
Dimaski
ni
hi
im
me
of Damascus,
Menahem
Talu
%
-Til
-
^T TH?
-
A
Hi
-
*m
ru
Sa
me
r6
na
ai
of Samaria,
t:TTT um - mu " Hiram - Q 1

1
-tTT
^ /u
<^ E^TT T? II
^'wr
-
T
"
z
^TT
&'
3/'
^T -!< 3 A-HF/'/
ra
-_
ti -
bi
'
f
of Tyre,
Sibittibi'li
tTT
a/"
^^
Gu
ut>
-ET
-
TI TI
-
-TTT- -TTI -TI
la
ai
-,
ri
ik
Id
of Gebal,
Urikki
al
in
pj
Sl
ri
a In
Qar
ga .
of Kui,
Pisiris
of Carche-
ITI
iS -
ai
T^^HFE
-
-fTT
alu
W< fxfc ET sT!T TMJ

Ha
-
ni
ilu
am
ma
fa
ai
mish,
".
Eni-ilu
of Hamath,
'
m Pa
^ ^y t^ ^ < mu-u
-
-tTT
alu
^ fc^ A-4Sa
-
-ET
la
-
TI TI
ai
na
am
am
Panammu
T
of Sam'al
-TI -ET E-^TT

-
v\
matu
m Tar - hu
^
Da
ET TI
-
TI T
*^
.
la
ra
Gur-gu - ma
of
ai
Su
lu -
ma
al
Tarhulara
*
:
Gureum,
Sulumal
?T?
T
"'
^T! <!^= -E liU

-
-tT
alu
Me
lid -
da
ai
di
lu
Kas-
of Melid,
Dadllu
of Kas-
TRIBUTE OF MENA HEM AND OTHER PRINCES
ka
at
'"
as
sur
me
" M/
Ta
bal
at
ka,
Uassurme
of Tabal,
T5?TAE5*-<T<
m
v-tiT^TTITI
HM/
US
hi
it
ii
Tu
na
'
at
TIH m
Ur
T
-
bal-
UShitti
of Atun,
Urbal-
ET
la
-
TI
a
v -E^T
mdtn
IK
ha
^T
-
TI TI
-
-E^T IK c=4 TTu

-
Tu
na
ai
ha
am
me
la
of Tuhana,
Tuhamme
TI TI
-
-E^T -Til ^TT

tu
-
MTT^
m
un
*-
da
ai
ri
im
of I^tunda,
J'
,.
Urimme
fT-nr.-Tf.il
aln
*rff*ff
t
Hu
h'?n
na
ai
Za - hi
bi
sar
rat
of Husimna,
Zabibe
the queen of
-^
]natu
ri
bi
hurasu
gol^j
kaspu
silver,
anaku
lead,
parzillu
Arabia, ~~
iron,
ma$ak
piri
sinni
piri
lu - bul - ti
bir -
me
elephants' hide,
ivory,
garments of variegated
stuffs,
* ub * tu
kitu
St'P* lu
ta
Ml
tu
cloth,
purple wool,
ar ga - man-nu crimson wool,
?"
urkarinnu
minima
eve
/
ak
ru
ni
sir
ti
?/7-wood,
}nrkarinnu-\
\
wood
valuable thing.
\
treasures
44
EXTRACTS FROM THE RECORDS OF TIGLATH-HLESER
III
t yyy= ~I<
r
\u
it
^\
M -^T
I
I immere P l
fat
HI Hf<
^((&/
of royalty, 1
sheep, t
I
J<7
^
-
<MTC
ar
-
=TTT<
-
sipaii
Pl
su
nu
whose
fleeces
ga - man with crimson
nu
.fcrr
/rt /
?> -
vr
~~âme(e)
mut
tap
he
- ii
r~T/r~
are dyed,
birds of
the heaven
that
fly,
TITCT^T
$a
gap
pi- hi-mi
na
ta
kil - te
sar
pu
whose
r
wings
v
with
,**^*-^'
purple <?u*-
are dyed,
horses,
mules,,
si
ni
im * r "
and
sheep,
cam-
/
els
na
ka
te
di
(and)
female camels
with
III <T
their foals
1.
7.
received.
e.,
royal treasures.
2.
LI.
2936.
CONQUEST OF THE CITIES OFPHQENICIA
45
III.
The death
of
Pekah and the accession of Hoshea
to
the throne of Israel,

in .the
|H
b.]
B. C.
122,
British
Museum, Nos. ii6a, ii6b,
1243,
I24b, I2a*ftnd 125
Ga
al
'
za
alu
bi-
The
cities of
Gal'za
(and) Abi-
il
ak
ka
sa
pat
m<ittt
Bit
Hu
urn
! .
ri
lakka,
which
{J^Vm}
Israel
rap
. . .
.
su
na
in
its
si
hir
ti -
su
li
the wide-spreading,
whole extent
a
to
;/'
j/r
'"^ /w
ASStir
fir
ra
the territory of
Assyria
restored,
/a
i
*t
amclu
Su
ud
Sa fo
pi
ia
amelu
foj
My
officers
as governors
eli ,-
su-nu
a$
I
kun
Ha
nu
?iu
over them
appointed.
Hanno
^
az
-
ff
za
-
tET
at
-
If
ai
^V
T^
.
[-ET
.la
3p
-
-HF.
pa
before
an
of
Gaza
r
i
i.
Literally
"Land of the House of Omri".
1*.
46
III,
-I]
m
my
_
I
- ia
-Elf
*
HJ
ip
-
^T <Tpar
-
[~I El
-
If
a
-
kakke P l
Si
dit -
ma
na
arms
Jf>
fled
and
to
main fifu
Ug
rj
na fr
fu
alu
ffa
az ,
Egypt
escaped.
Ga-
makkura
za
I
stt
busd
hi
conquered,
his property,
his possessions,
-ET
Hani F l (nt)-su
his
...
v tTTTT -U cC
mdtu
as
I
lit
-la
off.
.
...
.
Bit
Hu
umIs-
gods
carried
The
land of
*W
ri - a
I
Fl
-
JI
su
[T
...
. .
/
the
//wr
wz'^
di
rael
whole of
his people
together with
TMt^KI^
ar
-
T~nf
a
-
^'
ti -
su
nu
na
m ^ tu Assur
Assyria
v-T
-i
is
tlllÎII?
it
ra
their possessions
T
to
carried.
^T
a
-
fT<
-
tE^s
sarra
-
i
hi
-
/
nu
[<m
-
^
pit
-
EI
ma
ka
ha
ki
Pekah
their king
they overthrew and
si
na
sarnt
ti
na
Hoshea
to
the kingship
over
eli
su
-nu
as
I
kun
them
i.
appointed.
LI. 6
18.

V
CJ
I.
I-'
The
Botta,
Fall of Samaria, 722 B. C.
J*
145.]
[From
Monument de
Ninive, vol. IV,
pi.
I"
-III
-
tWf T-
Sa
me
rg
na
I
al
me
ak
I
$ud
The
city of Samaria
besieged,
took.
<T- TT XXVII. M, //.

27,290
TC,
T<
*
nt'Se
I
P* libbi -
XC
or the
peole
that dwelt
therein
I
rti
la
;
L
50
'V
narkabaii P l
ma
libbi -
su
nu
carried
away
chariots
from them
sur-ma
took
.
si
it
tu
ti
i -
nu-su-nu
and
the others
their share
u
I
sa
hi
- iz
su
- tid
saki
ia
cli
su-nu
caused to take.
My
officer
over them
as
I
kun
ma
bilat
sarri
mah
ri
appointed and
the tribute of the former
king
e I
mid
laid
su
nu
ti
upon them.
13.
i.
LI. li
i^
48
EXTRACTS FROM THE
ANNALS^F SARGON
II.
Sargon's campaign against Ashdod,

Botta,
711
B. C.
Ill,
[From
Monument de
Ninive, vol. IV,
pi.
82 and vol.
pi. 65.]
ff
^4
-
^TI
sa
-
-TTI
r/
far
* u
At
du
di
Azuri,
king of
Ashdod,
na
la
na
/U
J
Xe
to
no longer
*X
ê
bil
te
lib
bit -
hi
nng
^yx^
tribute
in his heart
.C4-{
Pu
u d-nia
na
sarrani P l (nt)
li
me-
planned and
to
the kings
in his neigh-
^
mAtli
ti
su
zi
ra
ti
Assur
KI
bourhood
**
J
-
(proposals of) hatred
against Assyria
>>
^xV^
^rfEVET
^
-
&
as a$
C(/W^<Q-
jy
-
<HH
-^r
*w
e -
*>-
pur
sent.
ma_
s su
JM
limuttu(tu)
tfe* evil
Because
pu - h he had done
^//
/'^
Pl
mati-su
be - lu
su
over
the people of his land
his rule
Ef F A <tt -K
X-/r
TMI
a
-
;;m
^4 -
/'
mi
ti
hu
ta
Urn -hi
ed
and
Ahimiti,
his twin-brother,
-<!<
a
-
[<^H
eli
-
I
su
-
^
nu
a$
I
na
$arru
ti
kuu
to
I.
the kingship
be-lu-su
over them
appointed.
bslut-su.
REVOLT OF ASHDOD
49
*
'" Mtl/ "
-<T<
-
//<//
//
ib
za
lip
ti
The
yatti,
planning
iniquity,
H
fo
-
IiU
/
-
^TI
su
i
-
*ffl ET
zi
-
Tl
ru
ma
and
la
at
na
d^Mfr
his rule
hated,
latna
/a
ifo
^/
'"
to
kusst
$a
kima
like
$a- a
$u
nu- ma
with no
clîm
the throne,
who
them
pa-lah
t. iX*
be
lu
^^^
//^)
Az
i -
du
rab-
^/reverence
for authority
did not
know,
they rais-
du
$u
un
na
ug
gat
ed
over them.
In
the anger of
lib
bi
ia
it
tf
'?
narkabat sepe
u-ia
feet
my
heart
with
the chariot of
and
da
ai
la
ip
par
ku
na
my
side
do not depart,
to
Variant reading: J
t^J^ Ej
Efl^
la-ma-ni.
50
EXTRACTS FROM THE ANNALS OF SARGON
-tTT
^ /M
*^ -I Ifr
As
-
[--IT fc&ffc ~T< JT

ah'
du
di
$arru
ti -
$u
hi
it
mu-tti
Ashdod,
his royal city,
in haste
m IH
al
I
El
ma
^TT
alu
^SE ^T ^T
As
-
-tTT
alu
-TTA
Gi
-
A4f -E^
im
-
lik -
du
du
tu
went, and
Ashdod,
Gimtu
(and)
tj^f
As
-
H
me
I
^T
du
di
im
mu
I
al
aksud(ud*) conquered, d
Asdudimmu
besieged,
z7az' P l
$i
bu
ut
lib -
bi
su
un
sa
su
The gods^^/
that dwelt
therein,
[R
<2
i^
di'
tTII T
/'^
himself
<ff
-M
sal
i'(^)
<W
^T
^7
mati-û
hurasu
gold,
kaspu
silver,
together with
the people
of his land,
*TTT*
-TTIT
ET- I
I
a
-
makkur
the possessions of
ekalli-û
na
la
ti
his palace,
as
booty
am
I
nu-su
alani f l
su-nu
ti
na
e$ -
Ju
ti
counted.
Those
cities
anew^
j
I
â/
/^ ^
matati
ki
sit
ti
kate
ia
took.
People
/from (various)i the prisoners

\
of
my hands,
lands,
i -
na
lib -
bi
u
1
se - Sib
;
amelu
$u
ud
$a fo
therein
settled
my
officer
TAKING OF ASHDOD
-II
J '" t / "
'
51
-TI*
pahaii
<-tH
eli
-
I
Su
-
*
nu
a$
I
-TAHTCF
set
ET
ma
and
î?/
kun
as ruler
^
ntie P l
over them
//
//
matu
AHur
KI
I
am
nu
with
the people of
Assyria
reckoned (them).
i.
IV, 82,
11.
and
III,
65,
1.
f.
SENNACHERIB'S INVASION OF PALESTINE, AND THE SIEGE OF JERUSALEM, 701 B. C.

[From
a cylinder in
the British
Museum, No. 12174.]
i -
na
sal
si
gir
ri
ia
na
matu Ha-at-ti
In
my
third
expedition
to
tKf
/
I
IH
-
I
"'
m
Zw
-
-E^TT *E
//
/$
^
sar
the land oftheHatti
-tTT
alu
=ETT
Si-
went.
Lull,
king
of Si-
un
ni
pul
hi
me
lam
me
be
lu
ti
ia
don,
fearVjôf the splendouf
of
my
dominion
hu
p^
su
ma
na
ru
uk
Id
kabal
jinto thel
\
overwhelmed and
afar off
midst /
tam-tim
of the sea
in
na
fled
bit -
ma
and
mata-su
his land
I
e -
mid
alu
Si-
/ he
subdued.
Si-
^T *W
du
-
un
ilu
alu
jrabu(u)
Si
du
un
nu
sihru
the less,
don
the great,
Sidon
SUBMISSION OF SIDON
53
^!T t yyyy -TT* Estf *T

alu
-tTT
tj/ "
ft
-Til
-
fcU
-
^
-
Bit
zi
it
te
Sa
ri
ip
tu
<-
Bit-zitte,
Zarephath,
tTT
ET
Mahalliba,
T
Jfr
=TTT=
-
U$u,
Ak
jsi
bi
alu
Ak
ku
aldni ? l
$u
Akzib (and)
Akko,
his strong ci-
tyyyy
dan
-
^B
durani P l (ni)
fortresses,
'
Tl
a
-
EH
$ar
nu
ti
bit
ties,
the places
-<y<
ri
-
^yyyyik-Eybit
i -
ti
ma$
ki
ti
tuk
la
ti -
hi
for pasture
and
watering,
jjuL*~
the stations for his troops,

k.fc^-'k'
ra
sub
bat
kakki
llu
Assur
belt
ia
the might
of the arms
of Ashur,
my
lord,
^
,
tT -TI
/j
//
pu overwhelmed them,
E! *; JT ^ -<!< ma su nu
-
-TI* -^
ik
-
JT
-
/V*- *TTMf
\
I
ti -
nu
su
$e -
pu
and
they submitted
at
my
te&.
ba
lu
i -
na
l?u
kusst
$arru
of the
ti
Tuba'al
on
the throne
kingdom
T tif
eli
-
*
u
I
su-un
$e-$ib-ma
biltu
/
man
da
at
tu
over them
seated
and
taxes and tribute
&r.
54
7 SENNACHERIB'S INVASION OF PALESTINE
V.yV,
-<
M
-
-<y< SET?
ti
-
v
Sat
be - lu
ia
MJ< ti
to
my
dominion,
^"fc*^
yearly,
-Ey e=u]fe Sam la Unni*
-^y Êy
ba
-
at
lu
unceasing,
TT=
w
I
Ml
^zw
=ETT
'
*JZ
-
53
-
I
$u
"HIT
$a
ru
us
<tt Mi
in-
fixed
upon him.
Of
Me-
/2?'
z'/w
mu
alu
Sam
si
mu
ru
na
ai
nahem
of Samsimuruna,
T
"'
-^T --T 4HFTu

-
m
lu
'
^TT
alu
ÊTT
Si
-
^T
du
-
tTW
un
-
^T Tf
na
-
ba
ai
Tuba'al
of Sidon,
ti
alu
ru
da
ai
Abdili'ti
*"
ft
alu
Arvad,
ru
mil
ki
Gu
ub
la
ai
Mi
Mi-
Urumilki
of Gebal,
//'
in
ti
alu
As
du
da
ai
m Pu
du
ilu
tinti
of Ashdod,
Pudu'il
matu firf
m ^ m _ ma
na
aj
m J am
of
Beth-Ammon,
mu _ su _ na . Kammusunadbi
v
matu
Ey
A-HP --T
'
T^
-
TI
HPilu
Ma
ba
ai
II II Malik
ram
mu
of Moab,
THE TRIBUTE OF NEIGHBOURING PRINCES
55
/w
w;w
7^0
ai
Warrant P l (W)
of
Edom,
kings
X-<z
/i
fo
Si
di
of the
Wern country,
\i
all
of them,
districts
J
aa
-
lu
ti
.
ta
mar
'
ta
su-nu
r i cn
ka
bit
tu
of broad extent,
yX'j^
tne i r
presents
a
f
di
'buh
na
mah
ri
ia
v
iS
together \ property
before
me, ^
'"~~_^ V^_^ they carnecT and \
_
-
$u
nim
Si
ku
'
Tepe
ia
Si
id
ka
kissed
my
feet.
But
Sidka,
^rtr
a '"
/$
^'<2
al
lu
na
sa
la
king
of Ashkelon,
who
-Hf-T
Hani P l
the gods
had
ik
[I*Î T^^T nu-Su a na

-
S^-TTI^
ni
-
^TTIT
bit
ri
ia
not submitted
to
my
yoke,
lofthel
*
I
abi-su
sa
-
a-su
aSSat
su
mareP -$u
l
mara/i P l -Su
his daughters,
of his father, himself,
his wife,
his sons,
I
ahe P l
-
^ ^M
zer
bit
-ET
I
as
I
Su
abi-û
jof his\
\ father,/
su
ha
L
am
ma
his brothers, the seed fofthel \ house/
carried aAay,
and
I_^
56
SENNACHERIB'S INVASION OF PALESTINE
?m
maiu
Assur KI
u
I
ra
a$-su
Sarru
lu-
to
Assyria
brought him.
Sarrulu-
-III
rz'
tg
mar
son
*ffl
-<T<
-
Ru
kib
ti
Sarru
su
nu
dari,
of Rukibtu,
v^vv
their former
ru
eli
nise P l
alu
Is
ka
a/-
king,
over
the people
of Ashke-
^
I
/#
w<z
wa
dan
bilti
/c,
^|
Ion
appointed,
and
the delivery
of taxes
-III -TTI
â/
-
tff
-
H
be
-
ISI
lu
-
-<!<
ti
-
ri
ia
I
e -
mid
su
ma\?
(and)
presents
to
my
dominion
laid
on him, that
i - $a
at
ap
$a
ni
i -
na
me
ti
ik
he might bear
my
yoke.
In
the course
gir
ri
ia
alu
B'tt
da
gan
na
alu
la-
of my expedition
Beth-dagon,
Jop-
tyyy,=
-
rt '
na
ai
bar
i
ka
pa,
Bene-berak,
\^^
-tTTT
A
-
zu
ru
alani P l
cities
(ni)
sa
Si
id-
Azuru,
of
Sid-
RECOVERY OK AS11KKLON
57
$a
na
Upe
ia
ar
hi$
ka,
which
to
my
feet
quickly
-ET
la
ik
-
nu
$u
I
a!
me
I
ak$ud(ud)
a$
I
lu
la
had not submitted,
besieged,
captured,
carried off
Ai/
'
la
sun
amsl? Sakkanakke ?\
amc hl
'
'
rube
Pl
g vernors
<MBj
w
.y^r
m'Se
Pl
(fa
alu
Am
kar
ru
na
}a
and people
of Ekron,
who,
v
'
-
-7
>
$arra-su-nu
their king,
f
be I
a
\
di
1m wile*
PadI,
^^
bi
the
commands
and
*
ma-mt\ compact
sa
'
ttt
A$snr
Assyria,
KI
ri
tu
parzilli
"
of
--^
I
into 'fetters
of iron\;
zi/
du
cast
ma
na
W
Ha za
-
ki
ia
had
and
to
Hezekiah
main
Ja
da
ai
id
di
nu-hi
\ *
nak
ris
of Judah
had given him
as a foe
<**"t
~~y
LX/*V
*-
*^
na
an
sil
sir -
hi
ip
lah
in
/a
I dun/geon
he imprisoned him,
afraid
was
58
lib
ba
su- un
Warrant P l (ni)
mdiu
Mu
su
ri
their heart.
The
kings
of Egypt,
amelu
^be P
'*
kaSti
'*
narkabati ? l
im ^ ru
sise
Pl
,
the archers,
chariots
(and) horses
v
â
T- -!!!<
jJ/<?
A
ET
ma
and
t
e -
^r
the king
" Z5 ^ M
luh
-hi
mu
ki
la
of
of Efchigfca,
forces
without
^ -m^*-TI^TMff
number,
ri
-
ni
bi
ik
te
<-!
ru
-
HJ^TT
il
-
nim
li
ku
they summoned,
they came
tE^T
i -
t^TTT
ta
-
EDlf
mir
-
^K
ti
su
us
su
un
na
their help.
In
the neighbourhood
alu
Al
ta
ku
el
la -
mu
of Eltekeh
over against
me
fc
j?
-
JH ^f
z#
rw
^
-
tyrft
u
-
V
sa
A-Hf-
"
ku
nu
lu
(their) line of battle
^^K^tJjf^^
.
they cried for

"
^-
ilu
z'
tukulti(ti)
AHur
their arms.
With
the help
of ASSur
T< I
3?//
-
t=m
-
z'/
ti -
su
un
am
da
I
hi
is -
ma
my
lord
with them
fought
and'
DEFEAT OF THE EGYPTIANS AT ELTEKEH
59
at
I
/a
kan
abikta
hi-un
amslu be I
'*
narkalati P l
accomplished
their defeat.
The commander
of the chariots
mare P l
the sons
$ar
matu
Mu
su
ra
ai
and
of the king
of Egypt
<Tsr
-
ESS
amelu
-II
bel
tT
is u -
di
T narkabati P l
'ill
$a
^
tar
with
the
commander
of the chariots
of
the king
Ttu
tTTT<
_
A
"
flfe _ /w ^
jn
of Ethiopia
T
^T
tarn -
^T <
-TTI
-
-TI^
ik
-
JT
Su
-
ha
ri
da
kata
at
the midst
JL
of the battle
>
Al
-
my
hands captured.
alu
ta
ku
alu
Ta
(and)
Eltekeh
am Timnah
na
v>vjt
/
I
z^
I
aJkfad(ud)
as
I
lu
la
$al
la
sun
besieged,
captured,
carried off
their spoil.
rt/
"
^4w
kar
ru
na
I
ah
rib -
ma
To
Ekron
drew near and
"
HfW
Sakkanakke
Pl amslu
e /M
rube
Pl
$a
the governors
(and) princes
who
60
H JI
/'
7*
1
tTTTt
-
Tl
a
I
2/
Sab
su
duk
ma
and
sm
kad
comm itted
slew
<#
ma- a
poles
- ti
si
hir
ti
all
a
I
lul
on
around
the city
hun^ up
-v
^^
r/
su- un
;
mare P l
alt
pis
\%n
\
ni
their corpses
the townsfolk
[
I
ted committed L
whp
had
wickedness
J*tt -
la
na
sal
la
ti
I
am
nu
;
and
5-*^ offence
as
spoil
counted
TT
si
-
^T
it
-^! ^T
-
I
su
-
^
nu
-ET
la
-^T
ba
-
^T
ne
tu
te
the rest of them,
who had
not committed
1\
hi
ti
ti
kul
lul
ti
sa
sin
and
wickedness,
who
ra
an- su-nu
la
ib
su
us
sursu-
un
I
-
h.
in
their iniquity
were not found,
their pardon \ J^**
<2^
I
^"
'"
Pa
di
sarra- Su-nu
their king
ul
tu
proclaimed.
Pad!
from
ki
rib
alu
Ur
sa
im
mu
the midst
of Jerusalem
THE PUNISHMENT OF EKRON
61
jV - sa -
am - wa
and
i -
na
'>'"
X'wjj/
be -
lu
ti
brought out
on
the throne
of dominion
TI^
/z
T*"~
Su
un
u
I
Se - Sib -
ET ma
and
E^M
-
î ^^'
at
-
"
man -da
tu
over them
seated
tribute
be
lu -
ti
ia
u
I
kin
si
ru
u$ - su
to
my
dominion
fixed
upon him.
And
Hf<
ff IEJII If
-
tTTT=
-
v
matu
-ETMTT^ ^TT !Uf

la
-
m Ha-za
ki
da
ai
$a
of Hezekiah
of Judah,
who
-ET
/
z'-('
/
-
TJ
a
-
TTI
na
ni
-
nu -su
ri
ia
XL VI
46
Û
had not submitted
to
my
yoke,
alani P l
su
dan
nu
ti
bit
durani P l
of his strong
cities,
fortresses,
and
-tTT
^'
sihruti P l
cities
V
sa
me
ti -
su
nu
'
small
which
were around them,
bu
us
1
ram
me
kit
ru
ub
the battering
of rams
and
the assault
62
s INVASION SENNACHERIB'S INVASIO OF PALESTINE
/z'
mil
hu
su
zu
uk
$epe
of engines,
the attack
of foot-soldiers,
^>z7
^'
nik
si
kal
ban
na
ti
of mines,
breaches,
and
al
I
me
aksud(ud)
I
IL
C.
M,
/.
C,
nise ? l
sihru
besieged,
captured.
200,150
people,
small
ETrabu
f(and)i
Igreat,!
zikaru
-''
sinniUu
tmSru sise P l
male
-
and
female,
horses,
imera
^^ r^
p/
/^^
^/
wera
gammaU
Pl
mules,
asses,
camels,
alpe
Pl
si
ni
$a
la
ni
bi
oxen
and
sheep
without number
<vM^ *~^-[
ul
-
^TT^
kir
-
^ <
^"ITT
-
^"!l
r
-
Ti
tu
bi- su
un
u
I
se - sa -
^-^^ ^[ am - ma
from
their midst
brought out and
x
,u^
*
al
la-tti
I
am
nu
$a
a-$u
kima
like
issur
ku
a
up
pi
as spoil
counted.
^ Him
caged bird
<m
ki
-
t=m
rib
-tr
alu
Ur
sa
li
im
V
mu
alt
within
Jerusalem
his
THE SIEGE OF JERUSALEM

/
63
//
hi
e
I
sir - Su
alu
halsani f l
royal city
enclosed.
<?//
Su
11
rak
h's -
ma
si
abulli
forth
against him
cast up,
and, whosoever came
from the gate
ali - Su
tir
ra
f'a
ik
ki
bu
of his city,
punished
his sin.
\\
I
'
I
-
^7
Su
hi
a$
I
lu
-ET -la
ul
tu
-His cities,
which
had taken
from
v
/('/
I
ab
I
T
-
<tt -T
Mi
ti-
rib
mati-su
tuk-ma
na
the midst of his land
separated and
to
Mit-
in
ti
Sar
alu
As
of
du
di
m Pa
di -/i
inti
king
Ashdod,
Pad!
alu
Am
kar
ru
na
+*
Silli
bel
king
of Ekron
/M***
and
"
Sillibel
1
^*
sar
alu
Ha
of
zi
ti
ad
I
din
-ma
and
u
I
sa-
king
Gaza
gave
di-
VHff
/ir
^
fffi
za/ -
su
bilti
miîshed
his land.
Beside
the
VA
64
SENNACHERIB'S INVASION OF PALESTINE^
-HI
mah
-
-III
ri
-
-<T<
ti
^y
na
-
tiff
dan
v
$at
-
^<!<
ti
-
I
su
-
t
un
v'
former taxes,
their yearly gift,
ESTT teT -til

man -da
-
-IIMIM?
kal
-
-< j@i
fo
-
MT<
-
at
tu
ri
lu
ti
ia
tribute
(and) presents
to
my
dominion
i sffi
u
-
rad
di
ma
and
kin
si
ru
us
su
un
added
fixed
upon them.
su
m Ha-za
ki
put
hi
me
lam
me
As
for
him,
Hezekiah,
fear
of the majesty
be - lu
ti
ia
of
my dominion
pu - su - ma overwhelmed him and

is -
hu
amelu
r jj
n
\~/J
the Urbi
^m
u
KS^T
amelu
l âbe P
i
-
<MH~~ îrnî
damkuti P l
sa
su
na
and
his trusty warriors,
whom
to
^
nu
-
*W
un
^TT
alu
IH
Ur
-
*\
dun
sa
mu
strengthen
Jerusalem
all
sarru
ti -
Su
se -
ri
bu
ma
ir
Su
his royal city
he had brought
in,
desert-
M
bat
-
ÊT
la
-
T a
-
-<!<
ti
^T
it
-<T<
-
<
^P^tm
bilat
ti
XXX
3o
ed.
With
talents of
.y
<\
^HEZEKIAH'S TRIBUTE
65
VIII.
.v
//7/rfl.
bilat
kaspi
ni
sill
ti
gold,
800
talents of silver,
precious stones,
*
gu
-
AHfff
uh
stibium,
7
-E^TT
-
7-
^
dak
J
I
kas
E -si
TTT
*
dakkassu,
.^^
.....
great
ET-T
rfl3/i ^ 7
7
>" trSe ?*
>V
;
.....
-stones,
couches
.v/>////'
7 >'"
kusse P l
nff-
me
di
Sinni
of- ivory,
s^seas s^seats
of ivory,
maâk
piri
sinni
piri
ivory,
j
ls u -
usu
j j
***
urkarinnu
elephant-hide,
usu-
(urkarinnu-l
j
/wood,
wood,
ty
minima
$um-$u
ni
sir
tu
ka
bit
tu
diverse objects,
heavy treasure,
ô-V^t**^
and
I
marati P l
-
^
zikretiP 1
ekalli -
sn
Su
amshi
zammere
his daughters,
the
women
^__ ^0
of his palace,
male musicians,
f zammere ti P l
na
ki
rib
Ninua
alt
female musicians,
into
Nineveh
the city
<5^
- /
//
ia
arki
after
ia
se - bi -
lam
ma
and
of
my
dominion
me
he despatched
5
66
na
na
dan
man -da -at

tribute
ii
pt'S
to
give
and
to
make
ardu
ii
is
pu
ra
rak
bu
su
submission
Col.
Col.
he sent
his messenger.
i.
II,
1.
34.
Ill,
I.
41.

I.
68
B.C.
From
the Babylonian Chronicle.

No. 84
2
[Brit. Mus.,
u,
356.]
**
ft
IT
XX
On
KAN
ll "
Sm
aheP 1
erba
the 2oth day of Tebet
Sennacherib,
$ar
matu
ASSur
maru-hi
his son
ina
in
si - hi
iduk
$u
XXIII
For 23
king
of Assyria,
a rebellion
slew him.
*'<<<
Sanati P l
ll "
Sm
ahe P l
erba
sarru
ut
years
Sennacherib
the
kingdom
epu$(us)-ma
of Assyria
ruled.
umu XX KAN
Sa
arhu
Tebetu
From
the 2oth day
of
Tebet
di
umiII KAN
sa
arl
to
the2nddav
of
Adar
the rebellion in
Assyria
T
sa
-
<W
t^
ilu
dir
arhn
Simanu umu XVIII KA *

the i8th day of Sivan
Atsur- ah
iddin
continued.
On
Esarhaddon
maru-su
his son
i.
ina
in
11.
mdtu
AHur
ma
on
Aussi
Assyria
the throne
sat.
Col.
Ill,
3438.
68
II.
THE M4JRDER OF SENNACHERIB
Fjom
the stele of Nabonidus.

Rccneil de travaux, XVIII.]
J^ V[Sch^t,
Babili KI
'
.
'
'
'.
..
na
am
mi
[he(/
c.
Sennacherib)
Against
Babylon
went].
He
destroyed
es
ri
its
ti
i~s
sa
ah
hi
temples,
he threw
down
su
ra
ti
bil
lu
di
the reliefs,
the shrines
sa
al
pi
it
ga
ti
rubi
of the prince
he cast down.
The hand
T
-HPilu
<OT
tT
is
-ET ET
-
tyyy t
u
-
* ^yyi HI
$e
-
Marduk Marduk
da
at -
he siezed
ma and
ri -
ib
brought (him)
ki - rib
As~sur Kf
M -ma
According to
uz
zi
into
Aur.
the anger
-fey
/// -
Ê^yyy^^T
i -
v <t^ HIJTIH
mata
the land.
ul
ip
-
ma
ta
pu
us
su
ur
of the god
he dealt with
He
f
did not subdue
ki
mil
ta
Su
rubu
the prince
ilu
Marduk
XXI
for 21
Sanati P l
his wrath,
Marduk;
years
ki
rib
AShtr
ir
ta
me
in
i.
ASSur
did he set
ga-ti
kati.
MARDUK'S ANGER AGAINST UAIiYI.ON
69
JT
-
M ^TT
3tf/
jw
z'w
lu
ume
Pl
his dwelling-place.
Fulfilled
were
the days,
</
dan
nu
i -
nu
uh
ma
there
came
the appointed time,
and appeased was
-Hf
s
-
-II
bel
-II T
bele
za
Su
$a
Sar
Hani
Pl
his anger,
which the king of
the gods, the lord of
lords,
sag
Ha
Babili KI
against Esagila
and
Babylon
ih
su
us
$u- bat
the dwelling of
be
tu
ti -
$u
$ar
had conceived,
his lordship.
The
king
v-TIW
AHur
KI
'
sa
i -
na
uz
za
ilu
Marduk
of Assyria,
who
during
the anger
of
Marduk
al
pu
ut
tim
mati
2$
ku
nu
maru
a son,
the destruction of
the land
had brought about,
i
'
*m
lib
i
-
ts
i
-
-a
na
a
ty
z'/
bi - su
kakki
the offspring of
his bowels,
with
weapon
ra
as
si
ib -
slew.
i.
Col.
I,
1.
41.
THE
DESTRUCTION OF SIDON BY ESARHADDON.
[From
Museum, No. 12170.]
^
ASsur
-
*W*Sarru
ah
iddin(na]
sarru
rabu
dan
nu
Esarhaddon,
the great
king, the mighty king,
Sar
kirsati
Sar
maiu
Assur
KI
takkanakku
ruler
the king jofthe\

\
the king
of Assyria,
world,
Bdbili KI
tar
mdtu
&umeri
of
Akkadi KI
of Babylon,
king
Sumer
and
Akkad,
3-
[ts
mar
son
T-Hf-<M
m
llu
^TT
-
ETsarru rabu Sarru
=m^]
dan
-
Sin
ahe f l
erba
nu
of Sennacherib,
the great king,
the mighty king,
v
^r
the king
-v <M
^^wr
Ki
4.
ma^M
[t mar
son
^T
Sarru
ETrabu
the great king,
m $arru-ukm
of Sargon,
of Assyria,
5.
-
nu
Sar
mdfu
AHur
KI
Sa
ina
the mighty king,
the king
of Assyria,
who
with
THE
KING'S TITLES
AND GENEALOGY
-Hf
ilu
VJ
AMur
ilu
tukulti(ti]
Sin
ilu
SamaX
ilu
Nabu
the help
of ASSur,
Sin,
SamaS,
Nabu,
ilu
Marduk
ilu
Rtar
iStar
$a
Ninua
K1
ilu
lUar
Marduk,
of
Nineveh,
iStar
gyy
$a
tt=
Arba
- ilu
KI
Hani P l
rabuti P l
bele
Pl
of
Arbela,
the great gods,
his lords,
/ -
//u
/'/
SamSt(<fi)
di
rib
from
the rising
of the sun
to
the setting
^M
Sam$t($i}
9.
^y -m ^n
it
tal
lak
~TTT~ ET u - ma
and
ma
hi
ra
of the sun
proceeds
an opponent
la
i -
$u
ka
h'd
alu
Si
du
tin
ni
does not possess,
the conqueror
of Sidon
<
$a
~
tarn
-
ina
is
kabal
tim
sa
pi
nu
which
in
the midst of
the sea,
who overcame
gi
the
mir
da
ad
me-Su
dura
its
$u
whole
of
its
habitation;
wall
and
$u
its
bat
su
as
I
suh
ma
and
hi
rib
tarn - tim
place of dwelling
tore out
into
the sea
72
THE DESTRUCTION OF S1DON BY ESARHADDON
*ET
0</
I
<T^
di
cast
-
ET
i -
-4.
y?
a
^H
-
HF-
^1
-
^
-
I
hi
ma
and
far
ma$
kan
it
i -
the place
where
stood
TT=
a
I
/2/
IH
-
^5.
lik
Ab
di
mil
ku
ut
li
destroyed.
Abdimilkutti
^
its
la
pa
an
kakke P l
ia
king,
who
before
my
arms
z>/
kabal
tarn - tim
in
nab
tu
hi
ma
into
the midst
of the sea
had
fled,
like
-9-TIHFnu
-
ni
ul
iu
ki
rib
tarn - tim
a-bar-su-ma
I
a fish
out of the sea
caught and
P
/('/
20.
-
sa
kak
ka
su
nak
mu
cut off
his head.
His hoarded
makkuru - su
possessions,
hurasu
kaspu
silver,
abnu ? l
kar
tu
gld,
precious stones,
maSak
piri
sinni
piri
l-
usu
usu\
ls u -
urkarinnu
elephant-hide,
ivory,
\wood, /
inrkaHnnu-) \ wood, /
kiti
mimma
Sum
su
raiment of
i.
/ gaily-coloured stuff f \
\
and cloth
of every kind,
kak-ka-sii
kakkad-su.
DEPORTATION OF THE INHABITANTS

23.
^
ni
^-yyy< ^y<
-
^yyyy
^
-
\
$u
24
.yj a
-
sir
ti
ekalli
na
in
the store
of his palace,
-El
di
-
25. srjjf
a$
I
lu
la
ni$e ? l
ht
abundance
captured;
his people,
$a
ni
ba
la
$a
from
26
far
and wide,
without number,
M^
-,
**
alpe
Pl
si
ni
oxen
and
"
-
sheep,
(and) asses
27.
If a
I
^- -ttl
-
It a
<II
na
ki
-
e=T!f
rib
VM
mdi
bu
ka
carried
away
into
Assyria.
u - pa Moreover
hir
ma
SarrdniP 1
mdtu
Hat-ti
collected
the kings
of the land of the Haiti
hi
tarn
- tint
ka
all
li
su-nu
and
3o.
[>
of the coast
of the sea,
of them;
^
a$
-
ina
in
ri
sa
nim
ma
ala
u
I
h - pi$ - ma
and
another place
a city
erected
r^^yy ^yy^ y *^~vi alu Kar - m AXSur
E>W< t^l
-
*^"T
ÊT ^^TTT
at
I
>^<
bi
ah
iddina(na)
ta
Kar-Aur-ah-iddina
i.
called
I.e.
"The Wall of Esarhaddon."
74
THE DESTRUCTION OF
SI
DON BY ESARHADDON
ni
bit
su
nise P l
hu
bu
ut
its
name;
the peoples,
the captives
ia
sa
$adi(i)
the mountains
u
as well as
tarn - tim
of
my
bow,
from
from the sea
of the rising
of the sun
therein
TTT=
I
^
se
-
<Tsi
-
HI
ib
;
3 5.
am * lli
su
ud
saki
ia
made
to dwell
my
officer
pahatu
as governor
eli
su
nu
as
fa
I
over them
set.
se.
<vjgp[
u
4ffHP-
^1 <MII
-
-III
ri
m Sa
an
du
ar
sar
But
Sandu'arri,
king
alu
Kun
of
di
alu
Si
zu
Kundi
(and) Sizu,
38.
rt?ne/?i
wa /- rw
^^
su
la
pa
Uh
be - lu
ti
ia
an obstinate
foe,
who
feared not
my
dominion,
39.
"gfT
sa
~f
I Hani P l
=111=
u
-
Hf-
^H
-
=111= El
-
mas
h'r
ma
whom
the gods
had forsaken,
SUBJECTION OF THE NEIGHBOURING CITIKS

yy
40.
f
.
75
>
na
$adi(i)
mar
su
ti
it
ta
kil
in
the difficult mountains
trusted,
Ab
di
mil
ku
ut
ti
far
and
Abdimilkutti,
king
42
alu
yj
a
-
K]
na
to
-TTI
ri
-
*
su
-
-<!< I
ti -
Si
du
ni
Su
of Sidon,
his help
-tit!
kun
-
43.
i7ia
Sum
Hani P l
rabitti
came
and
on the name
of the great gods
TJ
a
~Hf
-
Tf
a
-
W
ha
-
-T
meS
iz -
< ET
-
44.
TJ
a
-
na
kur - u
ma
and
na
together
they called,
in
45e
-
mu
ki
su
un
it
tak
lu
na
I
ku
their
own might
put their trust.
na
ASSur
belt
ia
at
ta
kil -
ma
in
ASSur
my
lord
trusted
and
'/
ma
is
su
ri
ul
tu
ki
rib
{ I
Sadt(t)
of
l
.
like
a bird
from
the midst
mountains J
h?
a - bar - Su
I
ma
ak
I
ki
sa
kak
ha
su
a$-$u
caught him and
cut off
his head.
In order
76
THE DESTRUCTION OF SIDON BY ESARHADDON
da
na
an
ilu
AsSur
deli
ia
niU P
the
power
of ASSur
my
50.
lord
unto the peoples
mi
im
ET ma
kakkade P l
to display,
the heads
T
111
Sa
an
du
ar
ri
of Sandu'arri
and
Ab
di
mi
il
ku
ut
ti
ma
to
ki
sa
di
Abdimilkutti
the necks
I
rabutiP 1
-
tTW
-
ff
a
I
JT=
-
su
un
lul
El ma
and
53.
it
ti
of their nobles
hung
with
<
M
tiE^<^
.......
.
54.ina
HTi
ri
-
zammereP 1
bit
musicians
and
melody (?)
into
the square
Ninua
K1
te
-it
I
ti
ik
of Nineveh
went.

[From
Museum, No. 12168.]
ina
$ane(e)
gir
ri
ia
na
m * tu Mu
sur
In
my
second expedition
to
Egypt
" 7t7/ "
Ku -u
- si
u$
te
I
e$ - $e
ra
har
ra
nu
and
Ethiopia
directed
the way.
Ur
da
ma
ni
lak
gir
ri
ia
Urdamane
of the coming
of
my
expedition
t$
me-ma
I
$a
to the
\
ak
I
bu
su
mi
sir
heard,
had trodden
the boundary
leffect that/
of Egypt.
Memphis
he abandoned, and
na
$u
zu
ub
napi$tim(tim}-su
his life
in
na
bit
to
save
he
-
fled
5.
na
into
ki
rib
alu
Ni
Sarram? 1
Thebes.
The
kings,
78
THE SACK OF THEBES BY ASHURBANIPAL
V
amelu
p a hati P
governors
amSlu
ki
pa
ni
sa
ki
(and) prefects,
whom
in
matu
_frf
s ur
a$
I
fc
nu
na
tarsi
ia
Egypt
had
set up,
into
my
presence
il
li
ku
nim
ma
na
a$
si
ku
came
and
kissed
<tETT MEff
sepe
7.
^^
arki
IH
Ur
-
^!! E
da
-
ia
ma
ni
my
feet.
After
Urdamane
har
ra
nu
I
as
bat
al
I
lik
di
the
way
took;
came
to
9.
TV/
'
ali
dan
nu
ti
su
ti
ib
Thebes,
his fortress;
the approach
tahazt
ia
dan
ni
mur - ma
aln
Ni
of
my
mighty
battle
he saw and
Thebes
TTfc Hfu - ma$
-<^
-
o.
fcgts
in
-
^}
na
fled
tyyyy
if
a
-
Sir
-bit
na
he abandoned;
he
to
-tTT
lu
JTTPT
Xu
-
\
a
-
Ki
ip
ki
pi
alu
tu
na
in
Kipkip.
That
city
THE CAPTURE OF HEAVY SPOIL

f<
i
79
~f
ilu
A
AHur
<
u
hir
its
fa
ma
with
tukulli(ti)
extent
the help
of ASSur
and
if<W
IStar
-TI^JmT
my
JTTTTITI
"
Silver,
hands took.
hurasu
gold,
ni
sik
ti
abne P l
precious stones,
the furniture
I
-
Ef -ET
-^T
ba
-
I<
$u-u
^
as
/a
lu
bul
ti
of his palace,
much
as
there was,
raiment
rabuti
of gailyi (coloured stuff,/
I
cloth,
great horses,
H. TT
ni$e
Pl
zik
ru
sin
niS
II
2
people
male
and
female,
pi
lofty obelisks,
tik
za-ha
li
structures of zahalu
Idl
i
3
-
<
bi
bright,
^TT U
of which
TT
<f-
W
V.
IL
M,
F C
KPl
bdb
^m^TI
bilti
that
is
2500
talents
<IIT
Sukultu (Y)
-
IV$u
-
W ^SL
man-za
-
-TTTT
e
-
v
kur
nu
az
was the weight,
that stood before
the gate
of the temple,
8o
THE SACK OF THEBES BY ASHURBANIPAL
///
man-za
al
ti -
hi
-nu
as
I
suh
ma
and
from
their
place
removed
al
ka
na
tu
ilu
ASSur KI
Sal
- la
lu
took
to
Assyria.
Spoils,
-TTTT *T
ka
-
ina
-ET
la
!
-n
M
as
I
-ET
-
bit
tu
lu
la
heavy,
without number,
carried off
ul
tu
ki
rib
alu
fti
from
Thebes.
Over
m * iu Mu-sur
malll
Ku
si
kakke P l
ia
Egypt
and
Ethiopia
my
arms
u
I
sam
ri
ir -
ma
and
as
I
ta
kan
tu
caused to rage
established
might.
ka
ti
ma
full
li
fi
sal - mes
With
Tf
a
hands
safe
and sound
-^
-
21.
-
<JEJ
a
-
-til
ah
the city
fu
ra
na
Ninua
^f
returned
to
Nineveh
belu
li
ia
of
my
i.
dominion.
II,
11.
Col.
2848.

[From
"
,.
"'
LYDIA.
Museum, No.
2,
68.]
* igs
Gu
-
^
gu
ni
is
-
,g$
sar
v
m<3hl
i@i
Lu
-
*i
ug
ud
di
Gyges,
king of
Lydia,
\a
gu
$a
bir
ti
tamti
a district
which
across
the sea,
T
-
ru
ru
ku
$a
Warrant P l
a distant place,
of which
the kings
ia
la
i$
mu
zi
Mr
my
fathers
had not heard
mention of the name,
ni
bit
sumi
ia
ina in
$utti
my name
fTI
dream
-*f
ilu
A
AHur
-4ilu
^T-jMT?
ba
-
^^
ri
su -ma
nu-u
did A^sur, the god,
my
creator, reveal to him,
82
THE EMBASSY OF GYGES, KING OF LYDIA

cCTTT ET ww - ma
thus
:
<HT
11
Hfilu
SP
T
sar
king of
sepd
m
of
Assur- ban - apli
"The
feet
Ashurbanipal,
matu
ilu
A$$ur KI
sa-bat-ma
ina
zi
kir
Zumi-'Su
Assyria,
grasp and
through
his
name
ku
su
ud
amelu
nakire P l
ka
conquer
thy foes."
u - mu The day
$uttu
an
this
ni
tu
mu
ru
his
dream
he saw,
messenger
7.
-
ru
na
sa
al
he sent
to
greet
suttu
an
ni
tu
$a
This dream,
s.
e
-
which
ina
JTTT
kdta
11
mu
ru
amslu
mdr-îpri-su
he had seen,
by
the hands of
his
envoy
-TTEVÊT
i$
^TTTt
u
-
V -f -Hf
Sa
-
Tl
^TTM<
ia
-
pur - am - ma and he sent

-
an
na
-a
ti
repeated
to
me.
<tT* *\
ul
-
*TTT
lib
^
-
*\
u
-
F
me
V
$a
tT
is
^T
-
^T
-
tu
bi
ba
tu
From
the very day
on which
he grasped
HIS
SUCCESS AGAINST THE CIMMERIANS
83
<tETT n $epd
Xarru
ti
ia
'"";i/ "
Gi
mir
ra
at'
my
royal feet,
the Cimmerians,
-TTI -El=TT
*pu
*T
I
m'Se P l
vl
mati-û
V
$a
mu
dal
li
who
afflicted
the people
of his land,
who
-ET
/rt
til -TTI -ET -II

z^
-
-ETT
abe P l
-
teTJ
ia
<MiU
u
tal
la
hu
did not
fear
my
fathers,
and
ET
at
"
fT^T^T
is
-
iu
u-a
la
ba
tu
$epa
ll
sarru
ti
ia
as for
me
had not grasped

<
my
royal
feet,
-4ilu
<
u
Hf-<W
ilu
ik
su
ud
ina
tukulti(tt)
Assur
IStar
he conquered.
With
the help of
ASSur
and
I^tar,
ilaniP 1
bele
Pl
ia
ultu
lib
bi
the gods,
my
lords,
from
'4-lTT
amc lu
'
Eâmslu
hazanatiP 1
sa
Gi
mir
ra
ai
the governors
of
the Cimmerians,
V
Sa
-TI^JT^T
ik
-
IT
su
du
II
amC>lu
hazanati P l
ina
whom he had conquered, two
governors
in
tT *TT fT tETT
^"
si is
-
C^TT -!-<!<
is
-Hf-HFparzilli
^-TTI-<T<
bi
-
si
ka
ti
ri
ti
bonds,
chains
of iron,
fetters
6*
84
4-
slut
u
-
^y
y- AHPPP
me
-
ET
ma
and
-6.
ESM
it
^<y<
-
parzilU
tarn -
ih
ti
of iron,
he bound
together with
ta
mar
a
ti -
su
gift
ka
bit
tu
se - bi -
la
heavy
from him
he sent
-7.
K?5^*-I
amslu
V
sa
di
mah
into
ri
ia
rak
bu
su
my
presence.
His messenger,
whom
na
sa
al
sul
me
- ia
ka
ai
an
to
greet
me
.. tTTT=
u
-
continually
^JT sTTT
i$
=
nap
-
&
pa
E^TT
-
^H
sar
-
V
$a
-
H
a
ia
ra
he had sent,
he
dis-
//
il
tu
as
Su
Sa
the
/wa/
of
*'"
Assur
continued.
Since
command
za:
su
ru
na
the god,
my creator,
he did not keep,
in
tff
e
-
.^
muk
his
EÎT
ra
-
te
man
- i -
I
su
^T
it
c^TTI
-
ta
q
kil
ET
-
ma
and
own power
he trusted
ig
bu
uS
lib
bu
e -
mu
ki
e-
~su
na
[his] heart
was proud,
[and] his forces
for
HIS
SUBSEQUENT CHANGE OF POLICY
85
tTTMTI
kit
-
-6T
Tu
-
V
$a
-
ri
mi
il
ki
tar
mdtu
Mu
sur
alliance with
Psammetichus
king of
Egypt,
Sa
is
lu
"" nir
the yoke
belu
ti
ia
who
had
cast off
of
my
dominion,
pur
ma
na
ku
I
a$
me
ma
and
he sent.
Then
heard
jrt/
//
ilu
Assur
ilu
Istar
um
ma
prayed
-
to ASSur
and
iStar,
thus:
&W
may
/>
an
amelu na kiri-su
pa - gar-$u
his corpse
na
di
ma
"Before
his foe
be cast
and
Us -su
ni
.......
Pl
su
ki
may
they carry off
his bones."
Even
as
na
llu
Assur
am
I
hu
ru
it
i$
lim
ma
to
ASSur
had prayed,
came
to pass.
pa
an
amelu na kiri-su
pa -gar-û
his corpse
in
na
cast
di
ma
and
Before
his foe
was
down
I
fll'
is
-
<
-
SB:
-
<tE
$u
ni
<T ^T .......
I
-
Pl
Su
they. carried off

i.
his bones.
variant reading gives li-in-na-di-ma.
86
Qi
m jr
ai
$a
jna
ni
fat
sumi
ia
V
&z
fcT
is -
^
pal
-
The Cimmerians,
I
su
whom
through
my name
Htt*
ik
-
v- ^TT
bu
-
26
su
it
bu
nim
ma
beneath him
he had trodden,
drew near
and
*pu subdued
-
Vnu
"TIA
gi
-
EHH
mir
t^5
arki
-
I
su
.
mati-su
his land.
the whole of
After
him
mari-û
his son
Sib
ina
** u
kussi
su
ip
sit
sat
on
his throne.
Of
the
<HH
-\ W ^
sa
limuttim(ti-ni}
ina
at
ni
is
kate 11
ia
evil fate,
which
the raising of
my
hands
Hani V 1
the gods,
tik
li
ia
ina
pa
an
my
helpers,
upon
tEj dbi
I
tpl
bani-su
l
=TTTt
u
-
^Hf
sap
-
-III JEf
ri
-
ina
^TTT
kdta
)
ku
11
the
his begetter,
had brought,
by *
the
{father,
(hands of}
amelu
-niar-îpri-û
t'$
pur
am
ma
is
ba
ta
his
envoy
he sent [me news] and
grasped
Sepa
w
sarru
-
-4ilu
ti
ia
um
ma
$arru
$a
my
royal feet,
thus:
"A king,
of whom god
HIS SON'S SUBMISSION
TO ASHURBANIPAL
87
*'
du
u-su
at art
la
abu -
u-a
ta
ru
ur
ma
ihath taken\
I
thou.
My
father
thou didst curse, and
knowledge, (
limuttu
evil
is
sa
kin
ina
was done
pa - m'-$u unto him.
ia
ii
As
for
me,
ardu
pa - lih
ka
kur - ban
ni
i -
ma
and
la
$u
ta
the slave that feareth thee,
bless
me
let
me
bear
ap
sa
an
ka
thy yoke."
i.
Col.
II,
11.
95
125.
THE GUTTING OF THE CANAL OF SIPPAR BY NABOPOLASSAR, KING OF BABYLON, 625604 B. C.

[From
Museum, No.
827
14,979.]
Na
bi
um
apil
su
ur
Nabopolassar,
&tf
.far
-f
E^TT
<M
4.
3.
^<y< .yyj
ti
-
ty
is
Babili KI
ri
king
of Babylon,
the de-
'
ga
a/
2
l lu
sire of
Mi - bi Nabu
um
ihl
Marduk
and
Marduk,
-II
a
-
ET-tTTT
rabu(u]
na
ku
i -
nu
ilu
Marduk
bclu
am
I.
When
Marduk,
the great lord,
7.
na
za
na
an
ma - ha
the
zi
ud
du
su
to
provide for
cities,
to
renew
e$
ri
ti
ur
ta
su
ka
bi
it
ti
the shrines,
1.
his
weighty command
e.
ga-at
is
kat.
2. Literally,
"the stretching forth of the hand of",
/.
the object for which
the
hand
stretched forth in desire.
ALTERATION
IN
THK BKD OF THE EUPHRATES

-Hf-
89
ma
ra
an
ni
enjoined upon me,

,o.
^+
2'
<B: jy
-
tew
-
...
^T
-ffff
Sippar
nu
mi
hi
um
<HT
at that
time
Sippar,
l3
2.
ET
W -TT*
-
-TT* -E -TTI
zi
-
ma -ha
zi
ri
na
ra
am
the august city,
beloved of
<
/^
-Hf- T
'7
fW
the Euphrates
ama
and
Ai,
j/
su
-ma
it
me
and
ri
ku
had receded from
the waters
were distant
...
. . .
.7.
-Hfilu
^T & sCTTT ^^^T -ITTNa

-
bi
um
apil
su
ur
Nabopolassar,
as
ri
ah
Um
pa
ih
the meek,
the humble,
the worshipper
tETJTM< -TI&^T^-TTTT
He
of the gods,
ia
-
- ti
n&TU
Purdtu
na
even
I,
the Euphrates
unto
Sippar
KI
lu
$a
-ah
ra
am
ma
Sippar
i.
caused to be dug out,

sir/.
and
zi-i-ri
go
THE CUTTING OF THE CANAL OF SIPPAR BY NABOPOLASSAR
me
nu
uh
h'
dam
ku
tim
na
waters
of abundance,
health-giving,
for
f-
^M
SamaS
5
//
-II teTf
belt
-
ia
lu
u
I
ki
SamaS
my
lord
established.
li -
z'
su
ti
na
The bank
of that canal
with
I
kupri
T?
u
TI
a
-
-TT
-TTI
bitumen
and
gur - ri brickwork
as.
jgy tyyT= 11TT

lu
-
<KTTI
-
<T
si
-
Tf
id
-
sa
I
ar
ma
and
na
strengthened,
for
30.
llu
Manias
belt
ia
kar
a wall
su
ul
mi
im
Mamas'
my
lord
of safety
lu
urn
mi
id
erected.
THE COMPLETION OF THE WALLS OF BABYLON BY NEBUCHADNEZZAR KING OF BABYLON, 604561 B.C.
II,
[From
Museum, No. 68
9, i.]
tlu
Na
bi
um
ku- dur
ri
su
ur
Nebuchadnezzar,
*!
$ar
T7
-
Ba
bi
lam
ru
ba
am
king
of Babylon,
the prince
na
-.
dam
mi
gi
er
ilu
Marduk
exalted,
the darling of
Marduk,
ak
ku
si
ri
na
ra
am
the august ruler,
the beloved of
llu
Na
bi
um
sa
ak
ka
na
ku
Nabu,
the governor
-ET
la
a
is
ne
fya
za
ni
in
sag
ila
who
not wearied,
the patron of
Esagil
92
THE COMPLETION OF THE WALLS OF BABYLON

<=TTTT
<M@I
w
-TT*
-
TT
-
* ^yy
$a
y a
-
zi
da
na
and
Ezida,
who
to
Hf//tt
^T
TVtf
-
3
&'
-
tCTTT
urn
<HiU
u
-Hfilu
Marduk
Nabii
and
Marduk
-IITJT
3^ ^'
-
7.
jw
hi
it
nu
su
ma
and
ip
pu
su
his lords
is
subject,
who
performs
-TTI tfl
ri
-
JT ^TT
-
-m
un
1
s.
^y
na
-
yf
a
^^y
-
su
su
dam
their service,
the exalted one,
<7/>/?^
sa
ri
du
sa
tlu
Nabu
apil
the son of highest rank
of
Nabopol-
su
assar,
ur
sar
Ba
bi
lam
king
...
of Babylon,
^^
i
-
t:yyy
-
Hfllu
na
ku
nu
urn
Marduk
am
I.
When
Marduk
belu
ra
bi^
ki
ni
is
the great lord
legitimately
ib
na
an
ni
ma
and
mata
the land
su
te
$u
ru
created
i.
me
to rule,
ri-e-su-su-un
resut-sun.
NEBUCHADNEZZAR'S ZEAL FOR MARDUK

-TTI ^T? Tl
ni
-
E&
-
II
za
-
h'm
ri
aw
na
an
the people
to shepherd,
to care for
ET IK -TT*
jrt
-
^T
ud
-
^T
du
-
M
su
<=TI
e
-
<
e$
-
-m
ri
-
-Tl
e tint
ha
zi
the towns,
to
renew
the shrines
ra
hi
i$
ma
ir
an
ni
majestically
commissioned me,
.5.
T?
#
-
^T
\
M
^w
-
T^
a
-
^T
na
f <^T
illi
-II
belt
-
=ETI
ia
Marduk
unto
Marduk
my
lord
pa
al
hi
t$
ta
ku
Ba
bi -
lam
with fear
was obedient.
Babylon
ET
ma
-
IK
ha
-
If
za
-
JT
su
-ETT
si
-
-E
i
-
-TTI
ri
--IT
alt
his august city,
the place
ta
na
da
tu
Su
fm
gu
ur
ilu
Bel
of his honour,
Imgur-Bel,
<
it
--
^
il "
^
Bel
is.
^y
durdni
its
-
su
Nimitti-Bel,
ET-ETrabuti
^T!T- "ElTT
u
-
-a -
$a
I
ak
li
il
na
great walls,
completed
on
94
THE COMPLETION OF THE WALLS OF BABYLON
^H^Tse
-
t53
ETof
its
S?:m- JT
gates
ip
pi
abulle-su
nman
mighty
the thresholds
ik
du
tim
oxen of copper
and
* ^TT
sirruHe
se
-
zu
zu
I! =TTT= u -
tim
colossal serpents
reared on end
u$
I
set
up.

I.
From a cylinder
of
Nabonidus, king of Babylon, 555538 B.

Mus., No. 82
7
14, 1025.]
C.
[Brit.
na
I,
ku
llu
Na
hi
um
na
id
Nabonidus,
sarru
ra
bu
$arru
dan
nu
$ar
the great king,
the mighty king,
the king
fa's
sa
ti
sar
Babili
^l
sar
of the world,
king of
Babylon,
3
king of
<
/1$
ra
ti
ir
bit
ti
za
ni
in
the four
quarters,
the patron
sag
ila
zi
da
of Esagil
and
Ezida,
^
f
^TII^TT <HiH -Hf-ÊTETilu
Ê^
i -
Sin
ilu
Nin
gal
na
whose i
Sin
and
Ningal
in
tdestiny/
96
THE DEFEAT OF ASTYAGES BY CYRUS
T<ttl s-TI-Hf
02*'-
<T-ET~ETt^TTT
h' -
$u
na
ma -
at
Zarru
tu
womb
of
his
mother
for
a royal destiny J
E
i
-
<!Hi
-
mu
si
ma
at
su
f \
mar
the
\
determined,
son of/
T -HFz
H& 2< >sTT Hfl* J3

Nabu-balat
-
/7z<
su
ik
bi
rubu
im
ku
Nabu-balatsu-ikbi,
the wise prince,
rabuti
//
z'A
z/awi
na
ku
the worshipper of
the great gods,
am
I.
E
E
hul
hul
hul,
bit
ilu
Sin
ta
hul
the temple of
Sin
which
(is)
ki -
rib
alu
Har
ra
nu
Sa
ul
tu
in
Harran
wherein
from
mu
sa- a
ti
" w Sin
belu
ra
bu
eternity
Sin
the great lord
I0
jy
$u
-
^T
ba
-
*T
at
M *&
tu
-
^!!T
lib
-
JI
bi
-
ub
$u
(as in) the dwelling-place
of the delight of
his heart
tyyyt
r
/
<ny
^/
-
-yyj t=ij I
r/
-
^
e
-
ib
$u
dwells,
with
THE SCYTHIAN INVASION
97
-tTT
ali
the city
<MEH
u
-IT!!
biii
V
Sa
-
!T
a
-
J!
Su
*TTT
lib
*
-
bu
and
that temple
his heart
zu
uz
ma
and
amclu
Umman-man
da
was wroth
the Scythians
TTt
u
-
v ~3 5^
Sat
-
ET
-
tTTTT
biti
JT
$u
-
ba
am
ma
and
TJ a
tim
he brought
that temple
nb
bi
it
ma
and
sa
lik it
su
to
fall
kar
in
mu
tu
he destroyed
he caused
ruins.
na
pa
li
.hi
i -
trim
ilu
Bel
In
my
legitimate reign
Bel
belu
rabu(ii}
na
na
ra
am
the great lord
through
love
Sarru
for
ti
ia
na
all
my kingdom
TJ
-
unto
the city
and
-TTTT
3^/z'
W
Sa
JT
-
tT
is
-
Su
li
mu
ir -
Su
that temple
was gracious (and)
had
mercy.
In
the beginning of
7
98
sarru
ti
ia
dariti(ti}
my
everlasting reign
*jn
Sab
-
^-
J!
su
a
-
*y
ut
-T<
-
ru
in
ni
ti
:
the
caused
me
to behold
dream
ET
l7a
Marduk
belu
rabu
ilu
Sin
Marduk,
the great lord,
and
Sin,
TTI
na
-
an
no,
ri
same(e}
irsitim(tim}
the light
of heaven
and
earth,
'
lal
-la
-an
lu
Marduk
stood
on either side;
Marduk
ta
ma- a
it
ti
ia
:
ilu
Nabii
na'id
spake
to
me
"Nabonidus
Babili KI
na
iineru
p/p^
king of Babylon,
with
the horses
m^
-
:]
i
-
^>si
ku
bi
ka
of thy chariot
bring
bricks,
^yyyy
mr mi
-
hul
hul
pu
us
ma
and
Sin
E-hul-hul
build
THE DREAM OF NABONIDUS -II

/><///
99
ET- tTTTs
rabu(u)
"
*E -17
i
-
<If =w
&'
-
3
-
JT
.fa
ir
&' -
the great lord
therein
.ETIHETT?
$u
-
JT^T^T^T!
$u
-
^.
tt^ ^ -yy
pa
-
ur
ma
-a
ba
at
su
al
hi
t$
cause to inhabit
his dwelling-place."
With
^TTT
fear
T a
tTTT ET
-
Tl
-
Tl
a
-
^T
na
^TII
tlu
/a
I
ma
Bel
HfHani
1
Pl
spake
unto
the lord
of the gods,
jy
//tt
yf
-
^v
-
-gyy
$a
Marduk
:
bitu
$u
tim
Marduk
"That temple
which
yyyt
^
e
-
*ypi
-
JT
$u
'
2 5.
E^ ^
amilu Umman-man
-
/^
bu
da
thou commandest
to build,
the Scythian
ET
sa
-
^pu
^^
ug
rnighty
i
-
fr*
gu
is
-
Ii0
lu
hi
ir
it
Sum
ma
and
infests
e -
mu
ga
su
ilu
Marduk- ma
ta
ma -a
his strength."
But Marduk
spake
//
ti
ia
:
amelu
Umman-man-da
of
sa
tak
bu
unto
me
T^
-
"The Scythian
whom
thou speakest,
7.
11TT
Sa
JT
-
JT
frm
u
3%
$u
mati -$u
his land,
Warrant P l
he,
i.
/. e.,
and
the kings,
pu-itk-ku-lu e-mii-ka-a-su.
ioo
>.k
di
su
ul
ba
as
- h'
n
In
his allies,
are no more".
HF-
lu
ul
ti
satti
na
the third
year
on
Tp
ka
-
^y
-
2g
-yyyt:
u
-
v
sat
-
^
bu
-
^ .^
nis -
Ey
-
sa
du
1
sum
ma
and
an expedition
they caused him to advance
Ku
ra
as
sar
matu
An
za
an
arad
Cyrus,
king of
Anzan,
his
AHFR
ah
-
-in
ri
* ^T
i
-
t:nr ET
um
-
^ JT
-
na
ma
ni
Su
petty vassal,
with
his troops
z'
amSlu Umman-man-da
rap
sa
ti
that
were few
the wide-spreading Scythians
tTTT=
z^
^fcU
j/>
-
^Tpi
A^ffi
-
-IT -^1 1Is

-
ih
tu -
me
gu
scattered.
Astyages,
sar
amslu
Umman-man-da
is -bat-ma
ka
mu-ut
su
king of
the Scythians,
he captured and
as a prisoner
34
a
-
*
a -mat
(It
ilu
na
mati-û
his land
il
ki
/
|
Bel
to
i.
he took him.
was)
the
the
word
of/
Or "as
approached".
THK CAPTURE OF ASTYAGKS
IOI
ET- sTTT*
rabu(u)
Hf' lu
<^T
<MJf
u
~3ll ^TT
ilu
Marduk
Sin
great lord
Marduk
and
of Sin,
-HF//</
^1
-
-III
-
-4-
tT?
<
an
na
ri
$ame(e)
irsitim(tini)
the light of
heaven
and
earth,
35.
Sa
ki
-
bi
it
su
nu
la
in
nin
nu
whose
command
was not annulled.
II.
From
the Nabonidus-Cyrus Chronicle.

[Brit.
Mus., Sp.
II,
964.]
ummani-su upahhir-ma
ana
s]
eli
Ku
ra$
$ar
His forces
llc
^-c^;; ^
1
against
Cyrus,
king of
-HfAn -
y HFsa
-
an
T ana
to
^H
ka
-
[V l&\
$a
-
J^TT
U
-
IH
lik -
ET
ma
di
AnSan,
conquer (him)
went
"z
IS
lu
me
gu
ummani-su
his forces
ibbalkit
su
ma
and
But against Astyages
revolted
ina
in
3.
Jin Y^<
kata
11
T a
-
sa-bit
na
'"
Ku-ra$
Cyrus
id
di
nu-$u
captivity
to
they delivered him.
M^ Ku
-
ras
Tf a
^T
-
v
mdtu
T?
x
-
TTT
ta
-
^
nu
^T
ali
na
A -gam
Cyrus
(went) to
Ekbatana
the
102

6
T
<tif
sarru
tu
kaspu
Silver,
hurasu
gold,
busu
possessions,
royal city.
makkuru
property
... ...
sa
matu
A -gam
ta
?m
of
Ekbatana
v-HFIf
V
-
-4-
/#/
u
off
ma
and
na
matu
An
sa
an
he carried
to
AnSan
il
ki
he took.
i.
Col.
II,
u.
14.

I.
From
the Cylinder of Cyrus.

No. 12049.]
[Brit. Mus.,
i$
te
e -
ma
ma
al
ki
i - $a -
ru
He
(i.e.
Marduk) sought out

'
a righteous prince,
tatf
'
*TTT
/*#
-
3
bi
"iff
$a
^T
it
TTT
-
ET
ma
AH
-
3/7
ta -
ah
after his
own
heart,
whom
T
he might take
J=T
ka
-
tu
11$
$u
Ku
ra
a$
$ar
by the hand
Cyrus,
king of
^yy
alu
f
An
^
-
Hf-
.^T^TIT^
it
S^^Î^TT
ni
-
$a
an
ta
bi
bi
it
su
AnSan,
he called by his name,
IT
a
^T
-
ET
ma
-^T!
li
-
m ~V
ku
-
~*
kul
-
-ET ^TTT
la
-
na
tim
ta
for
empire
over the whole
tT
>
E^<
-
E^T!
ra
JT [ccm JT1
$u
-
âr
/^
zdk
urn
Su
world
he proclaimed
his
title.
104
THE TAKING OF BABYLON BY CYRUS
matn
ju
fa
gi
the
m jr
um
man-man - da
The
land of Kutu,
whole
of the tribal hordes
ka
an
ni
'sa
na
se -
pi
su
nise P l
he forced into submission
at his feet,
the
sal -
mat
[lit.
kakkadi
sa
sa
ak
si
du
men
the black-headed],
whom
he had delivered
ka
fa
a-su
na
ki
it
tim
into his hands,
with
justice
and
wi
sa
ru
is
te
ni
si
na
tim
righteousness
he cared for
them.
jlu
Marduk
belu
rabu
fa
ru
nise P l - su
Marduk
the great lord,
the protector of
his people,
ip
$e
ti
sa
dam
ka
ta
his
good deeds
and
lib
ba
'su
$a
ra
ha
di
his righteous heart
with joy
Id!
ip
-
^
pa
-
-is
tu-kul-ti-sa ,(1. 19)
so.
na
alt
su
beheld.
i.
To
is
his city
for the pron. suff. su.
In ip-se-e-ti-sa.
and
employed
HIS ELECTION BY
THE GOD MARDUK
105
TJ
fl
-ET
-
^
<7/t
JI
-
-TI* J3
ik
-
la
In
of Babylon
that he should
go
he commanded,
TT=
u
_
ÎT
,y^
<5a
_
as
13 M
&ti
it
>sTT ET
-
AS E^TT
har
-
/mi
su
ma
ra
he caused him to take
the road
Babili K ?
to
ki
ma
ib
ri
Babylon,
like
a friend
and
t=
/j/
*T-
^ ^T
-
-TTI -ET
tal
-
-t
-
pi
it
la
ka
da
su
helper
he went
at his side.
,6.
t
ww
-
E
w<2 wz'
nz/
$a
tim
sa
of which
His wide-spreading troops,
('/
;;zrt
;#<?
- ^
war/
/<z
u
,
la
ad
du
is
like
the waters of a
stream
not
-to
be known
wz'
ba
$u
un
kakke P l
$u
nu
sa
an
du
ma
the number,
with their weapons
girt
Sa
ad
'di
-ha
da
su
ba
lu
advance
at his side.
Without
kab
ta
ha
zi
$e -
ri -
ba
contest
and
battle
he made him enter
106

tTT JT
53
Bdbili KI
ki
rib
Bdbili Kl
all - $u
into
Babylon
his city
Babylon
ti
ir
na
Sap
sa
ki
he spared
from
tribulation.
iiu
Na
-ET
i)
s^
pa
li -
na'id
Sarru
la
hi
su
Nabonidus,
the king
that did not fear him,
tTTT= ET
u
-
10 -ET
-
T a
-!-EiT^TI
ka
-
^.^H
ni$e P l
ma
al
la
tu
u$
$u
he delivered
into his hand.
The
people of
ka
li
$u
nu
nap
the
har
Babylon
all
of them,
whole of
m
u
_
<
u
^v v <^ în^^
Akkadi ^ !
ru
-
<
u
me
rj
bi - e
Sumer
and
Akkad,
princes
and
T^JI -TI*<t
sak
-
kan
nak
ka
Sa
pal
Su
ik
mi
sa
governors,
beneath him
bowed down,
S
u
-
<T-
^^
-
^ ^Se
-
5^!
tis
JT
-
na
aS
si
ku
pu
$u
they kissed
his feet,
=TTfc
ih
-
-T<
-
I
Su
du
na
sarru
ti -
they rejoiced
in
his
kingdom,
THE SUBMISSION OF THE CITY
107
im
mi
ru
pa
nu
uS
$u
un
be - lu
$a
bright was
their countenance.
To
the lord,
who
na
lu
kul
ti
$a
bal
It
tu
through
his strength
raises to life
mi
tu
ta
-an
na
bu
ta
ku
the dead,
(and) from destruction
pa
ki
ig
mi
lu
kul
la
ta
an
and
misery
(?)
had spared
all,
3
ta
-
^TT
-
-TI^ t^TT! <T-TTI

ik
Ml
-
*-
M
-
bi
i$
ta
ar
ra
bu
su
joyfully
they paid homage,
y
t'S
-.
y
a
-
tam-ma
ru
zi
ki
ir -
Su
na
I
ku
they reverenced
his
name.
fciY^
am
Ku
ra
as
$ar
kt$ - $at
$arru
El' rabu
Xarru
Cyrus,
king
of the world, the great king,
the
</w
for
Babili Kl
$ar
matu
&u-me
ri
mighty king, king of
Babylon,
king of
Sumer
Ak
ka
di
$ar
kib
ra
- ti
and
Akkad,
king
of the quarters
io8
THK TAKING OF BABYLON BY CYRUS
ir - hi
it
Urn
mar
son of
Ka
am
bu
zi
ia
four,
Cambyses,
ETrabi
t&m
sar
-tTT -Hfahl
An
sa
an
mar mart
grandson of
the great king,
king of
AnSan,
ET-
ra
a$
sarri
rain
sar
alu
An
sa
an
Cyrus,
the great king, king of
Anan,
ETllplipi
m &i
t'X
pi
t'S
tarri
rabi
descendant of
Teispes,
the great king,
sar
alu
An
sa
an
zeru
da
ru
king of
AnSan,
eternal seed
Sa
tarru
in
Sa
ilu
Bel
ilu
Nabil
of
royalty,
of whom
Bel
and
Nabu
3= -ET
ir -
TI
-
jr
-
mu
pa
la
su
net
tu
ub
love
the reign,
[and] for
the delight
lib
bi
-su- nu
'
ih
Si
ha
Zarru
his
ut
su
of their heart
desired
kingdom.
*- ey
e
-
yi
a
-
nu- ma
na
into
ki
rib
Babili A/
When
Babylon
HIS INSTALLATION IN TIIK RoVAI. I'AI.ACK
109
t
^
I
*3
t'S
rw
^W
jd
//
mi
na
entered
favourably, (and)
with
y* tEJ!
/ -
<MSJ
and
-IT! 1=!TT Tl
ri
-
-V
-
-E
i
-
^
na
in
-
j/
Sa
tim
exultation
shouts of joy
eTTTT
ET-
ET
wa
tW <M
-
<MTI
ar
I
El
ma
-
â///
al
ki
TJ a
Xu
bat
the palace
of the princes
took up
be
lu
tim
llu
Marduk
.
belu
rabu
lib
bi
lordly
dwelling,
Marduk
the great lord
the
it
pa
su
$a
mare
Pl
Babili KI
great heart
of
the Babylonians
-*f
-
^
-
ET
-
^T
u
-
.....
an
ni
ma
and
<tfc mi
^TTT
-
$am
[inclined (?)] to
me
daily
- $e
pa
la
ah
Su
um
na
ni
ia
do
care for
his worship.
My
wide-
rap
$a
tim
i -
na
ki
rib
Babili
spreading troops
into
Babylon
ME
i
W
-
*T
-
I*
-
ff<
-
JT <3*
ht
-
ET
ma-niS
=
nap
-
$a
ad
di
ha
ul
har
of
advance
in
peace.
The whole
HO
II
u
-
mi
-
<HH m^w<m
t
^
zeru
ETrabil
me
ri
Akkadi K1
Sumer
and
Akkad,
the great race,
tim
(?)]
ul
I
sar
&
f
dannat
For the
\
no [trouble
caused to have.
\affliction of/
Bdbili K1
kul-lat
all
ma -ha
its
zi
su
Babylon
and
cities
/'
na
$a
It
im
tim*
as
- ie
thoroughly
did
care.
ildniP 1
matu
$u
me
ri
And
the gods of
Sumer
and
r Akkadi KI
sa
?m
ilu
Afl- it
-
if
a
-
Nabii
na'id
na
Akkad,
which
Nabonidus
to
V2
//w
^/z'
ilaniP 1
se
ri
bi
the anger of
the lord of
the gods
had brought
m
-
jy
Babili KI
i
-
na
into
ki
rib
na
Babylon,
at
î'
<^/
/*'
//M
Marduk
belt
rabl
na
the word of
Marduk
the great lord
in
HIS
RESTORATION OF LOCAL DKITILS
//'
//;/
tim
i -
na
maS
ta
ki
Su
nu
(their) entirety
in
their
own
shrines
u
did
I
Se - Si
ib
$u
ba
at
tu
ub
lib
bi
cause to take up
the habitation of
(their)
hearts' delight.
kul
-la
ta
ilaniP 1
Sa
u
I
Se
ri
bi
May
TJ
a
-
all
the gods
whom
E!
|f<
have brought
-Hf
fl
<IEJ
-('/
tm
-
^
-
-TT^ JT t=m
-
ir
bi
ma -ha
zi
Su
cities
un
into
their
own
35.
st
'
$a
am
ma
har
llu
Bel
daily
before
Bel
and
//M
Nabu
sa
ra
ku
ume P
ia
Nabu
for
the lengthening of
my
days
/*'
ta
mu
lit
tas
ka
ru
a-ma-a
the
ta
pray,
let
them speak
word
^T
du
for
-
cffi
un
-
<Ef
ki
-
^
ia
//
<MiH
u
Tl
a
-
^T
na
-Hfilu
Marduk
my
good fortune
and
unto
Marduk
/a
ik
bu
my
lord
let
them say
H2
Ku
ra
-as
sarru
pa
li
hi
ka
"May Cyrus
the king
that feareth thee
and
'"
Ka
am
bu
zt
ia
mdri-su
his son
da
Cambyses
[have prosperity (?)]!"
II.
From
the Nabonidus-Cyrus Chronicle.

[Brit.
Mus., Sp.
II,
964.]
...
/wa
* r #"
JT
Zfez'
In
the
monih Tammuz
Ku - raS Crus
.3.
sal
turn
ina
a battle
in
A7
wa
ww/^
/'
naru
Zal
zal
- lat
Upe
on the banks of
the Zalzallat
v
against
ummani(ni} the forces
mdtu
Akkadi
of
Akkad
when
,
;he had\ waged, /

\
=W
m-^^/
the people
v ^v v
HW/
<^j
^T^
uspelQ)
ki
;
Akkadi Kl
of
Akkad
he conquered
when
uktassir
(?)
(?),
w/^v
^
he slew.
they rallied
the people
On
the i4th day
Hfffl
Sippar
KI
<M
ba
T
-
la
sal
turn
sa
bit
Sippar
without
righting
was taken.
HIS PACIFIC POLICY
Il3
ilu
Nabu-na'id
ihlik
umu
XVI
Ug
ba
ru
Nabonidus
fled.
OntheiGthday
Ugbaru
maiu
QU
//
um
?dbe
Pl
Ku
raS
the governor of
Gutium
and
the soldiers of Cyrus
ba
la
sal
turn
ana
in
Babili A/
trubu
arki
Afterwards
without
righting
Babylon
entered.
m
"
ilu
Nabu-na'id
ki
(so)
.,
ma
into
Babili KI
sa
bit
Nabonidus,
when
Babylon
/was taken \
\
captive.
... ...
.
.9...
.
.
jm
$u
-
lum
T ana
for
î!
alt
sa
kin
Ku - ras
Cyrus
Peace
the city was
established;
su
lum
ana
to
Babili KI
gab-bi-su
the whole of
it,
ki
bi
peace
Babylon,
proclaimed.
Gu
ba
ru
amClu
'
pahati-su
am<: lu
'
pahati
ina
in
Gubaru,
his governor,
as
governor
Babili KI
ip
ie
kid
ullu
arl u !
Kislimi
Kislev
Babylon
he appointed,
and
from
the
month
adi
to
arlm
Adari
Hani? 1
the gods
U
of
matu
Akkadt KI
$a
the
month Adar
Akkad,
which
H4
T

T ana
to
^m &
iiu
tw
<m
û
-
-in
se
-
^
-
Nalu-na'id
Bdbili Kl
ri
du
Nabonidus
Babylon
had brought down,
na
ma -ha
their
zi
su-nu
ituru P l
to
own
cities
returned.
I.
Col.
Ill,
11.
12
22.
INSCRIPTION OF DARIUS, KING OF BABYLON,
521-485
[From Schulz, Journal
B.C.
t.
Asiatique, Troisieme Serie,
IX, pi. VIII, col. a.]
ihi
iltt
rabu(uj
A
.
hu
(is)
ru
ma
az
da
great god
Ahurumazda,
sa
kak -ka
ru
ga
id
din
nu
Sa
who
4
.
this soil
did create,
who
an
-
5.
nu
tu
id
din
nu
Sa
these heavens
did create,
who
ja^^ ^ 7
zrf
dm
nu
Sa
gab
bi
mankind
did create,
who
all
nu
uh
$u
na
amelu
sale P l
id
din-nu
abundance
unto
mankind
has granted,
-TTI
Sa
*ETU *-
na
Da
ri
ia
muS
Sarri
who
Darius
the king
Ii6
INSCRIPTION OF DARIUS
TTfc Hf-II
ib -
"
ina
nu
isten(en]
SarraniP 1
mah
that
ru
in
did
make
one
among
kings
were before,
isten(en}
ina
inn
- te
i -
me
Pl
mah
ru
in
one
among
rulers
that were before.
na
I
ku
Da
-a-ri-ia-aDarius
mus
sarru
am
the
rabu(uj
sar
sarrani pl
sar
maldti F
great king,
king of
kings,
king of
lands,
sa
nap
the
har
li
sa
na
ta
gab
bi
of
whole of
all
tongues,
&
sarru
V
sa
^
kak
-
-T
ka
-
*J0a
ru
tTTT*
-
Tl
a
d
-
ga
king
of
this soil,
8.
ra
bi
turn
ru
tik
turn
great
(and) extensive,
19.
mar
son of
Us
fa
Hystaspes,
m A- ha- ma
an
wz'
z'^
the Achaemenian.
INSCRIPTION OF ANTIOCHUS-SOTER, KING OF BABYLON, 280260 B. C.

[From
Museum, No. 80
17, I.]
An
ii
ku
.
us
Sarru
Antiochus,
the
ralu(ii}
sarru
dan
nu
far
kissati
far
great king,
the mighty king,
king of
the world,
king of
v v
maiati
3.
ft
za
-
ni
in
Babylon,
king of
lands,
patron of
sag
ila
zi
da
Esagil
and
Ezida,
aplu
aâridu
sa
Si
lu
uk
ku
the princely son
of
Seleucus,
5.
far
fllM
^/iz -
ak
ka
du
na
at
far
king of
the Macedonians,
king of
u8
INSCRIPTION OF AN'TIOCHUS-SOTER
Babili KI
na
ku
ma
In
ar k u
the
Adari
umi
Babylon,
am
.4.
I.
month Adar,
on
XX
KAM
satti
XLIII
u!
$u
sa
the 2oth day,
in
the 43rd year,
the foundation
of
zi
da
biti
ki
ni
Ezida
the true temple,
Bar -zip
the temple of
KI
Nabu
which
is
Borsippa,
di laid
us
its
ti -
su
foundation
O
**
Nabu,
-Til!
apil
^3=
-
-TlWHel
-
^
bu
lit
^
kur
sag
ila
son
of Esagil,
the first-born
P-tT<vMTI
ilu
Marduk
of Marduk,
ris
tu
ti
of highest rank,
offspring of
filu
T?
^?
Eru
Erua
-
=m=
u
-
}}
a
^H
far
-
-ITrat
the queen,
into
tyyyy
38
ki
-
t yyyy
bit
zi
da
biti
ni
Ezida,
the true temple,
the temple of
HIS
RESTORATION OF THE TEMPLE EZIDA
''
A-
nu
ti
ka
Su
bat
tu
ub
lib
bi
ka
thy divinity,
the dwelling of
thy heart's desire,
na
hi
da
tu
ri - $a
lu
with
joy
and
shouting
4 o.
t
i
-
tff
na
e
-
-III
ri
-
S3
bi
-
ha
na
when
thou enterest,
at
3
^/'
~T<
-
-tW
-
*t.
tTTT
kit
-
-T<
ti
'iTT
sa
//
ka
thy righteous
command
which
#
is
- /j;// -
J~
ku
ri
ku
mi
ia
not hindered,
long be
my
days,
>~<T/
// -
^
ia
mi
be
da
$anati(ti}
many
43
'
my
years,
//
kun
established be
my
throne,
^yy t^yy ^ ^
//'
.&m
pa
-
-TTT^
-
TI
a
*e
i
-
il
bi
ir
lu
na
old
may
my
reign become.
By
hat
ta
ka
si
ri
mu
kin
thy exalted sceptre,
that holds fast
120
INSCRIPTION OF ANTIOCHUS-SOTER
pal
lu
uk
ku
same(ej
irsitim(thii}
na
the circuit
of heaven and earth,
at
ka
el
Us
tak
ka
nu
thy bright
mouth
may
they establish
du
un
ki
ia
matati P l
iUu
si
it
my good
fortune.
The
lands
from
the rising of
77
$amti(St)
di
ri
ib
ilu
Samsi(si)
the
Sun
to
the setting of
the
Sun
Uk
su
du
kata
If
ai
man -da
at
ti
si
nu
may my hands conquer;
their tribute
jgy
lu
-
*HK
us
I
&
tii
m
-
ET
ma
50.
a
-
ki -
na
suk
lu
lu
may
hold
fast
and
for
the completion of
sag
ila
zi
da
Esagil
and
Ezida
lu
bi
I
U
(it).
ilu
Nabu
Nabu,
s s.
aplu
asaridu
may
TI
a
-
bring
princely son,
~Hf
na
into
tyyn ÎT^ ^yy
tyyyy
biti
zi
da
ki
ni
Ezida,
the true temple,
HIS
PRAYER TO NABU
121
na
ri
bi
ka
damiktim(tim}
when
thou enterest,
good fortune
for
v v
-
//
ku
us
$ar
mdtaii
of the lands,
Antiochus
king
'"
Si
lu
uk
ku
sarri
mari- hi
his son,
Seleucus
the king,
5 6.
t^r
As
-
jm
ta
<MTI
ar
sTTT
ia
-
&
ni
-
-TI*
ik
-
Ef
ku
Stratonice
57-
A
hi
-
HHh
rat
-
^!!
su
sar ra
-
at
his spouse,
the queen,
da
mi
ik
ti -
su-nu
li
is
sa
kin
may
their
good fortune
be established
i -
na
pi
ka
!
at
thy mouth
THE CREATION OF THE GODS.

[K 54190 and
82-7
14,402.]
X
f
-
*- ET
;/
tff
e -
T
Us
-ET
la
w<2
na
bu
When
above
not
named was
sa
ma
mu
sap
Us
am
ma
turn
su a
ma
heaven
(and) below
earth
name
-ETEi
la
zak
rat
1
Apsu
ma
ris
tu
did not bear,
and Ocean,
4.
the primeval,
^
za
^JTT
-
Êy
-
^y^
-
^
mu
-
ru
su
un
^CTTT *^ um - mu
^T^
Ti
-
^^
dmat
who
begat them,
(and) confusion,
Tiamat,
-TTI
I
su -
*
-
mu
al
da
at
gim
ri
un
who
bore
them both,
*E
me?
1
A
hi
-
23
ku
-
'su-nu
is
te
nis
i -
sTTTt ET u - ma
and
their waters
together
mingled
-ET
gi
-
pa no
ra
field
la
hi
is
su
was formed,
I.
7.
did not exist.
THK BIRTH OF THE GODS FROM CHAOS
123
-ET
j
-
*4HFSe
-
7.
e
-
sa-a
la
nu-ma
yet
ildni ? l
no marsh
was
to be seen,
when
of the gods
-ET
/a
JT *Su
-
sTTT*
-
ET
ma
^T
-
Ef
ma
^T
$u
-
Ey
ma
-ET
la
pit
na
there had not been called into being
an )S
(and) no
name
jnj
2/('
-
JEJ
ku
-
^ffl
ru
fh' -
ET ^T
ma
-
-ET
la
tu
$a
mu
did they bear,
(and) no destinies
were determined,
//5
'
la
mi
ma
Hani
the gods,
gi
mir
hi
im
then were created
all
of them,
tlu
Lah
mu
ilu
La -hamu
u$
ta
pu
Lahmu
(and)
Lahamu
were called into being
-TTT^
a
-
di
ir
-bu
Ages
increased
4An
-
A
$ar
llu
Ki
$ar
ib
la
nu
Anar
(and) Kiâr
were created
ur
ri
ku
ume P l
the days
A-nu
Long were
Anu
li
An
sar
llli
nim
the father
Anâr
(and)
Anu
THE REVOLT OF TIAMAT, THE DRAGON.

[K 3473
-f-
79
78,
296
-|-
615,
8524,
8575 and
7
88419,
i3 with
restorations
from
4832 and 81
27,80.]
An
sar
pa
$u
i -
pu
Sam
-ma
and
na
AnSar
his
mouth
opened
to
f tlTMI^
7/ "
tyyy<]jy
sukkalli
-
Ga
ga
ht
ym^T ma
a-
tEE^<^
i
-
tu
zak
kar
:
Gaga
3.
his minister
the
word
he addressed
lik
ilu
Ga
ga
suk
kal
him
mu
- tib
"Go
Gaga,
(thou) minister
that rejoicest
4
ka
-
bit
ti
ia
na
llu
Lah
mu
my
spirit,
to
Lahmu
llu
La
ha
mu
ka
ta
hi
us will
pur
I
ka
(and)
Lahamu
thee
send.
^ jy
Hani
the gods,
na
gab
su
un
all
of them,
ANSHAR'S SUMMONS TO THE GODS
125
//'
$a
mi
Itt let
ku
nu
ina
at
ki
ri
ti
the tongue
them prepare,
the banquet
Us
let
bu
sit,
a$
na
an
li
ku
hi
them
bread
let
them
eat,
lip
ti
ku
ku
ru
na
na
llu
Marduk
let
them mix
sesame-wine,
for
Marduk,
nut
tir
gi
mil
li
su
nu
let
li
si
mu
their avenger,
them decree
al
-
Sim
ta
ka
ilu
Ga
Gaga,
ga
the
lot.
Go
i
T-
*-
^
i
-
^
ziz
-
Ey
ma
and
..
[ÊT
mimma
all
v
sa
me
Su
nu
before
them
stand
that
Tf
-
E^< -tHJ
zak
-
^ffl
ru
-tH
ka
JI t=w
su
-
-^
-
TI
-
ka
I
un
na
ana
tell
thee
repeat
unto
y^ JY ^pj ^lYY
&z
-
C^^
-
66, containing AnSar's for

11.
Su
un
Lahamu, correspond word

as delivered
message to Lahmu and word with the message

124; see pp. 126
ff.]
by Gaga
in
71
67.
il
-
lik
ilu
Ga
ga
ur
ha-Su
Gaga went,
his
way
126
THE REVOLT OF TIAMAT, THE DRAGON
tTTT*
u
-
tH
sar
-
IB
di
-
ET
ma
and
68.^113=
a$
-
-f
llu
ris
Lah
mu
he took
humbly
before
Lahmu and
ilu
La
ha
me
Hani P l
the gods,
abe P l
su
f
us
kin
ma
Lahamu
his fathers,
he made \ \obeisance andf
is
sik
kak
ka
ra
sa
pal
su
un
feet,
\
sir
he kissed
the ground
beneath their
ihe humbled I
himself,
/
I
iz - ziz -
^Tflf
-
ma
zak
kar
su
un
7...HfAn -
A
sar
he stood up and
spake unto them:
"AnSar
ET
/
*U1
-
m^
-
tTTT^ ET
u
-
A-HF-
*
i
-
-TI -Hfra
-
5^
-
ru
ku
nu
ma
an
ni
your son
hath sent me,
/t?
r//
lib
bi-su
sa
as
bi
ra
an
ni
of the design of his heart
he informed
ia
ti
um
ma
:
Ti
amat
lit
ta
ni
me
thus
'Tiamat
our mother
z'
74-
s/r
ra
an
na
$i
pu
uh
ru
hath conceived a hatred for us,
with
//
^'
;/rt
at
x
ma
ag
gi$
lab
bat
all
her might
"using (her)
angrily
full
she rages.
I.
Literally,
strength".
Till-:
ADVANCK OF
T11K
RKBKL FORCES
127
75.
cMI *jn ETW ET H-~f

ts -
hu
ru
Sim
ma
Hani
the gods,
gi
mir
$u
un
They have turned
to her,
all
of them,
di
Sa
at
tu
nu
tab
na
-a
da
$a
with those
whom
ye
created,
at
her side
al
ka
im
ma
are
as
ru
nim
ma
i -
du
u$ 1
do they go.
They
banded together and
at the side of
Ti
dmat
te
bu
ni
iz
zu
kap
du
Tiamat
they advance,
they are furious,
they plan
-ET
la
sa
ki
pu
mu
sa
im
ma
without resting
79.
night
and
day,
~Hf jy tyyy t
na
-
^
tarn
su
'-
j{< -ha
^
ri
-
na
zar
bu
bu
they make ready
for battle,
fuming (and)
lab - bu
unkenna(na]
h't -
ku
nu-ma
i -
ban
nu
raging,
with united forces
they
make
su
la
turn
Um
mu - Hu
bur
a
'
pa
ti -
hat
war.
Ummu-Hubur,
who formed
tT
H
&z
all
1.
-ET ET
la
-
s. S^T -ITuS
-
<T*
-
IS
ma
rad
di
kakke P l
things,
has added
weapons
i-dit-ns fr. idussu
(= ana
idi)
"at the side of".
2.
title
of the monster Tiamat.
128
-E! -EEII -HI

/<z
^T
z'/
TTT
-
v
/#</
^
sir
-
;;/<?$
r/
/a
mah
invincible,
she has spawned
monster-serpents,
83.
E^<-EEJET
zak
-
^Wss:
"sin
-ET
la
t^MIT
pa
-
tu
ma
ni
du
sharp
of tooth,
unsparing
at
ta
im
ta
kima
like
of fang(?),
with poison
ETHKtt
da
-
^TTAÎ^ ^1 E! tl<j ^
zu
-
mi
mur - su- nu
body
us
ma
al
blood
their
has she
rilled.
l usumgalle P
na
ad
ru
- ti
pul ha- a
ti
Monster-vipers,
fierce ones,
with terror
ET
u
-
86.v<^fTTme
-
sal
biS
ma
lam
me
us
das
sa
has she clothed and
with brightness
endowed,
Us
um
das' -
sad
a
/
i
mir
su-nu
\
sar
ba
da
on high
v
!
/she has caused\ to ..... / \ them
Whosoever
dread
beholds them,/
(?)
A^
-
US
har
[<cs: mi
Affl
-
88.
^TT
zu
-
EHIEJ
mir
-
I
su
-
^
nu
im
overpowers him,
their
body
T US
-
-E!
la
t
i
-
tah
hi
dam'
ma
and
ni
rears up,
none can stop
TIAMAT'S
BROOD OF MONSTERS
89.
129
-IIrat
-
su
un
their breast.
She has
set
up
a viper,
sir
ru$
Su
ilil
La
ha
mi
gal
lum
dragon
and
Lahami,
a hurricane,
IH~
sidimmu (?)
|a ragingl
!
<
u
--nit
akrab-amelu
a scorpion-man,
ume P l
tempests
and
hound
r/a
ab
ru
ti
nun-amelu
a fish-man
that are mighty,
and
9ki
na
a$
kakkeP 1
rams
(?),
bearing
weapons
TTT
=E
la
-El
la
II
a
.
H<
ha
-
pa - di - i without mercy,
di
ru
fa
zi
without fear of
the fight.
-III -EÎ
te
W
$a
-El El
la
ri
tu
ma
har
Mighty
are her
commands,
unopposed
<I- --Hf II El st - na - a - ma
are they,
94.
-
TEI
pu
-
un
na
ma
is
tin
and
of huge stature
the
<
es
-
-III
ri
2
31
turn
1
Su
in this
-
II
a
-
*T
tu
u$
tab
- Si
eleven
i.
Ill i,
manner
has she made.

11.
Pret. fr.
2.
7.
<?.,
the monsters described in
82
92.
i3o
95-
CE ~rT
i
-
-Hf-
*bu
^L
-
-III
-
V
-
na
Hani
the gods
uk
ri
sa
Among
her first-born,
JT
-
*}
/
^TT -lA-ffl
/
-
<Tsi
*- AHfff
pu
-
-TTI
ri
kun
uh
support,
since
he had given her
&
sa
aS
z/ "
TsTzV/
##
ina
bi
ri
su-nu
she has exalted
Kingu,
in
their midst
V TU
sa
-
5tf
us
tE^
-
^ ^!T
bi
-
97. T{
a
-EÎT
-
M
ku
-
^y
ut
a-$u
rab
i$
li
him
she has raised to power.
The going
ri
pa
an
um
ma
ni
mu
ir
ru
ut
in
front
before
the forces,
the leadership
puhri
ofthehost,
na
as
kakke P l
it
is
bu
tu
the raising of
weapons
to begin,
ti
bu
na
an
tu
su
ud
tarn- ha
ri
to
advance
to the attack,
generalship
in battle,
rty
nz
-
<u
$ik
^H -^T ^T<
-
-- tu tin
ip
-
ab
ka
tu
ti
kid
EI ma
prowess
in the fight,
she entrusted
tu$ -su
se - $i
ba
a$- $u
ina
in
kar
ri
to his
hand,
she
made him
sit
costly raiment.
HER APPOINTMENT OF KINGU AS CAPTAIN
l3l
ad
"I
di
la
ka
ina
in
puhur
the assembly of
ildni
have recited
thy spell,
the gods
K
I
$ar
bi
ka
ma
It
kut
ildni
have raised thee to power,
with the rule
of the gods,
im
rat
su
nu
ka
luk
ka
u$
ma
al
I
li
all
of them,
thy hand
have
filled.
I03
lift
<
/wr
-
-III
â
-
ta
ma
ha
ri
Be thou
great,
thou,
my
du
al
ta
li
ir - tab
bu
chosen spouse,
let
them magnify
2/X;
rw
/('a
^//
.....
all
uk
ki
thy
name
over
dupsimdtiv
She gave him
the tablets of destiny,
[>=ET
ra
-
^T
-
-TTIu
-
v
Sat
-
Tme
A
-
at
su
ih
on
his breast
she put
ta
kibit-ka
la
"May
thy
command
not
32
in
nin
na
kun
established be
that which \ / \cometh forth from/
be annulled,
/>z"
ka
na
nu
llu
Kin
Kingu,
gu
thy mouth!
Now
su
us
ku
li
ku
ilu
A-nu
power
of
ti
(thus) exalted,
having received
the
Anu,
.08.
mare P l
-
sa
si
ma
ta
for the gods,
her sons,
the lot
is
ti
mu
:
ip
su
pi
ku
nu
ilu
Gibil
determined
"Let your word
the Fire-god
It
//'
ina
in
z'
z'^
ha
naid
overpower!
Whoever
^T
is
exalted
^^ 3 HI
-
wz/
ru
ma
ag
sa
ri
Us
let
rab
bi
ib
1
excellence,
might
him display!"
$- pur~ma
I
llu
A-nu
Anu,
uin
ul
li
sent to
he cannot (go)
ma
har
sa
iltl
against her,
i.
Nu - dim - mud Nudimmud
dur
afraid
ma
and
was
Literally,
"make mighty".
MARDUK CONSENTS TO DO BATTLK FOR THE GODS
i33
/'
rrf
ar
kiS
ir
l! "
Marduk
turned
back.
Marduk has
set out,
/trt/
Hani
the gods,
ma
rw
ku
un
the director of
your son,
ha
rti
Ti
amat
lib
ba
hi
ra
against
Tiamat
his heart
to set out
ub
-la
(him).
(
ip
hi
pi
i -
Su
ta
ma - a
/has prompted!
\
His word.
he addressed
na
ia
ti
Sum
ma -ma
na
I,
ku
unto
me
"If
//r
^-/
0Z/7
//
ku
un
your avenger,
A-<
a
-
K
-
-<\<
Ti
-
fr*
/ww
me
ET amat -ma
and
-IIIu
-
-- T* v
bal
life
-
lat
will
conquer
Tiamat
give
to
ka
$u
un
hik
na
a- ma
pu
u/i
ru
you,
appoint
an assembly,
su
ti
ra
ba
hm
ti
na
make preeminent
(and) proclaim
my
lot.
In
34
Up
su
ukkin
na
Id
mit-ha
rti
ha-di$
UpSukkinnaku
together
joyfully
IH
/z
^T ET
-
'*>
fcU
ip
-
JT
#
*T/z'
-
sTJ
z'cz
<M
&'
-
ET
;;m
ba
ma
seat yourselves.
With my mouth
in place of
-^T
-
^
nu
-
ET
ma
tu
<T- ET ^T si - ma - lu
the lot
hi
sim
I
ma
you
will
decree.
la
ut
it
tak
kar
mim-mu
ban
nu
I
Let
not be altered,
whatever
*t
a
-
Till
at
na
do,
ku
ai
i- tur
it
in
ill
/
nin
na
/may
\
neverl
/
jmay
\
be changed,
never
be annulled,
se
kar
Sap
ti
ia
hu
um
fa
nim
.
ma
the
word
of
my
lips."
Hasten
and
si
mat - ku
nu
ar
his
si
ma-hi
HI
that he
lik
your destiny
swiftly
decree for him,
may go
<T-
-TI
-
E^TT
-
Um
hu
ra
na
kar
ku
nu
dan
nu
(and) fight
your strong enemy!'"
J^TT
i$
-
ET mu - ma
heard,
f
tlu
fc
TTT<
-
W\
mu
-*f -ET IK
ilu
Lah
La
ha
mu
They
Lahmu
(and)
Lahamu,
THE GATHERING OF THE GODS
f
iz
ilu
W
Igigi
TT
nap
har
Su-nu
The
Igigi,
all
of them
mar
wailed
st
i
:
mi
na
grievously
"What
;/^^'
ra
di
ir -
su
has been altered,
until
.....
wz'
- i
di
ni
i -
ni
sa
Ti
dmat
We
do not understand.
of
Tiamat
piS
ti
sa
ik
Sa
ht
nim
(?)
ma
and
the deed!"
They
I3
-
collected
^
-
"Hf-
ET- ETrabuti
?7
7rt^'
ni
Hani
they go,
the great gods
C^TT -<T<]
//
su-nu
mu
sim
mu
im
ti
all
of them,
who
ET
-
decree
the lot
*i
-
ru
bu
ma
mut
ti
An
$a
they entered in
before
AnSar,
ini
hi
.....
(the
in
nis
ku
hu
they
rilled
chamber?)
they pressed on(?)
one
i36

i33.
*li
-
W+
sa
-
hi
ina
in the
puhri
nu
another
assembly
The tongue
m
i$
-
ku
nu
ina
at
ri
ti
us
bu
they prepared,
the banquet
/they seatedl
\themselves ;/
-34.
'
HI
aS
-
-i<
-
na
an
/'
lu
ip
ti
ku
bread
they
ate,
they mixed
+
-
!]
-35.
<y^
Si
-
î
ri
30
-
ku
ru
na
;
sa
mat
ku
sesame-wine
the sweet drink,
the mead,
tTTTt^Hf-
<36.<T
ni
.
. .
TI^JIT
-
sa
an
su
un
;
si
ik
ru
(?)
distorted
their
they were drunk
>/<2
$a
te
ha
ba
su
zu
um
;
ru
with drinking,
their bodies
were
rilled (?)
ma
'
di$
gu
ka
bit
- ta
su
- tin
they were exceeding slack,
their spirit
i -
te
el
la
;
na
ilu
Marduk
mu
fir
was exalted
for
Marduk
their
gi
mil
li
su-nu
sim
mu
sim
ta
avenger
i.
they decreed
on
the
lot.
So the
traces of characters
3478
etc. read.
THE FIGHT OF MARDUK AND THE DRAGON.

[K 3487 -f
641,
K5420C, R
2. 83,
7978,
251 and
82-918,
3737.]
id
du
Sum
ma
pa
rak
ru
bu
turn
They
set for
him
a lordly
chamber,
ET
ma
-
ff< -TTI ha - ri
-TT
-
is
ab
bi
su
na
as
surpassing
his fathers
//
ku
turn
ir -
me
at
ta .-
ma
:ounsellor
he took his place.
"Thou
art
kab
ta
ta
i -
na
Hani
ra
bu
/urn
preeminent
among
the great gods,
Si-mat
ka
la
is
$a
na
-an
se
kar
ka
is
thy
lot
without equal,
thy word
5
77
y4
m'm
*'
lu
Marduk
Marduk,
kab
ta
ta
Anu.
thou
art
preeminent
38
THE FIGHT OF MARDUK AND THE DRAGON
f
z
E -IT
ra
-
*bu
:r3Ej
-
e.
<rsi -
v
mat
thy
-
na
ildni
turn
ka
among
the great gods,
lot
-ET
la
is
sa
na
-an
se
kar
ka
llu
A
is
mm
without equal,
thy word
Anu.
T
7-
^!I -tET
is
-
^1
u
-
<st A>ff El -ET tits

mi
-
ÊT ^T !T
nin
-
tu
im
ma
la
in
na
Henceforth
unannulled will be
ki
bit
ka
$u
us
ku
thy
command,
to exalt
and
<f-tE
su
-
us
to
pu
hi
si -
hi
ga
at
ka
abase
shall be (in) thy hand.
9.
m
lu
-
-TITu
<^f
ki
-
^1
na
-
tET
at
=ETT
si
/that
I
Established be
forth
which comethl from (
-ET
pi
i
-
.5?EfeTT<MTI tEJf^sa
-
ka
la
ra
ar
se
kar
ka
thy mouth,
irresistible
be
thy word,
.o.EjÊlHL
ma
-
tE~ry
i
-
^f^f
ildni
tEjfci -
am
ma
an
na
ink
ka
let
no one
among
the gods
thy boundary
-ET EEgtf Hf< -TI*

la
it -
"-^^1^-^m
za
-
Sm
ti
ik
na
nu
him
ir - hit
transgress.
i.
May abundance,
g occurs
the desire of
also in 1.15.
ga-at-ka
kat-ka; the Babylonian pronunciation of k as
THE GODS CONFER POWER ON MARDUK
i3g
pa-rak
the shrines
Hani
ma
far
sa
gi
Su
nu
of the gods,
while
they are
in
want,
m
lu
-
*TTT=
u
m
ku
-
*m
un
ax
-
ru
in
uk
ka
be established
thy sanctuary.
7/ "
Marduk
at
la
ma
mu
tir
ru
Marduk,
thou
"
-
art
our
%i
-
IT
mil
U
;
ni
ni
id
din
ka
avenger
we
give thee
sar
ru
turn
kis - sal
kal
gim
ri
li
the
kingdom
over the whole world.
//
sajn
ma
na
pu
hur
lu
Sir
down
in
might,
be
sa
ga
exalted
la
a-mal
(in)
ka
kak
ki
ka
thy word,
may
thy weapon
ai
ip
pal
tu
ra
it
su
never
be defeated,
may
crush
Id
ri
ka
be
lum
sa
tak
lu
ka
thy foe.
i.
O
tisab-ma.
lord,
whoso
trusteth in thee,
ti-sam-ma
140
na
pi$
ta
su
gi
mil
ma
ilu
his life
spare.
but
as for /
j
the god, J
Xa
Urn
ni
ti
hu
zu
tu
bu
uk
who
the evil
began,
pour out
nap
Sat
su
us
zi
zu
ma
na
his life!"
Then
set
they
in
hi
ri -
su
nu
lu
ba
su
2$
tin
na
their midst
a garment,
(and) to
-TTZ
ilu
&
-
*-
&+
hi
-
fifarduk
bu
uk
ri
su
nu
nu
Marduk,
their first-born
they
iz
zak
ru
:
si -
mat
ka
lot,
be -
lum
lord,
lu
spake
"May thy
have
mah
ra
at
Hani
ma
ba
turn
preeminence
among
the gods,
to destroy
ba
nu
ki - bi
give the
U
and
it
ik
tu
?m
and
to create
word
shall be accomplished.
ip
$a
pi
ka
U
(and)
bit
Open
thy mouth
may
there disappear
MARDUK TESTS
I
In
-
HIS
POWER
141
T
-
*4.
-EiT
tu
-
IH
nr
ki
-
da
hi
bi
it
him
ma
and
the garment,
again
command
<^z
.fo
//
t$
Urn
ik
bi
ma
let
the garment
be whole!"
He
spake
*JT A-HMITT
/'
wtz
/>/'
hi
bit
hi
ba
hi
;
with
his
mouth,
away went
the garment
6.
tE -EET
i
-
IH
ur
-TI^
ik
-
K te^ ET
bi it
M ~3 M
lu
-
iu
him
ma
ba
hi
again he
commanded
and
the garment
*7-<MET
^7* -
ma
as
I
tETT^T
si
it
^T-tEJT
pi
I
i -
hi
was
restored.
So soon
that
which
his
mouth
came
forth fromj
'
/"?/
Hani
the gods
ab
bi
hi
they saw,
his fathers,
i'/i
du
ik
ru
bu
(saying):
ilu
Marduk
ma
they rejoiced,
they paid
homage
"Marduk
2 9-
-TITu
-
^-T
us
si
-
sar
is
ru
king!"
They added
to
pu him
su
ls u -
hatta
the sceptre,
;?
M kussa
pala(a)
id
di
nu
hi
the throne
and
the ring(?),
they gave him
42
-ET
kak
a
-
ETA-WE^TT
ma
-
ku
la
ah
ra
da
'
bu
weapon
TI
-
invincible,
overwhelming
3,
TJIHET
a
-
^TT
sa
~T<
Ti
-
^v
amat
at
ri
lik
ma
the foe.
"Now
go and
of
Tiamat
/w
life
ru
cut
wa
and
the
off,
$a
ru
da
mi
sa
na
may
the wind
her blood
into
pT IBDf
pu
-
uz
ra
turn
li
bit
lu
ni
concealment
carry away."
z'
&' -
mu-ma
sa
ilu
Bel
si -ma - tu
us
ildni
They
decreed
for
the lord
his lot,
did the gods
ab
bi
su
ru
a
uh
su
ul
mu
his fathers,
on
way
of prosperity
<
u
IH
tas
-
T- *W
me
-
u$
ta
as
bi
tu
and
success
they caused
him
to take
E^
-
^
-
35
ra
nu
ib
sim
ma
I *'
the road.
He
prepared
the bow,
MARDUK'S PREPARATIONS FOR BATTLE
143
kak
ka
$u
ad
di
mul
mul
spear
/urn
his
weapon
he
fixed,
tar
ki
ba
kin
$u
it
ba
at
nu
,
he slung on,
37.
he arranged
......
-u
is
-
<y- EI h' - ma
tT
m
'*'"
-Hfim
-
mitta
na
$u
he raised
the club(?),
in his right
hand
sa
hi-
iz
^" kasta
maSku
ft
pa
turn
he grasped
(it),
the
bow
and
the quiver
* -TT
/'
du
us
su
lu
ul
i$
kun
set
at his side
he hung.
He
bi
ir
ku
na
pa
ni
su
naif
lu
the lightning
in
front of him,
with flame,
mus
tah
mi
hi
zu
mur
body
su
that burnt,
his
um
ta
al
la
i -
pu
us
ma
sa
pa
ra
he
filled.
He made
a net
Sul
mu-u
kir
bis
Ti
dmat
ir
bit
ti
to enclose
i.
the bowels of
and
in
1.
Tiamat,
four
kirbis here
cf.
1.
48
is
probably not an adverb but a contraction of
kirbi sa;
65.
144
TTMTI
sa
-
Stf *T sT J3 tTTT
us
te - is -
^
la
T*ETMJ
a
-
ri
bi
ta
ana
si
winds
;////;/
he posted
that there
might not escape
<Ct
-
V
sa
4 3.
mi
^ ru
siitu
âru
jif
anu
anything of her,
the South-wind,
the North-wind,
5am
$a(ju
saru
a harru
;
du
us
the East-wind,
the
West-wind
at his side
pa
ra
us
tak
ri
ba
ki
is
it
the net
he brought near,
the gift
abi -
sti
ilu
nim
ib
ni
im
hul
la
of his father
Anu.
He
created
the imhullu
<TSara
Urn
evil
-
^T
na
Ime
-
flK T^ ha - a
Tf
a
-
=!!!sam
-
^1
su
-
htm
an
wind,
the storm,
the hurricane,
f
Sara
arba'(da)
(?)
sara
the seven-fold
siba
(?)
sdra
1
daliha
the four-fold
wind,
wind,
the whirlwind,
l
/a
47.
tm= ^
u
-
flf
-
$anan
;
se - sa
am
ma
the
wind without equal
he caused to go forth
sare P l
sa
ib
nu
si
bit
ti -
su
un
the winds
i.
which he had
created,
the seven of them,
Literally, the
wind "four", the wind "seven".
MARDUK SETS OUT
IN HIS
CHARIOT
145
HTI
///
-
^/jf
71
amat
Su
ud
lu
hu
the bowels
of Tiamat
to destroy,
li
bu
arki
Su
is
Si
ma
be -
lum
to
advance
after
him.
Then
raised
the lord
bu
ba
kakka
his
Su
raba(a)
** tt
narkabta
/
si
kin
\
the thunderbolt,
mighty weapon,
the chariot,
a con-
\struction/
^
/</
-KI
â^
-
-TTI
ri
-T!T^
ga
-
C:
lit
tTTT
-
^
ir
-
-III
kab
ta
without
equal,
'terrible,
he mounted;
=TTTT
is
-mid
sim
ma
and
ir
bit
na
as
ma
di
he harnessed
it
a yoke of four horses
i -
du
us
it
sa
lul
gi
mir
of
su- nu
to
he bound,
all
them
la
pa
du
ra
hi
su
mu
up -par -hi
unsparing,
overwhelming,
flying along,
ma
la -
ru
ti
sin
na-$u-nu
full
of
slaver
their teeth,
~TT
na
-
V Tf
$a
-
A-ft t^TTT
im
-
54.
hET
la
-
^
sa
-
El
ma
Ê ^TCo]
i -
*W
u
ta
du
flecked with
foam,
in galloping
skilled,
10
46
sa
pa
na
lam
du
us
te
sir
ma
to trample
down
trained,
he directed
IHJ W<
harrdn - $a
its
I
-
ur
ha
su
sar
di
ma
and
way,
his road
he took
as
ris
Ti
dmat
ag
gat
pa
nu
us
against
Tiamat,
the furious,
his face
kun
set.
na
su
he
Then
Hf-'-Hfy
i - tul - lu
-
64.
-HFHani
the gods,
tul
lu
su
Hani
the gods
su
they beheld him,
beheld him,
abe
Su
i -
tul
lu
su
ildni
i -
tul
lu- su
his fathers,
beheld him,
the gods
beheld him.
it
hi -ma
be
lum
kab
lu
us
Ti
ma
ti
And
the lord
drew
near, on the midst of
Tiamat
i-
bar
ri
sa
illi
Kin
gu
ha
ri
sa
he gazed,
of
Kingu,
her spouse,
i - se
-a
is
tET -HI El
me
his
-
hi
su
na
at
tal -
ma
he surveyed
I.
.......
As he gazed,
kablus
probably a contraction of kablu sa.
MARDUK CHALLENGES THE DRAGON
147
$t
ma
lak - Su
l
sa
//
///
te -
wa -
troubled
was
his going,
loosened was
his
ma mind and
$u
-
M'
ha
ii
ip
$ii
su
Hani
the gods
stopped was
-in
r/
^
:
his action.
And
JT
^w
TJ
a
-E^TT
-
JEJ
ku
tE <i^
i
-
1
Su
70.
^^ m
i -
vw
li
di
his helpers,
who went
at his side,
mu saw
ru
TfV-m^T S?:-I-W *E<F

..... - da the .....
..... ..... .....
I
kakka
his
-
$a
ri
du
ni
til-su
un
was
i -
St
of the leader,
their sight
troubled.
75.
|~TT
is
-
<M
Si
-
ET
ma
be
-
^
lum
T^ a
=T
-
bu
ba
Then
raised
the lord
the thunderbolt,
ET-
T^
76.
KT<]
.....
Ti
-
^
amat
sa
su
ra&d(a)
mighty weapon,
[against] Tiamat,
who
ik
mi
lu
ki
am
is
pur
h'
was
furious,
thus
he sent (the word)
"
:
lu
sa
an
da
at^
um
mat
ki
Equipped be
thy host,
m
/
n'/
ku
su
set in
$u
nu
kakke P l
ki
let
i.
them be
is,
order,
troubled.
2.
thy weapons.
sa-an-da-at
That
as
Marduk gazed, Kingu was
samdat.
10*
148
iS
en
-
<
u
^HTMTka
-
di
im
ma
na
I
ku
si
Stand!
and
thou,
ni
pu -us
us join
a$
ma
Ti
dm a I
let
battle!"
Tiamat
an
ni
this
ta
i -
na
se -
mi
sa
mah
like
hu
tas
when
she heard
one possessed
-HFi
-
te
mi
sa
an
ni
te
en
was
she,
she lost her senses,
t's
si
ma
Ti
amat
sit
mu
ris
she cried,
did Tiamat,
furiously
90.
e
-
la
sur
h's
ma
al
ma
Us
(and) loud,
from the roots
asunder
91it
Ê
i-
ru
ra
i?
da
$a
4
man
ni
trembled
her foundation.
She recited
y-^yyy
tip
-
yyy
it
ta
ta
nam
di
ta
Sa
an incantation,
she Uttered
her spell,
1.
en-di-im-ma
te-en-ia
is-si
7.
emdlma.
2.
=
isi.
tem-sa.
3.
4.
=
the
e.,
ground she stood upon.
DETAILS OF THE BATTLE
149
9*.<MEJ[
K
Hh-HfHani
the gods
V -IS eTT^VASa
tahdzi
$a
lu
and
of
the battle,
cried
T
//
*- ;/#
^T IEJ
T
l
I
-
M
-
93
E^m ÊT ~T
in
-
ET
l
kakke P
for their
$u
nu
nin
du-ma
they
weapons.
Then advanced
Ti
amat
abkal
Hani?
ilu
Marduk
Tiamat
94.
/d!
(and) the arbiter
of the gods,
Marduk;
<?
/^^
z'/
tib
bu
kit
ru
bu
to the fight
they come
on,
they draw near
ta
ha
zi
is
u$
pa
ri
ir
-ma
be
lum
for battle.
The
lord spread
==
/
-
tt
sal
-
si
96.
ra
$u
mi
im
hul
lu
his net
to catch her,
the evil
wind
sa
bit
ar
that
ka
ti
pa
nu
us
was behind
in
her face
um
he
das
let
sir
ip
te -
ma
pi
her
i - sa
Ti
amat
loose.
She opened
mouth
did Tiamat
na
la
ti -
$u
im
hul
la
to
I.
its
full
extent (?),
I
the evil
wind
in-nin-du
innimdu, IV
fr.
emedu.
150

TTI
--T
-
TJ
a
-
-ET
na
la
ka
-
us
te
ri
ba
tarn
he made to enter
while yet she had not shut

99.
-!<
//
-
â
<2
tj MÎI M-I
/0
-
//
Sdre P l
her
lips.
The
terrible
winds
*m ^rr *irr
kar
-
ET
-
Sa
Sa
sa
-nu- ma
and
in
haz
her belly
filled
taken was
*m
/*$
ty
-
v
-
ET
-
ba
Sa
ma
and
pa
sa
us
pal
ki
her courage
her
mouth
she opened wide.
sir
j^
mul
mul
la
///
te
pi
He
grasped
the spear,
he shattered
ka
ras
sa
kir
bi
sa
bat
ti
ka
her belly,
her bowels
he severed,
^/
lit
lib
ba
ik
mi
si -
ma
he pierced
(her) heart.
He overcame
her and
nap
~sa
fas
,bal
li
sa
lam
her
life
he cut
off,
her body
id
da
eli
sa
i -
za-za
ul
fu
he cast down,
i.
upon her
karas-sa.
he stood.
After
ka-ras-sa
TIIK DKATII
OF THE DRAGON
e
15
<
7/'
-
^v
;;/j/
ff
#
-
IH
lik
pa
ni
na
ru
Tiamat,
the leader,
he had
slain,
ki
is
ri
sa
up
tar
ri
ra
pu
hur
her might
was broken,
her strength
is
sap
ha
Hani
the gods
ri
su
was
scattered,
and
her helpers,
\\
a
-^TT
-
m
ku
u
-
tE 13=
i
-
v
$a
*
it
li
di
tar
ru
who went
at
her side,
trembled,
tfl-EHI tmt
ip
-
la -
hu
stih -
hi
ru
ar
kat
su
;
un
were afraid
(and) turned
back
109
t
u
=
-
'se
su
ma
off
nap
sa
/us
ti
ru
they took themselves
their life
to save.
^T^TT
///
-
-ET
la
ta
la
mu
na
par-su-dis
In an enclosure
were they caught,
to escape
not
li
sir
su
nu
ti
ma
able were they.
He took them
captive,
kakke ? l
hi-nu
sab
bir
sa
pa
rfi
their
i.
weapons
I
he broke,
2,
in the net
it-tar-ru for ittarai'ti,
Pret.
fr. "iin.
152
*na
-
du- ma
cast
ka -
ma
ris
u$
bu
sat.
du
were they
and
in the snare
they
The
-I
tub
-
TJ
-
-y<
-
ka
ti
ma
lu
du
.-
ma
mu
of the quarters of heaven
they
filled
with howling,
y
se - n't
-
jy
su
su
na
~yyi u
-H m -in
ka
-
lu
his
punishment
they bore,
they were held
- TI
ki
-
&
tin
es
<
-
suk
kis
i$
rit
in confinement.
And
on the eleven
ti
sa
nu
creatures,
which
/with the power of\

\
she had
filled,
striking terror
mi
la
(?)
ml
ku
the troop
of devils
that
went
V
ka
at
;/
-
ta
di
her
he brought
-yyi ^y^
sir
-
'
ri
ti
di
su
nu
affliction
their strength
-y<
-
I
$u
-
^
nu
V
sa
ga
du
tuk
ma
ti
^
pal
-
together with
their opposition
beneath him
THE CONQUEST OF THE REBEL FORCES
153
HI*
ik
-
fbu
-
mi
Kin
-
&
gu
Xu-
us
fl "
he trampled.
Moreover
Kingu,
z'r
ta
bu -u
-Su
un
.,
ik
mi
ma
who had become
great
he conquered and
TI
//
/*
tin
la
with
im
*he
ni
Su
kim
Su
ma
duphmati P
counted him;
he took from him
^he tablets of destiny
la
si
ma
ti
$u
na
ki - Sib
bi
that were not his by right,
with
a seal
ik
nu
kam
ma
ir
tu
us
it
mu
uh
he sealed (them) and
in his breast
he held (them).
3.
/
'im
-
ni
Su
ik
mu
After
his
enemies
he had conquered
T
z'
I2 +-
T! T^
z'
v-
HTIA
mut
-
t^TTT
ta
A-HF-
du
rt'w
bu
(and) destroyed,
(and) the arrogant foe
sa
pu
Su
ri
Sam
,
ir - nit
ti
had made
.....
and
the triumph
154
An -$ar
of AnSar
li
na
ki
ru
ka
li
is
over
the
enemy
had completely
zi
zu
ni
- is -
mat
ilu
established,
(and) the purpose of
Nu - dim - mud Nudimmud
ik
su
du
iln
Marduk
the valiant
kar
du
li
had attained,
Marduk
over
3g
ka
-
tgyy t yyyy ^yyy

si
-
g
su
mu
turn
bit
ta
the gods
that
were captive
his
durance
dan
nin
ma
and
si
ri
it
Ti
dmat
strengthened
to
Tiamat
$a
ik
mu
tu
ra
ar
ki
is
whom he had captured
he turned
back.
ik
bu
us
ma
be -
lum
sa
Ti
ma
turn
Then
trod
the lord
upon Tiamat's
/ -
sid
sa
i -
na
mi
ti
su
hinder part,
with
his club(?)
pa - di - i that had no mercy,

la
î.tTTTt^T-TTI^^ ET
u
-
nat
ti
mu
uh
ha
par
ri
'
ma
he smashed
the skull,
he cut
MARDUK'S TRIUMPHANT RETURN
155
-ET
r/jf
<=E
-
<tt
da
-
^TT
-
/tf
at
mi
$a
Sa
ru
the channels
of her blood,
the wind,
il
/<r
nu
na
PU
uz
rat
the north-wind
into
concealment
.y
ta
bit
mu
ru
ma
ab
lu
su
he
made
carry
(it).
His fathers beheld,
///
r/
ri
Su
h'
di
they rejoiced,
they were glad,
presents
sa
bi
lu
su
nu
na
(and) gifts
they brought
unto
UTT
-
Tl
a
-
JT
ii
i -
ET
nu
-
uh
ma
be
lum
him.
Then
rested
the lord;
lam
tu
us
bar
ri
sir
ku
pu
(?)
on her corpse
he gazes,
the flesh of the body
za
zu
i -
ban
na
nik
la
ti
he divides,
he forms
cunning plans.
ih
pi
h'
ma
ki
ma
nu - nu
a fish
ma$
di
He
split her
like
.....
156

yy
jy
-
iss.
<K
mi
-
na
h'na
hi
i$
lu
us
sa
into
two halves,
one half of her
is
ku
nam
ma
and
sa
ma- ma
sa
aI
///
he
set in place
as
heaven
he spread out.
is
du
ud
par
a
ku
ma
as a
sa
ru
He drew
bolt,
watchman
sa
as
bi
it
me
~sa
la
he stationed,
her waters
not
su
sa
su
nu
ti
um
ta
ir
to let out
upon them
he enjoined.
141.
+j-
Eft
^ ^
i
-
$aml(e)
bi
ir
a$
ra
turn
Heaven
he passed through,
the places
i -
hi
tarn
ma
us
- tarn -
hi
- 'ir
mi
ih
rat
he surveyed, and
he placed
over against
JT
$u
-
*
.
-4
ilu
-^
Nu
of
-
<^JT -TI
dim
-
bat
mud
the abyss
the dwelling
Nudimmud.
'43.
&&- jy
z'w
^y
-
ey
ma
~
be
-
ife
lum
v
Sa
--TT
e=t=
su
uh
apsu
And
the lord measured
of
the abyss
MARDUK FORMS HEAVEN FROM THE DRAGON'S BODY
157
bi
-nu
its
iu
us
$u
e$
gal
la
tarn - h' -
la -
hi
it
structure,
mansion
like
unto
-45.
THE CREATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES AND THE SEASONS.

[K 3567 -f
8588 and
8526.]
ba
e.
a~s
sim
man-za-za
a place
an
for
Hani
the gods,
He
(/.
Marduk) formed
rabiiti
kakkabani P 1
tam-sil
hi
nu
lu
ma
- si
the great ones;
the Stars
their images,
the lumasi-stars,
y us
-
tyyyt tE
u
-
zi
iz
ad
di
satta
he
fixed.
He
ordained
the year,
4.
/A-
<yy
ra
ta
ma
as
sir
XII
for the twelve
into sections
he divided
(it),
arheP 1
kakkabani P l
III
TA
AN
us
zi
iz
months
three stars
he
fixed.
yy-^y *y<^ ^yy

'$
iii
mi
$a
Sattu
us
si
From
the day
when
the year
comes
forth
MARDUK CONTINUES THE WORK OF CREATION
159
-I!
</<//
(?)]
=TTT=
u
-
1H&
su
-
E^TT ~I<
ra
//
*TTT*
M
-
EiW yn
far
-
Sid
until
the end
he founded
}}
man-sa
^
az
si
-
-Hf- 5*:
tlu
E}
-
-Til
-
Ni
bi
ri
T ana
to
^T
ud
-
^T
du
-
<
u
the station
of Nibir
determine
-ET
rik
-
su
un
na
la
pi$
an
err,
ni
their
bounds;
that
none might
-ET
A/
*
t=Tf
<?
^
-
<
-
E! wa
~Hf El
T
s.
If
wa
ma
man-za
^
az
ti- hi
It
nor
go astray
the station of
/Vtt
^/
z^
ilu
E
Ea
kin
it
Bel
and
he
set
with him.
ip
te -
ma
abulle P*
ma
in
si
He opened
great gates
the sides,
ki
lal - la
an
si
ga
ru
ud - dan
ni
na
both (sides),
the bolt
he made strong
ET
-
<
u
Afl^T
im
-
"ina
-tH*<HKVET
ka
-
me
la
na
bit - ii (?)
sa-
ma
on
left
and
right.
In
the midst
thereof
ta
kan
la -
ti
tlu
Nannar
ru
he fixed
the zenith.
The Moon-god
160
THE CREATION OF THE HEAVENLY BODIES
us
te
pa
mu
Sa
ik
ti
pa
he caused to appear,
the night
he entrusted
(to him).
3.
tyyyt tty
11
<ys
-
^^
-
jy
hi
^r v ^
-
<y-
ad
di
sum
ma
uk
rial
mu
si
He
appointed him,
a being
of the night,
na
ud
du
mi
ar
hi
sam
to
determine
the days,
monthly
^y
la
^H
-
TI
a
ma
with
TI
a
na
par
ka
gi
without
ceasing
the
crown
sir
na
res
arhi
ma
"At
the beginning of the month,
*
na
-
la
-
pa
hi
...
of the
ti
kar
ni
at the shining
......
the horns
~fcTTfeSOT
na
-
^T^T=TTTt
ud
-
Wf
[^TKt
u
-
ba
ta
ana
to
du
VI
six
mi
shalt thou
command
determine
days,
/ -
wa
z/wz'
P7/ ^^^
ga
sum
su
la
(and) on
the seventh day
the
crown
to divide."
i.
8526 reads
THE STORY OF THE DELUGE.

The account given by
[K 2252 4-
Sit-napishtim to the hero Gilgamesh.

4-
2602 4245
3321
4486 4- S 1881,
33y5,
7752 4.
8124,
.
4-8124, 2964-8124,
460, KS$ijetc.']
^T
-17*
-
-*v
m Sit
napistim(tirri]
I. ana
to
W
$a
-
JT
$u
-
ET
ma
izakara(ra)
Sit-napis'tim
him
spake,
t
a
-
na
llu
GilgameS
lu
up
te
ka
to
GilgameS
"I will reveal to thee,
-f tT pf
7/ "
Hf-
II
^^ni
-
GilgameZ
a- mat
sir
ti
GilgameS,
the hidden word,
and
ta
$a
Hani P l
the gods
ka
sa
the decision
of
to thee
lu
uk
I
bi
ka
alu
Su
ri
ip
pak
alu
a city,
will
declare.
Surippak,
&z
//'
du
$u
at
ta
ina
ki -
Sad
which
thou knowest,
(which) on the bank

ii
62
THE STORY OF THE DELUGE
-TT---K
naru
^
$a fo
_
pu
ra i
//
nu
a û
$u
of the Euphrates
lies,
that city
*~^T ^SL^>Î î
la
-
*~n~
I*"*"*"*"
^YM ^*~
kir
-
r ^
4'
IT
a
-
bir
ma
and
Hani P l
the gods
bu
it
$u
na
was old
within
to
a -
kan
bu
bi
ub
la
lib
ba
su
nu
send
a deluge
their hearts
prompted
rabutiP 1
ba
su
abi-su-nu
their father
the great gods.
There was
6
tCTTT
flu
'
ET
IH I
*-
A-nu
Anu,
urn
ma-lik-su-nu
their counsellor
^
ku
E^TT
-
ra
du
the warrior
j-
-II tin
Bel,
17,
fr*
*-
J ÊT t
Ninib,
their
messenger
El- -ET
-
I
su
-
*nu
-HP -II
llu
^
-
^/
la
En
nu
their director
Ennugi.
77
TVm
igi-azag
iln
E
Ea,
it
ti
su-nu
The
lord of
wisdom,
with them
jft'6-ma
a -mat
su
nu
$a
-an
na
sat
and
their
word
he repeated
STT-NAPISHTIM
IS
WARNED BY THE GOD KA
63
na
ki
ik
ki - $u
1
:
ki
ik
ki$
to
the house of reeds
'Reed-house,
I*<s:
AY'
-ET
i -
<=EV
i -
<HHI* <IE( 3T
ki
-
ik
h'X
!
gar
gar
!
ik
ki
$u
reed-house
Wall,
wall
reed-house,
si
me
ma
ga
ru
hi
z'j
j-a
hear!
O
T
wall,
understand!
-Til
.
tU
.
3=
_
-
HI
_
/,
<=m<=
_
$u
rj
jp
pa
Thou man
of Surippak,
son of
f
'"
-HF^73rtra
'
^!
Tu
-
-^f
tu
=TTT=
u
pull
-
-TT
kur
=TTTT
bifa
(thy) house,
Ubara-Tutu,
down
V
/ 7?/
-
Ifc
me$re(e)
=ff
""
a
elippa
mus
sir
(
build
ship,
leave
tn y) possessions,
^<?
-i
(
napsati P
na
(
ak
ku
ra
take heed for
tn y) life,
tn y) property
zi
ir
ma
and
na
pi$
ta
bul
lit
abandon
(thy)
life
save,
1.
Ea probably addresses
Literally,
Sit-napis"tim in a
1.
dream, while the
latter is sleep-
ing in a house of reeds; see

2.
196.
"cause to live".
II*
64
$u
li
ma
zer
nap
$a
ti
ka
la
ma
and bring up
TT >-V~T
'.
living seed
of every kind
^TTT *~*
lib
*~T *~~TTT
H
^'
na
into
bi
elippi
28 8o concerning the building of the ship, are much broken. After fishing the ship, Sit-napiStim pro>
the ship.'
ceeds to
fill
it.]
minima
i -
su
I
si
I
en
it;
mmma
with
all
With
all
that
had
filled
i -
su
I
si
I
en
it,
si
kaspu
mimma
with
all
that
had
filled
of silver;
i - $u
si
I
en
it,
si
hurasu
mimma
;
that
had
filled
of gold
with
all
hi
I
si
I
en
it,
h'
zer
napsatif
that
had
filled
of living seed
8s.
ka
-
H KTJ
us
I
^TTT
libbi
la
ma
;
te
li
na
into
of every kind
brought up
7 -y"
elippi
ka
la
kim
ti
ia
sa
lat
ia
the ship
all
my
family
and
household;
TTt
bu
-
E!
ma
-
ul
sen'
am
the
seri
field,
the cattle of
the
field,
the beasts of
SIT-NAPISHTIM PREPARES
THK AUK
165
t:m
/
ET
w#
-
Tl
a
-
&
ni
flf
tf
-efcl
ka
-E^TT
-
I
$u
-
/nu
li
craftsmen,
all
of
them
TTc
u
I
*
Xe
-E^TI
//'
87.
*TT
tffo//
^T
-
~f
|V "
*T
SamaX
brought
in.
fixed time
ama
/^
ku
nam
ma
:
mu
ir
ku
uk
hi
ina
at
had appointed (saying)
'The ruler of
the darkness
-ET
//
-
Tl
a
-T<
-
-TITu
-
V ^L ^!
$a
-
-HF-
-^
-
la
ti
az
na
x
an
nu
eventide
will send
mu
tu
ki
ba
;
ti
ru
ub
heavy rain
(then) go
[*TTT]
//3
-
J3
bi
tT ^TTT E!
i?u
^Tpi
-
A ^}
hi
babi
-
elippi
ma
and
ka
into.
the ship
shut
thy door.'
dan
nu
$u
ik
ri
da
;
mu
ir
That appointed time
arrived
the ruler of
ku
uk
ki
ina
at
li
la
ti
the darkness
eventide
i -
za
an
na
nu
sa
mu
tu
ki
ba
//
sent
i.
heavy
rain.
Literally, "will cause to rain".
66
92.
v
sa
^
u
-
<tt
mi
eey ttyyy ^yyi

at
-
*
bu
its
-
ta
I
tal
na
su
Of
9 3. u
-
the storm
saw
beginning;
mu
na
i -
tap
lu
si
pu
luh
ta
the storm
to
gaze upon
fear
^
i - $i
I
94.
t
e
I
ru
ub
na
lib
bi
"'"
elippi
ma
had,
entered
into
the ship and
ap
te
hi
ba
bi
na
pi
lit
sa
shut
the door.
To
the pilot
of
=TT
-
IH
-
Hfilu
E
Bel
>"
^//
na
Pu
zu
ur
the ship,
to
Puzur-Bel
amslu
ma lahi
ekalla
at
*
ta
I
di
in
the sailor,
the ark
handed over
*-*=TU
a
-
97-
-^
^
Urn
=TTTe=
-
^^y^yy
$e
-
di
bu
its
se
e -
su
mini - mu
ri
together with
contents.
When
98.
the early
dawn
E
ina
^ i
-
E
-
is
-
na
ma
ri
ma
tu
appeared,
there
came up
from
*
z'
ym
-
-Hf- tlT
$ame(e)
IH
ur
-
^ ME
pa
-
^
sa
-
<Ilim
-
3
turn
^V/
turn
the horizon
i.
a black cloud.
Literally, "great house, palace".
THE BEGINNING OF THE FLOOD
167
99-4- Aflllu
ina
in
*TTT:3V
lib
-
rm^TETtÊT
ir- tarn -ma
-
Ramman
bi
$a
am
ma
Ramman
,00.
the midst thereof
f
l7tt
3=
<
a
H<
Afo
v"
Marduk
^
la -
thunders
and
^TT
il
-
-ET JEJ
la
-
ku
Nabu
and
Marduk
go
ina
mah
before,
ri
il
ku
guzale
Pl
they go
as messengers
v sm=
$adu(u}
over mountain
<
u
ET
ma
-
Tf
a
-
JÊj
turn
oa
^
tar
-
gul
li
and
country;
the anchor
Ur
ra
gal
i -
na
as
sah
;
il
lak
Uragal
tears
away
there goes
ilu
Ntn
Ninib,
ib
mi
ih
ra
$ar
di
itself.
the Storm
he makes discharge
-Hftlu
T?
-Wf
-
^T <M
-
^TT JT
is
-
tTT
-
nun
na
ki
$u
The Anunnaki
-TTI
di
-
carried
^
ir
-TTII
-
pa
ra
ti
ina
nam
ri
ri
$u-nu
(their) torches,
with
their brightness
lTT*
u
-
W< !=fc ET
ha
-
mr eyyîE
-
106.
v
$a
ilu
am ma
-
tu
ma
- turn
Ramman
they light up
the land.
Of
Ramman
68
S
mur
-
E^yy *i5r
ra
-
^TT
-
tE
i
-
^y
ba
^-Hfreached
=m=
u
as
su
his
whirlwind
$ame(i)
minima
all
nam
ru
ana
into
tu
ti
the heavens,
light
darkness
ut
iir
ru
...
. . .
ul
im
mar
beholds
hu
was turned.
No man
TMII
a
-
MtT*
ul
=TTT= t^TTT
u
-
tET 0fT
ad
-
Tf
.
tTR
nise P l
hu-$u
ta
da
his fellow,
no more
were men recognised
-Ey
$ame(e)
in
ildni pl
ip
-
-TI
-
la
hu
heaven.
The gods
were afraid of
bu
ba
am. -
ma
it
te
ih
su
the deluge,
they retreated,
yyy<=
i
-
te
lu
y ana
into
H-*T
same(i)
v
$a
-Hf-T ilu A
num
they went up
the heaven
of
Anu.
Hani P l
kima
like
kalbi
kun
nu - nu
The gods
hound
crouched down,
ina in
I.
ka
ma -a
ti
rab
su
sis
si
the enclosure (of heaven)
they sat
cowering.
She cried aloud
sn-mur-ra-as-su
sumurrat-su.
THE DESTRUCTION OF MANKIND
169
f ~TT^
ilu
<IITET
ki
-
TCi-T<
a
a
-
8.tTTT=-TI^^T
w
-
tar
ma
lit
ti
nam
ba
did
Is"tar
like
woman
in travail,
lamented
-Hf/v "
~ ^
d
//'/
^f
^TT
ta
-
~
bat
^ÎT
rig
:
ET
ma
UdniP 1
of the gods
the
Lady
with a loud voice
ud-mu
ul
lu
na
ti
it
ti
'That (former) race
into
clay
flTt
/?/
-EtgEET
i -
"Î
.
T
a
-
tur -
ma
a$-$u
since
na
I
ku
ina
in
has been changed,
-TIT/
-
<
limuttu
evil.
//r
Hani?
ak
bu
the assembly of
the gods
commanded
^7
'
z'
^z'
me?
/>
hur
ildni P l
When
commanded
in the
assembly of the gods
limuttu
evil,
ana
for
hul
lu
uk
nise P l
ta
the destruction
of
my
people
*
&z
a
-ET
/rz
-&
a^
I
^
-
ET
-
3.
TJ
a
-
^T
na
-
m
ku
bi
ma
tCTTT ET um - ma
I
storm
commanded.
That which
<tT* -ET
zz/
TT
-
5*:
-
JMTTt
$u
-
la
da
ni forth
TÎ^T at ma
-
4-<IEJtE
ki
?
brought
where
(is it)
Like
l?o
mare P l
the
nune P l of
fish
ma
it
al
fills
la
spawn
tarn
ta
am
ma
iidni P l
$u
ut
the sea!'
The gods
of
ilu
nun
na
ki
ba
ku
it
ti
sa
the
Anunnaki
wept
with her,
126.
>~>
-
ru
i
as
bi
na
bi
ki
ti
the gods
were bo wed ; they sat / \ down,
in
tears,
^111 < V
kat
-
ma
sap
ta
$u
nu
VI
For
six
pressed together were
their lips
IH-TTI
ur
-
<
ra
mu
sa-- a
ti
lak
days
and
nights
blew
VTMTI !^-^$a
-
TI=TTT=
-
^
i
-
ri
bu
bu
me
hu
sap
pan
the wind,
the deluge,
the tempest
overwhelmed
te
mata
the land.
si
-
^T
-
bu
mu
na
The
seventh
day
when
ka
it
$a
di
it
ta
rak
me
hu
drew
near,
there ceased
the tempest,
THE ABATEMENT OK THE FLOOD
I?
bu
bu
kab
la
$a
im
dah
the deluge,
the storm,
which
had fought
/(/
ai
aI
ti
i -
mi
uh
like
a host.
Then
rested
tamtu
ha
ri
ir -
ma
and
im
hul
lu
the sea,
it
subsided,
the hurricane,
.33.
a
'
bu
bu
ik
lu
ap
I
pa
al
sa
the deluge
ceased.
looked upon
T
-
ET tTTT
HZI
$a
^v'w
A'
ta
/w
the sea
while
caused (my) voice to resound,
but
kul - lat
all
te
ni
Se
ti
tu
ra
na
mankind
was turned
into
ki
ma
ri
mil -hu
rat
clay.
In place of
fields
there lay before (me)
m
ap
a
-
v
ti
nap
pa
Sa
am
ma
swamp.
opened
the air-hole
and
ta
kut
eli
dur
the wall
the light
fell
upon
172
ap
pi
ia
1
uk
I
tarn
mi
is
ma
of
my
face;
was bowed down,
at
ta
Sab
bak
I
ki
eli
sat
down,
wept;
over
dur
ap
pi
ia
il
la
ka
di
ma
ai
my
ijg.
cheek
flowed
my
tears.
^
ap
I
pa
is
kib
ra
ti
pa
tu
looked upon
the world
all
was
<!!
tamtu
sea.
cETTT
TA
-
na
XII
T A
-HfAN
After
twelve (days?)
*
i
-
t yyyt
-
y]
te
la
na
gu
na
emerged
the land.
To
,
matu
jyt
^r
x te _ m ^
try^yyy
tsu
4 ,.
Vtyyyt
sadu(ii}
e iipp u
the land of Nisir
the ship took
its
course.
The mountain
sjr
isu
e iipp a
is _
lat-ma
na
na
to slip
si
of the land of Nisir held the ship fast and
ul
id
din
(it).
i$ten(en}
mu
sana(a}
mu
did not allow

i.
/. e.,
The
2.
first
day,
the second
patn.
day
"upon
my
cheek".
pa-tu probably
THE SENDING FORTH OF THE BIRDS
es
SF
Ni
*<
-
-44.
1adu(u)
sir
do.
do.
fo/
fo
mu
the mountain
Nisir
The
third
day,
ri
ba
mu
Sadu(u)
Ni
sir
do.
do.
the fourth
da
the mountain
Nisir
'45-
W f
m V
si$$a($a)
tyyy<=
Ni
-
hanSu(ht)
Sadu(u)
sir
do
do
The
He.
fifth,
the sixth
the mountain
Nisir
yj
*T EI
u
-
t
i
-
siba(a)
ma
na
ka
it
$a
di
The
I47
.
seventh
day
when
drew
near,
tiTTt
w
I
^
$e
tETT ET
-
-^r
a
-TI
ÎTT^
u (and)
-
Hfmas'
let
E^H
-
si -
ma
summatu
Sir
sent forth
dove
(her) go.
'
/zX'
summatu
flew
lu
ra
fro
am
but
ma
The dove
to
and
man-za
zu
ul
a resting-place
2 pa - as - sum - ma is - sah - ra there was not and she returned.
i -
TI
u
-
*Wu
-
Hf-
$e
si
I
ma
a
sinuntu
maS
Sir
Then
sent
forth
swallow
(and) let (her) go.
//
-TZ*
flew
-II
*
i
i,
^
-
sinuntu
lu
ra
fro
am
but
ma
The swallow
i.
to
2.
I
and
Lit.
"went and returned".
Pres.
fr.
basn.
174
man-za
zu
ul
i -
pa
a$
$um
ma
is it
sah
ra
a resting-place
there
was not
and
returned.
I5 3.
tyyyt
u
-
* EEyy
$e
si
I
SET
ff
a
HTI
-
I
-
-111u
-
HF-
ma
ri
ba
mas
h'r
Then
sent
forth
a raven
(and) let
(it)
go.
il
lik
ri
bi
ma
and
ka
ru
ra
$a
The
raven flew
the abatement
of
me P l
the waters
i -
mur
ma
and
it
ik
rib
sa
ah
hi
beheld
came near
wading
tE^yyi
i -
<tT*
ul
trtTITE^T!
is -
.se-tTTTt^cETTET
u
-
tar
ri
sah
ra
se
si
ma
out
(and) croaking,
(but) did not return.
Then
brought
(all)
na
IV
$dre P l
at
ta
ki
ni
ka
unto
the four winds,
offered
an offering
<57.
a$
-T^HTCF
-
-V
sur
-
MI ^
ki
-
ina
<eli
kun
nu
made
a libation
on
^TT
zik
-
-TT-
eE
;
*&
f
VII
in
<
u
f
VII
kur
rat
sadt(i)
the peak of
the mountain
sevens
e=Tf* T
karpatu
^TI --T^T
-
^r ^<
uk
I
159-
t
i
-
da
gur
tin
na
the vessels
i.
set out,
un-
Perhaps read
ik-kal,
"it fed".
THE SACRIFICE ON THE MOUNTAIN
175
^
-
TTT
-
-II
bak
-TTA t T
kanu
reed,
HUEHR
erinu
//
Su-nu
at
I
ta
'"
der them
heaped up
cedar-wood
and
..... .....
Hani?
si
nu
The gods
smelt
- ri
$a
ildni F l
si -
nu
ri
$a
the savour,
the gods
smelt
the savour
to
ba
ilaniP 1
M
.
ma
zu
um
bi
that
was sweet,
the gods
like
flies
eli
bel
nike
ip
tah
ru
ul
lu
over
the sacrificer
collected.
When
///
la -
nu
um
ma
llu
Belit Hani
ina
ka
$a
di
su
now
the
Lady of the gods
drew near
ti
-Si
.....
Pl
rabutiP 1
(?),
$a
ilu
she raised
the great jewels
which
A-nu - um Anu
z'
pu
su
ki
su
hi
$u
:
Hani P l
had made
according to
her wish, (crying)
'(What) gods
//'
lu
abnu
ukm
kiSadi
ia
these (are)
i.
By
it
the (jewels of) lapis lazuli

is
upon
i.
my
neck,
For abnu ukni kisadi-ia
abnu sipri-ia, possible to read
e.
"By my
(jewels of) lapis la%uli'\
I7 6
ai
I
166.
am
h'
!
ume P l
an
nu
ti
will not forget
These
days
^HFTT ^TT Jm
<2/z
t^ ET
-
su
set in
sa
am -ma
I ana
0T^
da
-
THJ
ai
ris
have
my memory,
I67
.
never
will
E
am
-
<y^
h'
!
y^
E<*>< -EÎT Jgf 55:

HI
-
ildniP 1
li
ku
ni
forget (them)
Let the gods
come
.es.
^ni
ilu
fc
yyy
na
sur
hi
ni
Bel
^
ai
ki
-
to
the offering,
(but) let not Bel
II1I
il
-
li
ka
na
to
sur
ni
come
the offering,
.69.
^^ - ^w
^
/
?>
//
ku
ma
and
i$
ku
sent
nu
since
he took not counsel
bu
bu
nise P l
ia
im
7iu
the deluge
and
my
people
he surrendered
^HÎKTka
-
-7i.<tT*-EiT
ul
-
<^^T^^TTIET
ul
-
ana
to
ra
si
tu
la -
nu
um
ma
destruction.'
When now
ilu
Bel
ina
ka
Sa
di
su
mur
Bel
drew
near,
he saw
BEL'S
ANGER AT THE ESCAPE OF THE ARK
177
'V
elippa-ma
i - te - ziz
ilu
Bel
lib
ba
ti
the ship; then
wroth was
Bel,
with anger
A>Jf ttTTT -EE^TT

im
-
W
$a
Hh
HP-
HPllu
TT
la
li
Hani
the gods
Igigi
was he
filled
against
of the Igigi
74.
TI TI
ai
-
tern ET
um
-
m*
u
-
-ETT
si
ma
na
pi$
li
"Who
175. TI TI
ai
then
has escaped
with
life?
HI tff*
ib
-
lut
amelji
ina
ka
ra
'si
No man must
i
live
in the destruction!"
7 6.
^4//
^y tU
jy/w
_
^ TH
â
his
_
E!
^
ikabbi
^_^w
epu^-ma
Then Ninib
177-
mouth opened and
spake
>^ t^t
izakar(ar)
ana
to
ku
ra
di
ilu
Bel
:
(and) said
the warrior
Bel
rnan-nu
um
ma
sa
la
llu
E
Ea
a- ma
(this)
- li
"Who
but
thing
p
i
-
M^|
ba
-
>^-
179-
<M
u
llu
an
nu
E
Ea
could do?
And
di
e -
ma
ka
la
$ip
ri
ilu
E
12
knoweth
every
matter!"
Then Ea
78
pa
his
a-su
epus-ma
mouth opened and
EA'S
PROTEST AGAINST A RECURRENCE OF THE DELUGE
79
///
ba
am
ma
tii$e
Pl
li
sa
let
ah
hi
ir
come
and
mankind
him
lessen!
am
ma
ku
ta$
ku
nu
bu
ba
Instead of
sending
a deluge,
190
barbaru
let a
lit
ba
am
ma
and
ni$e P l
leopard
come
mankind
Ê^TT
//
flf
AMPff
ah
-
A
hi
-
ss]
ir
.
191-
t^4
am
-
El
ma
-
Jgf
ku
sa
let
him
lessen!
Instead of
)^
1^
4
-
"^
/a$ -
ku
nu
bu
ba
hu
sah
hu
sending
a deluge,
let a
famine
y7lillET
-
v
mata
Us
.
'93.4Eym
am
.
.
.
Us
Sa
kin
ma
ma
ku
take place
and the land
Instead
tas
ku
nu
bu
ba
ilu
Ur
ra
of sending
a deluge,
let
the Plague-god
lit
ba
am -ma
and
ni$e P l
li$-gi$
let
na
I
ku
come
mankind
him
slay!
ul
ap
ta
pi
ris
//
Hani P l of the
12*
did not divulge
the decision
i8o

,
96
tE
At
E-
rabutiP 1
ra
ha
sis
su
na
ta
great gods!
Atra-hasis
dream
u
I
sab
ri
sum
ma
pi
ris
ti
Hani? 1
the gods
caused to see
and (thus) the decision of
'97.
is -
t
e
-
r
nin
-
me
na
ma
mi
lik -
$u
mil
kit
he heard!"
Thereupon
came he
to a decision,
198.
tE <tTT El
i
-
~f~
ilu
T a
-
Urn
ma
Bel
na
into
lib
bi
l'?
elippi
and Bel went up

.99.
z'j
the ship;
-H
-
A'
^
-
^^/
ti
ia
ma
and
ul
te
la
an
ni
he took
my
hand
forth
he brought
ia
a
;
Si
us
te
li
u$
tak
mi
is
me
he brought forth,
he caused to
bow down
sin - nis - ti
ina
at
di
ia
il
pu
ut
my
wife
my
side,
he turned us
pu
to
ut
ni
ma
1
iz -
za
az
ina
bi
ri
in
ni
one another,
he stood
between
us,
kar
ra
ban
na
si
na
pa
na
he blessed us
i.
"Formerly
Literally,
"he turned our front".
THE DEIFICATION OF SlT-NAPlSHTIM
181
Sit-napUtim
a- me
lu
turn
ma
nin
na
ma
Sit-napiStim
(was) of mankind, but
now
m
let
Sit-naptitim
Sit-napiStim
sinm'S/i-Su
lu
mu
ki
and
his wife
be like
unto
^y_
Hani P l
~ry<ÊT
na
-
**.m*W
lu
TH-ET
a
- stl> -
$i -
ma
u
let
ma
the gods, even us,
and
dwell
Sit-napislim
ina
ru
ki
ina
at
pi
the
Sit-napitim
afar off
mouth
narati f l
of the rivers!"
ku U in Then took they me
ni
ma
and
ina
afar
ru
ki
ina
at
pi
the
narati v l
off,
mouth of
the rivers
.y
/e
si -
bu
in
r
ni
they
made me
to
dw ell.
THE DESCENT OF ISHTAR INTO HADES.

The
arrival of the
goddess at the gates of the Lower World.

[K
162.]
na
mat
the land
la
tari
kak
ka
ri
To
whence none
return,
the place
z'
//
ilu
Htar
|V "
Sin
of darkness,
Itar
the daughter of Sin
zu
un
sa
z',y
#;/
*
;
her ear
inclined
3.
~TT
-TA-ffl
-
^
ma
HP/v "
<
kun
&
then inclined
the daughter of Sin
z/
zu
tm
sa
na
bit
ti
her ear
to
the house
of darkness,
fo
^^/
;V "
7r
kal
-la
to
sa
the seat
i.
/.
of the god Irkalla.

"directed her attention".
the house
from \ / \ which/
e.,
DESCRIPTION OF
TIIF.
DKAD
i83
TMTi*-i
e
-
-ET
la
ri
bu- hi
su
na
he that enters
comes not
forth,
to
TJ *=jn
har
-
mv
-
-ET
la
ra
ni
$a
lak
la
$a
the road
whose path
does not
?
ta
-
HH
-
TT
a
-
ai
rat
na
bit
Sa
return,
to
the house
whose
ri
bu
su
zn
is
um
mu
nu
ra
visitor
excluded from
the light,
TJ
a
EEH
-
^!T ATf
epire
v- *bu
-
v-TI
-
^TT
-
$ar
Pl
bu
is
us
su
nu
to the place
where
dust
their bread
If
rt
<=m JT *-
<T^
ti
-
^T [UM]
it
9.
^
nu
=TTTt
-
kal
su
nu
tu
ru
(and) their food
is
mud.
The
light
im
ma
ru
ina
in
tu
ti
as
ba
they behold not,
darkness
they dwell,
tT
/rt^
-
^S
-
-TTl
-
$u
ma
kuna
like
is
su
ri
su
in a
bat
and are clothed
birds
garment
gap
pi
eli
f? u
dalti
'V
sikkuri
of feathers;
I.
over
door
and
bolt
bu-bu-its-sii-nn
bitbnt-sn-nu.
184
THE DESCENT OF ISHTAR INTO HADES
sa
pu
uh
ip
ru
llu
Is-tar
na
to
bob
is
scattered
the dust.
iStar,
the gate
v
mat
l
la
tari
ina
at
ka
sa
di
$a
na
of the\ whence none return \ land f
her approach,
to
amelu
p efu
ba
bi
ma
- turn
iz
zak
kar
.:
the porter
at the gate
the
word
addresses
amelu
etn p~
me
pi
ta
ba
ab
ka
Ho!
Porter!
Open
thy gate!
pi
ta
ba
ab
ka
ma
lu
ru
ba
Open
thy gate,
that
may
enter,
T
a
-
-ET
la
t^TT
ta
-
na
ku
!
$um
ma
pat
ta
even
If
thou openest not
tffl
ba
-
tT
I
T
a
-
bu
la
ir
ru
ba
na
ku
the gate,
<
Wrt^
I
ha
^
as
so that
enter not,
-in
dal
-
^m
turn
i
sik -
ku
ru
will smite
the door,
the bolt
T a
tHd!
-
A^
-
is.
IT
a
-
-^11
mah
I
$ab
I
Mr
}}< ha
as
will
i.
shatter,
will smite
me
is
here probably to be taken as an enclitic particle.
THE GODDESS AND THE PORTER
185
si
the
pu- ma threshold and

-
ip
$a
bal
kat
>
dalati f l
tear
down
the doors,
$e
el
la
mi
tu
ti
akiluli P l
will raise
up
20
the dead,
that they
may
eat
lal
tu
ii
eli
bal
tu
ti
(and) live,
(and) over
the living
'
z'
ma
will
du
mi
.tu
ti
amelu
swarm
the dead.
The
porter
pa-a-su
his
i -
pu
u$
ma
i -
kab- bi
;
iz -
zak
ka
ra
mouth
opened and spake
he addresses
23
a
-
na
ilu
rabiti(ti}
R
Itar
tar
zi
zi
the princess
"Stay,
<H
be
-
el
ti
la
ta
na
da
r
a$
lady,
thou shalt not throw
it
down
lu
ul
lik
$umu
ki
lu
sa
an
ni
na
Let
me go
(and) thy
name
declare
to
Sar
ra
ti
fl
Allatu
the queen
Allatu."
THE LOVES OF ISHTAR.

The
repulse of the goddess by the hero Gilgamesh.
[K 23i,
4579
a -f-
8018, S 2112 and
578.]
W
a
-
H^
llu
na
du
un
ki
sa
GilgameZ
On
the comeliness
of
GilgameS
na
it
ta
si
ru
bu
ut
llu
Istar
:
(her) eyes
she cast,
did the mighty iStar
7.
tKf
al
-
^
kam
-
ET
ma
~f
tT
illi
HF-
EH
lu
-
=TTT=
u
GilgameS
"Come,
Gilgamesh,
be
ir
at
!
ta
in
bi
ka
thou (my) spouse
Thy
strength
- iV
^fl
-J?
>(v'
Sam
ma
and
al
ta
on
me
as a gift
bestow
thou
//
mu
ti
ma
na
I
ku
lu
shalt be
my
husband and
will be
ISTAR'S PASSION
FOR GILGAMESH
187
aS
Sa
at
ka
!
lu
Se -
iz-ziz
ka
'^narkabti
in a chariot
thy wife
will set thee
Sa
ma-Sa
rti
of lapis lazuli
and
gold
whose wheels
hurasa
am
ma
and
of
el
mi -hi
(?)
kar
na
$a
.....
.....
are of gold
diamond
its
horns!
=TTTTs:
a
-
i -
na
biti -
ni
na
ri
ka
Into
our house
when
thou enterest,
TMT
a
-
Ei
-
rat
tu
li
na
rt,?
Si
ku
the mighty
shall kiss
sepe
T Pl
ka
lik
mi
su
thy
feet,
there shall
bow down
III
ina
<
Pl
Sap
ka
Sarrani P l
bele
beneath thee
kings,
rulers
and
HfffiT
rube P l
man
da
at
$adi(f)
princes
the tax
of mountain and
ma -a
tu
lu
na
Su
nik
ka
bil
tu
land
shall they bring thee
as tribute!"
l88
THE LOVES OF ISHTAR
ilu
Gilgames
Gilgames'
his
pa- a-~su mouth
i -
pu
us
ma
opened
T7
a
-
and
23,
/ -
[*E EEE<
i
-
^tJ
ka
-
E^TT]
ra
^T
na
kab
bi
zak
spake,
he addressed
ffl
ru
-
*bu
-
*T
ut
-HFiln
TT H-tar
IStar
:
^'
..... .....
"....:
ff< ha
the mighty
4 6.
//M
<B: -TTI
-
Duzi
mi
ri
On
Tammuz
the spouse
su
uh
ri
ti
hi
sat
ta
na
of thy youth,
from year
to
-Ill
l
-
^T<
-
ti
bi
tak
ka
.a
tal
ti
mes
su
year
affliction
didst thou lay
upon him.
48.
sj r -ET
/ -
-ITU *jn ET
bit
-
ÎT
ta
-
<= ET
ra
-
//
la
ru
ma
mi
ma
The
49.
brightly-coloured
Allallu-b\rd.
hast thou loved but
*Hf<
tarn -ha
*ETT
-
JT
su
-
ET
ma
-TII^J
kap
-
si
pa
su
tal
te
bir
thou smotest him and
his
wing
thou didst break;
iz -
za
az
na
in
ki -
$a
tim
ss
s
:
he stands
i.
the woods,
Ishtar's offer,
he
are
cries
LI.
24
45, in
which Gilgamesh refuses
much
broken.
THE FATES OF THOSE SHE HAS FAVOURED
189
"
^/*
/*
â
"
fa
(S: Ey m - ma
IH -HI
a lion,
"O my wing!"
Thou
hast also loved
;;//
/>'
ki
;
siba
it
siba
perfect
in strength
seven
by
seven
-TTI
tt/i
^
-
&
su
-
*T t^TIT
ut
-
Tl
a
-
tar
ri
ta
ti
didst thou dig for
him
the snares.
ta
ra
mi
ma
sisa
na
id
Thou
hast also loved
a horse,
exalted
54.
kab
-
li
is
dah
ha
zik
ti
in the battle,
bridle
(?)
spur
and
dir
ra
ta
tal
ii
me$
Su
siba
.....
stages
whip
(?)
didst thou lay
upon him,
for seven
-ET ,55 ET
la
-
-Til
tal
-
*- T< I
ti
-
I
me$
-
56.
^yy
da
-
^y
la -
-\
hu
ma
su
to gallop
didst thou lay
upon him,
trouble
sa
ta
tal
ti
me$
Su
na
and
sweat (?)
didst thou lay
upon him,
on
ummt-Su
his
ilu
Si
li
bi
tak
ka
mother
Silili
affliction
go
THE LOVES OF 1SHTAR
tal
ti
mi
ta
ra
mi
ma
amelu
r^ u
didst thou bring.
Thou
59.
sa
hast also loved
a shepherd
tfcTTT
la
-
vbu
-
-El
la
If If
ka
-
HTI*
-
ai
nam
El ma
of the flock,
who
continually
tu
urn
ri
(?)
pu
kak
hi
the sacrificial flame
poured out for thee
60.
mi
sam
??ia
ta
ba
ha
ak
ki
and daily
slaughtered for thee
ki
ti
tarn
-ha
si
su-ma
na
kids;
but thou smotest
him and
into
IH
HFbarbara
a leopard
tu
-
ut
tir
ri
su
didst thou
change him,
I
ta
-
ar
ra
du
su
ka
par
ru
there hunted
him
.
the sheep-boy
<
u
MT
kalbe P l
-
JT
su
sa
ram
his
ni
su
who was
own
and
his
hounds
& W
u
-
HI
-
-III
Sab
in pieces. 2
"tore his wounds".
-
JI
-
na
a$
sa
ku
ri
su
tore
i,
/. e.,
him
his
own
sheep-boy.
2. Lit.,
THE FATES OF THOSE SHE HAS FAVOURED

64.
191
tfcTTT
ta
E^TT
ra
<~
mi
-
ET
ma
<=E
JT <cT* -ET *-
hi
id
la
nu
Thou
hast also loved
ISullanu,
ÊT
urki
<M
-
65Sa
abi
hi
the gardener
of thy father,
who
X:tz
ai
nam
ma
su
gu
ra
na
sak
ki
continually
66.
-
costly gifts
would bring
=
thee,
- tt
;;//
t
u
Sam
-ma
nam
ma
ru
and daily
made
bright
sS*V<m
/
-
as
hir
ki
thy dish;
..... ..... .....
76.
^HT <
tam
-
tETT
-
JT
su
T^^
a
-
ha
si
na
thou smotest him,
into
-Til -ET
dal
-
-ey
li
.
^y
tu
-
^y
ut
-
la
tir
ri
su
a cripple
didst thou change him,
77.
-^y
"
*
Jfe
<j-
3
-
^y
-
ET
-
ma
in
-T --T^
ka
-
///
^'
bi
~su
ma
dal
thou madest him to
sit
the midst of
ma
na
a
ah
ti
couch
..... ..... .....
79.
<
u
ia
-
- si
and
as for
me
j^TTT^ÊT
ia
-
<MÊ VJT^ki
-
ram
man-ni-ma
$a- $u-nu
tu
.......
me]!"/
thou wouldest love

i.
me and
like
them
fwouldest thoul
\ [ ------
su-gu-ra-a
su-ku-ra-a.
THE TREACHERY OF THE GOD

[K
3 4 54
ZU.
3 9 3 5 .]
z>
sit
*'
Bel
ta
On
the insignia
of Bel's dominion
*ET
i
-
^TT -ET
-
*
i
-
na
at
ta
-la
na
su
gi
gaze
his eyes;
the crown
be -
lu
ti -
su
na
al
ba
as
ilu
ti
su
of his dominion,
the robe of
his godhead,
3.
tCTTTT
Htt*
l
-HFilu
-
-!<
ti
-
I
su
-HFilu
W
Za
-
dupnmati P
the destiny-tablets
of his godhead
Zu
Til ET
/'/
4
it
ta
na
tal -
ma
and
ta
na
tal
ma
looks upon,
he looks upon
T a
-
^~X
bi
ildni P l
^T '^CHF~
Hi
Dur
an
ki
the father of
the gods,
the god of
Duranki
7.1
"S
AMBITION
~TTT -TTfc
-
ig3
5.
t^^
w/C'
-^TT
-
^TII
llu
-T<
-
tT
is
-
W sa- bat
fast
su
Bel
Bel's
ti
a longing for
dominion
is
held
HFi
-
--TT ~TTT~
Zu
-
na
lib
bi
Su
ilu
in
his heart.
Zu
^TTT -ET -TT1 ET

ta
-
Tt
a
-
-HFbi
at
tal
ma
Hani P l
the gods,
Hi
the god of
looks upon
the father of
Dur
an
ki
-
uk
su
ilu
Bel
ti
Duranki
a longing for
Bel's
dominion
z'j
sa
bat
na
lib
bi
Su
lul
"I
ki -
ma
is
held fast
in
his heart.
will take
duphmati P
ildni P l
na
ku
I,
the destiny-tablets
of the gods,
even
and
TI-TM<
-
ri
ti
y
Sa
-HPT
Hani P l
all
ka
li
Su-nu
the oracles
of
the gods
m
/
-
*
uh
will
I
mu
um
lu
uk
kin
ma
direct.
will establish
T
-
liH-M
lu
-
^TÊTT
par -si
IEU ET A-Hflu -
Rs
ir
be - lu
ma
I
'
my
throne
and dispense commands.
will rule
i3
194
TIIE
TREACHERY OF THE GOD ZU
kul
lat
ka
li
su-uu
llli
gi
gi
every one of
the Spirits of Heaven!
ik
pu
nd -ma
lib
la
su
in
kit
mi
fa
And
his heart
pondered on
battle,
;//
rib
\
ki
is
si
sa
it
fa
at
la
lu
I I
at
the
the hall,
entrance of|
where he beheld,
=TTT=-TTM
u
-
-TTKTri si
*!<&
u
-
***$*-&
e
-
ka
mi
mi- -
ma
as he waited,
the
dawn
of the day.
Now when
J
iln
IH
me
Pl
ellidi
Bel
ra
mu
ku
Bel
was pouring out
the clear water,
mr ET
$ah
-
^
i -
tu
ma
na
""
kussi
and taken
off
upon
the throne
his
gu - su diadem
I6
k
-
nu
duph??iati
Pl
ik
su
da
lay,
the destiny-tablets
he seized
'
ka
tus
Su
lu
Bel
ti
te
ki
with his hand,
the dominion of Bel
he took,
-I
na
-
-TIT-
l^T tETT]
par
-
'8-
du
si
^ ^TT
illi
=TTT
-
Zu
the dispensation of
commands.
Zu
IMS
THEFT OF THE TABLETS OF DESTINY
IQ5
v *ip
-
HI*
-
^
-
pa
ri$
wfl
&*</
wj
z'X:
fled
and
in
his
mountain
hid himself.
<T
//
V
$a
-
/cz
<?/
bak
har
ra
turn
$a
kin
Poured
forth
was
20
^
ku
grief,
resounding
IMI
lu
IT
a
-
^bu
ET ma
IH
-
JT -^
-
lik
$u
nu
were the
cries;
the father,
their arbiter,
^
-
r
Bel,
was
through the hall
fa
pa
ak
na
mur
rat
su
he poured out
his rage.
ilu
nu
urn
pa
his
su
pu
sa
ma
and
Arm
mouth
opened
E e^
i
-
^
-
24.
t t E fc<] .-vy t-yy

i
-
y a
kab
bi
zak
ka
ra
spake,
he addressed
2 s.
[T? Tl]
ai
-
=m=
u
llu
ilaniP
mare?
su
Za-a
will
the gods,
his sons:
"Who
vanquish
Zu
und
over
the peoples
i3*
of
all
196
THE TREACHERY OF THE GOD ZU

Ill ad -
TT da
Tme
-E&
U
-
^H ^
sar
-
bi
sum
his
su
dwellings
make
great
name?"
27
llu
Rammanu
gugallu
is
su
mar
the son of
On Ramman,
the ruler,
they cried,
llu
A - mini
Anu;
ilu
A - num
Anu
the
te
ma
na
command
to
$a
su
ma
zak
kar
su
llu
Rammanu
him
addressed.
On Ramman
gugallu
is
su
mar
the son of
llu
num
the ruler
they cried,
Anu;
llu
A - num Anu
te
ma
na
to
~sa
su
ma
the
command
him
i -
zak
kar-û
:
al
ka
ma
ru
tlu
Rammanu
addressed
"Up!
son
Ramman,
-^ 1W
da
-pi
nu
;
ai
i -
ni
ka
bal
ka
mighty one
unvanquished be
thine assault!
ni
ir
ilu
Za-
na
kakki
ka
Conquer
I.
Zu
I
with
sasu.
thy weapon,
is-su-u
issu,
i,
Pret.
fr.
ANU'S APPEAL
|-
TO RAM MAN
97
33.
;itmu
-
ka
H
may
ir -
bi
na
pu
hur
that thy
name
be great
34
in
the assembly of
^
z'Az#z'
JM^.
[srE
i
-
Fl
rabnti pi
na
bi
rit
the great gods,
among
Hani F l
the gods
ahe P l
ka
ma
hi
ra
thy brethren
a rival
thou
Azr
A'
lib
$u
ma
lib
ba
nu
wilt not possess!
Let there
exist,
let
there be built
^-i
l
parakkdni F
shrines,
na
kib
rat
ir
bit
ti
in
the four quarters (of the world)
<rsi
-
tak
ka
na
ma
ha
zi
ka
establish
thy
cities,
37.
[ET flf< ma - ha
^TT]
-
zu
ka
ru
bit
na
let
thy city
enter
into
38
kur
\
$it
ra
ah
i -
na
mah
before
ri
/the Mountain
lof the
Show
thyself strong
World!/
Hani P l
the gods
ma
and
ga$
ru
lu
$umi
thy
ka
mighty
be
name!"
198
THE TREACHERY OF THE GOD ZU
tE*
ilu
ET
Rammdnu
RAMMAN'S EXCUSES
199
-ET
ilu
-ET
-
Rammdnu
la
la
ku
Ramman
not to go
ik
bi
decided. 2
Col.
1.
II,
11.
549,
and Col.
Ill,
1.
6.
2.
Eventually Shamash,
the Sun-god,
caught Zn
in
his
net and
recovered
Bel's insignia; see below,
The Story of the Eagle, the Serpent, and the Sun-
god, B. Obv.,
1.
3.
ETANA'S JOURNEY TO HEAVEN WITH THE EAGLE.

[K 8563 and
2,
454 -f
7978,
180.]
V
nasru
a
-
JT
-
ET
-
T
a
-
na
sa
su
ma
na
The Eagle
to
him
to
TTI
ta
na
iz
zak
kar
:
ib
ri
Etana
spake
"My
i6
-
friend,
JT
su
-
&
pa
-
TJ
a
.
tl<l
al
-
*t
ka
make
bright
[thy countenance
(?)]!
Come!
;/fl
$aml(e)
sa
let
me
carry thee up
to
the heaven
of
Anu
Upon
18.
my
breast
lay
ma
thy breast,
eh
upon
the wing-feathers of
THE START
2OI
JI HTAHFff
kap
-
HII
kap
-
*Tpi
-
pi
ia
Su
kun
lay
ka
my
pinions
thy hands,
//
z'
di
ia
Su
kun
lay
upon
my
<>
side
^HJ
/'
ina
<KH
eli
** JI
irti -
di
ka
su
thy side!"
Upon
his breast
he laid
his breast,
upon
na
as
kap
pi
Su
is
ta
kan
kap
pi
su
the wing- \ ) \feathers of/
his pinions
he laid
his hands,
ina
eli
di
Su
is
ta
kan
upon
his side
he laid
di
-hi
1
dan
nin
-ma
ir
ta
bi
his side.
He made
fast (his
hold) and
great
was
v^TT
bi
- lat
-
MZ
titen(en}
**.....
/
^V<M[JT]
u
-
su
sa
ki
su
his weight.
For one
space of
\two hours/
*.
he carried him up.
^T -II
na^ru
\\
a
-
-Hf
na
to
V
sa
-
JI
Su
-
El
ma
I
a
-
na
The Eagle
I.
him,
to
Etana evidently did not ride on the back of the Eagle but clung to his breast.
202
ETANA'S JOURNEY TO HEAVEN WITH THE EAGLE
z/ "
ta
na
iz
zak
kar
:
du
gul
Etana,
spake
"Look,
HMTI
z$
-
ETff-tET
ma a
-
<EftE
ki
-
tEE^y^M
i
-
n'
tu
ba
it
a$
is;
si
my
friend,
at the land,
how
nb
bi
tarn - turn
da
te
it
sa
1
behold
the sea
around
is
lit
ni- me
hi
ma -a
turn -
me
- e 2
li
mid -da
the abyss;
the land
perceive
sada(a}
/
tam
\
turn
tu
ra
na
I
me
as a
the sea
has turned
into
JO
little]!
\mountain, /
water."
JT
sana(a)
.....
f
u
\
sa
ki
hi
- ??ia
For
a second
space of
he carried
two hours \
him up
and
nasru the Eagle
na
to
sa
su
ma
na
him,
to
ta
na
iz
zak
kar
:
du
gul
Etana
spake
"Look,
ib
ri
ma
turn
ki
ba
it
as
;
h'
my
I.
friend,
Literally,
at the land,
(at) its sides,
2,
how
with the
is
ma-a-tum-me-e = matu
enclitic particle
me.
THE APPEARANCE OF THE EARTH
AS
THEY ASCEND
31.
2o3
<t
ma
-a
turn -
me
$ib
bu
[is
$al-$a
for the land
a girdle
the sea]."
For
a third
u
space of I two hours/
r
i
$a
ki
$u-ma
nasru
na
he carried him up and
the Eagle
to
Sa
su
-ma
na
iln
ta
na
iz
zak
kar
:
him,
to
Etana,
spake
T
?*.
^T
</
U
-
HI
ib
-
-TTI
ri
.
ET
ma
-
IT
a
-EET
-
<Ef
ki
-
gul
tu
"Look,
my
friend,
at the
land
how
i -
ba
it
a$
- si
tarn
turn
tu
ra
na
is;
the sea
has turned
into
ki
tu
the water- 1 j
\
of
channel
a gardener.
After
lu
na
$aml(e]
sa
ilu
num
going up
to
the heaven
of
Anu,
35.
wa
into
tttf
^
ilu
T^
<t<T
-
num
ilu
Bel
the gate of
Anu,
Bel
and
Ea Ea
ba
'
they came.
THE STORY OF THE EAGLE, THE SERPENT, AND THE SUN-GOD.

[A
:
tablet in the possession of Dr. D.
W.
Marsh; B
1547 and
2527.]
A,
obv,
i.
s.
i
nasru
^yyy
lib
-
ty
ba
-
^y
su
[lib
-
ÊT (?)]
la
The Eagle
4.
his heart
prompted
^^
ik
-
^y ET
-
pu
nd
ma
and
lib
ba
su
he considered
his heart
ub
la
na
ad
the
mi
sa
prompted (him)
young
of
/
ru
his
Tf
If
a
-
-a- su
ka
li
companion
to eat
nasru
pa
his
su
i -
pu
11$ -
ma
and
zak
kar
The Eagle
[y
mouth
opened
7.
he spake
ana
I mare P l
his
M]
-
Su
:
mare P l are
sin'
mi
unto
I.
young
'The young
enclitic particle
of the Serpent
mi
is
a rare
form of the
ma.
THE EAGLE'S DESIGNS ON THE YOUNG OF THE SERPENT
205
lu
ku
lu
I
ana-ku
eat
I
li
ma
and
will
will ascend
VET<st
i
-
9.JH-TTu$
-
na
Sa
-ma
mt
.......
I
ur
/I
\
rad
I
into
heaven
will
[mount].
will
swoop \ down
z'
na
ap
pi
is
si
ma
I
kal
in
ba
1
.
upon
the top
of a tree and
will eat
the fruit
ad
mu One
-
si
ih
ru
tar
in
ha
si
sa
of the
young
birds,
abounding
wisdom,
TJ
a
-
^T
-
-II
tET I
abi
-
-tH
amata
the
[*] t
izakar(ar}
na
na'sri
su
to
the eagle
his father
word
addressed
-ET t^
/a
=m
â/
eat,
\}
a
-
^
bi
^
$e
^
-
-E^T
-
V
sa
tu
"Do not
O my
father,
(for) the net
of
/M
SamaS
ba
is
nu- ma
(?).
gi$-par
ru
ma-mil
the ban
SamaS
-HF;/ " SamaS
of
laid
The
trap,
HI
ib
-
bal
ki
iu
ka
ma
and
SamaS
will fall
on thee
EH i3.7 tE
<5ar -
ru
ka
ma
Sa
fa
sa
ilu
will catch thee.
Whoso
the law
of
SamaS
That
is,
the fruit of the Serpent.
206
THE STORY OF THE EAGLE AND THE SERPENT
//
ti
kn
llu
Santas
Urn
nis
ma
ka
at
.....
transgresses,
will Mamas'
terribly
.......
4.
<ti*
ul
~TT
is
-
K M *- -!<
me
-
ET
ma
ul
is
-
$u
nu
ti -
ma -a
He
did not hearken to
them and
gave not ear
zi
kir
mari
of his
su
ri
dam
ma
and
to the
word
young one.
He swooped down
111
of the Serpent.
'I e
-
ts;
the
[1
ta
kal
mare
ate
young
B,
-
t/z'
su
The Serpent
when
he drew near
na
tlu
SamaS
a-
ma
turn
i -
kab
hi
:
ad
dan
give
to
Sanaas"
the
word
spake
"I will
-II
a
-
na
nasri
an account
To
the Eagle
nin
na
kin
ni
ia
Now
my
nest
THE SERPENT'S COMPLAINT TO THE SUN-GOD
207
kin
ni
ia
tu
na
in
is
si
My
nest
he espied,
the tree
-TI
sa
-
TTT- TJ
ad
.
ap
hu
mn
Scattered are
my
young,
MM
;///
ri
dam
ma
ta
kal
He swooped down and

-
did eat
9.
~
-
/w
(my young
ones).
nu
evil
sa
i -
pu
Sa
an
ni
The
which
he hath done me,
f/w<2^ -
sa
(behold!)
Help,
?z'
tu
rapastu(tii}
Thy
net
(is
like) the
broad earth,
giS-par
ru
ka
(is
rukuti(ti]
thy trap
12.
like)
the distant heaven!
-E
i
-
^7
na
-
//
ka
From
thv net
who
<HH
^
-
/i?
Umuttim(tim}
evil,
hath escaped?
(Even) the worker of
208
ilu
Zu
Zu,
mu- Ml
the raiser
ri
e$
limutti(ti)
of the head of
evil,
-Iff
un
-
.....
(did not escape)!"
ni
ni
$a
siri
na
The
prayer
of
the Serpent
when
mi
su
ilu
Samas
pa
his
su
i -
pu
sa
am
ma
and
he heard,
SamaS
mouth
opened
If
IH
-
na
siri
zak
kar
:
lik
to
the Serpent
spake
"Take
IH
ur
-
ff< ha
ti
ik
sa
da
If] a
the road,
go into
the mountain.
-Ill
uk
-
[*
-
ta
as
si
ka
ri
mu
Make thy
hiding-place
a wild ox
mi
tu
pi
te
=TfET e - ma
'ib
ba
$u
that
is
dead.
Open
its
bowels,
ra
its
as
su
~su
tu
ut
su
a
ub
ta
belly
tear,
dwelling
id
di
na
kar
its
$i-$u
mm-mu
make
i.
in
belly.
All
ha-ra-as-su
karas-su.
THE SUN-GOD'S ADVICK

tT
is -
209
-IT-
V El <tt
$a
-
su
rat
ma
mi
ur
ra
da
nim
ma
the birds
of heaven
will
come down
and
21.
22.
naSru
it
ti
h'
na
the Eagle
with them
El
z7
-
3.
*i(J)]
ina
la
ka
am
ma
and
will
come
without
du
nu
ru
ub
knowing
a piece of
z'^
te
ni
ir
ta
ti
flesh
will he seek,
swiftly
z'/
ta
na - al
lak
na
ku
tu
um
will he go,
to
the hidden part
/z$
bi
us
ttlll El ta - ma
will
E&
-
El(?)
am
ma
na
his attention
he turn.
Into
tff -III
lib
^z'
z'
S3 JT
-
*ET
at
-
11
ta
na
ri
bi
Su
the midst
when
he has entered,
do thou
sa-bat
su
na
kap
pi -hi
nu
uk
kis
seize
him
by
his wing,
tear off
210
-TZITJT
kap
-
^MTII <HiU
ab
-
[>E^]E
su
-
pi
hi
ri
Su
up
ra
su
his wings,
his pinions
and
his claws,
a8
^
bu
-
J2=<
ku
tfflf
JT
-
ET
-
^
l
<!^
-
I
Su
un
su
ma
and
di
ana
into
pull
him
in pieces
cast
him
ut
ta
ti
.......
...'....,
mu -ut
a death
bu
bu
it
a pit
from
hunger
su
um
thirst
mi
li
and
let
mu - ta him die."
-
na
At
zi
kir
ilu
&ama$
ku
ra
di
siru
lik
the
word
of
SamaS
the hero,
the Serpent
departed,
ti
ik
$a
da
ik
Su
-ud-ma
siru
[and] went into
the mountain.
And
the Serpent
came
na
si
ir
ri
mi
ip
te
ma
upon
a wild
ox
and he opened
*m
lib
-
tT I
ba
-
-tH
ka
-
EÎT
ra
its
-
^SL ^TT
as
-
-IT Dlf
i$
-
^1
ut
$u
su
tu
its
bowels,
belly
he
tore,
Su
ub
ta
id
di
na
in
kar
its
h'-
a dwelling
I.
he made
belly.
bu-ku-un-su-ma
biikum-su-ma.
THE SERPENT'S RUSE

34.
211
fr
-
^
mu
All
tTTT*
-
fT
is
-
*
su
-
-TTrat
V
Sa
-
ET
ma
-
Tme
the birds
of heaven
TI]
u
-
TT
ET
ma
and
-TI*-eH-ET
ik
<T-<=EEt!T
h'
-
ri
da
ka
ate
la
ra
came down
of the flesh.
35-
^T -U
naSru
liH
lu
-
*
mu
tfflf
-
I
Su
*E [^TT(
i
-
)J
-
T?
a
-
ET
ma
un
da
[But] the Eagle
his evil
purpose
(at first)
suspected and
it
ti
mare P l
is
su
ri
ul
with
the flock of birds
did not
/X'
kal
h'
ra
nasru
pa
his
Su
eat
of the flesh.
The Eagle
mouth
*-
V
-
^
-
ET
ma
and
*
i
-
E^<
zak
-
-tH
ka
-
E^TT
ra
T
ana
pu
$a
am
opened
38.
spake
unto
t
al
-
mare
his
Pl
Su
:
ka
nim
!
ma
i
let
ni
rid -
ma
young
"Come
us go down, and
Sir
rimi
an
ni
ni
ku
la
ni
nu
jofthe\
\
of this wild ox
let
us also eat!"
flesh
ad
mu
si
ih
ru
tar
ha
in
si
sa
One
of the young birds,
abounding
wisdom,
14*
212
4-CT]
ana
to
!$>TTtur
-
TJ3
a
-
Tm
mm
-
rat
bi
di
.....
a-
ma
turn
turn
away
the father
..........
the
word
zak
kar
:
bi
it
ti
sir
the flesh of
spake
"Father,
in
nmi
this
an
ni
siru
ra
bi
- is
wild ox
the Serpent lurks!"
A, Rev.,
i.
c*
ul
2$
-
me
su
nu
ti -
ma
and
ul
He
did not hearken to
them
gave
is
ma
-a
zi
to the
kir
of
mari-su
ihisyoungi
\
u
/
ri
dam
ma
not ear
word
one.
He swooped down and
it
ta
ziz
ina
eli
ri
me
na$ru
stood
upon
the wild ox.
The Eagle
tU
ip
-
tyyy
kid
$ira
is
te
-
ni
inspected
the flesh,
he looked carefully
$a
in front of
pa-ni-$u him
ar
kt -
$u
i$
ni
and
behind him.
He
again
=ITT
ip
-
kid
$ira
i$
te
ni
$a
inspected
the flesh,
he looked carefully
in
Till-:
CAPTURE OF THE EAGLE
2l3
pa
ni-$u
ar
ki -
hi
ir
ta
la
front of
him
and
behind him.
Swiftly
[tatf] jTTT
it -
ta
na
al
lak
na
ku
tuni
he went,
to
the hidden part
lib
bi
us
ta
ma
am -a
na
lib
bi
his attention
he turned.
Into
the midst
z'(2
tyi -III
f
-
I
bi
-
*Hfff<
siru
^T
is -
W
sa
-
-<
bat
-^TT
-
ina
$u
su
when
he had entered,
the Serpent
seized
him
by
pa
his
$u
wing
.....
The Eagle
his
mouth
/'
pu
.-
Sa
am
ma
and
na
siri
zak
kar-$u
:
opened
to
the Serpent
spake
[MF
wo/>
-
"To]
Its
-HFan
-
^
ni
-
ET
ma
<^!T
kima
ty? ^TTI <Te

-
ri
h'
"Have mercy upon me and
according to
(thy) pleasure
</w
na
gift
lut
lim
ka
siru
with a
will
present thee."
The Serpent
/rt
pu
Sa
am -ma
and
na
na$ri
his
mouth
opened
to
the Eagle
214
i -
zak
kar :
mas
"If
I
sar
ka
ma
ilu
spake
release thee
SamaS
nu
ki
i
.
ap
$e - rit
ka
against us(?)
thy punishment
i -
sah
hu
ra
na
to
muh
me,
hi
ia
sa
will return
which
TJ
a
-
sak
ka
nu
ka
na
ku
$e - ir
ta
(now)
execute on thee
as a punishment.
.yyj
-
nak
hi
is
kap
pi
$u
ab
ri
He
tore off
his wings,
his pinions
ib
ku
un
hi
ma A
(and) his talons,
he pulled him in pieces and
I
id
-
JT
su
-
^
ut
-
di
su
ana
into
ta
ti
cast
him
a pit
mu
ut
bu
bu
ti
su
um
thirst
death
from hunger
and
/ -
mu
ut
he died.
.
ib-ku-un-sii-ma
ibkum-sn-ma.
HOW ADAPA BROKE THE WING OF THE

SOUTH-WIND.
[V. A. Th. 348.]
.,
i.
jy
$u
tfTTt
-
[-E
tu
-
ET
z
The South-wind
T
~
ga blew
am - ma
and
a -su
ut
- ti
ib
ba
a$
su
na
to
bi
- i
tu
ducked him under,
the dwelling of
*TTT= "ElTT
nu
-
^
-
-ETT
-
^
il
-
sa
am
si
su
the fishes
she
made him
sink.
su
tu
ra
"O South-wind
[thou hast played]
me
ET-ET
uh
-
tE
i
-
hi
ki
ma -la
all
ba
as
su
thy tricks (?)
that
there are!
5.
ka
-
<m
a
-
m
lit
ap
-pa
ki
u
I
se
bi
ir
Thy wing
i.
will
the
break!"
i-î-ga-am-ma
in
11.
=
9,
i^lkamma;
14 and
1
Babylonian pronunciation of k as
occurs also
7,
6.
216
HOW
ADAPA BROKE THE WING OF THE SOUTH-WIND
ki
ma
na
bi
su
ik
bu
said,
As
e.
with
his
mouth
ka
-
he had
W
sa
[JT ^TTT~] -T<

su
-
ti
ap the
pa
sa
(so) of
the South-wind
wing
//
te
es
bi
ir
VII
mi
was broken.
7-
For seven
days
[JT tTTTt]
$u
-
-^T
tu
T~Hf
a
-
ElI^K
ma a
-
^TT!-<
u
-
na
ti
ul
the South-wind
over
the land
did not
TI* -TTT*
-
f
llu
TI
^
nu
ig
ga
blow.
AAnu
na
to
Su
uk
ka
li
su
ilu
la
ab
ra
at
his minister
Ila-abrat
9.
t
Sa
as
:
si
am
mi
ni
su
tu
spake
"Why
has the South-wind
is
tu
VII
seven
mi
na
ma -a
ti
for
days
io
-
over
the land
-ET
la
tE -TT*
i
-
-TTT*
ga
JT
Su
^K -cH -ET J
-
zi
uk
ka
la
su
not
i.
blown!"
bi-i-su
His minister
pl-u.
HIS
SUMMONS BEFORE ANU
217
E -ET
I
-
=T
-
E^TT *ET
-
tE^tKf^T
pa - al - $u answered him
:
^
bi
-
la
ab
ra
at
i -
li
Ila-abrat
"My
lord,
ÎT^ EKMTI ma
-
-f
ilu
da
pa
ar
E
Ea,
$a
Adapa,
the son of
of
su
ti
ka
ap the
pa
$a
t'$
te
bi
- ir
the South-wind
wing
has broken."
Rev.,
1.
10
da
pa
na
pa
before
ni
llu
When Adapa
AAnu
ni
$ar
-
ri
na
ki
ri
bi -
$u
the king
drew
near,
E
/ -
^ IH jy
mu
-
ET
-
-Hf- y^
llu
/
-
^^TT ^y
il
-
Ey
ma
ur
su
ma
nu
si :
Anu saw him and
said
y
al
-
y^
ka
da
pa
am
mi
ni
"Come,
Adapa,
why
M
$a
-yyy- ^y<
-
su
ti
ka
ap
the
pa
of
the South-wind
wing
i .
About 34
11.,
which describe how Adapa, on being summoned before Anu,
reached heaven, are here omitted.
218
HOW
ADAPA BROKE THE WING OF THE SOUTH-WIND
/<?
es
bi
ir
da
pa
ilu
didst thou break?"
Adapa
to
A - na Anu
HI
z)!>
cjfif
be
:
pa - al made answer
Hi
lord,
na
bi
if
"My
for
the house
be
Hi
ia
na
ga
ab
la
at
of
my
father
in
the midst
am
ti
nu
ni
a
I
ba
ar
....
.
of the sea
fish
was catching
Su
tu
zi
(when) the South-wind
ga blew
am
ma
and
ia
Si
me
ti
ib
ba
an
ni
na
bi
it
did she duck under,
to
the dwelling
nu
ni
ul
ta
am
si
il
of the fishes
she
made me sink!"
THE SONG OF URA, THE PLAGUE-GOD.

[K 1282 and Bu. 91
5
9, 186.]
tET
-
-ET
la
na
at
ni
bu
ta
nit
ti
For years
without
number
may
the glory of
EM
the great lord
'-V
[Ura endure
!]
-f^TE^TT
-
ra
For
Ura
'
Su
ma
and
ana
to
was angry
P an overwhelm
sa
~
mdtatif 1
the lands,
3.
-<
JgJ
ft
-
y-
ka
li
si
na
ku
nu
all
of them,
he turned
[tm*
-
n
2W
-
*TW JT]
un
-
4.
f
llu
*E
I
-
^
Sum
ET
ma
IH i
- lik -
su
su
his
mind;
but iSum,
his counsellor
ni
hu
Su
ma
and
zt
ib
pacified
him
he abandoned
[his
wrath]
220
THE SONG OF
URA,
THE PLAGUE-GOD
ki
am
ik
ta
bi
And
thus
spake
ku
ra
du
lllt
Ur Ura
:
ra
sa
za
ma
ru
the hero
"Whosoever
that song
T
-
I
-
&
1
su
na
du
ma
in
sir
ti
su
shall praise,
his shrine
lik - tarn -
me
ra
hegallu
plentiful be
made
abundance
.... ....
sa
su
me
Whosoever
my name
$ar
bu
bil
kib
ra
ti
shall magnify,
may
he rule
fthefour quatersofthel world / \

!
Sa
ta
nit
ti
kar
ra
du
ti
ia
Whosoever
the glory
of
my
valour
dib
bu
bu
ma
hi
ra
shall
ai
ir
si
proclaims,
an opponent
he not
possess!
amelu
zammeru
singer
$a
sar
ra
it
hu
ul
The
who
chants
will not
i -
ma
die
ti
ina
Sib
ti
eli
sarri
in
in
the pestilence,
11.
unto
used for
scltu.
king
and
i.
sa-a-su here and
23 and 26
is
ITS
MAGICAL PROPERTIES
221
Hffl
r3*
noble
-E^TTIgJ
//'
ÊT^JT
at
-
20.
amslu
//<&
mu
hi
jup
$ar
well-pleasing shall be
his speech!
The
scribe
,fa
z'//
ha
zu
i -
&
ti
ina
nak
(his)
ri
who
learns
it
will escape
from
enemy
..... ..... .....
T
ina
,
JH -T<
-
h'r
ti
sCTTT ET urn - ma
^
-
ni
in
the shrine
of the peoples,
Sar
ka
ai
an
hi
-me
i -
zak
ka
ru
where
continually
my name
he
cries aloud,
zu
un
hi
pi
will
it
I
ti
ina
biti
his ear
open!
in
the house
a
-
V !U
$a
-
sar
dup
pu
hi
$ak
is
nu
where
that tablet
set,
/7a
Ur
I,
ra
lu
gu
ug
ma
and
liS
gi
hi
should
Ura,
be angry
destruction should
* lu
Imina-bi
patar
the dagger of
h'b
ti
ul
shall not
ti -
hi-hi
it,
Imina-bi cause,
pestilence
approach
T<T
Sa
-
EiT
-
Urn
tu
$ak
na
-as
upon
su
za- ma
ru
immunity
i.
shall rest
sakncit-su.
it!
May
that song
sak-na-as-su
222
THE SONG OF URA, THE PLAGUE-GOD

ET ma
always
-i<
-
ET
ma
$
-
ET
$a
-
$u
na
ti
kin
ma
be established,
li
it
kun
ga
du
for ever!
ul
la
may
stand firm
ma
ta
ti
nap
all
har
si
na
*! E! El h'S-ma-ma
give ear and
May
lands
28.
//
-
Ejff
the peoples
na
du
kur
di
ia
glorify
my
TTT
valour,
may
F
me
//
-
kal
da
ad
mu
ra
ma
and
of
all
dwellings
behold
li
$ar
ba
$u
me
magnify
my name
LEGEND CONCERNING THE BIRTH AND BOYHOOD OF KING SARGON

I.
[K 3401 -f S 2118 and
4470.]
Sarru
ukm
Sarru
dan
nu
$ar
Sargon,
the mighty king,
king
ga
de
K!
na
ku
um
mi
of Agade,
am
I.
My
mother
ni
turn
bi
ul
I
di
f
was lowly,
my
father
knew
not,
while thei brother /
obi
ia
ra
mi
$a
da
It
of
my
father
inhabits
the mountain.
My
city
TT ff
"
^TT
-
^T- E^TTTI
-
^
-
V
$a
i
-
^1
#
is
pi
ra
ni
na
hi
Azupiranu,
which
on
the bank
J& *T E8 Hfflf
naru
Puratti
$ak
nu
ra
an
ni
of the Euphrates
lies.
She conceived me
224
LEGEND CONCERNING THE BIRTH OF SARGON
um
mu
ni
turn
i -
na
pu
uz
ri
[my] lowly mother,
in
secret
6.
~yy -TAHPFf -4t$

-
lid
an
ni
kun
an
ni
she brought
me
forth.
She
set
me
T*yz'
V
Sa
JI-TTI
su
-
^
i -
^/>
pi
ri
na
iddi
in
a basket
of
rushes,
with
bitumen
^ffETf
<5a^z'
HI A
2/>
.^y tyy^
id
-
z'a
hi
;
dan
an
ni
na
my
door
she closed
she gave
me
to
$a
the river
la
li
e -
is
sa
an
ni
which (rose) not
over me.
Then bore me
na
to
eli
Ak
ki
amslu
nak-me
the river,
Akki
the irrigator,
bil
an
ni
Ak
ki
amelu
nak-me
it
carried me.
Akki,
the irrigator,
HT
i
-TT
-I!
-
T^TT
i&l
na
ip
in
).
So
4470;
3401 reads id-dan-ni "she cast me".
2.
4470 reads jjjjlj.
HIS RESCUE
FROM THE RIVER
225
Se - la
an
up,
ni
Ak
ki
amelu
ndk-me
lifted
me
Akki,
the irrigator,
na
ma
ru
it -
$u
rob
ban
ni
as
his
own
son
reared me,
T
'"
-a <m
Ak
-
T?
amslu
ki
ndk-me
na
Akki,
the irrigator,
as
amc lu
'
.......
his gardener
-ti-$u
lu
t'jf
kun
an
ni
appointed me.
f<
W
ia
HFilu
na
amslu
I
......
ti
^T R
tar
While
was gardener
did IStar
lu
ra
man
ni
ma
and
....
for
.
.
IV
years
love
me
.-four
sarru
ta
lu
u
I
pu
the
kingdom
ruled.
EXTRACTS FROM PENITENTIAL PSALMS.

i.
lamentation.
[K 493 1.]
ba
na
at
Hani?
mus
tak
li
la
at
mother
of the gods,
who
fulfils
par
- si -
$u - nu
mu
se - sa - at
ur
ki
te
be
- lit
their
commands,
who makes
the green herb to spring up,
lady of
te
ni
Se
ti
ba
na
at
ka
all
la
me
mankind
who
created
things,
mus
te
Sir
rat
gi
mir
nab
ni
tu
who
4-
guides
the whole of
creation.
^:yyy um - mu
^
-
-f
tlu
^yy ^yyy
Is
-
-TTI
-
^m
-
w
$a
ta
ri
turn
mother
Itar,
whose
id
da
side
sa
il
man-ma
La
ti -
hu
no god
can approach,
A LAMENTATION
227
be
el
turn
Sur
bu
turn
$a
par
su
sa
exalted lady,
whose
command
hi
is
tu
ru
!
te
e$
li
tim 1
lu
uk
I
bi
;
mighty
prayer
will
utter
$a
that
li
$a
ta -
bu
li
pu
Sa
an
ni
!
which
to her
(appears) good
may
she do unto
me
7.
*
be
-
el
ti
ul
tu
um
O my
lady,
from
the day
mm
si
-
ih
I
ri
ku
ET ma
^Hf'
1
di$
^ m M<
Sal
-
pu
ti
when
was young
much
to misfortune
am
I
da
ku
!
&z/
a
I
kul
have
been yoked
Food
have
not eaten,
<5/
ki
turn
kur-ma
- ti
me
ul
a$
I
ti
weeping was
my nourishment!
Water
have
not drunk,
dim
tu
ma$
ti
ti
lib
bi
ul
tears
were
my
drink!
My
heart
never
ih
di
ka
bit - ti
ul
im
mi
ir
rejoiced,
i.
my mind
was never bright!

11.
te-es-li-tim
teslltim.
2.
Obv.,
24.
15*
228
EXTRACTS FROM PENITENTIAL PSALMS
2.
confession of
sin.
[K 4899 and
4934.]
The
priest
ina
ta
ni
hi
si
ib
ina
In
sorrow
there he sits!
With
ku
ub
bi
mar
su
ti
zu
ru
ub
cries
of affliction,
(in) trouble of
lib
bi
ina
bi
ki
ti
limutti(ti}
ina
in
heart,
with
bitter
weeping,
ta
ni
hi
Urn
ni
ki
ma
su
um
ma
- ti
bitter
sorrow,
like
the doves
CTTT mu - um doth he moan

-
JT
Su
-
-^
up
-
JT
su
-
uk
mu
si
grievously
night
<
u
JHHTTI
ur
-
5-T
ana
^\
ili-su
-m<tts:* <MET
ri
-
ri
!
mi
ni
ki
ma
and
day
Unto
his merciful
god
like
lit
ti
na
ga
cries
!
ag
ta
ni
ha
a wild
cow
he
Sighing
^TT
mar
that
-
t^TTT
ta
-
-Hf
na
-tH
-
-Hfan
Tf
a
-
sa
am
i$
ka
!
na
is
grievous
doth he make
Before
A CONFESSION OF SIN
229
///
/>/<z
///
ni
cip
his
god
in
supplication
his
pa - $u countenance
-
8
/#
-
tE i
-
bi
in
!
bak
ki
doth he cast
down
He weeps
it
hu
ul
that nothing
i -
kal
la
that he
may approach,
may
hold (him) back!
The
suppliant
pis
ti
lu
uk
bi
pis
ti
My
deed
will
declare (to thee),
my
deed
â
bi
a -ma
- ti
lu
will
$a
an
ni
which cannot be declared!
My
words
repeat (to thee),
a-
ma
- ti
ul
sa
su
un
ni
U
god,
my
words
which cannot be repeated!

<
My
<3*
ul
V
sa
pi$
ti
lu
will
I
uk
bi
pis
ti
my
deed
declare (to thee),
my
deed
which cannot
ka
bi
be declared!
i.
4934,
11.
13 and
4899, Obv.,
11.
10
18.
23o
3.
prayer
[K
for forgiveness.
ioi.]
The
suppliant
ana-ku
I,
arad
ki
su
full
nu
hu
a- sa
as
si
ki
!
thy servant,
of sighs
cry unto thee
*.y &z
Whoever
-HF-T*an
-
^JTfTTT=
i -
^T
te
-
JH
lik
-
<Ef
ki
-
nu
su
sin
possesses,
3
thou acceptest
- HK*
/
JT
su
!
TJ
a
-
*T- <Tme
-
e=
tap
-
3= -E! ^TT
pa
-
;;z^
ik
Urn
la
si
his fervent prayer
The man
thou lookest on in
pity,
me
lu
Su
-u
bal
lut
li
at
that
man
lives,
ruler
>^<2
wa
3^
/z'/
te
ni
se
ill
of
all
things,
lady
of mankind,
nw
ni
turn
sa
na
as
hur
y
sa
merciful one,
whose
turning
ta
is
bu
li
kat
un
ni
ni
!
propitious,
who
:
accepteth
supplication
The
priest
ilu-su
(Since) his
llu
i$
tar-û
zi
nu-u
it
ti -
god (and)
his goddess
are angry with him,
A PRAYER FOR FORGIVENESS
23
=E
V <3E
-
sTT <jgf
-
-tlbJ
ka
!
TJ <Ta
-
7.
[<jg[
ki
-
v <JEf
Sad
-
i - $a
as
su
ki
ti
ki
he crieth unto thee
Thy
neck
su
hi
ir
Sum
ma
and
ta
sa
ba
ti
kat
su
turn to
him
:
take
his
hand!
The
suppliant
la
ka
ti
i -
Um
mu$
te - $e
ru
Beside
thyself
a deity
that guideth right
1*
z*/
P
z'
<[>-
9-
^'
ki
niS
nap
Us
in
ni
ma
there
is
not!
Truly
look on
me
in pity
and
-E=!T <Ig
/'
-
=TW
w
-
^'
ni
ni
!
hu
lap
ia
accept
my
supplication
My
forgiveness
JE\^
ki
-
fcT^lip
TTT
bi
ma
and
ka
bit
ta
ki
Sa
YTv TT< ha
declare
let
thy spirit
be appeased!
di
ma
- ti
be
el
ti
su
uh
hu
ru
When,
my
"-
lady,
will be turned
3=
/
-
*
;/
<I!J
-
<M
X'z'
^/
E! ma
^JT
su
-
tCTTT El um - ma
- te
thy countenance?
Like
the doves
dam
do
ww
um
ta
ni
hu
us
ta
I
bar
ri
moan,
in sighs
do
abound!
232

priest
:
The
z'tf
$u
jm
hat
In
pain
and
grief
full
of sighs
bit
ta
su
bi
ki
turn
i -
bah
ki
is
his spirit!
Tears
doth he shed,
ku
bi
i -
kab
bi
cries
doth he utter!
4.
prayer for forgiveness of sin committed unwittingly.

[K 2811.]
'TfefflF
a
-
hMTTIiH
el
-
<tfk]
ul
TH^
a
-
-T-^
me
-
kal
lu
kul
!
Food
that
is
pure
have
not
eaten
Water
Mr
tu
ul
as
ik
kib
Hi
against
ia
that
is
clear
have
not
drunk!
A
Tf
a
have
I
fault
my god
=T|]
i
-
^
-
4.
Hfan
-
Hfflff
di
kul
nun
unwittingly
committed. 2 In a transgression
TJT
tS
-
-TTI
-
ta
ri
ia
ina
la
di
against
1.
my
goddess
1.
unwittingly
2. Lit.
Rev., Obv., 1.4 "eaten".
14.
233
TT= -Til
u
-
13 sT
-
5.
-<
be -
t
lum
-Hfan
-
^
nu
-
<
u
-
ff a
kab
I
bi - is
have
trodden.
O
E^TT
ra
-
Lord,
my
sins
ET
ma
A~f
-
TI
^T
ba
-
ff
a
A
hi
TT
-fa
-
-E^T <
tu
-
TJ
-
-da
are
many,
great are
my
iniquities!
6.
an
ni
sin
pu
$u
ul
I
di
The
7.
which
have committed
know
not!
A ^T
hi
it
A-ffi
ih
I
-tiT <
tu
-
[<3*
ul
I
-E
i
-
di
The
s.
^
z'/?:
iniquity
have done
know
not!
ff
-
T^
a
I
m
-
fe
-
9.
HFan
-
-flflf
kib
ku
lum
nun
The
fault
have committed,
the transgression
=TTT= -Til
7^
^ ^T!
<5/
[<^
ul
I
^
i
-
su
di
be -
lum
lord
have trodden,
know
not!
The
z'wa
^"
^"a/
/z'3
bi
hi
in
the anger
of his heart
ni man(an) hath looked upon me!

ik
kil -
t
i
-
.
/?'/
_
zw<2
wz
zi
lib
bi - hi
The god
tTTT* *TTT=
-
in
the wrath of
his heart
A
-
E^TT
-
-Hf-
Sr
-
* -4ilu
C^TT
i$
-
Um
hi
ra
an
ni
tar
hath visited
me!
The goddess
234
tft
e
-E^TT ^Tt
-
t] -*>is
-
^MI
-
ET
ma
and
tff- t
mar
-
li
ia
bu
us
si
is
with
me
was angry
to tribulation
tTTT*
u
-
*
$e
-
~f
man(ari)
-
Sfr
ni
'3.[*Et
i -
tET<
i -
-ET
la
lum
god,
du
hath reduced
me!
The
known
(and)
un-
i -
du
zar
rib
an
ni
ilu
is
tar
known,
hath afflicted me!
The
T
goddess,
E -2\ <
i
-
-ET *E
la
i
-
^T
du
HTTT*]
-
JT
-
^T
-
*T
tu
du
su
us
known
(and) unknown,
trouble
*
z
ku
na
a$
ta
I
ni
(for help)
ma
hath brought!
sought
but
man-ma -an
ga
ti
ul
i -
sa-bat
!
ab
I
ki
ma
no one taketh
me
by the
hand
wept but
ta
te
ia
ul
it
hu
ku
bi
to
my
side
none drew near!
Cries
If
a
I
^3
-
ET
man -ma
-
f
an
<-T^
ul
^
i
-
<TSi -
-f
man(an)
-
^
ni
ul
kab
bi
uttered
(but) no one listened
to
me!
rs.
^\
us
I
jy
-
w
-
m
-
-III ET
kat
I
M
-
<^
I
Su
sa
ku
ma
ku
am
afflicted,
am overwhelmed,
do not
I.
ga-ti
kati.
285
Wf
a
-
19. T
Hi
-
na
ta
al
ana
ia
rim
ni
look up!
Unto
my
merciful god
at
ta
na
I
as
har
un
ni
ni
a
I
kab -bi
utter!
turn,
my
petition
20.
^
be
-
-lum
arad
-
ka
la
ta
sa
kip
!
ina
Lord
thy servant
cast not
down
In
me
- e
$ub
tak
ti
na
di
ka
as
su
sa-bat
the waters
of the flood
thrown,
take thou his hand!
hi
it
ti
I
ih
tu
u ana
to
da
me
ik
ti
The
sin
have sinned
mercy
te
ir
!
an
na
I
e -
pu
u$
$a
let
ru
lit
bal
!
turn
The
iniquity
have committed
the
wind carry away
kil
-la
tu -
u-a
ma
'
da
ti
ki
ma
My
manifold transgressions
like
zu
a
ba
ti
$u
hu
ut
garment
ka-as-su
û-ba-ti
tear off!
1.
2. 3.
11.
= kat-sit. = subati.
2937 (=
11.
11.
Obv.
11.
15), Obv.
1.
43
Rev.
1.
(=
11.
619),
and Rev.
36-44 (=
2024).
236
5.
prayer for mercy and favour.

[K 4 623 -f
79-78,24.]
be
el
turn
ina
zu
ru
ub
lib
bi
lady
in
the grief of
my
heart
rig
me
zar
in
bis
ad
have
I
di
ki
hu
lap
ia
cries
trouble
raised to thee!
My
forgiveness
ki
bi
!
be
el
turn
ana
arad
ki
ma
/
si
\
declare
O
I
su
lady,
unto
thy servant
"It is
{enough !"/
<M
ki
-
3
bi
-
*TTT
libba
<m
-
-E^TT *- AHFff
li
ki
nu
uh
ana
say unto him!
Let thy heart
be appeased!
Unto
ÎE HJI
arad
-
-TTI
ri
-
ki
sa
ma
ru
u$
turn
ip
-su
e -
mu
thy servant,
who
4.
hath experienced sorrow,
mercy
ri
si -
su
ki - $ad
ki
su
hi
ir
'Sum
ma
extend to him!
Thy
neck
turn to
him
and
EJ
-
W
sa
ki
ut
nin
su
!
ana
arad
ki
'
receive
his supplication
Thy
servant,
w ith
Iwhom/
ta
gu
gi
si
il
me
it
ti !
su
thou hast been angry,

i.
deal favourably
with him
Obv.
11.
1826.
PRAYERS FOR MERCY AND FOR PURIFICATION
287
6.
prayer for purification.

[K 254-]
|7M
iStari
ia
nap
li
si
in
ni
-ma
and
O my
goddess,
look with pity on
me
like(e)
un
ni
ni
ia
!
lip
pat
ru
accept
my
supplication
Torn away be
ar
nu
it
Urn
ma r-Sa-a
hi
ta
in
my
sin,
forgotten be
my
transgressions
'
il
ti
lip
pa
tir
ka
let
si
ti
Let the ban
be torn away,
the bonds
//
ir
mu
!
ta
ni
hi
ia
lit
ba
lu
be loosened
My
sighing
let
carry
away
si
bit
'sare
!
Pl
I
lu
us
hu
tit
lum
/
\
ni
\
the seven winds
will rend
away
my
wickedness,/
issuru ana
6
{'
$ame(e)
t îe
$e
it
li
!
dir
ti
bifd
to
}
^ eavens
bear
My
misery
nunu
let
lit
bal
off,
U
let
bil
(it)
naru
the fish
carry
the river sweep
away!
238
7-
<[Urn
AJ
-
-HF-
Sri:
-
hur
#
(it)
ni
nam
mas
$u
sa
seri
May
there take
from
me
the beast
of
the field,
//
mis
su
in
ni
me
pl
nari
alikuti ? l
may
there
wash me
clean
the flowing waters of the river!
7.
prayer for a favourable dream.

[K 254.]
z'/
//
lum
ni
su
ti
ka
an
ni
ma
From
my
wickedness
make me
depart
and
un
let
ni
tir
it
ti
ka
me
be saved
by thee!
'p
ra
an
to
ni
ma
and
suttu
damiktu(tu}
Send thou
me
a favourable
dream
a
let
na I
fa
lu
lu
me
behold
May
the
dream
behold
be
damkat(ai)
suttu
!
na
I
ta
lu
lu
favourable
May
the
dream
behold
be
^y
kinat(at}
5.
<^
y^
a
^y
-
^yy
-
m
lu
sutiu
na
I
ta
ana
to
true!
i.
The dream
10
1
behold
Rev.
11.
6.
A PRAYER FOR A
FAVOURABLE DREAM
23g
-HP<hunikti(ti)
fir
-
ra
!
ilu
........
the god .....
,
ilu
favour
turn
May
the god
$a
Suna/t pl
ina
reh'
ia
lu
of
dreams,
at
my
head
~y
stand
f
!
,.
jy
$u
HfTI
-
^y
-
^
-
&- Ey
-
yj
a
-
^
na
into
bit
kan(an)
ri
ba
an
ni
ma
Make me
to enter
sag
ila
ekal
Hani
the gods,
Esagil
the temple of
the house
balati
na
llu
Marduk
ri
me
ni
of
life!
To
Marduk,
the merciful,
Jin
a
-
<M K
damkati P l
na
'
damiktim(tini}
na
kata
ll
for
favour
into
(his) favourable
hands
<yj
//^
-
*w
dan
-
^
ni
!
lud
lul
nir
bi
ka
commend me
So
will
bow
myself
before thy greatness,
lut
ta
'
/i/
z/
ntie P l
will
glorify
thy divinity,
and the people
ali
ia
li
Se
pa - a
kur
di
ka
of
my
i.
city
11.
will praise
thy power!
Rev.
2028.
240
8.
prayer
for restoration to divine favour.
[K 3i S 8.]
The
priest
pi
te
il
lu
ur
ta
su
pu
tur
Open
his bond,
remove
ma
ak
si -
Su
nu
his fetter,
um make
mir
pa
ni
Su
bright
his countenance,
pi
kid
su
i -
Us
ba
ni
su
!
bul
lit
commend him
to his
god
his creator
Give
life
to
arad
ka
lit
ta
id
kur
di
ka
thy servant,
4.
that he
may
praise
thy might,
jit=
nar
-
^ ^H
bi
-
-EÎT
li
[^y
-
m
lu
-
la
ka
id
kal
that before thy greatness
he may
^
bow down
in all
TTT
da
Tme
!
ad
dwellings
mu
hur
kat
ra
Su
Receive
his gift,
=11
li
-
] -
e.
*~
ina
5
kak
-
ki
pi
his
di
Su
kar
accept
purchase-money,
that in
the land of
lul
me
mah
ra
ka
lit
tal -
lak
!
peace
i.
before thee
11.
he may walk
Obv.
3641.
HYMNS AND PRAYERS.

i.
Hymn
to the Rising Sun.

[K 33 4 3.]
ilu
$ama$
ma
on
Sid
Same(e]
Sun-god,
the foundation of
heaven
- ha - am - ma tap -pu thou hast flamed forth!
ft' -
tfr
Same(e)
elluti
Pl
tap
- ti
da
- lat
The
bolt
of the bright heavens
thou hast opened,
the doors
Same(e)
tap
ta
a
!
ilu
SamaS
na
ma
ti
of heaven
thou hast opened
Sun-god
over
the land
ri
si
ka
tat
Sa
ilu
SamaS
me
lam
me
thy head
thou hast raised!
Sun-god,
with the brightness
$ame(e)
ma
ta
- ti
tak
turn
of heaven
the lands
thou hast covered!
1.
7. e.,
the horizon.
11.
2.
Obv.
2-10.
16
HYMNS AND PRAYERS

2.
Hymn
[Sp.
to the Setting Sun.

586 and R.
Ill,
Ill,
i.]
ana
ki
rib
me
Sun-god,
into
the midst
of heaven
when
ri
bi
ka
U
may
gar
sa
me
thou enterest,
the bolt
of heaven
T
^/
-
JH ^lik
-
C
-
lu
is
turn
sul
ma
bu
ku
that
bright
give thee greeting,
da
la
at
Sa
me
lik
ru
ba
ku
may
4-
the doors
of heaven
bless thee!
A*v>mi
-
^TT EEJI
Sa
-
>
rum
uk
kal
lum
May
the righteousness
of the minister
na
ra
am
ka
te
sir
ku
thy beloved
direct thee!
5-
T tTTTT *1 - babar ana
ra
su
bat
be
lu
ti
ka
In Ebabara,
the seat of
thy power,
JT
si
-
=TT1
-
ru
ut
ka
su
is
pi
tlu
Ai
Ai,
thy supremacy
i.
glorious!
for
May
a
Here and
in
11.
f.
^"^~5
is
employed
TpT,
form of the
2.
pron. suffix.
HYMN TO THE SETTING SUN
248
na
ra
am
ta
ka
thy beloved spouse,
di
rt
li
mah
hi
ir
ka
with joy
come
before thee,
7.
Jit:
//<5
.^
-
^H
-
^4^! AHfff -1
ne
-
ba
ka
ih
turn
to thy heart
rest
//
ni
ih
nap
ta
-an
may
she give,
may
the feast
'
lu
ti
ka.
li$ -
$a
kin
ku
!
kar
ra
du
of thy godhead
be spread for thee
O
t^TT! =E
ta
-
valiant
Hf- ^T
'i/
-e^TT
li
-
^T
it
^! du
-
/w/w
Z''
SamaX
i -
ka
hero,
ama,
let
them
glorify thee!
be
el
babar -ra
- lik
pa
dan
ka
lord of
Ebabara,
in thy
going
may
thy path
li
$t'r
ilu
&ama$
har
ra
an
ka
be straight!
Sun-god
thy road
Sir
ur
ha
ki
nam
sure
ana
for
du
ru
u$
to'
ka
direct,
on the road
that
is
thy foundation
1
6*
244
HYMNS AND PRAYERS
tf
- lik
ilu
$ama$
$a
ma - a
- ti
da
at
an
go!
Sun
of
the land,
judge
sa
pu
ru
us
si
$a
mu$
te
sir
of
its
decisions,
its
director
at
ta
art
thou!
3.
Hymn
[K 2962
to
-f-
Marduk.
K
3 1 20.]
HTI] <ct
ri
-
^
-
tTTT=
-
ina
f
ildniP 1
mi
nu
merciful one
among
the gods!
ri
mi
nu
sa
mi
ta
bul
lu
ta
Merciful one,
who
the dead
to raise to life
ram
loveth
!
mu
ilu
Marduk
Marduk,
$ar
ru
$ame(e)
king
of heaven
irsitim(tiiii)
sar
Ba
bi
lim
be
el
and
earth,
king
of Babylon,
lord of
^"
z7<2
^r
king
22
da
Esagil,
of Ezida,
HYMN TO MARDUK
^!< -ET
be
-
245
el
mah
ti
!
la
lord of
Emahtila
Heaven
and
7.
tffET
e -
*3-*W
$ame(e)
<
u
ir$itim(tim)
ku
um
mu
ma
earth
are thine!
The
space of
heaven
and
irsitim(tini)
ku
um
mu
The
&
pat
ba
la
life
tu
earth
is
thine!
incantation of
um
mu
The
i-mat
spittle of
ba
la
life
tu
ku
um
mu
is
thine!
is
thine!
Tl T
a
-
me
lu
turn
ni - h'
sal- mat
Mankind,
the race
black-
IT!
kakkadi
h'k -
na
at
na
pis
ti
ma
as
- la
headed
living creatures
many
as
tT
-
T^
a
ina
v
mati
ty
ba
-
V
sa
-
T^
a
ba
name
bear
(and) in the land
exist,
/i'z'3
r/
zr
3//
ti
ma -la
all
ba
$a
the four quarters of the world,
that
there are,
~f WTT V
I/M
<2<iv
ki$ - Sat
~f tff
$ame(i)
<
u
[<M
irsitim(tirti)
Igigi
Sa
the Igigi
of
the hosts of
heaven
and
earth,
246
HYMNS AND PRAYERS
maall
la
ba
sa
na
ka
fa- a- ma
thee
that
there are,
unto
uz
na
st
na
ba
sa
are their ears
inclined!
4.
Address to the god Ninib. [K 2487 and K 8122.]
tftf
rw
3w
^wr
llu
Bel
mighty son,
first-born of
Bel,
^wr
bu
git
ma
lu
lit
ti
far
ra
powerful,
perfect,
offspring of
ESara,
fa
pu
luh
tu
lit
bu
su
ma
who
lu
who
with terror
art clothed,
art full of
^T
har
-
[U
-
4.
HFilu
*T
Ut
-
ba
su
gal
lu
fa
fury!
Utgallu,
whose
la
im
mah
ha
ru
ka
bal
su
su
pu
onslaught
is
unequalled,
bright
ETza
is
ina
Hani P l
rabuti P l
!
ina
(thy) place
i.
among
the great gods
In
Obv.
U.
1645.
ADDRESS TO NINIB
247
J?
#r
3//
ta
Si
la -
ti
$a
ka
Ekur,
the house of
festal
joys,
exalted
ri
Sa
ka
for
id
din
ka
ma
ilu
Bel
is
thy head,
he hath granted thee,
hath Bel
8.
abu
ka
te
rit
kul
lat
Hani? 1
the gods
thy father,
that the law
of
all
ka-tuk
ka
tarn
-hat
ta
dan
di
in
thy hand
should hold!
Thou
judgest
the judgment of
te
ni
$e
ti
tu$
- te
sir
la
$u
is
$u
ru
mankind,
thou leadest
him
that
without a leader,
^M-T<
i
-
"-^m^T-<
ta -
JT
kat
ka
a
that
is
ku
ti
sab-bat
the
man
in
need!
Thou
holdest
-IHen
-
-ET
la
li
'
Si
tu
$a
a$
ka
the weak,
the
man
that
is
not strong
thou dost exalt!
$a
na
ra
al
li
$u
ru
du
/
m
{whi>
}
ro
the
Lower World
(has been brought!

(
down
3=
his
VI
^TTE^JT
tuhra(ra)
restore!
i3.y
$a
t
ar
-
pa-gar-'su
nu
sin
i -
$u
body thou dost
From him who
possesses
248
HYMNS AND PRAYERS
/a
/>#/
/r
nu
!
$a
ilu -
su
itti-
Su
thou dost remove
the sin
The man with whom
his
god
sz'
nu
tu
$al
lam
ar
hi*
is
angry
thou restorest to favour
speedily!
~f
l7a
C-ET
Nin
-
Hf
ib
IT
a
-
V
sa
-
^JH
rid
-f
Hani? 1
of the gods,
Ninib,
prince
ku
ra
'-
du
at
ta
a hero
art
thou!
5.
Address to Nabu.
[K 3i3o.]
be -
lum
it
ti
mu
hi
ka
lord,
with
thy might
<^
e
-
^TT
iS
-
T
sa
-
-HFan
-
mu
ku
ul
na
an
no might
2
.
can compare!
z7 "
â3
Nabu,
it
ti
mu
ki
ka
with
thy might
mu
ku
ul
iS
Sa
an
na
-an
no might
i.
can compare!
2.
Obv.
1.
Rev.
1.
ADDRESS TO NABU
3.
//
249
-<
-
//
biti
ka
zi
da
With
thy temple,
Ezida,
bi - turn
ul
t'S
$a
an
na
an
it
ti
no temple
can compare!
With
ah'
ka
Bar
KI
sip
alu
ul
thy city
Borsippa,
no
city
$a
an
na
an
it
ti
ik
li
ka
can compare!
With
thy domain,
Ba
bi
Urn
ik
lu
ul
i$
$a
an
na
!
-an
Babylon,
no domain
can compare
6.
Prayer to Ishtar of Nineveh.

[81-2-4,
188.]
na
$ar
rat
Hani? 1
the gods,
$a
par
si
To
the queen of
ET-T
ildni P l
rabuti P l
$u
ut
lu
mu
ka
of the great gods
are entrusted,
m
a
-
na
be
lit
alu
Ninua
f
the
to
I.
the lady
14.
2.
of Nineveh,
is
....
Obv.11.6
ka-tns-sa
translated in the previous line after the relative.
250
HYMNS AND PRAYERS
ilaniP 1
Sa
ku
tu
na
marat
the daughter of
of the gods,
the exalted one,
to
f-<
ilu
Sin
fa
li
mat
ilu
Sam
si
sa
the Moon-god,
the twin-sister of
the Sun-god,
who
/ - lat
Sarru
ti
ta
be
el
na
all
kingdoms
rules,
to
pa
her
ri
sa
at
purussa
decrees,
ilat(a(}
kal
gim
ri
who
determines
the goddess of
the universe
na
PRAYER TO ISHTAR OF NINEVKII
251
tt
bul
is
-
9.
-
lu
lu
si
ik
$a
da
al
pa
- te
confounded
distresses (?) her!
The
afflictions
mal
a -lam-ma
I
ru
mah
ra
ki
bak
I
ka
which
behold,
before thee
bewail.
na
at -
mu - u
$u
full
nu
hi
lib
$a
To
j>TTTt]
?/
my
tffl
ww
-
words
of sighing
directed be
^TT
sw
-
<M
ki
TJ
a
-
^T
na
II -TTI
zik - ri
-
ia
thine ear!
To
my
speech
Sum
that
ru
si
ka
bit
ta
ki
lip
pa
h'r
is
afflicted
let
thy mind
be opened!
a;w
n'
z'w
wz'
beltu
ki
Look upon me,
lady,
that through
^TT AHfff
jw
-II E^TI
hu
-
<M
-
^TTT
libbi
^T <M
ardi
-
uh
ra
ki
ki
thy turning towards (me)
the heart of
thy servant
<TUrn
E^TT
-
^n
-
ra
as
may
i.
be strong!
11.
Obv.
415.
INCANTATIONS.
i.
Incantation to the Fire-god.

[K 2455
3 9 36.]
siptu
tlu
Gibil
sar
hu
bu
kur
Incantation.
Fire-god,
mighty,
first-born of
nim
lit
ti
ellitim(tirn)
Anu,
offspring,
bright (and)
Sa
ku
turn
ilu
$a
la
a$
Sar
exalted,
of $alaS,
mighty,
id
di
$u
zik
ri
newly-shining,
name
4.
of the gods
â
that
is
a/
ww
wa
</z>z
wz'w
da
bi
enduring,
who
gives
offerings
5.
ilu
Igigi
$a
kin
na
mir
light
ti
to
the gods,
the Igigi,
who makes
INCANTATION TO THE FIRE-GOD
253
Hf-ir
a
-
Hf-
na
''"
nun
na
ki
ilaniP 1
for
the Anunnaki,
the gods
i.tT^TT
rabuti
1Z
-
-Hf-tTHF/III
ZU
har
mit
that are great.
terrible
Fire-god,
destroyer of
pi
ilu
Gibil
al
la
'-
Fire-god,
powerful one,
mu
ab
bit
u
the
annihilator of
and
wicked,
ka
mu
lim
-nu
- ti
zer
amelu
kassapi
who
burns
the evil,
the seed of
sorcerer
kaSSapti
mu-hal-lik
rag
gi
/
zer
the
\
and
sorceress,
who
blots out
the bad,
\seed of/
--yy
sorcerer
<
u
10.
kaUapti
sorceress.
and
At
na
in
di
ni
ia
this
time
my
cause
i -
ziz-za
am
ma
/('
$u
ud
lim
nu
take thy stand and
overcome
the evil one.
254
12.
A'zwtf
INCANTATIONS
salmdni P l
an
nu
1
ti
hu
lu
As
these images
quiver,
zu
bu
it
ta
at
ta
ku
melt
and
dissolve,
amelu
kassapu
katsaptu
may
the sorcerer
and
sorceress
hu
quiver,
lu
li
zu
bu
melt
and
///
ta
at
tu
ku
dissolve.
2.
Incantation against an
unknown
sorceress.
[K 2728.]
Siptu
at
ti
man - nu
art thou,
kaHaptu
Incantation.
Who
sorceress,
ta
in {
ba$u(u^
se
a
t îe
mat
limuttiitirti}
^
ia
heart
1S
}
worc
m7
misfortune,
1.
etc.
The burning of little images made of bronze, honey, clay, bitumen, wood, accompanied incantations of this class; hence the title of the series, Maklu,
Maklu
II,
11.
"Burning".
2.
i23i3s.
INCANTATION AGAINST A SORCERESS
255
"5V
lib
-
3.
E
z
bi
##
litani
Sa
by whose tongue
-II hu
*TTT*
-
T a
4.
^
i
-
ib
ba
-nu
made
ru
na
are
my
spells,
at
Sap
ti
$a
ib
ba
nu
ru
su
whose
lips
are
formed
my
poisons,
na
ki
bi
- is
tak
bu
2
su
izzaz(az}
in
whose
-
foot-steps
stands
Ê3f ^17
kaHaptu
^SL
as
I
-<
bat
turn
death?
sorceress,
exorcise
pi
ki
as
I
bat
HSana
ki
I
thy mouth,
exorcise
thy tongue,
exorcise
ma n
ki
na
ti
la
ti
I
as
bat
thy glancing eyes,
exorcise
al
la
ka
ti
I
thy active feet,

10.
bir
-
exorcise
ki
ki
bi
ri
ti
I
thy striding knees,

1.
exorcise
ina lib-bi-sa
is
translated in
1.
after the relative.
2. Lit. "in the footstep
she has trodden".
256
INCANTATIONS
ida
S3 -ET THT<
-
"H&^m^T
ak
to,
ki
mut
tab-bi
la
ti
si
thy labouring hands,
bind
M
i
-
di
ki
na
ar
ki
ki
ilu
Sin
thy hands
beneath thee!
May
Sin
<?/
/0#2
mi
li
kat
ta
pa -gar
ki
in front
destroy
thy body,
na
a
mi
kit
me P l
isati
into
chasm of
water
and
fire
lid
di
ki -
ma
!
kassaptu
ki
ma
si
hir
may
he cast thee
sorceress,
like
the stone
*=ffl
bnu
-HFan
-
^^
ni
-
*s.
-^yy ir^
li
-
^
du
kunukki
su
of this seal
may
there
glow
//
ri
ku
pa-nu
ki
(and) turn pale
thy countenance!
3.
Incantation against spells and witchcraft.

[K 43
-f-
142
-|-
2601.]
ilu
siptu
Nusku
sur
bu
lit
//
Incantation.
i.
O
11.
Nusku,
103.
mighty one,
offspring of
)faklu
III,
89
INCANTATION AGAINST WITCHCRAFT
257
flu
A -mm
Anu,
tarn- til
abi
bu-kur
ilu
Bel
image of the father, first-born
of Bel,
tar
bit
apsi
bi
-nu-ut
ilu
child
of the ocean,
creation
of
Ea Ea
a$
(I
I
ti
dipara
u
I
nam
mir
ka
have raised) on high /
the torch,
have given light
ka
$a
kattapu
ik
tip
an
ni
to thee!
The
(*
enchanter
hath enchanted
me;
y- Hf-
T
-
kit
pi
an
n
enchant thou him!
with the \ r \enchantment,
(with which) he enchanted me,
kdttaptu
an
n
/
k#
pi
\
The
enchantress
hath enchanted
me;
7-
with the
[enchantment,/
F <V
/a^
-
tip
an
ni
ki
tip
h'
!
(with which) she enchanted me,
enchant thou her
The
pi - $u wizard
fcfl I
i
-
pu
an
n
f
z'
pu
an
ni
hath bewitched
me;
with the
(with which) he bewitched me,
\ witchcraft,/
/>
su
pit
tu
te
pu
ta
an
ni
bewitch thou him!

i.
The
witch
hath bewitched
me;
e-pu-su
258
INCANTATIONS
H
f
I
te
-
HPpu
-
$a
an
ni
pu
si
with the I \ witch craft,/
(with which) she bewitched me,
bewitch thou her!
V
te
Hf-
pis
tu
te
pu
Xa
an
ni
The
sorceress
hath bewitched
me;
ip
I
-su
1
te
pu
â
an
ni
pu
si
with the
(with which) she bewitched me,
bewitch thou her!
fThosej
\
witchcraft,/
who
salmani P l
ana
pi
salmdni P l
- ia
ib -
nu
images
after the fashion of
my
images
have made,
bu
un
na
an
ni
ia
mas
- $i
lu
who my form
have imitated
ruti
ia
ku
sdrti
ia
who my
breath
have caught,
who my
hair
m
z'w
-
HI -
lu
su
ulinni
ia
ib
tu
ku
have plucked,
who my garment
have
rent,
ti
ku
eprati?
Tepe
ll ia
is
bu-su
who
I3
in
going through
dust
my
feet
have hindered,
Hf- ty
ilu
HFkar
-
I-HFdu
tipat
-
^TT
su
-
ynu
Gibil
may
i.
the Fire-god,
the mighty,
their incantation
e-pu-si
epus-si.
INCANTATION AGAINST WITCHCRAFT
259
m
//'
I~F
tipta
!
pa
aS
!
Sir
idi
dissolve
Recite the incantation
4.
Some
reasons for a curse falling upon a man.

[K 150 and
8868.]
na
bit
tap
pi
e -
$u
i -
te
ru
ub
Into
the house of his neighbour
has he entered?
na
a$$at
tap
pi
e -
$u
it
te
hi z
To
3.
the wife of
his
neighbour
has he drawn nigh?
sTTT -TI
-
dame P
tap
-pi
it
ta
dak
The blood
4-
of
his
neighbour
has he shed?
su
bat
tap
-pi
e - $
it
ta
bal*
The garment
5
.
of
his
neighbour
has he stolen?
<tt E^T! *mi

-
^
-
^T EDf
id
-
-ET
la
ra
nu
u$-$u
lu
^TITs= Hf- <fu - ma$ - & - ru

let
From
e.
his
power (?)
man
has he not
go free?
3Vf
id
-
Jgfl
lu
-t-EET
-T
-
ina
^T
kim
-
~T<
ti -
dam
ka
A good man
1.
from
his family
Maklu
I
I,
11.
122-134.
2.
3.
2,
fr.
tefeu;
K
:
8868 reads
it-ta-al-ba-as,
8868 gives the variant reading it-ti-hi. "has he put on?".

17*
260
INCANTATIONS
=e=
w
-
7.
se -
lu
kin
na
pu
hur
ta
has he driven away?
united household
sap
pi
hu
na
la
bu
ut
ti
has he broken up?
Against
one in authority
y
zis
ff
-
^w
<20
^^TT
-
9.
^
//
-
tE
i -
I
su
^
tar
is
^gt
-
za
sw
su
has he set himself?
In his
mouth
he honest,
//3
ba-$u
la
ki
i !
ni
pi
With
i-Su mouth
an
na
(but) in his heart
false
his
(says he) yea,
lib
da
Su
ul
la
(but) in his heart
nay?
i.
Col.
I,
11.
3746.
ASSYRIAN LETTER-TABLETS.
i.
Letter to the king asking for a doctor to see a sick lady.
[825-22,
174.]
ka
To
the king
my
lord,
thy servant
//M
SamaS
mita
uballit
lu
$ulmu(mu)
SamaS-mita-uballit.
Greeting
-II tETI
-
4.
Hfllu
&
Nabu
6
<
u
na
tarri
beli
ia
unto
the king,
my
lord.
May Nabu
and
-II
7/ "
-T^TTH<
a- dan
-
Marduk
na
sarri
beli - ia
nti
Marduk
unto
the king
my
lord
be exceedingly,
- </aw -
ni$
lik
ru
bu
ma -
amat
fthehand-i
\
exceedingly
propitious.
Now
maid
9.
^
/
-Hfl7u
^
^
-
=!!!= tTTT^
u
-
Fv
me
- lat
ga
of
the king,
Ba'u-gamilat,
262
ASSYRIAN LETTER -TAB LETS
mar
sa
is
at
ft sffi a - dan -
-El
nis
la
*
ku
-
sa
pi
grievously sick,
she cannot
.....
be
-
kal
;
ma
a
let
sarri
Hi
eat
now
the king
my
lord
"MAHfflF
te -
'3.
amelu
mi
Us
kun
gi ye
asu
isten(en)
instructions
that a physician
HI
ka
mur
si
may come
(and)
see her.
2.
Letter to the king introducing a messenger news for the king's private ear.
[K 498.]
who
has
2.
na
Sarri
be
Hi
ia
arad
ka
To
the king,
my
lord,
thy servant
ilu
Ramman-ibni
lu
sul
mu
na
Sarri
Ramman-ibni.
4
.
Greeting
unto
the king,
be -
Hi
ia
mar
That Babylonian
[/'.
Babili KJ
e.
$u
my
lord.
of
whom
the king already knows]
ina
<^HAtET?
muh
to
-
y.^T-TTI^H
it
El
ma
(He
-
If
a
hi
ia
tal
ka
me
came.
said):
LETTER OF INTRODUCTION
263
ETT?
di
-
ina
\
bi
ina
pi
ia
I
ma- a
(must be
{delivered),/
ekalli
My messaee
9.
with
mv own mouth
into
the palace
/w _ 3/ - lu -
ni
ma -a
an
nu
h'm
let
them bring me."
Even now
ma
into
pa
an
Sarri
be
ili
ia
the presence of
the king
I3
my
lord
tc
-
^
'
bi
la
$u
Sarru
be
ili
have caused them to bring him.
Let the king
my
lord
? -
al
hi
me - nu
$a
in
di
bi- su-u
ni
umu
ask
him
what
is
his message.
On
XXVIII KA **
the 28th day
istu
Ubbi
alu
Sa-ad
Saddu
di
ina
from
into
/a
aw
^<zm
3^
z'/z'
ia
I
si -
bi
la -
$u
the presence of the king
my
lord
caused them to take him.
3.
Letter from Apia to the queen -mother reassuring her during the king's absence.
[K
5 23.]
na
the
ummi
tarri
belli- ia
arad
ka
To
mother of the king,
my
lady,
thy servant
264
Apia
ilu
Bel
Bel
ilu
Nabu
na
/
ummi
the
\
Apia.
May
and
Nabu
unto
\mother of/
Sarri
belli - ia
lik
ru
bu
du
the king,
my lady,
be propitious.
Now
mu
us
su
ilu
Nabu
ilu
Na
na
daily
unto Nabu and
Nana
na
ba
la
ta
life
nap
$a
ti
for
ra
ka
mu
$a
far
the king of
and
length
of days
for
matati
the lands,
b'eli -
ia
ummi
sarri
l
belti- ia
my lord
and
tJUt
w
-
^
ja/
I
-E|
-
3.
la
^
ummi
for the
the king,
\motherofj
my lady,
j^^
$arri
^
belti -
flf
do
pray.
Let the mother of the king,
my
lady,
lu
ha - ma
ti
amslu
mar-sip
ri
Sa
be of good cheer (?).
messenger
of
du
un
ku
favour
from
Bel
and
Nabu
LETTER TO THE QUEEN-MOTHER
265
V V
z'/
//'
for
mdtdti
be - Hi
ia
with
the king of
the lands
my
lord
ta
lak
goeth.
4.
Letter to the king from Kudurru explaining
why
he has
been prevented from coming to thank the king personally for a, favour he has received.
[K
81.]
flf
~Hf
-
v
far
mdtati
be
-
na
Hi
ia
To
the king of
the lands,
my
lord,
arad
ka
m Kudurru
Kudurru.
Uruk
Kl
thy servant
May Erech
and
'an
na
na
Sar
the king of
matati
be - Hi
ia
E-ana
unto
the lands
my
lord
IH
lik -
*JH
ru
-
^
bu
be propitious.
Daily
to Itar of
z/ "
Na
na
na
Erech
and
Nana
for
napSdtiP
Sarri
beli -
ia
sal
lu
the
life
of
the king,
my
lord,
pray.
266
7W
amslu
Iki*a(fa)-aplu
dsu
U
whom
sarri
be - Hi - a
IklSa-aplu,
the physician,
the king
my lord
7.
na
bul
ti
ia
l
i'$
pu
sent,
ra
to
save
my
life
/<2/
///
an
ni
Hani? 1
rabuti? 1
has kept
me
s
alive.
May
the great gods
$ame(e)
irsittm(ti?nj
of
heaven
and
earth
unto
Sarri
beli
ia
lik -
tar
ra
bu
the king,
my
lord,
be propitious,
and
*"
^ww^
ârn'
3<?//
ia
lib
bu
the throne
of the king
my
lord
in the midst of
$am~e(e)
na
da
ris
lu - kin -
nu
$a
heaven
for
ever
establish.
For
-ii
'
T?
a
tu
na
ku
Sarru
beli -
dead
was
and
the king
my
lord
bal
lit
an
ni
ta
ab
ta
ti
hath caused
.
me
to live;
the benefits
bul-ti-ia is contracted
from
bulluti-ia.
LETTER FROM KUDURRU
267
,fa
Sam'
the king
be
Hi
ia
i -
na
muh
towards
hi
ia
of
my
lord
me
Tr^T
ma
'
HET^ffl
a
16.
V
Sa
da
na
-masee
ru
Sam'
are
many.
To
the king
- z'#
ia
ai
tal
ka
urn -
ma
:
al
lak
ma
my
lord
went,
(saying)
"I will
go and
pa
I
ni
the
i
$a
Sam
the king
belt
ia
am
I
mar
ma
of
(countenance/
my
lord
will behold,
and
Tfc -IT
u
I
rad
di
e -
ma
and
bal
lut
amelu
ra fr
.
____
will
go down
live."
The
.-officer
ul
tu
harrani
na
Uruk
from
the road
to
Erech
ut
tir
ra
an
ni
urn
ma
:
amelu
turned
me
back
(saying)
"A
cap-
kisir
ul
tu
ekalli
un
ku
tain
from
the palace
a sealed letter
na
muh
hi
ka
it
ta
Sa
to thee
has brought;
268
ASSYRIAN LETTER-TABLETS
25z7
^
-
//
ia
na
Uruk
KI
with
26.
me
to
Erech
7.
jm
/#
-?tz/^
-TI*
Tza/ra
A
-
tT ET
-
K&T
te
-
*=!
e
-
$/
is
ma
mu
thou must go."
The
1
instructions
&
-
tTIU
-
IT
a
-
ga he carried out and
kan
na
Uruk
KI
to
Erech
-II
-
Tf
a
A'r
r<2
an
ni
sarru
beli -
he brought
me
back.
Let the king
my
lord
lu
di
know!
5.
Letter to the king from Akkulanu asking for an answer to a previous letter.
[K 604.]
-II
-
na
sarri
beli
ia
arad
ka
To
the king
my
lord,
thy servant
I, a
-
ET^
-
3.
jiu<
lu
-
<HW^
$ul
-
^w/
la -
nu
mu
na
Akkulanu.
Greeting
unto
-II
Itarri
belt
-
W
ia
4.
-Hfilu
-S
Nabu
<
u
-Hfilu
<^T
Marduk
the king
i.
my
lord.
May Nabu
and
Marduk
i-sak-kan-ga
isakkamma (isakkan-ma).
LETTER FROM AKKULANU
269
na
Sarri
belt
ia
lik
ru
bu
unto
the king
my
lord
be propitious.
^TT
#/
-
fciSS
$arri
-II
UM
tu
-
mu
$a
beli - ia
ub
Prosperity
to
the king
my
lord,
joy
libbe
nP
Su
tu
ub
Stre P l
for his heart
and
health
for his
body!
ina
gab
ri
$a
gir
ti
ia
In
answer
to
my
letter
i3.
If
Sarru
be - Hi
na
ameiu
arc ft
may
the king
my
lord
unto
his servant
send.
LETTERS FROM TELL EL-AMARNA.

i.
Letter from Burraburiash, king of Karduniash,

of Egypt, begging for larger presents
for his co-operation against the Assyrians.
[Bu. 88 io
13, 81.]
to
Amenophis IV, king

and
tn
a
-
-TI
-
IH -m
-
-TTI
-
na
Ni
ip
hu
ur
ri
ri
ia
To
TTI
Niphuriria,
<=E]
.
<M
fo
fcAtf
.
fa-
ar
7?zata
Mi
jf
king
3.
of Egypt,
speaks
tcm
um
-
El ma
EV
Bur
EÎT
-
^
bu
-
-TTI
ri
-
ra
îa
-
a$
sar
thus
BurraburiaS,
king
E^TI
_
^T
du
-
^
ni
-
tEft
-
a$
4-
E^< -tH
ahu
-
El
ma
ra
ia
ka
of Kardunia,
thy brother.
^^
a
-
5.
ff
a
-
na
ia
Si
$u
it
ul
is
mu
na
With
me
well;
with
C^T
-
I
-
$a
biti
ka
a$$ativ l
ka
thee,
thy house,
thy wives,
GREETINGS TO THE KING AND HIS HOUSEHOLD
271
--
v -t
mati
-
6.
ka
rabutiP 1
ka
thy sons,
thy land,
thy nobles,
v E^
j w* P l
ka
'>"
narkabdtiP 1
ka
thy horses,
thy chariots
a//
lu
$u
ul
it
mu
be.
exceedingly
well
may
=y *s- tyyyt
ul
-
tu
ab
bu
ai
Since
my
father
and
ab
bu
ka
ha
mi
thy father
with
one another
ta
bu
ta
id
bu
bu
su
ul
ma
na
friendly relations
established
rich
T?
ba
-
na
na
to
ha
mi
presents
one another
ul
te -
bi
i -
lu
me
ri
el
ta
they sent
and
any desired object,
ba
ni
ta
na
ha
mi
is
though precious,
to
one another
272
LETTERS FROM TELL EL-AMARNA
ik
lu
'-
na
an
na
they did not refuse.
Now
IT
TMI-TTMU?
a
-
E
ma
-
hu
ai
II
2
na
hurasi
na
my
brother
manehs
of gold
as
jy <ty*
-
El
ma
-
^
ni
-
tEff
ia
<3* ^y
ul
-
3
-
-E -E
-
te
bi
la
a present for
me
has sent;
z'
w<2
an
na
ma
hurasa
ma
ad
now
much
gold,
ET-ET
ma
-
^T!
$a
fc*=T-t:H
ab
-
JT^-E
su
-
la
bi
ka
bi
la
as
much
as
thy father,
send;
w
and,
^MW
ma
mi
it
i - is
mi
si
el
$a
if
is
less,
half
that of
<5z'
ka
$u
bi
la
am
mi
ni
thy father,
send.
Why
.
yy
E
ma
-
//
(only) 2
na
hurasi
tu
$e - bi
la
manehs
of gold
hast thou sent?
na
an
na
du
ul
na
Now
the
work
in
REQUEST FOR MORK GOLD

-TTI!
//
2y3
f
/'//'
ET
ma
-
Tl
a
-
tET
ad
<MSJ
u
ET
El-
adannti
the temple
is
great
and
with vigour
ab
ta
ku
ma
and
ip
pu
u$
have
undertaken
(it)
am
carrying
(it)
out;
E!
hurdsa
Tl t^TT ma -a -da
JT
hi
-
^ -la -Ef
bi
r-
<
u
much gold
(therefore) send.
And
at
ta
mi
im
ma
$a
ha- a^ - ha- a
ta
do thou
for
whatsoever
thou desirest
is.
i
-
-^
$u
-
na
mdti
ia
up
ra
am
ma
in
my
land
send
li
el
ku
ni
(it)
ik
ku
that they
may
take
thee.
-TTI Eyi
-
tn
-
if
a
-
na
Ku
ri
gal
zu
bi
ia
In the time of
Kurigalzu
my
=T
-
father
=m=
-
tTTT^-
^
-
Jl
lu
-
^
nu
na
ha
ai
ga
ab
bi -
the Canaanites
with one accord
na
mu
to
uh
hi
$u
el
ta
ap
ru
ni
him
sent
18
274

TJ
CITT El
um
-
T?
a
-
~H
na
-I HPka
-
t
-
v
ni
malt
ma -a
:
an
as follows
"Against
the border of
the land
2i
[^ww
-
IT*"J]
ur us
let
t^k, E| am - ma and go down

da
E:
Eiy
Ê
i
tffi
ni
let
-
>^y ^Kf
ba
-
ÎEJ
-
al
ki
us
make an
22.
it
-
am
ma
and
ti
ka
invasion
with thee
let
ni
sa
ki
in
bu
ai
an
ni
ta
us form an alliance."
My
father
this (reply)
el
ta
ap
ra
su
nu
ti
um
ma - a
:
sent to them,
as follows
mu
us
$e
ir
it
//
ia
na
"Cease (seeking)
26
with
me
El
ma
to
na
as
ku
srjyy^ Sf= u - ni
^^
Sum
-
^^y
.
^
-
it
ti
form an
alliance.
If
against
-^ TIT
sarri
$a
Mi
is
ri
hi
ia
the king
of
Egypt
27.
my
r|
brother
at
ta
na
ak
ra
ma
and
it
ye are hostile
with
KURIGALZU'S FIDELITY TO EGYPT
275
.fa
;//
*>#
ma
ta
at
ta
at
ka
na
another
ally yourselves;
*o.
Tl
a
^T M
-
<tf *
ul
tWf -ET -tfcT f

al
-
ET
-
<tT*
ul
shall
I
na
ku
la
I
ka
am
ma
and
as for
me
tT
shall
not come
not
TJ a
ff< ha
*T
-
M
-
-^ <T-
*
-
*9.
<jg[
ki
-
tE
i
ba
at
ku
nu
h'
plunder you?
For
it
ti
ia
na
is
a$
ku
nu
bu
ai
with
me
he allied."
My
father
so.
^
a:f -
Sum
a-bi
ka
ul
t$
mi
$u
nu
ti
for the sake of
thy father
did not hearken to them.
HFi
-
na
an
na
As
$u
ra
ai
Now
as to the Assyrians
3^TT
da
-
3=
pa
-
gi
il
ni
ia
na
ku
I
my
subjects
have
ul
a$
pu
ra
ak
ku
ki
not
sent to thee
concerning
<tt ^1
ti
/-
33.
yf
a
-
^ry
na
^
mati
18*
*t
-
mi
Su
nu
ka
them?
To
thy land
276
am
mi
el
ku
ni
why
34
.
are they
come?
a^ ET
sum
-
s^TTT
ta
-
E^TT A^fflf ET HPra

-
ma
ah
ma
an
ni
If
thou lovest
me
$i -
ma
ti
mi
im
ma
let
la
any business
them not
IdJ
ip
-
*pu
=TTT=
u
-
JT
su
-TTI
ri
-
t1
ku
-
-T< JT
ti
-
^
-
su
nu
carry out,
their failure (in their enterprise)
ku
u$
si
da
su
nu
ti
secure.
na
su
ul
ma -
ni
ka
III
3
ma
na
As
a present for thee
manehs
w >
ukni
>
$adi
\
^
\
<
u
y
V
5
r
simittu
sa
of
lapis lazuli
of the
and
\mountain/
yoke
of
"
^
l sise P
^
Sa
11.
)^
V
5
'? u
narkabat-isi P l
horses
for
wooden
chariots
te
bi
I
-la
ak
ku
have
sent thee.
LETTER FROM TUSHRATTA

2.
277
Letter from Tushratta, king of Mitani, to Amenophis III, king of Egypt, sent with an image of the goddess Ishtar
into Egypt.
[Bu.
88ioi3,
T
78.]
i.
If
a
-
-ry
na
s*: Ni
&ft
-
*
mu
-
-III
ri
-
im
ia
To
Nimmuria,
V
.far
<tt tT -HI sE
Mi
2s
-
a.
""'"
ri
a hi
ia
king
of Egypt,
my
brother,
//#
ta
ni
$a
ra
mu
my
3.
son-in-law,
whom
love
<HiIJ
w
W
^
tE EvTT AHFi
-
T{
a
-
ET
ma
-
f
an
-
^
ni
ta
ra
and
who
i
4.
loves me,
t:m
urn
-
ET
ma
^
Du
-
'
ki
bi
ma
us
rat
speaks
thus
DuSratta,
<tt tE jÎII -*f

3far
S^
-
5-
^/z'
ta
an
ni
$a
king
of Mitani,
who
tif
e -
E EÎI
i
-
A-f
-
If
a
-
^ -tH
mu
-
^
mu
*
-fcjyf ET
-
ra
ka
ka
ma
loves thee,
thy father-in-law.
na
ia
h'
$ul
it
mu
na
With
me
is
well;
with
278
ka
$a
lu
u
it
sul
mu
na
thee
may
T a
-
be well,
with
tTTTT
<$*/?'
-tH
-
^T
na
&z
& f
na
TTT ff
Ta
turn
hi
pa
thy house,
with
Tatumhipa
ia
astati
ka
sa
my
daughter,
with
thy wife
whom
ta
ra
mu
lu
$ul
it
mu
thou lovest
may
be well
na
assati P l
ka
na
mare P l
ka
with
thy wives,
with thy sons,
I
a
-
ET- -t
rabuti
-
na
amelutiP 1
ka
na
with
thy nobles,
with
** u
narkabati P l
ka
na
l sise P
ka
thy chariots,
with
thy horses,
na
sabe P l
ka
na
mati
ka
with
thy troops,
with
thy land
na
mim - mu
all
ka
dannis(is)
and
with
that
is
thine
exceedingly
ISHTAR'S DESIRE
TO GO TO EGYPT
279
tTff tT
</ti/ifiis(is)
=TT
tT
lu
-
dannis(ts)
hd
mu
exceedingly
exceedingly
well
may
it
be.
;//
ma
ihl
Rtar
$a
alu
Ni
i -
na
Thus
(spake)
iStar
of
Nineveh,
belit
matati
gab
of
bi -
A'
na
ET ma
na
the lady
all
lands
"Unto
v
T
<tt ty
//
_
-m
_
tE
_
,
-5.
tt
/
_
^T
na
v
ma fi
the land
$a
Egypt
into
which
Tt
a
E-pTI
-
^-4I
T^
a
-
^
mu
m <3* IH
lu
-
ra
ul
I
lik
ku
me
love
will go,
-TI
lu
I
W
sa
^ ss
-
Tme
W
a
-
-^ ^TT! El
nu
-
us
hi
ir -
um
?na
will depart (?)."
Verily
na
an
na
ul
te
I
bil
ma
and
now
have
sent (her)
*/
tal
is
ka
she
gone.
nu
um
ma
na
tir
si
Indeed
in
the time of
280
bi
ia
ma
llu
Istar
[Star,
beltum(tum}
na
my
father
the lady,
into
$a
si
it
tal
ka
that land
went
and
E I- tff
ki
-
*e
i
-
^T
na
^T Tl ^-
i -
me
pa
na
nu
tCTTT E! um - ma
just as
formerly
^T ^TTT *fcU
//
ET
ma
and
^SS
uk
-
^T HI
te
^
bi
-
ta
$ab
ib
du
she dwelt (there)

22.
they honoured her
KT^JHJJ
u
so
^
i
-
^"J
na
-
M^fan
-
na
ahi
ia
now
may my
brother
na
X-$u
eli
$a
pa
na
a-nu
ten times
more than
formerly
4-
fcU
li
-
&
-
Z]
is
-
^
si'
gi
ib
bi -
ahi
ia
honour
her.
May my
I
brother
li
gi
ib
bi -
is
zu
i -
na
ha
di
honour
her,
with
joy
//'
miS
Sir
~su -
ma
li
du
ra
may
1.
II
he allow her
to return.
2 Pret.
i
2. II
Prec.
from kabatu with pron. suffix. from kabatu with pron. suffix.
3.
'.I
Prec. from taru.
INJUNCTIONS FOR ISIITAR'S SAFE RETURN
281
y-=yj
//H
/?/<ir
&//'/
.fa
me
ahi
ia
May
iStar,
the lady of
heaven,
my
brother
ia
Si
li
is
sur
an
na
Si
and
me
protect
li
t'm
tandtiP 1
for 100,000
years
and
t
///
^y
-
^yyy
-
du
ia
ra
bi
ta
be lit
i$ati
great joy
may
the lady
of
fire
na
ki
la
al
li
unto
both of us
li
id
din
an
na
h' -
ma
kt
give
and
thus
ta
bi
ni
pu
u$ do.
good
1.
shall
we
ta-a-bi
tabi.
2.
The
last
two
lines of the letter, the
meaning of which
is
uncertain, are
here omitted.
OBSERVATORY' REPORTS.
i.
Reporting the date of the Vernal Equinox.

[K
15.]
^T umu
fflf
t^
KAN
sa
ar 'l u
VI
Nisanu
mu
On
the 6th day
of
Nisan,
the day
<u
3.
sit
-
mu
h'
ku
lu
VI
.......
1
and
the night
were equal.
Of
periods
flf
^.......
periods
^
mu
-
<Tsi
6.
mu
VI
of 6
^^
iln
Nabu
was the day,
was the
night.
May Nabu
7.
ilu
Tl
a
-
Marduk
na
sarri
be
(and)
Marduk
unto
the king,
my
lord,
lik
ru
bu
be propitious.
i.
The {\7
>~
is
proved by
this
and similar passages to have been a space
of two hours.
THE VERNAL EQUINOX AND LUNAR OBSERVATIONS

2.
283
Reporting a successful observation of the moon.

[K 716.]
ma
sar
tn
ni
it
ta
sar
umu
XXIX
KA ^
watch
we
kept.
On
the 29 th day
ilu
Sin
ni
ta
mar
ilu
Nabu
the
moon
we
5-
saw.
May Nabu
and
-HPllu
*2G
Marduk
]]
a
-
^
na
sup*
$arri
-II ^t]}
beli
-
ia
Marduk
6.
unto
the king,
my
lord,
jj^j
lik
-
^m ^ru
-
?.
bu
sa
Na
bu
$a
be propitious.
From
Nabua
of
the city of ASSur.
3.
Reporting an unsuccessful observation of the moon.

[K 297.]
a - na
Sarri
beli
ia
arad
ka
To
T
the king,
my
3.
lord,
thy servant
-*f
|7
<W
&
II
K^ ETam * lu
rab
-
< -!<
e$reti(tt)
Htar-iddin-apla
Sa
Itar-iddin-apla
the chief
of
284
OBSERVATORY REPORTS
5
pl
.
$a
alu
Arba'
ilu
the astronomers
of
Arbela.
m<
/
-
$ulmu(mu}
na
to
Sarri
belt
ia
Greeting
the king,
my
lord
9
//w
Marduk
illt
iStar
sa
May Nabu,
Marduk
(and) Itar
of
Arba
- ilu
na
sarri
beli
ia
Arbela
unto
the king,
my
lord,
//^
ru
In
ina
nmi
XXIX
KAN
ma
sar
tu
be propitious.
On
the 29 th day
watch
ni
ia
sa
ar
bi
it
ta
mar
ti
we
.6.
kept.
At the house
of observation
A4f
tTffi
'?
HF- <
ilu
-ET
la
irpitu
Sin
ni
mur
(there were) clouds.
The moon
^y
iimu
we
did not see.
is.
>3 ^
ar & u
Sabatu
Sebat,
I
the
i
t^ KAN
day,
<y^
Urn
-
^
mu
The month
st
the
eponymy
-II
^v
<
Bel-harran-$adu(u}-a of Bel-harran-Sadua.
LUNAR OBSERVATIONS
Reporting a lunar eclipse.
[K 88.]
285
4.
-.
~
a
-
K&
'"'*'
-EET
/#&7r
-II
/*// -
W
m
^T
;w/
-t
-
na
ka
To
y
"'
/7
the chief gardener,
my
lord,
thy servant
^ ^-
3.
t7 "' tl/
"
4
e&rete(te)
Nabii-him-i<Mimi
rob
Xa
Nabu-um-iddina,
the chief (of the astronomers)
of
|V "
Marduk
na
Nineveh.
May Nabu
(and)
Marduk
unto
^/z' -
*iz
ru
bu
umu
XIV
KAN
the chief gardener,
my
9.
lord,
be propitious.
On
the i4th day
^TT
sa
-Hf-<<<
ilu
masartu
a
Sin
ni
ta
sar
watch
of
the
moon
we
kept.
ilu
Sin
atald
is -
sa
kan
The moon
was
eclipsed.
REPORTS FROM ASSYRIAN ASTROLOGERS.

i.
From
Nabu-ahe-erba.
[K 692.]
enuma
Sin
the
ina
arl u !
Kislimu
Kislev,
umu
XXX
KAN
When
<Tinnammar
is
moon
in
the
month
on the 3oth day,

3.
.s?5
sar
^T
Mar
-
EiMM
tu
-tTM
ina
KI
kakki
seen,
the king
of the Western land
with
(his)
arms
sumkutu(tu]
r(shall achieve)
I
\
sa
ilu
Nadu
ahe P l
erba
From
Nabu-ahe-erba.
a conquest.
2.
From
the chief astrologer.

[K 6 9 3.]
enuma
Sin
the
ina
namun'-Su
its
kima
as
umu
I KAN
When
moon
in
appearance
ontheistday,
umu
(so)
XX VIII KAN innammar

on the 28th day
is
limuttim(tim)
(there will be) evil fortune
Mar
for the
tu
KI
seen,
Western land.
REPORTS FROM ASSYRIAN ASTROLOGERS

3.
287
4.
<
Sin
*T
umu
ciiiima
XXVIII KAN
mt&
is
" Ia!u
<Tinnammar
'
<M
dumku
When
the
moon
on the 28th day
seen,
Akkadi
for
K1
limnttu
evil fortune
Mar
lu
Kl
U
From
Akkad,
for the
Western
land.
ETamelu
TJ
_
^TT
asu
j,^
the chief astrologer.
3.
From Akkulanu.
[K 694-]
enumaumu
XVI
1
Â ^
Sin
Samas
the sun
itti
a -ha
mt$
When
<y^
on the
3
6th day
y~~
l
innamru F
^ ^
sarru
the
moon and
with
one another
y ana
^^
nukurta
hostility
-
mitte
uma'ar(ar)
will direct,
sarri
are seen,
king
against
king
Sarru
ina
ekalli -
$u
na
mi
na
at
the king
in
his palace
for
the space of
<MTI
ar
a
-
A
hi
4.
tTTT* t^TTT
u
-
ta
sar
$epa
ll
nakiri
month
will be besieged,
the feet
e
,
vl
a
-
5.
ESSâmslu nakiru
ina
VI
mati-Su
his land
Sal - ta - nis
na
/
mati-$u
his land
\ l( will
into
the
enemy
in
triumphantly
come),/
288
REPORTS FROM ASSYRIAN ASTROLOGERS

6
ittallaku P
y enuma
Sin
the
ma
in
the
ar b u
Duzi
lu
will march.
When
moon
month Tammuz
either
^T
umu
<W tEE
XV
KA *
7
illi
XIV
KAN
lu
umu
on the i4th day
or
on the 15th day
with
llli
SaittXi
la
innamir(irj
sarru
ma
in
ekalli
su
the sun
has not been seen,
the king
his palace
ta
sar
umu
XVI ^^
the i6th day
<Tshould
it
r ET
be seen,
innammar-ma
will be besieged.
On
<I^f
dumku
((there will be)
\
V
matu
/
^=TT
Subarti
^l
limuttu
forSubartu,
evil fortune
prosperity
tu
sa
for
Akkad
and
the Western land.
From
Akkulanu.
SOME ANCIENT BABYLONIAN LAWS.

[K 251.]
TH3U
Sum
-
ma
ma
ru
na
bi
Su
If
a son
to
his father
TJ
a
-
&
fo'
[tET s0TT]
#/
-
-TI* tHTT
ik
.
^
bi
ta
ta
"Thou
art not
my
father"
says,
ga
la
ab
Su
ab
bu
ut
turn
they shall
brand him,
in fetters
I
i
<1
Sa
ak
kan -hi
na
kaspi
silver
place
him
2.
and
for
*s ET
Sum
-
ET -TTI
ma
-
TJ
a
-
^T
na
to
din-Su
ma
ri
sell
him
(as a slave).
If
a son
um
his
mi - Su
ul
um
art
mi
at
ti
ik
ta
bi
mother
"Thou
not
my
mother"
says,
19
290
SOME ANCIENT BABYLONIAN LAWS
ffz# -
ut
ta
as
su
gal
bu
ma
his face
they shall
brand and
TJ -ET S3fc a - la - am
the city
tTTTt ff
u
-
A-TTT
-
sa
ah
fi< tffl ha - ru - Su
JT
<HEJI
u
they shall forbid him
and
*TTTT
i
-
-TTT^
u
-
* IS*
se
-
JT
$u
3.
e=^
Sum
-
ET
ma
na
biti
su
from the house
they shall drive him.
If
EMTI^T
a
-
<tT* ET -TTI
ul
bu
ana
to
ma
ri
su
ma
ri
at
ta
a father
his son
"Thou
art
not
my
son"
ik
ta
bi
ma
biti
ga
wall
rum
says,
from house
and
^TTT
i
-
[-ET]
-
4.
ET
Sum
-
te
el
la
ma
^:TTT um - mu
a
^
-
T ana
to
he must depart.
If
mother
ET
ma
HfU JT
-
<tT*
ul
ET
ma
-
T^
a
-TTI
-
-ET ^TTT
at
ta
ri
Su
ri
her son
"Thou
art not
my
son"
<
u
eTTT
u
-
ik
ta
bi
ina
biti
na
ti
says,
from
house
and
household
stuff
E ^T i^TTT
i
te
-
s.
*s ET
Sum
-
aS
-
-gTT s^TTT
Sa
-
el
ma
ta
he must depart.
I.
If
a wife
mu-ut-ta-as-su
muttat-su.
LEGAL RELATIONS OF HUSBAND AND WIFE
2gi
-TI^TT
mu
-
us
su
pE-TT^SmET ma zi
i
-
<-T^
ul
^
mu
-
T<
ti
ir -
her husband
hates
and
"Not
my husband
at
ta
ik
ta
bi
na
na
ru
art
thou"
says,
into
the river
i -
na
ad
du
Su
Sum -ma
If
mu
a
tu
na
let
them throw
her.
husband
to
aS
Sa
ti -
Su
ul
aS
Sa
ti
at
ta
his wife
"Thou
art
not
my
wife"
ik
ta
bi
I /2 J
ma
na
kaspi
Sak
kal
says,
/2
maneh
T
a
-
of silver
he shall pay.
^
3fw/w
-
ET
ma
*Tme
a
-
t
lum
<MTI 0T
ar
-
da
If
man
a slave
tiT *T
i -
^Hfff ^TTT
ih
ta
-
IH
lik
gu
ur
ma
and
im
tu
ut
hires
he
dies,
(or) gets lost,
!!T
z'/
* <MTI -&
pa
-
ta
ba
ta
it
ta
ar
ka
(or) runs away,
(or) disappears,
w or
i.
/w
ta
ra
sick,
su
di
Su
Sa
falls
as his hire
for
mu-us-su
mut-su.
19*
292
SOME ANCIENT BABYLONIAN LAWS

ET
/#
-
=TTT=
-
tffi
tan
HFx
TTT
7^4
-
T
^-
HF-
/2
J
*
$e
-
r
-
am
one day
/2
(a
measure
of)
corn
i-
ma
an
da
ad
he shall measure out.

i.
Rev., Col.
Ill,
1.
23
Col. IV,
1.
22.
PROVERBS AND SAYINGS.

TJ
a
is
-
sa
al
tu
far
ki
na
tu
ti
Hostility
among
(one's) servants,
kar
-si
ka
li
$ar
pa
h' -
$u
ti
slander
where
with
oil
^
one
/a - a$
is
- h'
u-bar
ru
ina
alt
Sa
nim
ma
anointed.
servant
in
another city
ri
is
e -
$u
ib
ru
turn
Sa
u
is
ma
ag
tan
a high officer.
Friendship
for a day,
T T!
ki
-
-K
-
4.
na
tu
tu
Sa
da
is
ra
ti
ana
service
for ever.
With
ka
-la
da
is
mi
ik
la
pa
every one
i.
he friendly
2 - Mid.,
1.
and
3. Ibid.,
into an alliance
Sm.
61,
11.
1215.
i6f.
11.
911.
294
PROVERBS AND SAYINGS
-ETJ3
la
-
bi
alpu
na
ka
ri
Sam
me
enters.
The ox
of an
enemy
weeds
ET
ik
-
J3
-
-TTI
-
^TT
-
kal
eat,
ra
ma
bi
ri
iS
doth
ones
6.
own
ox
in a fat pasture
HPF-
ni
il
ina
na
ri
ba
Si -
>
lies.
By
a stream
thou
art,
but
da
ad
da
3
ru
ap
pu
na
ma
ina in
thy water
stinketh
exceedingly
/^^'
n'
/3
- h' -
ma
su
lu
up
pa
ka
a plantation
thou hast been, but
thy date
da
nu
is
$a
Sarri
(was)
gall.
To
give
the king's (privilege),
w<5
3w
is
$a
$a
ki
na
da
nu
to
make
joyful
(the privilege) of the ruler.
To
give
V
fistheking'sl
\ (privilege), /
to
mu - ku show favour
-
a
s
(
ba
rak
ku
\
(the privilege)
\of the governor./

6f.
11.
i.
4347, Obv., Col.

4.
1.
Ill,
1.
2.
807
24.
5.
19,
i3o,
11.68.
"(is)
1.
a stink".
7.
K
7
4347, Rev.,
f.
19
tu-ub-bu
3. Literally, 6.
tubbu.
Sm.
61,
f.
7*M.,
TEXTS
TO BE TRANSLITERATED AND TRANSLATED
Inscription of Tiglathpileser
Engraved on the rock near the source of the
I.
Tigris.
-TTI
T?
ET
T
mi
From
T
Inscription of Assur-nasir-pal.
his statue in the British
Museum.
Ei-
tmÊT-
=n?^-
298
INSCRIPTION OF ASHURBANIPAL
=T
Hunting-inscriptions of Ashurbanipal.
i.
From
a relief in the British
Museum, representing
dead
lions.
the king pouring a
libation over four
=yrrt=
INSCRIPTION OF RAMMAN-NIRARI
III
299
2.
From
a relief in the Louvre, representing the king seizing a lion by the ear and slaying it.
IT
^T
m
-
HF-
fr
T?
v Hf- A <ET
MKIH ^11
T
TTT
A-*f
TT
^T
Inscription of
From
Ramman-nirari
III.
a stone slab in the British
Museum.
[51-92,
35.]
I
3
v-
V Sr!
tÎ
-HF-WTT
^T^TIET
<
-ET
T<
3oo
INSCRIPTION OF RAMMAN-NIRARI
III
T^
-e=T
TTT
<tt
*?
A
Hf-
<
^.^
-ffi
^T.^-Hf- ^T
-HP
T ~Y
-f
-Afl-
<
<^T
-III
^^
I
> v
JET
v
T
yy
-m
<Tti^ ET
<
HF-
V-
Hf-
tyyyy
A^ ^!T^ v
Hf-
-< -TZI
-t
-HZ
y
-yyz
-^yy
<
SENNACHERIB'S FOURTH CAMPAIGN
3oi
The
subjugation of Babylonia by Sennacherib in his fourth campaign.

From
[No. 12174.]
Museum.
coi. HI,
i.
4*
in
-TT^
tyyyy
1.
I.
e.,
2.
I. e.,
matu Bitla-kin. amelu Kal-da-ai, the Chaldean.
3o2
SENNACHERIB'S FOURTH CAMPAIGN
* iMTT
v ^yy
-III
tn
=m=
T?
yyy
T-
<*
rflg
Tl II
SET
<M!I
^T<
-^
ASHURBANIPAL'S CONQUEST OF ELAM
3o3
liH^KI
-t
The conquest
From a
of
Elam by Ashurbanipal.
Museum.
cylinder in the British

[No. 12168.]
Col. v, 1.90
<\V
&T
-tTT
tEB
T< I
^
Tl
v
tyyyt
-TTI
tCTTT
i~f A
304
ASHURBANI PAL'S CONQUEST OF ELAM
ro 4
<TT
tCTTT
t^f ^TT
^ v
V
tyyyy
<y-yil
-'
-<
-c
THE SACK OF SUSA
3o5
MfF
-II -II
-.-Hf-T
TJTI
t^
ET
-ey -yyi
<MTI
-!<
-yyi
--TT
T-tTTT=
20
3o6
>~CTY?T
>-^j_LJ
INSCRIPTION OF ESARHADDON
fA*~< -V^.
te-rw
TT
1
A >~<l< |\
Ty
>7^~
Z 33
^T^TT C^T!
/YY AT T <|| ^T TW**\jj
<ff
-yy^
v
.
Jl
l>
vi,
i.
^yy
^^
2
<^y
T
ey <jgf
< ~T<
If
<T*
^^
^THH-
JlTT
Inscription of Esarhaddon recording the restoration of Eanna, the temple of the goddess Ishtar.
From
[81
Museum.
7,
209.]
E^TT
^s:
-HP
If
<cT
DEDICATION TO ISHTAR
3oy
HFTI
*TI
^T<
TI<T
ET--K
ET=TTT
HF-
-Hf
I
v JT
F -TH
-TTI I
TTT
II
-HF-=TTTTTI
HF- <^T!
<
-HF-
<W
HF- 1-
ET- I20*
3o8
~f
TI
<
!<
-HF-<W
-*fT-
*TI*
-^T!
v Hf-A
tTTTT
<
-III efi -<T<
<
ET
IHI
JT
tyyyy Ey^
TITLES AND GENEALOGY OF THE KING
3og
T--TTI
jy
y
=yyy<
w
I
~f
<
E^
-tir
^r tS^
-Hf-<w
3 io
33
=yyy
34
<MTI/
fc
^<
y{v
IHI
TTI
-fflf
TÎ
-<y<
tt
^ JT
Hf-T
i.
Reading uncertain; u-si-bi-ma,
if
correct,
ustZpi-ma.
INSCRIPTION OF
NABOMDUS
DtU
^
-tfcj
4,
TJ
TT
Inscription of Nabonidus commemorating the restoration of the temple of the Moon-god at Ur.
On
four cylinders in the British
Museum.
1692.]
[K 1689,
1690,
1691 and
I?
TT
Hf-
yyi
jy
-ET
3 12
INSCRIPTION OF NABONIDUS
TT
"
18
HF- <
<THf-
B=TTT=
IH
ET
^ -^H
T
^yy^
T
-TTI
I
IH
I
^<y
yyi
Hf-
<^^W -TTA
yy
^ t^
jy
y?
<y-iiiy
f<
-II
-Hf-T
t=yyyy
HIS
PRAYER TO THE MOON-GOD
3i3
ii,
i.
-HF-
Tl
<I-
HI
JT
T
ET-
-TTI
^
^TTTT
-TT^
-<T<
yyy<
dl It -t
-ET
*>
<!<
tj -ET
3 14
INSCRIPTION OF NABONIDUS
tETT EE^T
^TTT
*-
-!!!< -<!<
-HP- t=TTT= -<T<

T
-tH
-ffff
VOCABULARY
VOCABULARY.
a-a
ai
si
interj.
"alas!"; employed as subs.

:
"grief, pain".
particle of -prohibition
"not".
Cf. Hebr.
^.
Hebr/X.
interrogative particle interrogative
"where?".
:
Hebr. ^.
Cf.
\iu
pronoun "who, which ?".

ia-a-bu.
aibu
"enemy"
"father".
"flood,
sometimes written
Ideogr.
Hebr. D^K.
abu
S^J.
Hebr. SK.
abubu
abubis
deluge";
Marduk's
weapon,
"thunder-
bolt ')".
\
abubanis
abbuttu
}
\
adv.
'like a
deluge".
"fetter".
Pret. ebuk,
Hebr. nb#i
abaku
abiktu
sing, dbuk
"to carry off (as spoil)".
"defeat".
Ideogr. ^[>~ ^|~.

abkal
:
abkallu
cons
:r.
st.
"spokesman, director".
Ideogr.
abalu
Pret
ubil,
ubla
Prec.
lubil,
hbil
"to bring, carry,
conduct; to dispense (commands); to prompt,

ur$ e (with tibbu "the heart" as subject)
(th
;
to lay
hand upon)".
Part, muttabbilu
Cf. Hebr.
^DIH,
Hif. of
b^
Ifteal,
"to bring, carry".

:
Shafel, iret. uSabil, uSebil; Imper. subil
"to bring,
cause fo bring, send".
3i8
VOCABULARY
Ishtafal, Pret. uMabil,
ult'ebil,
usibil
"to cause to bring,
to send".
biltu
constr.
st. bilat
"tribute, taxes;
burden, weight;
ta-
lent".
Ideogr.
^f^TCf
Ideogr. Ideogr.
abullu
"great gate, city-gate".

constr.
st.
jfl^ E|>-.
fr"^f-
abnu
abru
aban
"stone".
Hebr.
pX
"wing, pinion". Hebr. "Dl*.
abarakku "governor".
abatu
Prec.
li'abit;
Pres. i'abat,
Mat
"to destroy;
ÎDSI.
:
to
be
destroyed, disappear".
Piel,
Hebr.
Pret. u'abbit,
ubbit;
Part, mu'abbit
"to destroy,
annihilate".
Nifal, Pret. innabit
Ittafal, Pres. ittabat
:
"to
:
fly,
fly,
escape".
"to
run away".
:
aga
fern. sing, agata,
demonstrative pronoun
"this";
the
form aga
cases.
is
also used for all
numbers genders and
agu
agu
"crown,
tiara, diadem",.
"stream, river".
Pret. igug
fern. sing,
:
agagu
aggu
aggis
"to be angry".
:
aggatu
"angry, furious
'.
adv. "angrily, in wrath".
uggatu
"anger".
agammu a S aPP u
agaru
agurru
adi
"swamp"
"wing of
Pret. igur
written with determ.

a bird".
:
J^'J^J.
Hebr.
D3^l.
"to hire".
.*
see igaru.
"up
to,
to,
until;
together with";
adi mati
"how
long?".
Ideogr.
^J.
Hebr. 1$.
adu adu adu
adv.
"now".
"age, long period of time".
"to
fix,
ordain".
VOCABULARY
Piel,
3 19
Pret. uaddi\
Inf.
uddu
"to
fix
in place;
to or-
dain, appoint; to determine".
adu
plur.
cide
"ordinance,
command".
adaguru
"vessel for incense".
admu udmu
adannu
adannis
"the young (of birds, serpents

"generation, race".
etc.)".
"a fixed time".

adv. "exceedingly, vigorously".
the
Ideogr.
Adaru
adaru
adattu
month Adar.
:
Ideogr.
>%H^ ^.
"dwelling".
Hebr.
Pret. edur
(i.
"to fear".
:
e.
<z<fcatf adantti),. plur.
ahu
"brother"; ahu ..... ahu "the one ..... the other".

Ideogr.
E^.
Hebr. HK.
ahamis
ahu ahu
ahazu
adv. "together"; ana ahamti "together, to one another";

itti
ahamti "with one another".
"side; bank of a river; shore of the sea".

fern, ahitu
:
"hostile".
Pret. ihuz
Pres. ihhaz
"to hold,
seize
to
learn
to begin". Hebr. ttlX.
Shafel, Pret. usahiz\ Pres.

Nifal, Pres. innahaz
:
uUhaz
"to cause to take".
"to be taken".
ahuldpi kibu "to proclaim forgive-
ahulapi
adv.
"how long?";
ness (to
some one)".
Hebr.
"111$.
[aharu]
"to be behind".
aharru u the West-wind".

Hebr. niHK.
aAri/
fern. plur. ahratu
:
Ideogr.
^Jft. ^yj^
ina
^^J.
Cf.
"future";
ahrdt
ume "in the
future".
Cf. Hebr.
jntjg, nn.CjS2 sing. takal\
akalu
Pret. z^/;
Pres. z^j/,
:
Part. 5^7,
masc.
plur. dkiluti
teal, Pret.
"to eat".
:
Ideogr. ^-Effij.
Hebr.
zM^/
"to eat".
aAra
Vood".
Ideogr.
:
^.
Ideogr.
alu
U Ur.
aldni
"city".
^TT-
320
VOCABULARY
Pret.
ulid',
aladu
Pres. ullad
"to bear,
bring forth"; fern,

in travail,
part, alittu (for alidtii)
"woman
mother".
Hebr. lh\
Ifteal, Pret. ittalad
:
"to spawn".
:
Piel, fern. part, mu'allidatu
"to bear".
ilittu
"child, offspring".
Pret.
illik,
alaku
2 masc. sing,
Pres.
illak,
i
tallik,
sing. a-lik\ Prec.

;
sing.
al-ka
;
lullik
sing, allak
Imper.
a-lik,
Part. alik\
Perm.
3 plur. a/-&z
"to go, to
come";
alaku
alik
risilt
(or ana rlsui]

alik
"to go to the help of";
idi
"ally";
pdni "leader;
predecessor".
Ideogr. J^J.
Ifteal,
Hebr.
$*.
ittalak
^
"to
Pret.
and Pres.
"to go, walk, proceed".
Ideogr.
Iftaneal,
J^J J^J.
Pret.
and Pres.
ittanalak
go along or
round".
Shafel, Pret. uSalik
:
"to cause to go"

in ruins".
karmuta Zuluku
"to cause to
fall
alaktu
"path".
alikutu "going, advance". allaku "active, quickly-moving".
malaku
alalu alalu
ul
"going, course".
Pret. ilul
:
"to bind, |o hang, to hang up".
"to be void, to be nothing".
negative
"not".
ullu
[alalu]
alilu
"denial, nay".
"to be strong".
"strong".
"strong, powerful".
allalu
ellatu
allallu
"might, forces; family relatives".

a brightly-coloured bird.
alpu
"ox".
Ideogr.
^y^.
Hebr.
f\b%.
amu
"to speak".
VOCABULARY
Ishtafal, Pret.
321
and Pres. uUami
with
libbu
"to think,
direct the attention to".
amatu
atmu mamitu amelu
\
constr.
st.
amat
"word,
command
thing".
Ideogr.
"word, speech".
"ban, curse; oath, compact".
plur.
ameluti
"man";
for
amel urki see
araku.
amilu
Ideogr. ^yyyy.
amelutu
"mankind".
"instead of".
ammaku
ammlni
"why ?".
"earth".
Pret. emur,
imur',
;
ammatu amaru
Pres. immar\
to find
;
Imper. amur,
(in
fern.
amri
"to see
to read
J*~.
an inscrip-
tion)". Ideogr. ^|~,

Ifteal,
$>-
Pret. itamar
"to see".
Pres. innammar;
Inf.
Nifal, Pret. innamir;
ndmuru
"to be seen
to be found".
bit
tamartu
"observation";
inter j.
:
tdmarti "observatory".
amassa amtu
ana
"help !"(?).
st.
constr.
amat
"maid, handmaid". Ideogr.
'\*-
V.
Hebr.
rm
Ideogr.
:
prep. "to".
constr.
st.
J.
silli
anu
an "receptacle, place"; an
"dungeon".
Anu
Anutu
[anahu] tanlhu
\
the god of heaven.

>"divinity".
Anumutu]
"to sigh, lament".

"sighing, sorrow".
"full of sighs".
Hebr. rQX.
sunuhu
[anahu]
Pret. enah;
Pres. innah
"to
grow weary;
to de-
cay"
la
dnihu "unwearied".
anhutu
"ruin".
21
322
VOCABULARY
personal pronoun
"lead".
:
anaku anaku
"I".
Hebr. Hebr.
Ideogr. *->f- *~T|.
anumma
[ananu]
"verily, indeed".
"to be gracious".
Ifteal,
inf.
Hebr.
:
pfi.
Inf.
utnennu
as
"to
weep, pray, supplicate";

supplication".
Cf.
used
subs,
"prayer,
Hebr. [irinn.
annu
unninu
[ananu]
"mercy, grace
consent, yea".
"prayer, supplication".
"to be hostile".
anantu
"opposition, fight, attack".

"sin, error, wickedness". "sin, fault, transgression".
annu annunu
aninu
anini
\
ninu
nini
personal pronoun
"we". Hebr.
annu
anrii
(gen.),
anna (ace.)
fern,
anmtu,
anriiti
(gen.),
anriita
(ace.); masc. plur. annuti, annutu\
fern, anndti,
demonstrative pronoun "this".
annusim
anakati
adv.
"now".
"she-camels".
Ideogr.
(fern, plur.)
asu
"physician".
asamu asmu
simtu
"to be adorned".
\}
^\.
"adorned",
constr.
st. simat',
plur. simati
"ornament, adornment,
honour";
la simati
"property or position unlaw-
fully held".
Ideogr. |>-
^|.
<?.
asmaru
[ape]
"lance"

Cf. Hebr. HS;.
l|,
g.
*>"
as-mar-e.
"to shine forth".
Shafel, Pret. u^dpu, u$epi\
Imper. Supa; Perm, supu

call into
"to cause to
come
forth,
being, create,
make;
to
make
bright; to praise, glorify".
VOCABULARY
323
"to cause to appear; to
make
bright, to adorn;
to be called into being, to be created".
supu
apalu
aplu
"bright, brilliant, glorious".

Pret.
~ipul\
st.
Pres. ippal
apil
:
"to answer".
Ideogr. J^,
constr.
"son".
^r^^5|.
Cf.
apsu
"ocean, abyss".
e.
(*'.
appu
anpii)
Ideogr. *-j^y| t^^=J. "countenance; top (of a tree)".
Hebr.
*]g,
Dm
appunnama
apparu
adv.
"mightily, exceedingly; on a huge scale, of

stature".
:
huge
plur. appare, apparati
"reed-bed, swamp".
apsanu
asu
"yoke".
Pret.
usi',
Pres.
;
ussi-,
Part. dsu\ "to
come or go
forth,
to escape
to
come
forth (from the mouth), to be
decreed".
Shafel,
Inf.
Hebr. K^\
Part, musesu,
fern,
Pret. u&st;
Siisu
:
muê-m-at;
"to
cause
to
come
to
or
go
forth,
to
.
send forth, to bring out;

to
let
allow to esto
cape,
go;
to
drive
out;
take
one-
self off".
situ
"exit;
that
which comes forth;

offspring"
;
offspring";
si-it
lib-bi-ia
"my
sit
pi "that
which comes
;
forth
from the mouth, speech, word"
sit
SamSi
"the rising of the sun, the east".

si'atu
\
"eternity"
um
si'ati
"days of old"
u-mu sa-a-H
satu
"eternity".
assaru
substantive
edit
of uncertain
meaning
kima as-sa-ri
ippar&d "like an assaru alone he fled".

Cf. Hebr. nnjT.
[aku]
"to fear, to reverence".

Iftaal, Pret. utakku
:
"to be obedient".
alfsu
"obstinate, rebellious".
akaru
"to be precious".
Hebr. *lp\
21*
VOCABULARY
akru
fern, akartu
:
"precious, costly".
sukuru
akrabu
masc. plur. $ukuruti\ "costly"; $u-ku-ru-tim Sarruu-tu "treasure of the
kingdom".
"scorpion". Ideogr. *-*] |
^.
Hebr.
f
!
akrab-amelu
<x
"scorpion
man".
Ideogr.
*~-]
'aru
am
Pret. 'ir
"to set out"
$a-ad la '-a-ri "an in-
accessible mountain".
Piel
:
"to send
to rule"
Part, mu't'rru "ruler".
urtu
"command".
"leadership".
plur.
t'ereti
:
mu'irrutu
tertu
"law,
command;
divine
oracle;
will, design".
aru
arba'u
Pret. ura
fern,
"to bring, carry, carry away".

irbitta
:
irbitti,
"four".
Ideogr.
nz,
Hebr. $2^$.
ribu
"fourth".
Ideogr. TJJ'.
aribu
"raven".
Hebr. 2*$.
argamannu
aradu
"red purple, crimson";
IÎlE
"crimson wool".
:
Hebr.
]fcr\$.
Pret. iirid; Pres. urrad
"to go
down;
to
swoop
down". Hebr. TV.

Shafel,
Pret. u&rid',
Perm. Zurud
"to
bring
down".
ardu
ardutu
constr.
st. arad',
plur. ardani
"slave, servant".
Ideogr.
^^|.
araji
:
"servitude, submission, vassalage".

constr.
st.
arhu
"month".
Ideogr.
>%^f.
Hebr. HT.
arhisam
arhis
adv.
"monthly".
"quickly, speedily".
Pret. erik
Piel,
:
araku
"to be long".
Hebr.
:
TplK.
Pret. urrik;
Pres. urrak
"to lengthen;
VOCABULARY
to
be
very
long"
urrak time "he
will
have a
long
life"
(cf.
Hebr.
D^
T^COIdeogr.
[araku] arki
"to be behind".
"behind,
beneath,
;
after".
;
l?JE^.
employfuture".
*
arku
"situated behind
future"
fern. plur. arkatu,
*f.
ed
as
subs, "the
back,
the
rear;
the
*"
Ideogr. Jl^JE^r.
arkis
"backwards, back".
"afterwards".
arkanu
arallu
"the lower world, Hades". "battering-ram".

constr.
st.
arammu
arnu
aran
:
"sin".
to be or
araku
urku
urkitu
Prec. link
"to be green;
become
pale".
Hebr. pT.
amel urki
\
"gardener".
Ideogr.
"green herb".
Pret. irur
:
araru
irritu
"to curse".
Hebr.
"curse".
araru
arurtu
arattu
"to be hot, to burn''.
Hebr. Tin.
"drought".
"mighty".
Pret.
asabu
&;
Pres. uttab] Part. a$(t)bu\ Perm.ah'd, 3 plur.

:
a$-bi,
at-ba
3tt^.
"to
sit;
to
dwell".
Ideogr. JEJ.
Hebr.
Ifteal,
tatib
Pres. ittasab;
:
Imper.
;
ttiab,
plur. tti-ba;
Perm.
"to
Pret.
sit
down
:
to dwell".
Shafel,
uMib
"to
make
to
sit,
to
seat;
to
cause to inhabit, to settle (trans.)".

Ishtafal, Pret.
uMe&b "to cause to dwell".

Dtflfc.
musabu
subtu
"dwelling". Cf. Hebr.

constr.
st.
Subat
"dwelling".
Ideogr.
^JEJ JE|.
Cf.
Hebr.
DS^-
asamsutu
"tempest, hurricane".
326
VOCABULARY
"bread".
"to be gracious, to favour". Cf. Hebr.
Piel, Inf.
asnan
asaru
uHuru employed
"shrine".
as subs, "pardon".
asm
asirtu
esreti
"shrine, sanctuary".
pluri atrati
(P^ ur
:
"shrines, temples".
asaru
asru
asris
Pret. Jh'r;
Perm.
plur. asru
"to
bow down,
humble oneself".
"meek, submissive".
"humbly".
constr.
st.
asru
afar; plur. asrdti: "place". Cf. Hebr.
"Ittfg.
asar
asris
"in; where; during".

"against".
"first in
asaridu
rank
chief, leader, prince"
aplu asaridu
"son of highest rank". Ideogr.
asasu
ussu
"to found". Cf. Hebr.

Piel, Pret. ush's
:
"to found".
"foundation".
"to be sorrowful".
Piel
:
asasu
asustu
assu,
"to afflict"
Perm. uSSuS
"afflicted".
"trouble, sorrow".
assum
"in
in
order
to;
because of;
since";
relative
sometimes
:
combination
with
the
assu
sa
assatu
atu
"wife".
Ideogr.
Hebr
H^.
-/)
:
"to see".
Piel, Pret. uttu (written
/-/,
"to perceive
to choose, elect",
itutu
"the chosen, elect",

"eclipse".
atalu
Ideogr.
>H^ ^^.
atmu
ataru
see aniu.
"to exceed, to abound". Hebr. 1JT, înij.

Shafel, Imper.
siitir
:
"to
make preeminent".
VOCABULARY
atru
constr.
st.
32 7
atar; fern, atartu
"abounding
in".
suturu
atta
"mighty, glorious".
fern.
atti\
masc. plur. attunu;
personal
pronoun
"thou, you". Hebr. HfiK, fiK,
atta'u
a
fang(?)".
in
attu
phrase at-tu-u-a "as for me".
particle of prohibition
"not". Cf. Hebr.
^.
eberu
Pret.
ebtr,
ibir
"to pass over, cross, traverse, pass
through".;
bir-ki-ki e-bi-ri-e-ti (Part. fern, plur.)
"thy
striding knees".
Hebr. *DJJ.
ebirtu
"further bank, opposite side (of a river)".
ebirtan
"on the other
side,
beyond".
nibartu
nibirtu
"crossing (over a river)".
"opposite side (of a sea or river)".
egu egu
egirtu
"to
sin,
:
go astray".
"to delay, be slack".
Pret. egi
"letter".
Hebr.
rnj.
Hebr. nilK.
edu
edis
ône, alone".
adv. "alone".
edu
"flood".
see idu.
Cf. Hebr. *1K.
edu
edesu
"to be new".
Hebr.
ttflH.
Inf.
Piel, Pret. uddft;
Part, muddti;
udduSu
"to re-
new".
iddissa
essu
essutu
new".
Ideogr.
"newness"; ana eHuti "anew".

Pret.
ezib,
ezebu
izib
"to leave, abandon".

;
Hebr.
D1JJ.
Shafel,
Inf.
tuzubu "to save"
Suzubu ina "to pre-
serve from".
328
VOCABULARY
Pret. ezuz,
izuz;
ezezu
Perm.
plur. iz-zu
"to be angry,
furious".
Ifteal,
Cf. Hebr.
iteziz
:
njj.
Pret.
;
"to be angry",
izzu
-
fern, izzitu
"angry, terrible",
izzis
"angrily, in wrath",
uzzu
efu
"anger, wrath",
"to be
dark";
bit
e-ti-e
(Inf.)
"house of darkness".
Cf. Hebr.
ntfSJ.
etutu
"darkness".
Pret.
etir,
eteru
itir
"to protect, save, spare"
with prep.
ina "to spare from".
Hebr.
i
ÎftJ?.
:
Nifal, Pret.
innitir-,
Prec.
sing, lunnitir
"to be saved",
eku, iku
"starving, in want",
ekutu
ekallu
"want, need",
plur. ekallali
:
"palace".
Ideogr.
fc:TT
T ^V-.
Hebr.
ekemu
ekurru
elu
Pret. *&>,
F&iw (3 sing, i-kzm
3 plur. e-ki-i-mu)
"to
capture, take
away
:
from, detach".
plur. ekurre, ekurrati

Pret.
eli\
ili-,
"temple".
:
Pres.
^//i*
"to be high
to
go or come
Hebr. rh%.
up, to ascend;
Ifteal, Pret.
iteli,
to depart,
make
off".
:
itela-,
Part, mut-tal-lu
"to be exalted;
to
go up; to emerge; to depart".

:
Piel, Pret. ulli
"to raise".
Shafel, Pret.
raise,
u&eli, lift
uMa;
to
Prec.
Itieli;
Imper.
to
Suli
"to
to
to
up;
bring in;
carry up;
drive away".
Ishtafal, Pret.
uSteli,
ult'eli
:
"to bring up or out".
eli
"over, upon; against; beside, in addition to; unto";
ana
eh,
ina
eli
"to"
also written e-la "beside, with
the exception of".
Ideogr.
fern, eldti
^^T^f.
:
Cf. Hebr. bj?.

shrill,
elu
fern, elitu
elati
plur.
eluti,
"high
loud"
"the zenith".
VOCABULARY
elis
32 9
"above".
"distant (of time)";
ullu
gddu
ulld "for
ever";
ultu
ulld
"from of old".
ullanu
ellu
"distance"
fern,
ellitu
;
ultu
ulldnumma "when, as soon as".

elluti,
plur.
fern,
elleti
"bright,
pure'".
Ideogr.
teliltu
^|.
"purification".
ellamu
ellamu
ellatu
"front"; ellamu'a "over against me". Cf. Hebr. DÎS,
adj. "in
front, before".
see \alalu~]. a brightly-shining precious stone,
elmisu
"diamond
(?)".
Cf.
Heb.
elippu
ttT^'pn.
elesu
^y *~\}}. "to rejoice". Hebr. yb%.

Ifteal, Pret.
itelis
:
"ship". Ideogr.
"to rejoice",
ulsu
"joy, exultation",
emu emu ema emu
"father-in-law". Hebr. DPI.

"place, space".
among"; also written e-ijn. Pret. emi\ Perm, emi "to be like".
"in,
:
Cf. Hebr. !"!$?.
Ifteal,
Pret. itemi
"to
become
like".
Shafel, Pret. u$emi\ "to
make
like,
reduce to a state of".
emedu
Pret. emid\ Imper.
2.
fern. sing, en-di-im-ma
= emdi-ma
"to stand; to lay upon; to cast
down, subdue".
Hebr. 1&J7.
Ifteal, Pret. itemid
:
"to take a course (of a ship)".
Piel, Pret.
ummid
"to set up, erect".

:
Nifal, Pret. innimid
"to advance",
nimedu
"dwelling"; kussu
riimedi "seat",
emeku
"to be deep". Hebr.
emku
enku
"wise".
33o
VOCABULARY
"might, power"; plur. emuke, emuka "forces",
b~it
emuku
nimeki nimeku "wisdom"; temeku "fervent prayer",
"the Abyss".
enu, inu
"time"; as conj. "when".
enuma
inuma
enu
"when". Ideogr.
Pret. eni
:
J.
"to
make
void,
make
of no effect
Ideogr.
to vanCf.
quish,
overcome, humble".
PUJJ.
^^J^.
Hebr.
Nifal, Pret. in-nin-na-a, in-nin-nu-u
"to be annulled".
vjy.
enu
eninna
fern, enitu
"lowly".
Cf.
Hebr. 1^,
"now; thereupon".
"to be weak, to decay". Cf. Hebr. $3K.
enesu
ensu
[eseku ?]
eseru
"weak".
"to distress (?)";
Pret.
est'r
:
i-si-ik-sa.
"to enclose,
imprison,
besiege
to
take
captive". Hebr.
Iftaal,
1p.
:
Pres. utasar
st. epir\
"to be enclosed, besieged".
epiru
constr.
plur. epire, eprdti: "dust". Ideogr. ^~^TT.
epru
Hebr. ^SJJ.
Pret. lpu$\ Pres. ippu$\ Imper. epus, ip-$a\ Part,
epfifu
:
epesu
"to do, make"; pa epesu "to open the mouth, to
speak"; Urruta eprtu "to rule a kingdom, exercise

sovereignty".
Iftaal,
Ideogr. ^y~.
itepus
:
:
Pret.
t'tapuS,
"to
Shafel, Pret. uUptt
"to cause to
:
make; to deal with". make or build".
epistu
plur.
epSeti,
ip-â-tu
"deed, action; insignia (of doip-*it limuiti

t'epus-,
minion); occurrence";
"evil fate".
epus',
epesu
Pret. tpu$,
fern.
sing,
Imper.
"to be-
witch"; Part,
epifu,
fern. ept'Mu
"wizard, witch".
Ishtafal, Part. fern. muMeptitu "witch, sorceress".
ipsu
"witchcraft".
VOCABULARY
33l
esenu
esepu
eseru
Pret. <?>/, isin
"to smell".
"to add to, increase".

Piel, Pret. ussip
:
"to add to".
"to bind, to enclose". Cf. Hebr.

Piel
:
u-sir.
:
usurtu eseru
plur. usurdti
"boundary, end".
"to form". Hebr.

Piel,
Inf.
^T.
:
ussuru
"to make, fashion",
usurtu
plur. usurdti'. "sculpture, relief"; usurti salmi
"image,
statue".
Ideogr.
ekil
:
:J
^^-
eklu
const, shekel,
"field, estate, territory". Ideogr.
T?
meri, iri
:
era
Pret.
"to be pregnant, to conceive". Hebr.
rnn.
era
"copper". Id'eogr. Î^TTPret. erub,

irub',
;
erebu
Pres.
irrub',
Imper.
erub',
Part. ~eribu\
"to enter
Cf. Hebr.
Ifteal,
to set (of the sun)".
Ideogr. ^gfEj.
n^JJ.
:
Pret. iterub
"to enter".
:
Shafel, Pret. u$erib\ Imper. Surib

to bring in".
Ishtafal, Pret. usterib
:
"to
make
enter,
"to
make
the
-
enter",
ereb samsi "the
setting
of
the
-
sun,
west".
Ideogr.
Hf- ^T I If
niribu
"entrance".
Pret. eriba, er-ba
:
Cf Hebr yyi> **yp"to increase".
erebu
erinu
Ideogr. ^>^yT.
Cf.
"cedar". Ideogr.
^] Jg[J^ppf.
Hebr.
J^.
eresu
eristu
"to desire, wish for".

constr.
st. trfat
"desire". Hebr.
meristu
meriltu
"wish, desire; desired object",
eresu
iresu
"smell, sweet savour".
332
VOCABULARY
"to trouble, disturb"; Perm.
plur. eSati
:
esu
esitu
*&',
tit
"troubled".
"trouble, disturbance".
tesu
"ruin; hurricane".
esgallu
[eseru]
"mansion".
Pret. isir
:
"to be straight". Hebr. *\1$\

susir
:
Shafel,
"led".
Imper.
"to
direct";
Perm. Sutur
Ishtafal, Pret. u*tttir\

Inf. tutesuru
:
Prec. UWSir;
Part.
muWSiru;
"to direct, lead",

:
isaru
fern. iSartu,
isirtu
"right,
righteous".
Hebr.
ÎtT^
mesaru
misaru
esertu
"righteousness".
constr.
st.
Hebr.
:
ÎtJ^S.
eXerif
"ten";
for iSten
eSrit
see
isten.
Ideogr. ^. Hebr.
n^.
esreti
see see
asaru.
essu
edesu.
essutu
etellu
"lord"; fern.
etillu
Â7/z'/w
"lady, queen".
ittik\
eteku
Pret.
etik, itik',
Pres.
Imper.
etik
"to go, march,
advance; to traverse; to go through or into, to

transgress". Hebr. pflj.
Ifteal,
Pret.
itetik,
etetik
"to go, march".

itti
:
Shafel, Imper. $utik\
with prep,
"to cause to
depart from, to
remove from".
metiku
"course".
precative particle
"come!"
ibbu
ibru
"bright",
"friend". Hebr.
ibrutu
"friendship".
VOCABULARY
igaru
plur. t'garu,
t'gare,
333
igarati:
"wall". Ideogr. ^JJ J ^fcl5<.
Cf. Hebr. 13PI.
agurru "brickwork".
idu
plur. iddj
iddti
;
"hand;
side;
might, strength;
idi,
pos-
session;
hire, price for hire";
idd "at the side
of". Ideogr.
ES^J. Hebr. T.
idi\
idu,
edu
Pret.
1di\
Perm.
of,
Part,
idu
"to
know,
take
knowledge
understand;
to see, choose, elect";
ma
iddu
iddisu
la idi
Iftaal,
"without knowing, unwittingly". Hebr. JH\ Pret. utaddi "to be known, to be recognised".
:
"pitch, bitumen". Ideogr.
see edesu.
iddissu
idlu
idirtu
"man,
lord, hero".
Ideogr.
:]
"grief, misery".
\
izzu
izzis
see ezezu.
}
iku iku
"small water-channel".
see
eku.
ikdu
ikkibu
"strong, mighty, courageous".

"sin, fault".
ikkaru
iklitu
"gardener". Ideogr. "darkness".
EvfJ
*~E^
&]]]]
>--
bit
ikliti
(?)
"dark
chamber". Cf. Hebr.
ikribu
ilu
see
karabu.
He
:
plur. Hani,
"god".
Ideogr. >->^-
rarely
written
tyy", plur.
,
yy~ fff~-
Hebr. hx.
:
iltu
constr.
st. ilat\
plur.
ilati
"goddess",
Hutu
"godhead, divinity",
"bond,
fetter".
illurtu
ilittu
'iltu
see aladu.
"bann, curse",
see istanu.
iltanu
334
VOCABULARY
"evil wind, hurricane".
imhullu
immu
immeru imnu
imeru
izzrfu
"day".
"lamb, sheep". Ideogr.
^f| *"^|-
Hebr.
"right hand, right". Hebr. pj\ "ass". Ideogr. Hebr. *l1toPT-
^T^:
const,
st.
/OTa/
"breath, spittle, foam, poison".
Cf.
Hebr. n&H.
ina
prep, "in, by, through, during, in the time of"; some-
times written m. Ideogr. >

112
.>
)t >
;J
see
ewu.
:
inu
plur. *a, z<?
"eye; part, share". Ideogr. ^|>~; in plur. frequently written <|*ff. Hebr. pg.
st. iw/3
:
.mbu
constr.
"fruit;
manly
strength, virility".
inuma
inanna
inanni
\
see eww.
?
I
"now".
inannu
islru
see isku. see epe.su.
ipsu
isu, issu
"wood,
Jsu
pg. "scanty, "few". Cf. Hebr.

plur. issurdti
:
tree".
Hebr.
ph.
issuru
"bird". Ideogr. ^JJ. issuris adv. "like a bird".

plur. subs, used adverbially
:
irtati
"swiftly".
irnittu
"triumph, victory".
"cloud, clouds".
plur. urpdti
:
irpitu
urpatu
irsitu
j'rnYw
"cloud".
Ideogr. ^Jg[. Hebr.
"earth
see
district".
K.
araru.
iresu
irsu
irtu
if
see eresu.
"couch". Ideogr.
constr.
st. irat
:
^^^^.
Hebr.
"breast". Ideogr.
:
iati
personal pronoun
"me".
VOCABULARY
isu
Pret. (with
meaning of
Pres. also) iti
"to have,
possess
to be". Ideogr.
:
^.
;
Cf. Hebr. tf ?.
isdu
constr.
itid
st. ih'J
stir/it'
"foundation
lower or hinder part";
"the horizon".
isdahhu
ispatu
isku, isku
"bridle (?)".
"quiver". Hebr.
HS^X.
Cf. Hebr.
"portion, possession, property".
iskatu
isaru
"chain, fetter".
see [eseru].
issakku
isatu
"fire". Ideogr.
t; Mis
t >.
also
the ide g r
for Gibil the Fire-god,

tialu "fire".
employed
for
Hebr. t^K.
istu
prep, "from"; adv. "after"; #/# //^z "from, out of".
istanu
iltanu
isten
"north, north-wind". Ideogr.
A JT.
>
"one". Ideogr.
J,
which with phon. compl.
frequently written
^-\\.
Cf. Hebr. Dttty,
isten esrit "eleven". Cf. Hebr.

istenis istar
adv. "together".
"goddess".
Ideogr.
Cf.
Hebr.
iati
n^
see iasi.
itu
"boundary; ordinance, law".

"prudent".
see atu.
plur.
itati
:
itpesu
itutu
ittu
itti
"side". Cf. Hebr.
D.
prep. "with". Ideogr. ^Jgf.
U
u
u'a
copula
interj.
:
"and"; written ^, <y^^Qf. Cf. Hebr. ^

"alas";
1.
employed
as subs, "grief, pain".
336
VOCABULARY
"finger; peak, summit". Ideogr. ÊJ "servant".
see
ubanu
ubaru
^JJ.
uggatu
ugallu
agagu.
"storm, hurricane".
see
udmu
uzzu
admu.
uzun
"ear; mind, attention"
see ezezu.
constr.
st.
:
uznu
(cf. bo$u,
sakanu).
Ideogr.
.
^[^,
|]S.
in plur. frequently writ-
ten
^|>ff
:
Hebr.
uhhu uknu uksu

ul ullu ullu
plur. uhhe
"trick (?)".
"lapis lazuli".
Ideogr. J^;<^
^ ^.
"longing".
see alalu.
see elu.
"that".
ullu
ullanu ulinnu
a garment.
Ideogr.
ulapu
ulsu
ultu
"bond, alliance". Cf. Hebr.

see elesu.
prep, "from"; adv. "after, since".
Ideogr. ^^||y.
uma umu umu
adv.
"now".
"storm". Ideogr. ^J.

plur. iime
:
"day"; ina umisuîna umeSuma, inu umisu,

"then,
at
inumtium
that
time";
i$tu
umimma
"henceforth".
Ideogr. ^J.
Hebr. D1\
umisam umussu
umatan
adv. "daily".
umagtan
adv. "for a day".

"beast".
umamu umma ummu
adv. "thus"; introduces direct speech.
"mother". Ideogr.
Nt>->fT-
Hebr. DK.
VOCABULARY
33y
ummanu ummanu
-
"craftsman"; also mar ummani. Hebr. |EK. plur. ummdne, ummdndti "tribe, people; host, forces,
:
troops".
Ideogr.
^,
^ ^Jf
sakanu.
umman manda
ummatu
unlku
"host".
plur.
"tribal hordes".
uriik'eti',
"kid".
full
unkenna
unninu
"the whole;
strength";
see
Ideogr.
see \ananu\.
unku
unutu
usurtu
"signet-ring; sealed letter".

plur. undti: ','furniture,
household
stuff".
see eseru.
uru
"enclosure, field". Cf. Hebr. nn.K.

constr.
st.
urhu
urkarinnu
urpatu
uruh: "road". Hebr. Fnfc.
a precious
wood. Ideogr.
see irpitu,
urku
urkitu
see aralcu.
]
urru
urfu
"light, day".
see.
Ideogr.
^J ^|J. Hebr.
1]^. channel for the blood,
'aru.
usu
usultu
a precious
plur.
wood. Ideogr.
"blood-vessel,
îj
uUati\
artery".
usumgallu
"monster-viper". Ideogr.
Ej^
^-^-yjy^.
usmanu
ussu
"camp". Cf. Hebr. njbtt^Dsee asasu.
ba'u
Pret.
and Pres.
iba
"to come, reach, go". Hebr. 813.
Piel-Shafel,
Pret. utta'i:
"to storm against, plunge
down upon".
babu
plur. bdbdti, bdbdni\ "gate". Ideogr.
tf-]r.
22
338
biblu
constr.
st.
VOCABULARY
bibil:
"inclination,
desire";
bibil
libbi
"prompting, desire of the heart",
bubutu
"hunger, famine
food, bread",
buhalu
batalu
batlu
"male beast",
"to cease". Hebr. btS3.
fern, batiltu
:
"discontinued, at an end"
Id batlu
"unceasing".
batiltu
plur.
&Z//0/2':
"discontinuance, discharge"; see rasu.

Pres.
ibaki-,
baku
Pret. ibki\
Perm,
baki,
3 plur. baku
"to weep". Hebr. H?3.

Iftaal,
Inf. bitakku "affliction",
bikitu
"weeping".
bakru
"young of the camel".

constr.
st.
bukru
balu
bukur
"first-born". Hebr.
^"D^J.
pfesi.
"not to be, fade, go to ruin". Hebr.
Piel,Pret.&i///: "to destroy, bring to an end, cut off".
bala
balu
belu
belu
Prep, "without".
Pret.
ibely
ipil
"to conquer, subdue, rule".

bel ade
bel
plur.
bele:
"lord";
"one who
is is
faithful
faithful
;
to
commands";
;
mamiti "one
who
to an oath"
bel kussi
bel sallmi "ally,
confederate"
la
"one with no claim to the throne"
bel narkabati
"commander
of the chariots", writ-
ten
Hebr. beltu
constr.
st.
belit:
"lady".
Ideogr.
"jE: ?
belutu
"lordship, rule, authority, dominion".
Belutu
the
power or dominion of the god Bel
written
bel-pahati "governor". Ideogr. "four-footed beast; bulu "divine command". billudu
cattle".
VOCABULARY
balatu
Pret. iblut\
33 9
"to live".
Ideogr.
bullit-,
Pres. ibalut:
^.
Inf.
Piel, Pret. uballit-, Pres. uballat;

bullutu
;
Imper.
"to cause to live, give
life to,
quicken,
raise to life".
Iftaal,
Pret. ubtallit: "to
keep alive".
balatu
baltu
"life".
Ideogr. >~<T<
baltuti:
*-|.
bal-tu-su-un ik-tu-da kata
11 -
masc. plur.
"living, alive".
baltutu
"state of being alive";

ai
"my hands
captured (them) alive".

:
[balkatu]
Shafel, Pres. u&abalkat

Nifal, Pret. ibbalkit
:
"to tear down".

fall
"to
upon
invade
revolt
against".
Ideogr.
^^-J^.
to confound".
\balalu]
"to pour out".

Piel,
Inf.
Hebr. bb%.
:
bullulu
"to smelt
balru
biltu
"side, bank".
see abalu.
Pret.
ibni\
;
banu
Pres.
ibani\
fern,
Imper.
banat
:
bini\
Part,
bant,
bdnu
Perm,
bani,
"to build, make,
form, create, beget".

.Nifal, Pret.
Ideogr. JÎ.
Hebr. PIJ.
formed,
and Pres.
ibbani\ "to
be
built,
created
Ittafal,
to be laid (of a net)".

ittabni'.
Pret.
"to be created, restored".

building, structure".
binutu
"creation, product
bunu bunnannu nabmtu banu
"formation, origin, beginning".
"form".
"creation, creature".
"bright, beautiful
Pret. ibkum
; ;
rich, precious".
:
bakamu
baru
Imper. bukum
3
"to tear in pieces".
ba'aru, baru Pret. ibar\ Pres.
plur. ibarru: "to catch".
Pret. ibri\ Pres. ibari: "to see, gaze
upon".
Shafel, Pret. utabri: "to cause to see".
baru
biru
"seer".
Ideogr.
;
>*~.
"glance
midst"
ma
blri
"between, in the midst".

22*
840
birtu
constr.
birit
st.
VOCABULARY
birit
:
"glance
midst
;
clearness
(?')"
ma
"between, among"
(?)",
2.
me
is
birtu
"water of clear-
ness
e.
water that
;
.
clear.
tabritu
"sight,
wonder" plur
tabrdti':
"marvellous treasures".
KÎS.
baru
"to be superabundant".
Cf. Hebr. 8*13,
Piel-Ishtafal, Pres. u$tabarri\ "to be sated, to
abound
with".
biris
adv. "in luxuriant pasturage".
barbaru
birku
"leopard" or "jackal".
plur. birkd, birke
:
Ideogr.
;
JVJ
>Jf:
E^JT-
"knee"
1j^3
tar-bit bir-ki-ia
"my
off-
spring".
Hebr.
[baramu] birmu
Piel
"to
weave coloured threads".

Ideogr.
"brightly-coloured cloth, variegated stuff".
^Jx&J.
baraku
birku
biritu
Pret. ibrik
:
Hebr. Din?.
bitrumu "brightly-coloured".
"to flash (of lightning), to blast".
"lightning".
"fetters".
Hebr. p^3.
basu
Pret.
MM
Pres.
;
tbati
(rarely
;
written
ipasi)
Part.
bdÛj
ba$i
Perm,
Ideogr.
:
bati
"to
be
to
be inclined,
directed".
Shafel,
^|T^.
"to
Pret. uSabtt
in
cause
to
be,
hitta
to
create"
(Ideogr. JJ^,
proper names);
subsu "to
commit
sin".
Ishtafal, Pret. uMabSi: "to
make, create".
busu
"property, possessions".
Pret.
ititim
:
basamu
Ideogr. ÊJ, "to build, form, prepare".

:
J.
Piel, Pret.
ubaHim
"to form".
basmu
bitu
"viper".
"house
temple"
bit
Hi "temple"
bit
durdni in op-
position to aldni:
"walled or
;
fortified cities"; bit
nakamti "treasure-house"
troops".
Ideogr.
.
bit tukldti
"stations
for
Hebr. JTS.
VOCABULARY
bithallu
341
"saddle-horse";
sometimes written with determ.
batnu
word of uncertain meaning.

Pret. ibtuk
Piel,
:
bataku
"to rend, tear

:
to cut off,
separate".
Cf.
Pret. ubattik
"to cut
through,
sever".
Hebr. prD.
Nifal, Pret. ilbatik
:
"to be destroyed".
close
a
batku
"cleft,
fissure,
breach"; batka sabdtu "to
breach, restore".
butaku
"destruction".
$ub-tak-ti,
subtaktu "flood";, written

ru-htm-ti.
which can also be read
bitrumu
see
\baramu].
gabbu
gabru
"all, the
whole".
"answer, reply".
Pret. igbu$
:
gabasu
gabsu
gibsu
"to be firm, hard, proud".
"mighty".
constr.
st.
gtbft
"multitude".
Ideogr.
gugallu
"ruler, director".
>^2^
El^"-
gadu
guzalu
prep, "up to
together with".
.
"messenger, servant, minister". Ideogr. \*-^ |y J

"stibium".
Piel, Pres. ugalldb
\
guhlu
[galabu]
"to brand".
gallu
"evil
demon,
:
devil".
"terrible".
galtu
fern, galittu
gamalu
Pret. igmil
Imper. gimil
of)";
"to complete
to spare Cf.
(the
life
with ina "to spare
from".
Hebr. bty.
gimillu
"mercy, sparing of
life"; gimillu turru "to requite,
take vengeance", see taru.
gitmalu
"perfect".
3 42
VOCABULARY
"camel".
EfflJ.
gammalu
gama.ru
Ideogr.
Hebr.
:
Pret. -igmur
"to complete, bring to an end".
Cf.
Hebr.
Ifteal,
*m
gitmum employed
"to
as
Inf.
subs, "perfection,
excellence".
Piel, Part,
mugammiru
carry out, achieve".
gamru
gimru
gimirtu
constr.
constr.
st.
gamir: "perfect".
gimir
;
:
st.
"entirety,
the
whole"
kal gimri
"everything
constr.
st.
the world".
gimrat', plur. gimreti'. "entirety, the
whole";
kiât kal gimreti "the
whole of the world".
ginu
"appointed offering".
"district (?)".
gunu gappu
gipa.ru
ga.ru
"wing, feather".
"piece of land, field".
plur. gdre
:
"enemy, opponent".
Cf. Hebr. ,TI3, PP13.
girru
"way
campaign, expedition".
gisparru
"snare, trap".
gasaru
gasru
gisru
"to strengthen, fortify".
Cf. Hebr.
"mighty".
fern, gtiirtu
:
"strong, powerful".
ma.gsa.ru "might, strength".
gitmalu
see ga.ma.lu.
[da'abu]
da.ba.bu
Part. dcCibu
Pret. idbub
;
"to
overwhelm
(?)".
:
Pres. iddbub, idibub

;
"to speak, converse,

itti
. . .
.
proclaim
to plan, intrigue";
tobuti dabobu
"to establish friendly relations with". Cf. Hebr.
dibbu
"speech, message".
Cf. Hebr.
VOCABULARY
dabru
masc. plur. dabruti
Pret. idgul\
\
3 43
"mighty".
"to look
at,
dagalu
Imper. dugul:
behold";
ddgil pdni "subject of, tributary to".
Shafel, Pret. u$adgil\
Perm. Sudgul: with pdnu "to
entrust to".
daddaru
"stink".
plur. dadme
:
dadmu
Du'uzu
"dwelling, habitation".
Ideogr. E-^**^
the
month Tammuz.
^J.
Hebr.
daku
tiduku
Pret. iduk
Ifteal,
"to slay". Ideogr.
<.
Cf. Hebr.
^.
Pret. idduk\ "to slay".
"battle".
Pret. idki\ "to
diku
dakkassu
dalabu
summon, assemble". word of uncertain meaning.

"to
:
"to be in trouble".
Piel, Part, mudallibu
:
afflict,
oppress".
dalibtu
plur. dalbati, da-al-pa-a-te
"affliction".
;
dalahu
"to confuse, to disorder"

subs, "trouble";
Inf. daldhu
employed
as
&J$:
^^,
**ru dalihu "dis-
turbing wind, whirlwind". Hebr. fth^.

Shafel, Inf. Sudluhu
"to confound, destroy".
dalihtu
plur. dalhtiti: "disturbance".
dalalu
Pret. idlul
"to
bow down, humble

hh^.
oneself,
wor-
ship".
Cf. Hebr.
dallalu
"cripple".
"service, work, task".
constr.
st.
dullu
daltu
dalat;
plur. dalati:
r\b^..
"door".
Ideogr.
*]].
Hebr.
damu
dimu
dimtu
"blood".
plur. dimd
"tears,
Ideogr.
:
M.
Hebr. n !.
1
"tear".
Cf. Hebr. pfc^.
weeping".
:
Hebr. njD^.
damamu dumamu
Pres.
idammum
"to lament, moan".
"howling, lamentation".
344
VOCABULARY
"column, obelisk".
"to be friendly, favourable, propitious".
Ideogr.
dimmu damaku
Piel,
Inf.
dummuku
"to
make
favourable
show
favour".
damku
fern, damikiu-, plur. damkuti, fern, damkati'. "friendly,
good, favourable health-giving (of water-supply);

;
trusty (of warriors)".
Ideogr. damkati
^|>-^.
"good
deeds".
damiktu
"mercy,
Ideogr.
favour";
plur.
-
<!-*f
good
<|^f
;
dumku
dunku
dimtu dimtu
"favour,
fortune
comeliness".
Ideogr.
^|^f
plur. dimati'. "pole, post".
see
dimu.
;
danu
dinu
Pret. idln
Pres. idan
"to judge".
"judgment".
"judge".
Hebr.
p*!.
daianu
Ideogr. ^|^f= >^^-.
Cf. Hebr.
p^.
dananu
"to be strong".
Piel, Pret. udannin
;
Inf.
dunnunu
"to strengthen,
make
fast".
dananu dannu
dannis
"might, power".
fern, dannatu', plur. danniiti,
fem.dannati: "strong,
mighty".
Ideogr.
^JJf
g||
;
<?.
^.
also written with
adv. "very much, exceedingly"
phonetic complement
is, i.
dannis. Ideogr.
affliction
^jy^.
dannatu
"foundation,
base;
distress,
(ideogr.
dannutu
"strength, strong point, fortress"

tress,
alt
dannuti "for-
stronghold".
dandannu dunku
dapnu
dapinu
"strong, all-powerful".
see
damaku.
"strong, mighty".
"strong".
VOCABULARY
345
duppu
diparu
"tablet".
Ideogr.
t
Ideogr.
plur. dipdrdii\ "torch". plur.
^
Ideogr.
:*"]
dupsimtu
dupsarru
dupTimdti
"destiny- tablet".
"scribe"
usually written
e'
am * lu
dup-$ar.
;
daru
fern,
ddrilu
plur. ddruti, fern, ddrdti
"lasting, conti-
nual,
everlasting";
;
##
ddrdti
"for
ever,
continu-
ously"
/ara
ddrdti
"an everlasting shrine". Ideogr.
daris
cfuru
adj. "eternal"
a0
"the
ddrt'S
"for ever".
lit.
plur.
durdm: "wall"; dur appi

i.
"the wall of the

bitu.
face",
e.
cheek";
see
also
Ideogr.
dirratu
"whip
Part.
Cf.
(?)".
durussu
"foundation".
ddt'S
:
dasu
"to
tread
under
foot,
crush,
destroy".
Hebr.
tfn
Hebr. M*\.
:
[dasu]
"to abound, be luxuriant".

Piel-Shafel,
Pret.
ut-das-U-a
"to cause to have in
abundance, to endow with".
[zabu]
Pret. izub
"to melt, dissolve".
Hebr.
SIT.
zazu
zahalu
"to divide".
Piel, Pres.
uzaz
"to divide".
a bright stone or metal.

Pret. zis^wr;
zakaru
Pres. izakar:
;
"to name, call upon, pro-
claim, speak, tell"

i.
$uma zakdru "to name a name",

Cf. Hebr. IDT.
e.
"to bear a name, to exist".
Piel,
Perm, zukkur
"to
name"
$u-ma
la
zuk-ku-ru
"they were not named, did not exist".
346
VOCABULARY
constr.
st.
zikru
zikir:
"name, speech, word, mention,

zikru kardu "valiant hero".
renown".
Hebr. ^pt.
Ideogr.
zikaru
|
"male; man";
?!?],
plur.
zikru
zikritu
-r|.
Hebr.
"fit.
zikreti'.
"women
of
the
palace".
Ideogr.
zalpu
zaliptu
"wicked".
constr.
st.
zalpat
"wickedness, iniquity".
zamu
zumbu zamaru
zamaru
Piel "to exclude
from"
Perm, zummu "excluded
from".
(i.
e.
zubbu}
"fly".
Hebr. sn|.
*)&!.
"to sing".
Hebr.
"song".
plur. zammere
:
zammeru
zammertu
"singer, musician".
Ideogr.
E^^
-
jitplur. zammereti'.
"female musician".
Ideogr.
M*
zumru
zinu
zinu
constr.
st.
zumur, rarely zumir
"body".
"to be angry".
"angry".
"to rain".
Shafel, Pres. usaznan
:
zananu
"to cause to rain".
zananu zananutu
ziku
"to provide for, care for, support".
"provision, abundance".
Pret. izik
:
"to blow, storm, rage".

zuk
:
zuku
zakapu
zikkuratu
[zakatu]
constr.
st.
"foot-soldiers"
zuk Sepe
"foot-
soldiers, infantry".
Pret. izkup, iskup
"to place, set up, erect". Hebr.
T
"peak of a mountain
;
temple-tower".
"to be sharp, pointed".
zaktu
zifrtu
"sharp, pointed".
"spur".
VOCABULARY
zaru
Pret.
iz~ir\
347
Pres. izirri:
"to hate, conceive a hatred
for"; Part, za'iru

Piel,
"enemy".
Hebr.
lit.
Imper. zir: "to abandon".
zirutu
[zaru]
plur. zlrdti\ "hatred".

Part, zaru
:
"to beget".
Cf. Hebr. ST]J.

p*lj.
zeru
"seed, descendants". Ideogr. >~c, >^. Hebr.
zarabu
zarbis
"to be oppressed".
Piel, Pret. uzarrib
:
"to oppress, afflict".
adv. "in trouble".

constr.
Nifal,
st.
zurbu
[zarbabu]
zurub
3
"trouble, affliction".
plur.
Perm.
nazarbubu
"to
fume,
to
be
furious".
H
habasu
habatu
3 plur.
Perm.
(?)
ha-ba-su:
"to
be
filled,
swelled
out
(?)".
;
Pret. ihbut
Pres. ihabat
:
"to plunder".
;
hubtu
hegallu
constr.
st.
hubut
"booty
captives".
"abundance".
.Pret. ihdi\
Ideogr. îfc
Hfl^'
as
hadu
"to rejoice";
Inf.
with prep, ana "to rejoice
in
or at";
hadu
employed
subs.
"joy".
Hebr. .Tin.
hadis
hidutu
adv. "joyfully".
plur. hidoti\ "joy".
Ideogr.
^^J|.
Ideogr.
hazanu
hatu
hatu
plur.
hazdndti'.
"ruler,
governor".
Pret.
z'AF/
"to see, survey".

?7///i':
Pret. ihti; Pres.
"to sin".
Hebr.
"sin"
hititu
plur.
^/
>z/
snner.
hitdti'.
"sin, iniquity".
"sceptre".
Ideogr.
[ha/u]
Pret.
/:
^J
T^J
g^.
Cf.
"to tremble, quiver".
Hebr.
348
VOCABULARY
"army, host".
plur. halse,
haialtu
Cf. Hebr. b?!l.

"fort,
-
halsu
halsani;
entrenchment"; written
-
*TT
halaku
*+:
Cf Hebr rô-fc"to be destroyed

;
Pret. ihlik
to
flee".
Ideogr.
Ifteal,
Pret. Malik: "to be lost".

;
Piel, Pret. uhallik

fyulluku
:
Prec.
lihallik
Part, muhalliku
Inf.
"to destroy, cast down".
sahluktu
\hamu~]
"destruction".
Perm.
fern.
sing, hamati: "to be of

(?)".
:
good cheer,
be comforted
hamatu
hitmutis
Pret. ihmut
Imper. humut
"to hasten".
adv. "swiftly, in haste".

Pret. ihmut
Piel, Pres.
Ishtafal,
:
hamatu
"to burn".
uhammat: "to make glow, to light up". Part. muVahmitu "to flame, burn".
:
:
hamamu
hamiru hansu hasasu
Pret.
ihmum
"to rule, direct".
see ha'iru.
"fifth".
Ideogr.
:
lj!jf.
Hebr. ^fcfr
plan,
Pret. ihsus
"to
think, conceive,
invent
to
recollect, to set in the

Ifteal,
memory".
Msas)
:
Imper.
hissas
(for
"to understand".
hasisu
hipu
"wisdom, understanding".
Pret. ihpi: "to shatter, destroy; to split".
Ifteal,
Pret. ihtepi
"to shatter".
:
Piel, Part, muhippi, muhip
"to shatter, destroy".
hasbu
subs, of uncertain meaning.

Pret. ihik
:
haku
haru
"to mingle together (intrans.)".
Pret. ihri\ "to dig".

Iftaal,
Pret. uhtarri'. "to dig".
Shafel, Pret. uSafrri "to cause to dig out".
ha'iru
hamiru.
"spouse, husband".
VOCABULARY
hirtu
"spouse, wife".
"desert".
3 49
hiratu
huribtu
Hebr.
."
harbasu
[harmatu]
"power
of striking icrror, fury".
"to destroy".
Shafel, Part, mutyarmitu
:
"to destroy".
"to overpower, destroy".
[harmamu] hurasu
harranu
Shafel,
Prec.
lilharmim
"gold".
Ideogr.
^r ^Jf^-
Hebr. p*lH.
"way, road".
plur. hursani'.
Ideogr. p\^.
hursu
hirtu
"mountain, wooded highland".
Cf.
Hebr.
\
hiratu
see ha'iru.
}
hasu hasahu husahu husahhu

hasalu
hitmutis
Pret. t&JX
"to hasten, set out, go".

:
Hebr.
Pret. ifrSuA, ihtih

\
"to long
for, desire".
}
}
"hunger, famine".
"destroyer".
see
hamatu.
Hebr.
hatanu
"son-in-law".
tabu
Pret.
itib
Pres.
itab,
Dltfi.
itib
"to be good, well-pleas-
ing".
Piel,
Hebr.
Part,
mufibu:
st.
"to
joy".
make
joyful";
Inf.
tubbu
a
tub)
;
(constr.
tabu
fern,
tobtu
"good, pleasant
loud (of the voice)".
tabis
"joyfully, cheerfully".
plur. tdbtdti
(?)
:
tabtu
tibu
"benefit".
"to sink".
Iftaal,
Hebr. jntp.
"to
Pret. uttibbi:
make
sink,
duck under".
350
VOCABULARY
"to slaughter".
tabahu
Hebr.
:
Piel, Pres. utabbah
"to slaughter".
itihhi
:
tahu, tehu Pret.
ithi\
Pres.
itehi,
"to
draw near, ap-
proach".
titu, tittu
"clay,
mud,
earth".
temu
taradu
"understanding, mind;
account, instructions, com-
mand".
Hebr.
DJJtD.
"to drive away, hunt".

Piel, Pres. utarrad
:
Cf. Hebr.
"to hunt".
K
ki
conj. "as,
when,
after, since,
for".
Hebr.
^3.
prep, "like, according to".
ki'am
adv. "thus".
kima
kime kabasu
prep, "like, as, according to
corresponding
to,
in
place of"; adv. "as soon as". Ideogr.

"just as".
Pret. ikbus
:
^vJJ.
"to tread".
Cf. Hebr.
DD3.
:
Piel, Pret. ukabbis; Part, mukabbisu
"to tread down,
trample on".
Shafel,
Inf.
sukbusu
"to cause to tread
down,
to
batter (of siege-engines)",
kibsu
kibru
kibratu
constr.
st.
st.
kibis
"footstep, tread",
:
constr.
kibir
:
"bank
;
(of a river)",
plur. kibrati
"region
quarter of heaven".
Ideogr.
trfc.
Hebr.
rnM.
Hebr. "153:
kabatu
"to be heavy, weighty".

Piel, Pret. ukabbti, ukebit
Iftaal, Pret.
"to honour".
uktebit:
"to honour",
kabtu
kabittu
fem. kabitiu
"heavy, weighty, pre-eminent,

kabtat
:
with pron. suffixes
"spirit,
mind
midst
(?)".
kibatu
"abundance, great quantity".
VOCABULARY
kudurru
\
351
kuduru
kiki
"boundary, frontier".
J
Cf.
Hebr. "HS, TTTO.
adv. "so, to such an extent".
kakku kukku kakkabu

kikkisu
"arm, weapon".
"darkness".
Ideogr.
:J
JEJ.
plur. kakkabdni: "star".
Ideogr.
zi^*^-.
Hebr.
"reed-house".
"to hold".
Piel, Part.
kalu
kalu
Hebr. SlD.
*&"/
#/a
;
"to hold
to hold high, raise".

:
Pret.
i/fc/if,
Pres. *&?//, ikalld

;
"to hold back,

refuse".
restrain,
prevent
to
withhold,
Hebr.
Pret. i/a
Pres. z&z//a
"to cease,
come
to
an end".
Hebr. nba.
kalu
constr.
"all,
st.
kal\ "all, the whole".

;
Ideogr. Jfl.
kalamu
kalis
everything
of every kind".
"altogether, completely".
constr.
st.
kalbu
kalbannati
[kalalu]
kaldb
"dog, hound".
Ideogr. JJ^J JEJ.
Hebr. SS?.
(plur.) siege-engines.
"to be complete".
Shafel,
Pret.
Cf. Hebr. Part,
bbz.
;
uSaklil;
musaklilu
Inf.
suklulu
"to complete".
Ishtafal,
Part.
muUaklilu,
fern.
muS-tak-K-la-at
"to
carry out,
fulfil".
kullatu
kilallan
...
;/
\
"totality, all, the
whole"; also written

sides".
kul-la-ia-an.
"both; on both
see kalu.
kalamu
[kalamu]
[kalmu]
Piel, Pret. ukallim
Inf.
kullumu
"to cause to see,
show
to, display".
Nifal, Pret. ikkilmi'. "to look upon".
352
VOCABULARY
see kalu.
Pret. ikmi, ikmu\
kalis
kamu
Pres. ikammi\
"to conquer, over-
come, take captive".
kamu
kamutu
kamatu
ki'am
I
plur. kamuti:
"bound, captive".
ilki
"captivity, condition of imprisonment"; kamiitsu u as a prisoner he took him".
"enclosure".
kima kime kimu
\
}
see ki.
"family".
kimtu
"family".
Pret. ikmil\ "to be angry".
kamalu
kimiltu
"anger, wrath".
"thy, thine".
Pret. ikmis
Iftaal,
:
kummu
kamasu
"to
bow
:
oneself, to
bow down".
Pret. uktammis
"to
be bowed down, over-
whelmed".
Ishtafal,
Pret. uUakmis
"to cause to
bow down".
<?.
kamaru kamaru
kamaris
[kamaru]
"to strike
down"
Inf.
used as subs.,
g. ka-mar-
su-nu as-kun "I struck

"net".
them down".
adv. "in a net or snare".

Piel, Inf.
kummuru
"to
make
:
plentiful".
Iftaal, Prec. lik-tam-me-m
"to
be
made
plentiful".
kamatu kamutu
kimtu
[kanu]
}
J
see see
kamu.
kimu.
:
Piel-Shafel, Pret. u$km
"to
humble
oneself,
make
obeisance".
kanu
Pret. ikun
Pres. ikdn
Perm,
kan, ken
"to stand,
be established,
-
be firm, endure".
-
Ideogr.
^|,
Hebr
13
VOCABULARY
Piel,
353
;
Pret. ukin
Part, mukinnu
st.
Perm, kun
fix,
Inf.
kunnu,
constr.
fast,
kun
"to
set,
make
firm,
hold
kun
Iftaal,
found,
establish,
appoint,
arrange";
libbi
"truth, constancy".
:
Pret. uktin
"to
set,
fix,
arrange".
kaianu
kaian
"continuous, enduring, imperishable".
kaiana
adv. "continuously".
kaianamma
kinu
klnis
kittu
\kanu~]
"firm, sure, established, true". Ideogr.
>-
Hebr.
[3.
adv. "truly, legitimately, carefully".

"right, justice".
Piel, Pret. ukanni'. "to
;
prepare carefully".
kinatutu "service
servants".
:
kanaku kunukku kananu
Pret. iknuk
"to seal".
"seal".
Ideogr.
fj~^ ^JTT.
"to crouch down".

Piel
:
"to
press
down"
Perm, kunnun "bowed,
crouching".
kanSsu
Pret. iknu$
Ifteal,
"to
bow down,
submit".
Perm,
kitnutu "subject".
Piel, Pret. ukanniS'. "to force into
submission".
:
Shafel,
Pret. u$akni$,
utiknti
Part. mu'Sakntiu
"to
cause to submit, bring into subjection",
kansu
kasu
adj., plur. kanSuti'.
"subject",
"to bind, take captive".

Ifteal,
Pret.
iktasi'.
"to bind, fetter".
Iftaal, Pret. uktassa: "to

e.
be bound"; ideogr.
(?).
]*"(?),
g.
>rTTY
==
uktassa
/rasffu
"fetter,
bonds".
:
kasu
Pret. iksu
"to cover, to hide oneself". Hebr. HD3.
Iftaal, Pres. uktassi:
"to serve as a hiding-place for".
354
VOCABULARY
adv. "in confinement".
kisukkis
Kislimu
the
month
;
Kislev. Ideogr.
*-y^
^^>-. Hebr.
:J
kussu
"throne"
*~-
kissu riimedi "seat".
Ideogr.
"- W,
^J.
st.
Cf. Hebr.
KD3.
kaspu
constr.
kasap
"silver,
money". Ideogr.
^^
^J.
Hebr.
J^D?.
kusapu
kusarikku
subs, of uncertain meaning.
"ram
(?)"
plur. written ku-sa-rik-ki.
kapadu kappu
kippati
Pret. ikpud', "to plan, think, consider,

e.
ponder on".
(2. kanpu] "wing". Hebr. ^33. (plur.) "the ends (of heaven and earth)". Cf. Hebr.
kappu
kaparru
"hand".
Hebr.
r]3.
"sheep-boy".
kupru
kissu
"bitumen". Ideogr.
Cf. Hebr.
"dwelling, hall".
"wall".
Ideogr.
karu
[karu]
"to fetch, bring".

Ifteal,
Pret. ikteri
"to
summon".
kiretu
Iriru
"banquet".
Cf. Hebr. JTIS.
"plantation, garden".
Pret. ikrub\
Ideogr. ^:J
:
karabu
Pres. ikarrab
to".
:
"to be propitious, bless,
pay homage
Ifteal,
Pret. iktarab
to".
"to be propitious, to pay ho-
mage
ikribu
"prayer".
"to cast
"ruin". adv. "like a ruin".
karamu karmu
karmis
down, overthrow".
karmutu karmatu karanu
"ruin"
for karmuta Suluku see
alaku.
"food, sustenance, support".
wne
Ideogr.
VOCABULARY
355
kurunnu
karru
"sesame-wine".
Ideogr.
"costly raiment".
"belly".
Cf. Hebr.
karsu
karasu
karasu
kisibbu
"destruction".
"seal".
Pret. ik$ud\
kasadu
Pres. ika$ad\
to,
Imper. kuhid
'.
"to reach,
come up
seize,
draw
near,
to
approach,
come;
to
take,
attain
to;
conquer, overcome".
Ideogr.
Piel,
V:
Imper. kuHid
"to attain
:
to,
secure".
;
Shafel, Pret. ttSakttd

to
"to cause to attain
to cause
conquer";
with katu "to cause the hand to
conquer, to deliver into the hand".

kisittu
"booty; possession; prisoners".
kisadu
[kasapu]
"neck
bank of
;
a river".
kisip
:
Ideogr. J^Lt^.
Pret. ik&ip
Imper.
"to enchant, cast a spell
upon".
Hebr.
F|l$3.
kispu
"enchantment, sorcery".
"sorcerer".
Hebr.
kassapu
kassaptu
[kasaru]
Ideogr.
^^
*>-:V<y
^^3.
^^TT'
Hebr
'
"sorceress".
Pret. iksir
:
Ideogr.
^^|
(?)".
"to repair, set up again".

:
kasasu
kissatu
Pret. #&tf
"to assemble, collect
"host, totality, the world".
Ideogr.
kasusu
kisittu
"darling, beloved".
see
kasadu.
"wood,
forest".
fcstu
plur. fa'Sa/u
fern, kati,
katu
kasu kasa
kitu
kd$i\
plur. katunu,
kaSunu, personal pro
noun
"cloth".
"thee, you".
Ideogr. Jg[ ^J-,
856
VOCABULARY
Pret.
katamu
iktum
"to
cover;
to
close
(the
lips);
to
overwhelm".
Piel, Inf. kuttumu
:
"to cover completely".
kuttumu
kitru
"covered, hidden".
"alliance".
"gift> present".
katru
la
\le'u]
li'u
negative particle
Pres.
ili'i
:
"not".
Hebr. $h.
"to be able".
li'at'.
fern. constr.st.
"strong, mighty, powerful"; lali'u

s*ij
"impotent, weak, unable". Ideogr.

litu
^1^6*
"strength, might; triumph, victory".

"full extent (?)".
la'atu
[IS'u]
"to wish".
"will, pleasure, determination".
multa'utu
lu
precative particle; particle of emphasis used with

3
and
pers. sing,
;
and
plur.
Hebr.
f?.
lit
. . .
lu
conj. "or"
lu
,
lu
... lu
. . .
...,/......,
or
.
"either
.".
lu
littu
"wild ox".
"wild cow".
[lababu]
Perm.
fern. sing, labbat,
3 masc. plur. labbu
"to
be angry, to rage".
libbatu
libbu
"anger".
"heart;
womb, bowels, courage";

in the
ina
libbi
libbi,
libbi,
libbu "in,
midst of"; ana
"against".
Ideogr. ^jyy.
Hebr.
^, M^.
liblibbu
"offspring, descendant".
lubultu
see labasu.
labanu
libittu
"to lay or cast

plur.
libndti
:
flat".
"brick".
Ideogr.
^t-
Cf. Hebr.
VOCABULARY
labaru
Pret. ilbur,
ilbir
:
857
old".
:
"to
grow
Shafel,
Pret.
u$albir\
Pres. uâlbar
to
"to
old".
cause
to
become
labaris
labiru
old, to prolong;
;
grow
adv. "into old age"

fern, labirtu^
labariS alaku "to

labiruti,
become
:
old".
plur. masc.
fern, labirdti
"old,
former"; ki-ma la-bi-ri-im-ma "as of old".
labasu
Perm,
labti,
;
plur. lab-$u
"to
clothe
oneself,
be
clothed"
ulapa labatu "to enter into an alliance".
Hebr. Vlb.
Ifteal,
Perm,
litbu*
"to be clothed".
:
Shafel, Pret. uSalbiS
"to clothe".
lubasu
lubustu]
lubultu
} J
"garment".
"garment".
nalbasu "robe, garment".

labuttu
libittu
"ruler, governor".
see
labanu.
litu
"hostage".
"fulness,
life".
lalu
abundance";
la-li-e
baldti
"the fulness of
lilatu
"evening".
Hebr.
rfo*h.
lami,
lamu
Pret. ilmi, ilme\
Perm,
masc. plur. lamu
"to
surround, catch, besiege".

Shafel, Pres. u$almi\ Inf. tulmu
\
"to enclose, catch".
limu
lim limetu
limitu
1
"period; eponymy".
"thousand".
}
}
"neighbourhood
Pret. ilmad\
lamadu
Imper. Kmad,
li-mid-da
"to learn,
to
perceive"; lam-du (Perm. 3 plur.) "trained". Hebr.
Piel, Pret.
ulammid
"to teach".
Hebr.
limenu
"to be evil".
358
VOCABULARY
fern. limuttu\
limnu
limnis
limuttu
plur. masc. limnuti,
fern, limneti
"evil,
wicked, hostile".
Ideogr. ^
adv. "evilly, terribly".

"evil,
misfortune".
st.
Ideogr.
"evil,
lumnu lumasu lasamu

liplipi
constr.
lumun
:
'.
wickedness, evil purpose".
plur. lu-ma-si
certain stars.
"to gallop".
"descendant".
Pret.
ilput
:
Ideogr.
*]]]
^|^ ^J*.
destroy".
lapatu
"to
turn,
overturn,
Hebr.
Shafel, Pret. uSalpit
"to destroy".
salputu
laku, liku
"destruction; misfortune".
Pret.
liki\
ilki,
ilkd\
Prec.
lilki\
Pres.
ilekki,
'.
ilikki\
Imper.
Part,
liku,
fern, li-ka-at,
K-kat
"to take, catch,
receive".
Ifteal,
Ideogr. +~<\(.
ilteki'.
Hebr. HpS.
Pret.
lisdndti
"to take possession of".
lisanu
plur.
"tongue,
speech,
nation".
Ideogr.
^Tr^f.
la'atu
see litu
littu
[jfe'u].
Hebr.
see la.
M
ma
ma.
ma.
enclitic particle of
emphasis
the forms me, me, mi
and mu
also occur.
:
enclitic particle
"and".
;
adv. "thus, as
plur. me
:
follows"
introduces direct speech.
mu
magaru
migru
Pret. imgur
"water". Ideogr. Cf. Hebr. l, *fo, Q^D. J^. "to render obedience to, to gratify" ;
:
Part, mdgiru, plur. mdgire "obedient".
constr.
st.
migir
"darling, favourite".
magsaru
see
gasaru.
VOCABULARY
ma'adu
|
359
:
Pret. im'id, imid\
Pres. imciid
to
"to
be
numerous,
madu
many, much,
fern,
swarm".
Cf. Hebr.
*1K.
'.
ma'adu
maattu,
maitu\
plur. ma'aduti,
fem. ma'addti
madu
ma'adis
"many, much".
adv. "greatly, exceedingly,
much"
ana ma'adif "in
great numbers".
mu'du
plur. mu'de
',
'.
"abundance".
Pres. imandad'. "to measure". Hebr. Yl_D.
madadu
madatu
see
nadanu.
madattu
mehu mahazu mahhu

mahhutas
"storm, .tempest".
"city,
town".
:
Cf. Hebr. nil,
fem. mahhutu
"prophet, prophetess".
adv. "like one possessed".

ina muhhi, ana
muhhu
muhhu
mahasu
muhhi
'.
"on, upon; concerning;
to,
towards; against",
"skull".
Pret. imhas\ Pres. imahhas
Ifteal,
:
"to smite". Hebr.

:
pfljjp.
Pret.
imdahis,
imdahhis
"to
fight"_^
;
Part.
plur. mundahhise, mundahse "warriors"
Inf.
mithusu
employed
as subs, "battle, attack".
maharu
Pret.
imhur\
Imper. muhur
"to
correspond
to,
rival;
to oppose, fight;
to
go or
come
before;
to pray to; to take to be

first,
from; to receive favourably;

;
to
"opponent, rival"
have preeminence" Part, mahiru la mahdr (Inf.), la mahra, la

;
mahri "invincible".
Ifteal,
Perm, mithur
"to correspond to, to
lie
over
against".
Piel, Pret. umahhir, umahir\ Prec. limahhir
\
"to
come
before;
to
bring
before,
offer";
e.
Inf.
muhhuru
employed
as subs, "offering",
g.
muh-hu-ru u-
ma-hir "I offered an offering (libation)".
36o
VOCABULARY
Shafel, Pret. usamhir
Ishtafal, Pret.
:
"to seek out,

:
visit,
punish".
uMamhir
:
"to
set,
place".
Nifal, Pres.
immahar
"to be equalled".
maharis
"against; in greater degree than, surpassing".

constr.
ina
st.
mahru
mahar
'.
"front"
mahri, mahar, ana mahri,
mahri "in front
of, before,
;
against"
adi mahri
;
"into the presence of"
dlik
mahri "predecessor"
Sarru $u-ut mah-ri, $ar ma-har "a former king".
Ideogr. <J>-.
mahru
mihru
mihirtu
fern, mahritu',
plur. rnasc. mahruti, mahrutu
"first,
former".
"battle, storm".
"front"
constr.
st.
mihrit, mihrat
employed
as prep.
"before, over against".
muhru
mitharis
constr.
st.
muhur
"homage".
adv. "together".
"battle".
tamharu
mittu
"club
(?)".
Ideogr.
Jgf
^.
Cf.
meku maksu
makkuru
namkuru
nakkuru
main
\

"bond,
fetter".
"property, possessions".
Ideogr.
Hebr.
"property".
J
Pret. imli
"to
fill
to be full, to be full of, to

btt.
be
fulfilled".
Hebr.
Ifteal, Pret. imtali'.
"to be filled with".

umalli, u-mal-lu-u, u-ma-al-la-a
fill
:
Piel, Pret.
and Pres. up"

;
"to
fill
with katu "to
the hands with,
deliver into the hands of, invest with".

Iftaal, Pret. um-ta-al-la
:
"to
:
fill
with".
Piel-Shafel, .Pret. utmalli
"to
fill".
VOCABULARY
36l
ma!,
main
malu
milu
constr.
st.
mal
as
"fulness"
mala,
tihl$.
mala $a "as
many
as,
:
much
as".
Hebr.
fern, malltu
"full".
Hebr. &6fc.
"flood, stream".
"sailor".
Pret.
imlik
malahu
Ideogr.
:
^J
counsel,
to
|gf
e.
Hebr. n^2.
maldku
mi-lik-Xu
malaku
"to
take
counsel";
g.
milku
mil-ku
"to
come
decision",
a
(Perm.)
-!|^pj.
"he came to
decision".
Cf.
Hebr.
Ifteal,
Pret. imtalik
"to take counsel
with
one-
self"; 'with negative "not to take counsel with
oneself, to be ill-advised".
maliku
constr.
st.
malik
"prince
arbiter,
counsellor".
malku
malkutu
milku
Hebr.
"rule,
T^ft.
;
malikutu
empire
position of counsellor".
"lordship, dominion".
constr.
st.
milik
"counsel".
malaku
millu
see alaku.
"troop, gang
plur. melamme
(?)".
:
melammu
malmalis
"brightness,
splendour, majesty".
adv. "into
two
parts, asunder".
mulmullu malasu
multa'utu
"dart, spear, javelin".

Pret. imlus
:
"to pluck out".
see [le'u], see
mama
mima
\
manma.
minma.
mimma mimmu mamman
see
}
see see
minmu.
manman.
amu.
;
mummu
mamitu
"uproar, confusion".
see
manu
Pret. imnu
Pres. imanu, imani
"to count, reckon,
362
allot
(Inf.)
VOCABULARY
;
to
recite
(an
incantation)"
ana Id
mam
"without number".
Hebr.
njfc.
menu
minutu
"number".
plur. mindii:
"number;
space, period".
j *~*~\-
manu
minu
mandattu
"maneh"
"what
see
generally written
;
Hebr.
njtt.
:
gen. mine, mini

?".
ace. mind, interrogative
pronoun
nadanu.
nazazu.
manzazu
manzaltu
see
see
manahtu
lanama
nahu.
pronoun
:
indefinite
"anyone"; with negative "no
one".
indefinite
indefinite
pronoun
"anyone, any".
ever"
pronoun "anything, everything, whatmimma sumsu "everything that bears a

:
name,
jects,
i.
e.
that exists
everything, various ob-
of every kind".
minmu
indefinite
}
pronoun
"anything, whatever,
of, a little of",
e.
all
of";
mimmu
manman
"something "early dawn".

indefinite
also
g.
mimmu
Sen
pronoun: "anyone"; with negative "no
mamman
mannu
minutu
one".
interrogative
see
pronoun
wash".
"who
whom
?".
manu.
wash
"to
misu
[masaku]
Pret. imsi\ "to
Piel, Prec. limissi: "to
clean, purify".
Shafel,
Pres.
uSamsak
withhold,
keep back,
conceal".
Ishtafal, Pres.
uMamsak: "to be kept back, hindered".
musaru musaru
"inscription".
VOCABULARY
[masu]
Perm, mix
:
363
to be less (?)". to be
"to be
little,
;
masu
[masaru]
[masaru] misru
Perm. mast: "to be wide

Piel, Pret. umassir
:
enough,
sufficient".
"to divide".
:
Nifal,
Pret. tmmasir
st.
"to be banded together

'.
(?)".
;
constr.
misir
plur. misratu, misrcti
"boundary
section
territory".
massaru massartu masartu makatu
see
nasaru.
Pret. imkut-. "to

Ifteal,
fall,
fall
upon".
Pret. imtakuf. "to fall". Part, nmsamkitu'. "to
Shafel, Pret. utamkit, u$imkit\
overthrow"
Inf.
sumkntu (ideogr. ^JTT) employed
as subs, "conquest",
makittu
"ruins".
constr.
st.
miktu
mikit
"chasm, abyss".
jtUfc-
maru
TJ if Piel, Pret. uma'ir ; Pres. uma'ar,
"to send".
^^^
:
"^H?
;
umdr
"to send
to rule
to
command,
umta'ir
to
commission"; Inf.mu'uru
employed
Iftaal, Pret.
as subs, "rule, lordship". Ideogr. JEJJ^:
"to
command,
enjoin upon",
tamartu
"present, gift",
plur. mare
\
maru
martu
"son"; mar man' "grandson"; mare

Ideogr.
;
ali
"townsfolk".
constr.
st.
&,
:
^^
J^J.
mdrat
plur. mdrdti
"daughter". Ideogr.
marutu
"sonship".
Ideogr.
;
mar-sipri "messenger, envoy"

meriltu
-TTIsee eresu.
T
written
Eyffj J^ IÎI>
miranu
"power
(?)".
:
marasu marsu
Pret. imras
"to be steep, difficult

marsuti'.
to be strong".
masc. plur.
"steep;
difficult,
grievous".
VOCABULARY
marasu
Perm, man's
"to be sick".
:
Ifteal, Pres. imtaras
"to be or
;
fall
sick".
Shafel
"to
make
sick"
Perm, sumrus
"sick, af-
flicted".
marsu
marsis
"sick, woeful, afflicted".
adv. "afflicted, in tribulation".
mararu
"to be bitter".
Shafel,
Hebr. ^Hfc.
:
Pret. usamrir
"to
make
bitter, to
cause
to rage (of weapons)".
mariu
namurratu
mu'irrutu
"gall".
constr.
Cf. Hebr. .TTl.!?, fTtlfc.

st.
namurraf. "anger, rage".
see 'aru.
fern,
marsu
meristu
maruttu
"evil"
the
fern,
maruttu
is
also
employed
see eresu. see
as subs, "sorrow".
martu
mararu.
:
masu
Pret. imtt
"to forget".
:
Nifal, Pret. imma$i
"to be forgotten".
musu
musitu
"night".
plur. mu$ati
:
"night".
musabu masadu
see
asabu.
"to overcome".
Iftaal,
um-das-âd
meaning uncertain.
masdu masahu masku

masalu
word
of uncertain meaning.
:
Pret. imtuh constr.

st.
"to measure".
:
md&ak
"skin, hide".
Ideogr.
*^yj.
"to be like".
Piel,
Cf. Hebr. btyto).

:
Pret.
Inf.
umaSh'l
"to
:
make
like,
to
imitate".
to
Shafel,
sumSulu
"to
make
like,
divide
into equal parts".
mislu
tamsllu
constr.
st.
mtiil
"half".
"likeness, image".
constr.
st.
maslu
masal
'.
"whole".
VOCABULARY
[masaru]
Piel, Pret.
umaHir; Free.
lime$ir\ Pres.
umaHar; Imper.
;
muHtr
let
Iftaal,
"to leave, forsake, abandon
to loose, to
go
free; to permit, allow; to cease".
Pret.
umdaMir
"to
let
loose".
mesaru
misaru
see [eseru].
\
musaru
musitu
mati
see
see
musaru.
musu.
Tlfc.
"when?"; adi mati "how long? when?". Hebr. matima "whensoever" ana matima "for ever, always". "land". matu Ideogr. plur. matdti Hebr. matu Pret. imut\ Pres. imat "to die".
;
:
Ifteal, Pres. imtut
"to die".
\
mitu
plur. mituti, mi-tu-ta-an
"dead".
mutu mutu
mitharis
mitlutu
"death".
"man, husband".
see
Cf. Hebr.
fi.
maharu.
"might, power".
see mati.
.
matima matku
metiku
"sweet drink, mead".

see eteku.
Cf. Hebr.
muttu
iMutas
"front".
"before".
face".
muttatu "countenance,
N
ni
enclitic
particle,
appended
to
verbs
especially
in
relative sentences.
[ne'u]
Pret. in?
"to stop, restrain, hinder".
Hebr.
fcfl3.
nitu
"enclosure".
Pret. ibbi\
call,
nabu
Pres. inambi\
to
Imper.
ibi\
Perm, nabi
"to
name;
command;
to appoint, proclaim";
366
VOCABULARY
nabu "to
Cf. Hebr. S23.
Ifteal,
be
named, bear
name,
exist".
Pret. ittabi
"to name, call by name".
Piel, Pret. imambt,
unamba
"to cry aloud, lament",
nibu
nibittu
"number",
constr.
st. nibit
:
"name chosen
;
one, elect"
nibit
sumi
"mention of the name, name",
nibhu
"enclosure
(?)".
:
nabalu
Pret. ibbul, ibul

Ifteal, Pret.
"to destroy".
ittabal\
and Pres.
"to destroy; to steal (?)".
"talon, claw (of an eagle)",
"flame",
see
banu.
see eberu. see
nabu.
:
plur. nage
"region, district, land".

'.
constr.
st.
nagab
\
"the whole".
Pres. inagag
"to cry, to bellow".

;
Prec. 3 plur. li-na-du

praise".
Ifteal,
Pres. ina'ad, i-na-du
"to exalt,
Pret. ttta'id
"to exalt, glorify; to exalt one-
self"; Part, mutta'idu "arrogant".
"exalted".
Ideogr.
^^ ^ Ê-/
Imper.
idi\
plur. tanadatu
'.
"glory, honour".
"glory, honour".
Pret. iddi\
Pres. inadi\
cast,
Perm, nadi
'.
"to*
throw,
set
cast
(a
down;
to lay (a foundation), to
or place
dwelling),
;
to
found (a"^rine);
to dispense
(commands)
to raise (a cry), to re-
cite a spell or incantation

Ifteal, Pret. iltadi
:
(ideogr. ^î
"to lay, bring upon".
VOCABULARY
Iftaneal, Pret. ittanamdi
:
36 7
"to utter (a spell)".
Nifal, Pret. innadi
'.
"to be cast".
maddin,
inamdin,
nadanu
Pret.
iddin',
Pres.
iddan
"to
give, deliver, grant, allow; to sell; to
make,
Ideogr.
create"
fcjrf
Ifteal,
nadan
(Inf.)
Satti
"yearly
gift".
Cf. Hebr.
\
JJU
"to hand over".
Pret. ittadin
nudunnu
mandattu
madattu
"gift".
"tax, tribute".
madatu
nadru
plur. masc. nadruti Pret. izziz\
:
"fierce".
nazazu
Pres. izzaz\
Imper.
iziz\
"to stand,
stand
up,
take
:
one's
stand".
Ideogr. J^|.
Ifteal, Pret. ittaziz
"to stand, take one's stand".

\
Shafel, Pret. utaziz, uSeziz, u$ziz

fix,
"to
set, set
up,
establish".
station,
manzazu
"place,
resting-place"
man-za-az
bdbj
e-kur
"that
stood
before
the
gatfi--ef^frie
temple".
manzaltu
sezuzu
e.
(*'.
manzaztu)
"place, position".
:
masc. plur. rezuzuti

/Tret, inuh
:
"erect, reared
on end".
PPIJ.
nahu
"to rest; to be appeased". Hebr.

uriih\ Prec. linih\ Inf.
\Piel, Pret.
to rest,
nuhhu
"to bring
compose,
pacify; to overpower, con-
quer".
nihu
fern, nlhtu
"quiet, peaceful".
mhtu manahtu
nihesu
"rest".
"couch".
Pret. ihhis;
Pres. inahhis,
inamhis
"to subside;
to go, depart".
Ifteal, Pret. ittehis
:
"to retreat".
nuhsu
"abundance".
368
VOCABULARY
Pret. ittul\
natalu
Pres. inatal,
inattal
"to look,
behold,
gaze, look up, glance".

Ifteal,
Pres.
and
Pret. itiatal
:
"to look upon, see".
Iftaneal, Pres. ittanatal
"to gaze".
nitlu
constr.
st. nitil
"look, sight".
nakkuru
nikiltu
see
makkuru.
:
plur. nikldti
"cunning
cunning plan, device". Cf.
Hebr.
b^,
[nakamu]
"to heap up".

Piel
:
"to heap up, hoard"; Perm, nukkum "stored,
heaped up".
nakmu
nakamtu
nakasu
"heaped up, hoarded".

plur. nakamdti
:
"treasure"
bit
nakamti, plur. bit na-
kamati, "treasure-house".
Pret. ikkis
"to cut
off,
to cut
down".
:
Piel, Pret. unakkis', Imper. nukkis

off".
"to cut
off,
tear
niksu
constr.
st. nikis
'.
"cutting off; breach".

to be hostile". Cf. Hebr.
nakaru
"to be altered
Iftaneal, Pres. ittandkar

Piel, Pret. unakkir
\
'.
"to be hostile".
:
Pres. unakkar
"to alter, change
(trans.)".
Iftaal,
Pres. uttakkar
"to be altered".
nakaru
nakiru
"hostile; foe".
plur. nakir'e
fern, nakirtu
'.
"enemy,
"hostile"
foe".
;
Ideogr. A^-,
ESS
^V'
nakru
nakris
as subs,
"enemy".
Ideogr.
adv. "as a foe, with hostile intent".

"hostility". Ideogr. -jt-
nukurtu
[nalu]
A-.
Cf. Hebr. brtt,
Perm,
nil: "to lie, lie
down".
nalbasu
\_namu~\
see labasu.
Piel, Pret.
unammi
"to destroy".
VOCABULARY
nimedu
see
emedu.
namkuru nimeku namaru
see see
makkuru.
emeku.
:
Pret. immir
Piel, Pret.
"to shine, be bright".

;
unammir
Pres.
unammar
Imper. num-
mir
"to
make
:
bright, to give light to".
namru
namirtu
fern,
namirtu
"bright".
"brightness, light".
namrirru
"brightness".
"beast".
see
nammassu
nini
\
mnu
aninu.
Ideogr.
nunu nun-amelu
nindabu
"fish".
^<.
"fish-man".
Ideogr.
^ K$f?
*"
"offering, free-will offering". Ideogr.
Cf. Hebr.
Him
Hebr.
nannaru
nisu
"light".
Pret.
issi
:
"to retreat, recede from".

(?)".
:
nisiggu
"spoil from hunting

Pret. issuh\
nasahu
Pres. inassah
"to tear
away
or out,
to carry off,
remove".
Hebr. fipl
nasaku
nismatu
Pret. issuk "to set in position, to grasp (a

:
weapon)".
"will, purpose".
nasaku nasku
nisilftu
"to glorify, extol".

"lordly, magnificent".
"splendour, costliness";
abne "precious stones".
nisikti,
abne
nisikti,
nisikti
napahu
Pret. ippuh
"to flame or shine forth";

ilu
ideogr.
V,
napharu
see
'
g- napaha(ho)
$am$i(Si) "sun-rise, the
east".
Cf. Hebr.
HSJ.
paharu.
Cf. Hebr.
napasu
"to breathe, breathe freely".

Piel, Inf.
#}.
nuppuSu
"to
let
breathe, to give ease to".

24
37o
VOCABULARY
with pron. suffixes napsat;
living creature, person".
plur. napsati
:
napistu
"lite;
Ideogr. >~JJ^. Hebr.
nappasu
naptanu nasu
"air-hole,
window".
see
patanu.
st.
constr.
nas
"portion of an eagle's wing, wing-
feathers".
\nasalu]
"to sink(?)".
Shafel, Pret. utamsil
:
"to cause to sink".

:
Ishtafal, Pret. ultamsil
"to cause to sink".
nasmadu
nasaru.
see
samadu.
;
Pret. issur
tect".
Ifteal,
Imper. usur
'.
"to watch,
keep, pro-
Ideogr. Kffi<-
Hebr
"1^3:
Pret. ittasar\
with massartu as object
"to
keep
nisirtu
a watch".
bit nisirti
"watching, guarding; store, treasure";

"treasure-house";
secret".
amat
nisirti
"hidden
wôrd,
massaru
massartu
"watchman".
"watch".
Pret. inuk
Pret. ikki
:
masartu
Ideogr.
:
^J
naku
naku
"to lament, wail". "to pour out (a libation), to offer (an

Ideogr.
:
offering)".
Ifteal.
>->^S
Cf. Hebr.
n^?.
bel nike
Pret.
:
ittaki
"to offer".
;
niku
plur. nike
"libation
offering, sacrifice"
"sacrificer".
Ideogr.
JEJJ.
<^^, sometimes
written
with determ.
nak-me nakbu
nakaru
"irrigator".
Ideogr.
EJ^ ]} *--]
Sp_J.
:
"depth".
Cf. Hebr.
;
Pret. zkkur, ikur
Imper. ukur
1J5J.
"to destroy,
pull
down".
Cf. Hebr.
VOCABULARY naru naru

neru
nlru
plur. narati
:
3y
Ideogr. TlTJ.
"stream, river".
Hebr.
Pret. mar, imr\
Imper. nir
"to slay, destroy, van-
quish".
"destroyer".
"inscribed tablet of stone".
naru
nlru
"yoke".
"light".
Ideogr.
lE^TT^f.
nuru
narabu
Piel, Part, mu-nir-bu "destroyer".
nurbu
narbu
nirbu
niribu
constr.
st.
nurub
"fragment, piece".
see rabu.
see erebu.
narkabtu
see
see
rakabu.
naramu
naramtu
niraru
ramu.
;
"helper"
e.
occurs
in
number
of proper names,
g. Ramman-nirari.
niasi
niati
personal pronoun
j
"us".
to slip".
st.
nasu
nasu
Pret. inu$
"to totter, be in ruins
Pret. i$$i; Imper. ih'i Part, nasu, constr.
na$\ Perm.
nah'
to
"to raise, bear up;

off,
to bear,
carry,
bring;
carry
capture"
with tamharu "to

Kttt.
make
ready for battle".

Ifteal,
Hebr.
Pret. itta$i\
"to raise, bring;
to
raise,
cast
(the eyes)".
nisu
"raising, invocation"
rii$
kati "raising
of the hand,
invocation, prayer".
nisittu
constr.
st. ntiit
"darling".
nesu
nisu
"lion".
Ideogr. JV-J ^fcEjJ.

;
"people"
Ideogr.
plur. m'Se
"peoples
men, mankind".
^f
24*
372
VOCABULARY
"to bite".
Piel, Pres.
nasaku nasaku
Hebr.
TptfJ.
'.
unaHak
"to bite, tear".
Pret. iHik
Piel, Pret.
"to kiss".
<tf&2
:
Hebr.
"to kiss".
:
Nifal,
Pret.
plur. in-nis-ku
(?)".
"to press on, jostle
one another
nasru
nisittu
"eagle".. see
Ideogr.
EE^J
*-JJ.
Hebr.
^5.
nasu.
niati
see niasi.
natu
"to strike".
Piel, Pret. unatti
:
"to smash, shatter".
nitu
see ne'u.
Ifteal,
nataku
Pret. ittatak; Prec. littatuk
"to dissolve, melt,
disappear". Cf. Hebr. 1JJU
siba
fern, sibittu
\
"seven".
sibi
Ideogr.
Hebr.
tfSttf.
siba
"seventh".
see
Ideogr.
^
oneself
in
sabasu
sabasu.
sagu sadu
sadaru
sidru
"to starve^ be in want".

Pret.
<&/
:
"to destroy".
:
Perm,
sadir
"to
set
battle
array;
to
carry on
(a rebellion)",
"line of battle".
Cf. Hebr.
Tip.
\
[sahu]
Perm,
sihi,
3 fern. sing, si-ha-ti
"to disappear, cease;
to revolt".
Piel, Pret. usahhi
:
"to destroy, blot out, overthrow",
sihu
"revolt, rebellion".
Pret. ishul:. "to pierce",
sahalu
sahmastu
sahapu
"rebellion".
Pret. ishup
:
"to overwhelm".
Hebr.
VOCABULARY
373
to
saharu
Pret. ishur
"to turn, turn towards;

Cf. Hebr.
issahra;
*)!"JD.
surround,
harass, infest".
Ifteal,
Pret. issahur,
Pres. i-sah-hu-ra
"to
return".
Piel, Pret. usahhir;
Imper.
suhhir',
Perm, suhhur;
Inf.
suhhuru
Ishtafal,
"to turn, to turn towards".

uStathir
:
Pret. uMashir,
"to
cause
to
sur-
round, to surround with".

Nifal,
Inf.
nashuru
"to be turned, to turn oneself
(from anger)".
Ittanafal, -Pres. ittanashar
:
"to turn oneself towards",
sihru.
constr.
st.
sihir
a precious stone,
;
sihirtu
"enclosing wall
ana
sihirttiu
neighbourhood
its
full extent,
whole"
"in
full
extent",
sukkallu
"minister, servant".
"bolt".
Ideogr. t^jy^-
sikkuru
Ideogr.
^y
^yy^ ^^.
:
Cf. Hebr. nStD?.
sakapu
[salu] [salu]
Pret. iskip\
Pres. isakip
"to cast
to rest".
down, overthrow;
to cast oneself
Pret. is-lu-u
:
down,
"to cast off (a yoke)".
Cf. Hebr.
Inf.
nbp.
sullii.
:
Piel, Pret. usalli\
Pres. u-sal-la, u-sal-lu\
"to pray".
taslitu
\
teslltu
"prayer, supplication".
I
salamu
salimu
salimis
Pret. islim
Imper.
silim
"to deal favourablv
be gracious".
"mercy;
alliance, confederacy",
ay,
remove
"favourably, mercifully",
subs,
salmu
of uncertain
meaning,
occurrin.-",
a-$ar sa-al-me.
suluppu
sal at u
"date".
Ideogr.
/alty,
\
"household".
plur. summdti
ring
(?)".
summatu
"dove".
Ideogr.
>-
3 74
VOCABULARY
see
simtu
sinuntu
sinnis
j
asamu.
Ideogr.
"swallow".
sinnistu
"female, wife".
Pret. isnik
:
Ideogr.
"jj-.
sanaku sunku
sisu
"to oppress
to
hold
fast".
"want, hunger".
plur.
stse
:
"horse".
Ideogr.
^T^ V ^TT'
Perm,
Cf
"
Hebr. DID.
sipu
"to pray", "to

loose,
scatter,
sapahu
bring to naught"
sapih
"loosened".
Piel,
Pret. usappih;
Part, musappih,
mu-si-pi-ih
"to
scatter,
break
up,
:
shatter".
Cf. Hebr.
USD.
Nifal, Pret. issapih
"to be scattered".
:
sapanu
sippu
Pret. ispun
Pres. isapan
"to cover, overwhelm, cast

Cf. Hebr.
down, overcome, subdue".

plur. sippe
'.
JSD.
"threshold",
saparu
saparis
"net",
"in a net".
Pret. iskur, tikur
:
sakaru
"to speak, to
:
command".
Ittafal, Pret. ittatkar
"to speak".
'.
constr. st
sikir,
sekar
"word, command".
"drink-offering, libation".
"to oppose, resist".
Hebr. Tip.
sidru
'sweet drink, mead",

sixth".
[sahu]
Ideogr. ffi f
:
Hebr. *&$.
sihu
asc. plur. sittuti
"the others, the rest",

Ideogr.
sahalu
êgular offering".
sahmastu
sahapu
VOCABULARY
375
pa
pagru padu
pidu
"mouth word, command".

;
Ideogr.
^^z-.
Hebr.
Hebr.
*"|j.
,1S.
constr.
Part,
st.
pagar
\
"body, corpse".
la
padu
"to loose, to free";
padu "unsparing,
without mercy".
Hebr. ITl^-
"purchase-money",
padanu
puzru
pihu
pihu
"way, path".
constr. st.puzur; plur. puzrati
Pret.
iphi',
:
"secret, concealment".
Imper. pihi
:
"to close, shut".
Ifteal,
Pr.et. iptehi
"to shut",
"to steer"; Part, p'ehu "steersman, pilot",

"district, province, territory"; bel pahati
"governor".
pahatu
pihatu
Ideogr.
-J^.
Ideogr.
"governor".
f^ ^JIÎdeogr.
Cf Hebr
-
HPIS.
"district, province".
^1^^.
paharu
"to collect (intrans.)".

Ifteal,
Pret. iptahar Pret. upahhir,
"to collect (intrans.)".

u-pi-hi-ir
:
Piel,
"to collect
(trans.)
to strengthen".
Ideogr. J^J^T-
puhru
constr.
st. puhur'."
whole; assemblage; might, strength,

Ideogr.
support; host, forces".
^^
puhuru napharu
patu
pataru
f.
puhurtu
"united",
Ideogr.
"entirety, the whole".
"boundary, border, limit; all"; pat gimri "entirety,

the whole, the entire extent".
Pret. iptur\
Ideogr. EÊK.
Pres. ipattar
"to tear away, remove".
Hebr.
-)tOS.
'.
Nifal, Pret. ippatir
"to be torn away",

Ideogr. ^^-fyj.
patru
constr.
st.
patar
"dagger".
paku
palu
"misery
(?)".
"reign, year of reign;
symbol of
royalty, ring (?)".
Ideogr. >->-y<6.
3y6
[pelu]
Piel-Shafel,
Ideogr.
VOCABULARY
Pret. uspel
:
"to
conquer,
overcome".
*-A|*.
"to fear, be afraid; to reverence".
:
pulu
"stone, stone-block".
Pret. iplah
:
palahu
palhis
Ifteal, Pret. iptalati
"to fear".
adv. "with fear".

"fear".
constr.
st.
pulhu
puluhtu
[palku]
pulhat', plur. pulhati
"fear, terror".
"to be wide".
Shafel, Pret. ut-pal-ki
:
"to open wide".

;
palku
pallukku
[palasu]
masc. plur. palkuti

"circuit,
"wide
fat".
boundary".
Cf. Hebr.
T|s.
'
Nifal, Pret. ippdlis\
Pres. ippolas;
Imper. napKs\
;
Inf.
naplusu
pity".
Ittafal,
"to look upon, behold
to look
upon
in
Inf. itaplusu
"to gaze upon".
pilsu
[paltu]
"mine
Nifal,
(in
siege-operations)".
3
Pret. ippdlti,
plur. ip-pdl-tu-u
"to
be
de-
feated".
panu
constr.
st.
pan
"face, countenance, front"; pan, ina

;
pan, ana pani "before"
ina
pana "formerly"
sar
pa-ni "a former king"

Ideogr. <J>-.
lapan (Hebr.
*)h) "before".
Hebr. D'OS.
i-na
pananu
paltadu
adv. "formerly";
Pret. ipkid;
to
pa-na-a-nu-um-ma "formerly".
:
Imper. pikid
or
"to inspect;
to
(for
to
control;
entrust
commend
safe -keeping)".
Hebr.
Ifteal,
*!.
:
Pret. iptekid
"to appoint".
[pakalu]
Piel
"to
make mighty"; Perm, pukkul "mighty".

"mule". Ideogr.
paru
[paru]
plur. pare:
Imper. puru'
"to cut off".

:
Piel, Pret. uparri'
"to cut
off,
sever".
VOCABULARY
pir'u
"offspring, descendant".
plur. pirdni, pirati
:
877
Ideogr.
piru
[parcfu]
"elephant".
:
Ideogr.
bright".
Shafel, Part, mu^-par-du
"to
make
parzillu
"iron".
Shafel,
Ideogr.
>>$-
>j-.
Hebr.
bH3.
:
[paraku]
Pret. uSaprik,
with
to
ma pan
"to bring upon

to;
to
with violence,
force towards".
cause
happen
display
parku
[parku]
"bolt (of a door)".

Nifal, Pret. ipparku-, Inf. naparku
:
"to cease; to dis-
appear, depart".
Ittafal,
Pret. ittaparka
"to disappear".
:
parakku
parasu
plur. parabke, parakkani
"shrine,
room, chamber".
Ideogr. Effi.
Pret. iprus
:
"to divide
to determine, decide". Ideogr.
>^.
Nifal,
Cf.
Hebr. D^S.
Pres. ipparas
:
Pret. ipparis\
"to be decided;
to stop, cease".
purussu
piristu
"decision".
Ideogr.
^^ >^-.
statute,
"decision".
constr.
st.
parsu
[pararu]
paras
"command,
ordinance".
Ideogr. ^f=
Piel,
>->Jf-.
Pret. uparrir;
Part, muparriru
"to
break
in
pieces, shatter".
Iftaal, Pret. uptarrir
Cf. Hebr. TllS.

:
"to be broken, to be shattered".

Part, muppartu
:
[parasu]
Nifal,
Pret. ipparft\
"to
fly,
to fly
along".
Ittafal,
Part. muttapriSu
"to fly".
[parsadu]
Nifal, Pret. tpparSid;
Inf.
;
napariudu
ina
kate
"to
fly,
to es-
cape, to disappear"
naparfudu "to dis-
appear".
pasahu
pasafu
Pret. jpSafr
"to be appeased, to be satisfied".

:
Shafel, Pret. utaptih
"to appease, to satisfy".

:
Pret. ip*it\ Pres. ipa&t
"to blot out, deface, destroy".
VOCABULARY
[pasaku]
"to be strong; to be grievous".
"tribulation, affliction".
sapsaku
supsuku
pasaru
"troubled, afflicted".
Pret. ipsur
:
"to loosen
:
to
subdue (wrath)".
be
Piel, Prec. lipa^sir
"to loosen, dissolve".

:
Nifal,
Prec. lippasir
"to
loosened,
to
be laid
open".
pasasu
Pret. ipûs
"to anoint".
ip-pa-a'S-'si
:
Nifal, Pres.
"to be anointed".
pasisutu "anointing with
oil,
trade of anointing".
passuru
pitu
"dish".
Pret.
ipti,
Ideogr.
iptd
:
z|
^|^:^<~y|.
ipatti, ipeti, ipitti;
Pres.
Imper.
ptti,
ptta;
Part, petu
to".
"to open;
to declare,
divulge, reveal
Hebr. nnS.
gate), porter".
petu
"opener (of a
"face, front".
Ideogr. Evffj
^~ ^^.
putu
patanu
naptanu
pitpanu
"to eat".
"feast".
"bow"
sometimes written with determ.

:
zj.
pataku
pitku
pattu
Pret. iptik
"to make, create

:
to
make
or mix (wine)".
constr.
st. pitik
:
"structure".
plur. pat-tu-te
sabu
plur. sabe
"warrior"
"archers"
;
in
plur. "people,
mankind";
Ideogr.
sdbe kasti
sabe tiduki "warriors".
^fE^ff^f
[sabu]
Piel, Imper. subbt
:
Cf. Hebr. X=5:.
"to look
:
at,
behold".
sabaru
sabatu
Shafel, Pret. uâsbir

Pret.
isbat-,
:
"to inform, to acquaint with".

isabbat',
Pres. isabat,
Imper.
fast,
;
sabat',
Part.
;
sdbit
"to hold,
grasp, hold
;
take,
capture
to undertake (work)
to exorcise"
harrdna sabatu
VOCABULARY
3 79
"to take the road, set out"; with $adu as object "to take to the mountains"
;
ina kdta sabit (Perm.)
"taken in the hands",

ar-ka-ti "that
i.
e.
"in captivity"
sa-bit
was behind".
:
Ifteal, Pret. issabat\ Inf. tisbut (for sitbut]
"to take;
to begin"
with harranu as object "to set out".

:
Piel, Pret. usabbit
"to take, capture".

:
Shafel,
to
Pret. uSasbtt
;
"to cause to take (a road),

to
despatch
to
cause
take
(a
habitation),
to station, to settle".
Ishtafal, Pret. uUasbit
:
"to cause to take (a road)
to cause to take (a position), to post". Nifal, Pres. issabat

:
"to be held fast".
sibittu
"captivity, durance".
subatu
"garment".
Pret.
isiid
:
Ideogr. JEJ.
sadu
"to glow".
(?)".
:
suhu
seheru
"wish, desire
Perm,
sing, si-ih-ri-ku
"to be small, young".

:
Piel, Pret. usahhir', Pres. usahhar
"to diminish, to
lessen; to deprive of, exclude from".

Iftaal, Pret. ussahhir
:
"to depart
(?)".
sahru
sihru
masc. plur.
sihruti
"small, petty, young".
Ideogr.
suhntuQ)
silu
silu
"youth".
plur.
file
:
"rib
side".
Hebr. yS^,, yb$.
"to fight".
"hostility, battle".
saltu
sulatu
[salalu]
"battle".
"to overshadow".
Piel, Pret. usallil
:
Hebr. bb%.
"to set as a covering, to spread
out".
sillu
"shade, shadow, shelter". Ideogr.
^rl. Hebr. b#.
38o
VOCABULARY
constr.
st.
salmu
salmu
salam^
plur. salmanu,
salmani
"image".
Ideogr.
^/<^^^, ^-.
i.
<?.
Hebr.
D^.
;
fern, salifhtu', fern. plur. salmati'.
"dark, black"
salmdt
Cf.
kakkadi "the black-headed",
"mankind".
Hebr.
saltu
|
see silu.
salatu
sumu samadu
"thirst".
Hebr.
:
Pret. ismid
"to yoke,
fern. sing.
harness,
Zandat,
equip,
gird
on"
Perm. 3
"girt,
masc. plur. sandu

1)3^.
equipped".
:
Cf. Hebr.
simittu
plur. simdati
"yoke".
Ideogr. J^.
Hebr.
nasmadu
senu
[senu~]
"yoke".
plur. sine
:
"sheep".
:
Cf. Hebr.
fill
|K^.
Pret. isan, ism

"lapis lazuli".
"to
with".
sipru
Ideogr.
supru susu
sissu
"claw".
Cf. Hebr.
"marsh, marshland".
"bond, fetter"; sometimes written with determ.^lT.

"field,
seru
siru
plain, desert".
:
Ideogr.
^>f- ^fc,
j^^f
fern, sirtu
"high, exalted, august". Ideogr.
Ê^
upon";
sirutu
sir
"supremacy, majesty".
Prep, "on, upon, over; against"; ana
sin's
sir "to,
"to"
si'-ru-us-Su
"upon him",
si-ru-us-su-un
"upon them".
siru
"serpent".
Pres. isarrah
(?)
Ideogr.
^^r.
Hebr. rTl.
(?)".
Ideogr.
:
^^^<.
sarahu
sirlalu
"to cry aloud, chant".

:
written sir-la-la
portion of a temple, "facade
sirmahu
sarapu
sirpu
sirritu
"monster-serpent".
Pret. isrup
:
"to
dye with";
Perm.
fern.
sing.
sarpat, 3 masc. plur. sarpu "dyed with".
word of uncertain meaning,

plur. sirreti
:
"affliction".
Cf. Hebr.
VOCABULARY
"colossal serpent, dragon". Ideogr.
see slru.
38i
see asu.
K
a measure.
[ka'u]
Piel, Pres. uka
"to wait".
Hebr. HJp.
kabu
kibu
Pret. ikbi; Pres. ikdbbi; Imper. kibi\ Part. kabu\

kabt, Mbi,\
Perm.
Ideogr.
"to speak, proclaim,
command".
Ifteal,
Pret.
and Pres.
iktabi
"to speak, say".
kibltu
"word, command".
plur. kubbe, kube
:
Ideogr. Êz
kubbu kubu
kablu
"cry".
:
constr.
st.
kabal
"midst;
-
battle,
-
assault,
storm".
Ideogr.
E<2<lf
Cf Hebr ^5p:
kablu
adj.,
fern, kablitu;
fern. plur. kablati
"in the midst";
ina kabldt "in the
midst of".
"before",
kudmu
kalu
"front";
as
prep,
kud-me-û-nu "before
them".
Pres. ikallu
Cf. Hebr.
:
D^.
Hebr. nSf?.
"to burn".
kulu
kalalu
killatu
"cry".
Piel
plur.
:
Hebr. Sip.
"to abuse, disgrace".
Cf. Hebr.
killdti
"sin, transgression, offence".
kullultu "iniquity".
kamu
kanu
Pret. ikmu\ Part,
kdmu
"to burn".
"reed".
Ideogr.
-J|^.
Hebr.
HjjJ.
kannu
kinnu
"frontier (?)".
"nest; family, household".

Pret. ikup
:
Hebr.
fp.
kapu
"to
fall
in,
become ruined".
382
VOCABULARY
Pret. ikip
Ifteal,
:
kapu
klpu
"to entrust to".

:
Pret. iktipa
"to entrust to".

prefect"
;
plur.
kipdni
"governor,
written
with
determ.
yyyy.
kuppu
kasaru
"chest, basket; cage"; usur kuppi "a caged bird".

Pret. iksur
Ifteal,
:
"to bind
kissur
:
to seize, take".
e.
Perm,
(i.
kitsur)
"to form".
Iftaal, Pret. uktassir
"to collect, to rally (intrans.)".

(?).
Ideogr.
^Jf jjEj^
:
kisru
constr.
st. kisir
"might; battalion";
cf. rab-kisir.
kakkadu kakkaru
karabu
kirebu
|
"head".
Ideogr.
soil
;
^||^:
J^J.
Cf. Hebr.
"ground,
Pret. ikrib
land".
"to approach,
kitrub
:
draw near". Hebr. draw near

as
D*"lp.
Ifteal,
Perm,
;
"to
for battle,
to
attack"
Inf. kitrubu
employed
subs, "attack,
assault".
Ishtafal, Pret. ustakrib
:
"to bring near".
kirbu
constr.
ina
st.
kirib
"midst, interior;
bowels";
kirtb,
kirib
"within".
Hebr.
S*1fJ.
[karadu]
"to be strong".
fern, karittu
:
kardu
karradu
karradutu
"strong, valiant, heroic, courageous".
"strong, brave, valiant".

"strength, valour".
Ideogr.
kurdu
lizuradu
"might, power".
plur. kurdd'e
:
"strong, valiant; hero, warrior".
karadu
Pret. ikrid
"to come, arrive".

Ideogr. "T^yf-
karnu
karasu
karsu
karuru
"horn"
part of a chariot.
Hebr.
rt?
"to break
off,
;
to bite off".
Hebr. JHJ5.
"slander"
karsi akdlu "to slander".
"drying up, abatement".
VOCABULARY
383
"to give, present,
kasu
kistu
Pret.
?/&/.?;
Imper. &!$;
Inf. kdhi
Part. kdi$
bestow";
"gift".
employed
as subs. "gift".
kastu
plur. kaSd/i
"bow".
:
Ideogr.
:J
K^J-
Hebr. n$[3.
katu
katu
plur. kdte, kdtd Pret.

ikti
:
"hand".
to an
"to
come
:
Ideogr. Ê|. end ; to be accomplished".
Piel, Prec. likattd
"to bring to an end, destroy".

:
Shafel, Pret. utikti
"to bring to an end".
re'u
re'u
"to pasture
to rule".
Hebr.
"shepherd".
Ideogr.
t^jgj,
re'utu
rifu
"shepherding, rule",
"pasture, pasturage".
ru'a
\rabu~]
"companion, neighbour".
"to be wide, broad".
Hebr.
$Tl.
Hebr.
211"!.
rebitu
"wide space or square

Pret.
z'rfo'
:
(in a city)".
Cf. Hebr.
rabu
"to be great;
:
to
increase".
Hebr.
Ifteal, Pret. irtabi
"to be or
become
great".
;
Piel, Pret. urabbi
"to
make
great, raise to authority
to rear, bring up".

Iftaal,
Pret. irtabbi
"to praise, magnify".

uârbi
:
Shafel, Pret.
nify
;
and Pres.
"to
make
great,
mag-
to raise to power".
:
Piel-Shafel, Pret. utrabbi
"to
make
great, to raise to
power".
rabu
fern. rabitu\
plur. rabuti, fern, rabdti
"great", ideogr.
officer,
rabiu]
rabis
Ej*~;
ideogr.
employed
VTTT El*"
as
*
subs,
r
"high
noble",
rab Sikkatutu
see
sikkatu.
"greatly, gloriously, majestically".

fern,
rubu
rubdtu
"great,
exalted"
employed
as
subs.
"noble, prince".
Ideogr.
384
VOCABULARY
"greatness, loftiness, might"
iStar".
;
rubutu
rubut ISfar "the
mighty
narbu
nirbu
"greatness".
fern, surbutu
:
surbu
tarbitu
"great".
"child, offspring".
rab-asu
"chief
astrologer".
(lit.
Ideogr.
Ideogr.
rab-esreti "chief"
"chief of ten").
rab-kisir
"captain".
Ideogr.
Ideogr.
ryfy
^r
Ej>-
*">-]
tab- ____
ribu
an
officer.
vp^
:
*".
see arba'u.
[rababu]
Piel-Shafel, Prec. Itimbbib "to

Cf. Hebr.
make great or mighty".

lie
ran.
3 plur. rabsu
:
rabasu
Perm, mbis,
to
"to
in wait,
lurk
cower down".
Hebr. j^*l.
\ragagu]
"to be wicked".
raggu
targigu
"wicked".
"sinner, wicked
constr.
st.
man".
;
rigmu
[radu]
rigim
plur. rigme
"cry,
lamentation
din, clash (of arms)".

Pret. irdi
:
"to go, march".

:
Ifteal, Pret. irtedi
"to go".
:
Shafel,
to
Pret.
and Pres. utardi

flow,
to
"to cause to go;

itself"
;
cause
to
make discharge
urha Surdu "to take the road".

[racfu]
Piel, Pret. uraddi
:
"to add".
:
Piel-Shafel, Pret. utraddi
"to add".
ruhu
rahasu
"spell, sorcery".
Pret. irhus
"to trust
to,
to
put hope in"
em-
ployed with prep.
eli.
rahasu
rihsu
Pret. irhis\ Part, rahisu
"to overwhelm".
constr.
st. rihis
"downpour".
VOCABULARY
rakabu
Pret. irkab
:
$85
"to ride; to
mount
a chariot".
Hebr.
=*!
Shafel,
Pret.
uSarkib
:
"to
cause
to
embark (on
a ship)".
Ishtafal,
Pret. ustarkib
"to sling on
(a
weapon)".
rakbu
"messenger".
"riding, chariot".
plur. narkabdti
:
rukubu
narkabtu
"chariot".
Ideogr.
:T
]p<Y.
Cf.
Hebr.
HDS^.
Hebr. D5*J.
r//&/j
: :
rakasu
"to bind".
Ifteal,
Perm.
"to bind "to

fix,
fast,
set in
order".
Piel,
Pret. urakkis
to
cast
up (entrenchbounds".
ments)".
riksu
constr.
st. rikis
"band, bond
barrier,
markasu ramu
"bolt (of a door)".

Pret. irdm, irim\ Pres. z'rdm, in relative clause iram-
mu, in letters from Tell el-Amarna ira'am, iraham

Part, rd'imu
:
"to
love"
with double ace. "to
grant to".
Ideogr. tXjgigif-
Hebr. CITl.
remu
riminu
\
"mercy".
fern,
nmnu
naramu
rimmtu
"merciful
"love, affection; darling".
naramtu
"darling".
Pret. irmi, irmd;
to cast
ramu
Pres. irami',
Part,
rdmu
"to cast,
down;
to set or take up one's dwelling,

Cf. Hebr.
Ptfc'"!.
to inhabit".
Ifteal, Pret. irtame, with tubtu as object
"to set one's
dwelling".
Shafel, Imper. surma, with Subtu as object: "to cause
to inhabit".
Piel-Shafel,
Pret. u^-ram-ma
"to cause
to
dwell
or inhabit".
25
386
VOCABULARY
Pret. irmu
Piel,
:
ramu
rimu
"to be loosened".
:
Imper. ru-um-me
:
"to loose; to forbear".

Ideogr.
plur. rimdni
fern,
"wild ox".
Â
Hebr.
rumu ramaku
rumtu
"high, exalted".
:
Pret. irmuk\ Pres. irammuk Pret.
"to pour out".
ramamu
ramanu ramnu
resu
irmum
Pret.
"to thunder".
Ifteal,
\
and
Pres. irtamam
"to thunder".
"self".
"to crush".
Piel, Prec. lira' is
:
"to crush, shatter, destroy".
rusu
rasabu
"poison".
Piel, Pret. urassib
:
"to slay".
rapasu
"to be broad".
Piel, Pret. urappis', Pres. urappas; Part, murappisu
:
"to
broaden, to increase",
rapsu
fern, rapastu, rapaltu
"broad, great, wide-spreading".
Ideogr. ^y^-J.
ritpasu "broad, great",

risu
"helper",
risutu
"help".
Pret. irsip
Pret. trek
: :
rasapu
[reku]
"to
fit
together,
to
build".
Hebr.
Fjin.
"to be distant".
Hebr. prn.
ruku
fern, riiktu;
plur. masc. rukuti, fern, rukati, ruketi: "dis-
tant (of time and

ruki "afar off".
place);
broad, extensive";
ina
Ideogr. ^>-flPf.
:
rifcu
masc. plur.
rikuti
"empty"
rikutisunu
kussidasunuti
"their failure secure".
Hebr.
risi
:
pn.
"to have, possess";
;
rasu
Pret. irU\ Pres.
irasi',
Imper.
rema,
batilta
or salima,
or taiara, rasu "to have mercy"
rasu "to take one's discharge, to desert".

:
Shafel, Pret. usarsi, u$ar$a
"to cause to have"
batilta
$ursu "to cause to cease, to discontinue":
VOCABULARY
marsitu "possession".
[resu]
Pret. iri$
Ifteal,
:
38y
"to rejoice, to be glad".

:
Pret. irtiS
"to rejoice, to be glad".
risatu
(pur.) "exultation, shouts of joy".
resu
"head, summit; beginning,
dawn
(of the day); chief,
high
officer".
Ideogr.
^]]^-
Hebr.
tf*Cl.
restu
'"chief, principal, of highest rank; primeval".
resutu
"slavery, service".
rasubbatu "might".
[rasadu]
Shafel,
Pret.
uUrtid
"to
found,
establish,
make
firm, strengthen".
russu
re'utu
rltu
\
"lordly, sumptuous".
see re'u.
]
"spittle, slaver; breath".

!
Ideogr.
^Tr^T.
ritpasu
see
rapasu.
s
sa
relative
pronoun "who, which"
genitive particle
employed
[se'u]
as conj. "for, since",
Pret. *? Y; Pres. z'&Y; Imper.
^Y; Perm. &Y: "to

heed
to
for".
see,
survey
Ifteal,
to seek, to take
t'X/e'i
:
Hebr. njj^to
Pret.
"to
seek,
seek out,
care
for".
Iftaneal, Pret. titoni'i, t'Meni't; Pres. istend
:
"to seek,
to look carefully; to look after, to care for".
seu su su
sebu
"corn, grain".
fern.
Ideogr.
^.
personal
H;
plur. masc. Xunu, Sun, fem. $tna;

:
pronoun
"he, she, they".

Zuniiti,
fem. 37; plur. masc. Sunu,

"that".
fem. Smart, Mnartna:
Pret. t$M: "to be satisfied with".
Hebr.
25*
388
VOCABULARY
"girdle".
sibbu
sibtu
"rod, sceptre
Pret. isbus
:
pestilence".
;
Hebr.
with kisddu "to avert
sabasu
sabasu
sabaru
"to be angry"
the neck (in anger)".

Pret.
isbir-,
Pres. iSdbir
"to
break,
to
shatter".
Hebr.
nattf.
titebir,
Ifteal, Pret.
iltebir
"to break". "to break".
Piel, Pret. uUbbir, uhbir

Ittafal,
Pret.
iltrtbir
"to be broken",
sabru
"wound".
Pret. iSbuS:
Hebr. "O^.
"to hinder",
sabasu
subtu
see
see
asabu.
bataku.
subtaktu
sigaru
"bolt (of a door)".

Pret. tigti
:
sagasu sadu
sadu
sadu
\_sudu~]
"to slay, destroy",
"to be high; to rise".

plur. sade, tadani
:
"mountain".
Ideogr. ^k.
the East, the East-wind. Ideogr.

constr.
st.
4^fl;
V E^H*
sud lamhari
sud
"highness, supremacy"
"generalship in battle",
sud-saku
[sidu]
"officer"; written
plur. side Pret.
:
^fr ÊJ
^J
:
^||^.
"to drag, to draw
;
"gift, present".
ildud-,
sadadu
siddu
sidu
sada.hu
[sadalu]
i'sdud,
Imper. $udud
(?)".
to
\
have patience
:
plur. h'de
"district".
Pres. tiaddih
"to advance".
"to be wide".
Piel, Part. muSamdtfu
:
"to widen, to increase".

\
sadlu
fern. Sadtltu;
masc. plur. Xadluti
"wide, of broad
extent".
sidimmu
sezuzu
(?)
"raging hound".
see
Ideogr.
nazazu.
VOCABULARY
[sahu]
Pres.
Ifteal,
fSa/i/u
:
38 9
(in
"to
wade
:
slime)".
[sahadu]
Pret. titahid
"to prance, to rear".

tear off";
sahatu
Pret. tihut;
Imper.Mt//: "to
Perm.
Uh-tu "taken off (of a diadem)".
Cf. Hebr.
sahluktu
see
halaku.
:
suharruru
saharratu
sahtu.
Pret. utyarir
side".
"to be or become narrow, to sub-
"grief".
"humble, submissive".
Pret. tiut; Prec.
to
i
satu
sing.
Mut\
Pres. iSdt
"to drag,
fclttf.
draw, to bear
(a yoke)".
:
Cf. Hebr.
satatu
Pret.
#//; Imper.
V/r
:
fo/fc/
"to tear".
sataru
satru
Pret. i?/wr,
"to write, inscribe".

;
"written, inscribed"
Xumu
tatru "inscribed
name,
record of name".
sifru
constr.
st.
&tir
"writing, inscription"
ft/ir
sumi
"record of name".
sukiidu
"spear".
\
sakkanakku sakkanaku
sikkatu
"governor, viceroy";
Ideogr.
also
written
sa-ka-an-ki.
^^ ^^T> Etw ^^ ^^|.

triumph";
abstract
rab
sikkati
"conquest,
"conqueror",
whence the
noun
rab sikkaluti
"migh-
tiness in battle,
prowess in the
fight".
sakanu
Pret. *'-&&;
Pres. tSakkan; lmp&r. su&un, 2 masc.

:
plur. $uk-na-a
"to
set,
place,
set up,
set in
(a li-
position,
establish,
appoint;
to
to
(a
make
bation or offering);
send
deluge);
to
raise (the voice); to execute (a
with
double
ace.
"to
place
punishment)"; something on
lita
someone";
kdnu
"to
abikta takanu
"to defeat";
$a-
triumph,
prove victorious";
uzna
3go
VOCABULARY
sakanu "to direct the
attention"
;
lisana
sakanu
"to prepare for a feast"; puhra sakanu "to give
support to"
ana
risuti
.... Sakanu "to come

Saktn,
to the help of";
Perm.
sak-nu "situated,
placed".
Ideogr.^.
Cf. Hebr.
fyf.
Inf. sit-
Ifteal, Pret. titakan, isakan-,
Imper. Sitakan;
fix,
kunu
"to place, lay
to establish,
set up,
found";
"to
abikta sitkunu
;
"to defeat";
atala sitkunu
be eclipsed"
puhra or unkenna sitkunu "to

;
exert one's full strength"
Perm,
sitkun
"drawn
up
(of line of battle)".
Iftaneal, Pret. istanakan "to
make".
Shafel, Imper.
suskin
"to cause to be established,
to set, to place".
Nifal, Pret. issakin
;
Inf.
naskunu
"to be established
to be done, to be accomplished; to take place";
with prep.
Ittafal,
////
"to be allied with".

////
:
Pres. ittaskan, with prep.
"to be allied
with".
saknu
siknu
sikittu
"governor, director".
con str.
st. $ikin
"image; construction". Ideogr.^.
plur. siknati
(constr. st.)
"creature".
"creature, being".
suknat
sukuttu
"equipment, pomp".
"place,
site"
;
maskanu
sakaru
sa'alu
a$ar ma^kanisu "the
place
where
it
stood".
"to
be drunk"
"OttJ.
:
masc. plur. Perm.
(?)
ti-ik-ru.
Hebr.
Pret. iS'al
"to ask"
with sulmu "to greet".
Hebr.
Ifteal,
Pret. i$-ta-al
:
"to ask; to seek for".

or.
Piel, Pres. u$a'al
"to cry
clamour
for,
to de-
mand".
VOCABULARY
tasiltu
plur. tahldti
:
3gi
"joy, festal joy".

.
suluhhu
[salatu]
saltis
.
"command,
decree".
"to have power".

\
Hebr.
toSttf.
saltanis
"triumphantly".
J
sullutu
[salatu]
"triumphant".
Piel, Pret.
&*////
:
"to pierce".
off,
salalu
sallatu
sallatis
Pret.
$//
"to carry
to plunder".
Hebr.
"spoil, booty".
adv. "as spoil, as prisoners".

Pret. isltm
:
salamu
"to be complete, intact;
to be
comHebr.
pleted,
to
come
to
pass;
to
prosper".
Piel,
Pres. u$allam\
Inf.
tullumn
"to keep intact,
to preserve; to cause to prosper, to restore the
fortunes of".
salmu
salamtu
salimtu
constr.
st.
Salam
"dead body, corpse".
"corpse".
"completeness, entirety; prosperity, immunity from

disaster"
;
ma
Zalimti
"thoroughly".
salmes
adv. "safe and sound".
salmis
sulmu
constr.
st.
sulum "prosperity, safety, peace; greeting;

:
the setting (of the sun), the west". Ideogr.
^J^.
sulmanu
sulmanis
salputu
salsu
"present, gift".
adv. "in peace",
see lapatu.
fern.
Cf. Hebr.
jbStT.
Multu
;
"third".
;
.Hebr.
^^.
:
Pret. tiim
Imper. Sim
Perm. $dm
Hebr.
"to establish
to determine, decree".
Ifteal, Pret. tifim,
iltim
:
Qlt?.
"to determine, decree; to
lay upon".
Piel, Part,
muîmmu
"to determine, decree".
392
VOCABULARY
plur. simati
:
simtu
"destiny, lot; affair, business".
samu
plur. Um~e
"heaven".
Ideogr. >~>^-.
Cf. Hebr.
ow.
samamu
semu
"heaven".
Pret. i$mi\
Xemt,
Pres.
iSimi,
isimmi;
:
Imper. Stmi; Perm.
3 fern. sing, semat
"to hear". Hebr.
semu
tasmu
"obedient; favourable, propitious".

"prosperity, success".
sumu
sumelu
"name".
"left".
Ideogr.
^.
Hebr. p#.
Hebr. btitip.
sammu summa
samnu
[samaru]
"plant, herb, weed".

conj.
"when,
st.
if".
:
constr.
saman
"oil".
Ideogr. ^yy~
Hebr.
Ifteal,
Jfctf.
:
Pret. istammar
"to keep, preserve
to re-
verence".
Hebr.
îfcttf.
[samaru]
"to be violent".
"violent; rapid, turbulent (of a river)".
samru
sitmuris
sumurratu "whirlwind".
adv. "furiously".
samsu samutu
simtu
[sano]
"the sun".
"rain".
see
Ideogr. >->j- ^|.
Hebr.
tfttttf.
samu.
tint, is-ni:
Pret.
"to repeat, to do a second time"
ft-ni-
ip-kid
"he again inspected". Hebr.

usanna',
njtT.
Piel,
Inf.
Pret. usanm,
Imper. sunni,
sunna;
tunnu
:
"to repeat, to relate".
sanu
sin a
fern,
sanutu
"second".
Ideogr. TT.
Hebr. *y$.
"two"; ma
linasu "into halves".
Ideogr. JJ. Hebr.
sanltu
[sanu]
"repetition
time, times".
Ideogr. J.
"to be otherwise, different".
Hebr.
VOCABULARY
Piel,
3g3
distort";
Pret. ufanni
"to alter,
Sunnu hunt
"to lose one's senses".

Iftaal, Pret.
usanni
(i. e.
uManni}
"to alter, distort".
sanu
fern, tariitu "other,
another".
sangu
sangutu
"priest".
Ideogr.
^J
"priesthood".
see
Ideogr.
sunuhu sananu
anahu.
tiannan
:
Pres.
"to
equal,
to
rival";
Part.
Saninu
"rival".
Nifal, Pres.
Ideogr.
<Jî Jf
:
iânan
:
"to be equalled".
"tooth, tusk;
sinnu
plur. $mna, Sinnati
ivory";
Xmni piri
"ivory".
Ideogr.
^^f.
Hebr. |^.
sanunkatu "queen".
sanltu
see [sanu].
Pret. ?',
plur. ^/^,
i/y
;
sasu
Pres.
:
z'^wz',
zWj'
"to cry, to speak".
sepu
^/a
"foot".
Ideogr.
Ê.
supu
siipu
a siege-engine.
see [apu].
[sapaAu]
"to scatter"; Perm.

Nifal,
Inf.
z/>/z
"scattered".
naspuhu
:
"to be scattered, ruined".
sapaku
sapalu
saplu
Pret. tipuk
"to pour out".

:
Hebr.
^StT.
Ifteal, Pret. i&tapdk
"to pour out".

^Bttf.
"to be low".
Hebr.
:
Shafel, Inf. Xufyulu

constr.
st.
"to abase".
;
Sapal:
"under part"
sapal, ina
^///'"beneath,
under".
saplu
saplis
fern. Mpiltu
"low, lower".
adv. "below".
Pret. z'^wr
Ifteal,
:
saparu
"to send, to send to".

:
Pret. iltapra
"to send".
:
Iftaneal, Pret. titanapar
"to send".
sipru
constr.
st.
$ipir
;
"message;
work,
craft;
concern,
matter"
for
mar-sipri
see
maru.
Ideogr.
3g4
VOCABULARY
Pret. usparir
:
suparruru
"to spread (a net)".
sapsaku
supsuku
saptu
sipatu
siptu
\
J
see
[pasaku].
st.
constr.
"fleece,
sapat
"lip".
Hebr. HS'y.
wool".
st. Sipat
:
Ideogr.
TETTf
constr.
"incantation".
Ideogr. ^~^f--
saku
"to be high".
Piel,
Pret.
usakki
"to
make
high,
to
raise,
to
carry up".
Shafel, Pret.
and Pres. uM&i;
Inf. suskil
"to exalt".
saku
susku
fem*fa&u/u: "high, lofty"; employed as subs, "ruler".
"high, exalted".
"to drink". Shafel
Inf.
saku
SuHu
"to
cause
to
drink".
Hebr.
maskitu "drinking watering (of sakalu Pret. rtkul; Pres. iSakkal

;
:
cattle)".
Cf. Hebr.
"to weigh, to pay". Hebr.
Ifteal,
Perm,
h'/kul
"to balance, to be equal".
sukultu
"weight".
see
Ideogr.
^JEJ
.
J^"(?).
sukuru
saru
[saru]
akaru.
Ideogr. ^fcfff
"wind".
Hebr. nj?^.
"to go, to pass, to pass over".
Hebr.
masaru
[saru]
"wheel".
"to grow, to increase".
mesru
seru
Slru
"wealth, possessions".
"morning, dawn".
"flesh,
Hebr. ÎH^.
body".
Ideogr.
t^v.
Hebr.
suru
"reed, rush".
see rabu.
surbu sarbabu
[sarahu]
"dread
(?)".
"to be mighty".
VOCABULARY
Ifteal,
3g5
Part.
Imper. Mrah
"to
show oneself strong";
muStarhu,
Piel,
Inf.
multarhu "mighty".
:
Zurruhu
"to
make mighty
to increase, to
augment".
sarhu
"strong, mighty".
fern. Saru/jtu
:
saruhu
siris
"mighty".
see seras.
Pret. tirup
:
sarapu saraku
"to
burn".
Ideogr.
Jg^.
:
Hebr.
Pret. i$nik\
Pres. i$arrak\
Imper. Suruk,
rp_^. "to present,
bestow upon".
siriktu
"gift, present".
sarru
constr.
st.
far; plur. Sarrdni: "king". Ideogr.
^j^, ^.
sarratu "queen". sarrutu "kingdom, kingship, royalty". word of uncertain meaning. surisu
sursu
sursis
"root".
Hebr. tt^tT.
adv. "from the roots".

"hair".
constr.
sartu
sertu
st.
Hebr. -|^t?. Ideogr. JEJjE. Sent "sin punishment".

:
sasu
fern. $d$a
plur. sdtunu, $d$un
3 pers. sing,
and
plur.
of the independent personal pronoun (in the gen.
and
ace.):
"him, her, they"; rarely used forsuatu,
Sdtu.
susu
"sixty".
"fight, battle".
sasmu sasmes
susku
satu
"to the fight".

see
saku.
Pret.
Mi
"to drink".
Hebr.
Pirittf.
mastitu "drink".
satu
[setu]
Hebr. n^l^tt.
(?)".
"to sweat (?)"; Inf. employed as subs, "sweat

Pres. iUt
:
"to escape".
setu
"net, snare".
'
suatu
satu
fern.
$iati\
plur. masc. Suatunu,
Sd/unu,
:
fern. Xuatina,
tdtina;
"that".
VOCABULARY
sutu, sut
genitive particle;
relative
pronoun "who, which";
employed
as conjunction "since".
sutu
sitmuris
the South-wind.
see
Ideogr.
x&^ff ^JyyJ H3J-
[samaru].
suturu
sattu
see ataru.
constr.
e.
st.
"duration
eternity"
ina sat "during",
g. ina sat must
"during the night".

:
sattu
(i.
e.
to/),
>~t~].
pur. sandti
"year".
Ideogr,
>^,
>^
>-^suttu
Hebr.
plJttf.
sattisam adv. "yearly".

plur. tuncitu
:
"dream".
njt27.
Ideogr.
t-J^ ^^.
Cf.
Hebr.
Jttfy
suttatu
"hole, pit; snare (for lions)".
#u
tibu
"spell, incantation".
Pret.
zW; Pres.
itabbi,
itibbi',
Perm,
tebi
"to
come
on, to advance, to
Shafel, Pret. usatbi
:
draw near
(for attack)".
"to cause to advance, to bring".
tibu
constr.
st. lib
"approach, attack, onslaught".

:
tabaku
Pret. itbuk
Ifteal,
Imper. tubuk
:
"to pour out, to shed".
Pret. ittabak
"to pour out, to heap up".

:
Ittafal, Pret. ittatbak
"to be poured out".
tabalu
Pret. itbal
"to carry away".
tabulu
"flock, herd". plur. tubkati

:
tubuktu
tabrltu
"side, quarter of heaven".
see baru.
tiduku
tizkaru
see
daku.
"high, exalted".
tahazu
tahazis
"fightâttle".
"for battle".
Ideogr.
^^J,
takalu
Perm,
tdkil
"to trust in".
VOCABULARY
Piel,
3 97
Pret.
utakkil-,
Part,
mutakkilu
"to
strengthen,
give encouragement
Nifal, Pret.
ittakil
:
to".
"to trust in".
tiklu
plur.
tikle
"helper".
plur. tuklati "troops".
tukultu "might, strength; help";

"purple"; with determ.
Ideogr.
takiltu
"purple wool". Hebr.
tilu
"mound".
see ellu.
Ideogr.
teliltu
talimu
fem. talimtu (constr.
st.
tallmaf)
"twin"
ahu tallmu
"twin brother".
\talamu]
Pret. itlim
"to present to".

:
Shafel,
Pret. ufatlim
"to entrust to"
Perm.
Outturn
"entrusted".
[ta'amu]
tarnu
Piel
"to
command,
rule"
Part, muta'tmu,
mute'imu
"ruler".
Pret. itmu, itmd\ Pres. itamu, itama, itammd
:
"to speak,
to
address;
to
pray";
tamii
itti
"to speak to, to
address".
tamdu tamahu
see
tamtu.
:
Pret. iimuh
Ifteal,
"to take, hold, grasp".

:
Pres. ittamah Pret.
"to take, hold".

:
Piel,
uiammih
"to
hold
fast,
to
bind
as
captive".
Shafel, Pret. utatmih
:
"to cause to take";
with kdtu
or
irtu
"to place in the hand" or "on the breast".
tamharu
see
maharu.
;
temenu temeku tumru

tamartu tamartu
"foundation-inscription
see
foundation".
emeku.
flame (?)".
"sacrificial
see
see
amaru. maru.
3g8
VOCABULARY
"neighbourhood".
see
masalu.
:
plur. tdmdti
"sea".
Ideogr.
Hebr.
[anahu]. "men, mankind".

see
see
nadu.
see [salu\.
"neighbour; helper".
plur. tukmdte, tukumdte, tumkumdte, tnrnkumdiu
sition, battle".
:
tukuntu
"oppo-
tukmatu
Ideogr.
Pret.
itur-,
Imper. tur
"to turn, turn back, return;
to be turned to, to be changed, to
become";
in
combination with another verb "to repeat, to do

a second time".
Ideogr.
*p,
^4^
Hebr.
Piel, Pret. w/zr;
Imper.
//r;
Part. mufiru\
;
Inf. turru
"to turn, change, convert
to turn back (trans.)
to bring back, restore; to requite, to punish (sin)";
with gimillu "to avenge", mufir
gimilli
"avenger"
pan mri
turru
(sometimes shortened to turru] "to

e.
turn the front of the yoke", L
"to turn back
(on a journey or expedition)".

Iftaal,
Pret. uttir
"to turn, change, convert; to be
turned, converted".
taiaru
taiartu
adj. "returning,
going back".
subs, "mercy", see rasu.
"return".
(?)
turratu
"turning aside".
VOCABULARY
ta.ru
3gg
"protector".
Pres.
if
[tarQ]
am'
"to croak
(?)".
tarbitu
see rabu. see [ragagu].

(?)".
:
targigu
targullu "anchor
taraku
Pret. itruk
"to
fail
:
(of the heart),
to
lose
courage".
Nifal, Pres. ittarak
"to
fail,
to cease".
tarasu
Pret. itrus
"to stretch, to stretch out".

:
Shafel, Pret. ufafris
"to lay, set up, erect".
tarsu
occurring as prep,
tarsi
"opposite"
ana
tarsi
"against"
ina tarsi "before, into the presence of".
Ideogr.
^.
first
tarsu
tirsu
"upright, honest".
constr.
st.
fin's:
"stretching out;
direction";
ina
"in the time of";
fins kati "stretching
out of the
hand",
i.
e.
"desire, object of desire".
tararu
Pret. itrur
"to shake, tremble".

:
Ifteal, Pret. ittarar
"to tremble".
tertu
see
'am.
tesu
tasiltu
see esu.
see sa'alu.
see
tasmu
semu.
p*'
.-u
3251
K5
King, Leonard William First ste^
PLEASE
DO NOT REMOVE
FROM
THIS
CARDS OR
SLIPS
POCKET
UNIVERSITY
OF TORONTO
LIBRARY

Οδηγός στα Ασσυριακά

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Οδηγός στα Ασσυριακά

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

:CT>

FIRST STEPS IN ASSYRIAN

FIRST STEPS IN ASSYRIAN

A SKETCH OF ASSYRIAN GRAMMAR, SIGN-LIST AND

AND ASSYRIAN MUSEUM

PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING CROSS ROAD

Printed by Adolphus Holzhausen, Vienna.

to furnish the beginner with

the materials which he

will require in his earliest studies of

the Assyrian language and the cuneiform inscriptions.

concerning the cuneiform

of Assyrian system of writing, and an outline of the principles

the Assyrian cuneiform

character with interlinear transliteration and translation, ranging

from about B. C. 2250 to B. C. 260

the texts printed in the book.

enable the reader

knowledge he can obtain by a perusal of the

For the convenience of the beginner

the Babylonian texts

included in this volume have been transcribed into the Assyrian

of the greatest importance for

master of the so-called Ninevite script

the ordinary Assyrian character with

here chosen represent

Babylonian and Assyrian literature and include examples of histor-

the account of the

701 B. C. and of the taking

of Babylon by Cyrus in 588 B. C.

gonies will be glad to have in a handy form the Babylonian

legends of the Creation and the Deluge.

the Descent of Ishtar into

Hades and the Loves

of Ishtar, the Treachery of the god

the story of the Eagle

their leisure in the childhood of

have been made as

with the difference which

between the Assyrian and English

enable the reader to identify

the words and their meanings.

the full vocabulary which

follows the texts the words are arranged alphabetically

be remarked, in passing, that the reader

in his Assyrian studies

such knowledge, however, on his part,

has not been assumed anywhere throughout the book.

that Dr. Wallis

Budge has made

his First Steps in Egyptian

with reference to the

for study at the disposal

of the beginner in Egyptian

out practically on the lines

opportunity of thanking him

valuable suggestions and for his friendly advice which

he has freely placed

during the course of the

London, May 2nd, 1898.

Cuneiform inscriptions Cuneiform writing

Assyrian method of writing

List of determinatives List of List of

ideograms for the months ideograms